PDF Panasonic KX T336 System Ref Vol 1

KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 689

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Panasonic

KX-T336 SYSTEM
System Reference Manual
Vol. 1

Panasonic Company
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Panasonic Company (West) of America,
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
6550 Katella Avenue, Cypress, California 90630
Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),
Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Avenue, KM 9.5, Carolina, P. FL 00630

KX - A220
Printed in Japan

PQQX6483YA

Q069101053M

Contents
Vol. 1
Section 1

----

System Outline

Section 2

----

Installation

Section 3

----

System Features and Operation

Section 4

----

Station Features and Operation
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 5

----

Station Features and Operation
Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Section 6

----

Station Features and Operation
Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 7

----

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Section 8

----

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal

Section 9

----

System Programming
VT220 and Compatibles

Vol. 2

Section 10 ----

System Programming
Dumb Type Terminal

Section 11 ----

System Programming
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 12 ----

Station Programming
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 13 ----

Station Programming
Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 14 ----

Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Section 15 ----

Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal

Section 16 ----

Backup Utility-On-Site

Section 17 ----

Backup Utility-Remote Location

Section 18 ----

Abbreviations

Section 19 ----

Index

NOTIFY THE TELEPHONE
Installation

must be performed

COMPANY

by the te!?phone company or a qualified professional

Notify the Telephone Company
Before connecting this equipment
following:

to any talephone,

call the telephone

installer.

company and inform them of the

Telephone number to which the system will be connected ..................................................
Panasonic
. Make.. ..................................................................................................................
. Model ........................................................................................
..KX-T336 1 OO/KX-T336200
. FCC Registration No.. ..................... See the Name Plate on the KX-T3361 OO/KX-T336200
In case of enabling the following function(s), please inform your telephone company
of the FCC Registration number “ACJJPN-18958-MF-E.”
1. Ground Start
2. Automatic Route Selection
3. Local Access
.0.48
Ringer Equivalence ......................................................................................................
9.OF
. Service Order Code ......................................................................................................
02LS2
(Loop
Start)
.......................................................................
Facility interface Code
(Ground Start) ..................................................................
02GS2
(DID) ..............................................................................
02RV2-T
(OPX) ................................................................................
OL13C
. Required Network Interface Jack (Loop Start and Ground Start). ............................ RJ21X
RJll
(DID and OPX) .......................................................
l

Present FCC Regulation

prohibit connecting

Please read the section

on “Telephone

this unit to a party line, or to a win operated telephone.

Company and FCC Requirements

and Responsibilities.”

4
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the even of theft.
i

MODEL NO.: KX-T3361 OO/KX-T336200

4Q/s,

~~~pr/-

cmv?-~~

SERIAL NO.:

For your future reference
DATE OF PURCHASE
---.
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S

ADDRESS

.:
(lOl91,

TELEPHONE COMPANY and
FCC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of
the FCC Rules and Regulations for connection of
terminal system (this device is classified as
terminal system) to the telephone network and’
for your convenience, the following information is
presented:

1. Notification
Company

to the Telephone

Customers connecting terminal equipment to the
telephone network shall, upon request of the
Telephone Company, inform the Telephone
Company of the particular line(s) to which such
connection is made, the FCC registration number
and (See label on bottom of unit.) ringer
equivalence number of the registered terminal
equipment.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of
devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all of those devices ring when your
telephone number is called. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of the REN’s of all devices
connected to one line should not exceed five
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you
may connect to your line, as determined by the
REN, your should contact your local telephone
company to determine the maximum REN for
your calling area.

2. Direct connection to A Partyline or Coin-operated
telephone Line is Prohibited
3. Incidence of Harm to The
Telephone Lines
Should Terminal Equipment cause harm to the
Telephone Network, the Telephone Company
shall, where practical, notify the customer that
temporary discontinuance of service may be
required. However, where prior notice is not
practical, the Telephone Company may
temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such
action is reasonable in the circumstances.
In
case of such unnotified temporary
discontinuance of service, the Telephone
Company shall:

Promptly notify the customer of such
temporary discontinuance of service.
(b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct
the situation which gave rise to the temporary
discontinuance.
(cl Inform the customer of the right to bring a
complaint to the Commission pursuant to the
procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of
FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.

4. Compatibility

of The
Telephone Network and
Terminal Equipment

(a) Availability of telephone
interface information.
Technical information concerning interface
parameters and specifications not specified in
FCC Rules, including the number of Ringers
which may be connected to a particular
telephone line, which is needed to permit
Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner
compatible with Telephone Company
communications facilities, shall be provided by
the Telephone Company upon customer’s
request.

(b) Changes in Telephone
Company Communications
Facilities, Equipment,
Operations and Procedures.
The Telephone Company may make changes in
its communications facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures, where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its
business and is not inconsistent with the rules
and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules
and Regulations.
If such changes can be
reasonably expected to render any customer
Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone
Company Communications
Facilities, or require
modification or alteration of such Terminal
Equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use
or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

OTHERS
Keep the unit away from heating appliances
and electrical noise generating devices such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and television.
These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the EASA-PHONE.

This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture,
high temperature and vibration, and should not
be exposed to direct sunlight.

Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into
the vents or other holes of this unit.

If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the
telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into
the telephone line. If the telephone operates
properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line
until the trouble has been repaired by an
authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
If the telephone does not operate properly,
chances are that the trouble is in the telephone
system, and not in the unit.

Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents.
Do not use abrasive powder to clean the
cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.

IMPORTANT

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

When using your telephone equipment,
basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire,
electric shock and injury to persons,
including the following:
1 . Read and understand
2.

Follow all warnings
on the product.

This product is equipped with a three wire
grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a
grounding type power outlet. This is a safety
feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, contact your electrician to
replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat
the safety purpose of the grounding type
plug.

Do not allow anything to rest on the power
cord. Do not locate this product where the
cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

all instructions.

and instructions

marked

Unplug this product from the wall outlet
before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for
cleaning.

10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.

Do not use this product near water, for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen
sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or
near a swimming pool.

Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious damage to the product.

Slots and openings in the cabinet and the
back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to
protect it from overheating, these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing
the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other
similar surface. This product should never be
placed near or over a radiator or heat
register. This product should not be placed in
a built-in installation unless proper ventilation
is provided.

This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type
of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.

11. Never push objects of any kind into this
product through cabinet slots as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts that could result in a risk of fire or
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the product.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
disassemble this product, but take it to a
qualified serviceman when some service or
repair work is required. Opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous
voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly
can cause electric shock when the appliance
is subsequently used.

:.‘.:,

:I
.:

14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a
cordless type) during an electrical storm.
There may be a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.

13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and
refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
A. When the power supply cord or plug is
damaged or frayed.
B. If liquid has been spilled into the product.
C. If the product has been exposed to rain or
water.
D. If the product does not operate normally
by following the operating instructions.
Adjust only those controls, that are
covered by the operating instructions
because improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will
often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal
operation.
E. If the product has been dropped or the
cabinet has been damaged.
F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance.

15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak
in the vicinity of the leak.

SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY INSTALLATION
When installing telephone wiring, basic
safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric
shock and injury to persons, including
the following;
1.

Never install telephone wiring during a
lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations
unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or
terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

Use caution when installing or modifying
telephone lines.

INSTRUCTIONS

Section 1

System Outline

(Section 1)

System Outline
Contents

Page
1 -A-l
Overview ... .. ...__..__...___......_.._.....................__..._.__..........._....._............................
1 .OO
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00

The Structure of This Manual ................................................................
Some Conventions Used in This Manual.. .............................................
System Description.. ..............................................................................
Communication Needs ..........................................................................
Service Cards Description .....................................................................

1 -A-l
1 -A-2
1 -A-3
1 -A-3
1 -A-5

1 -B-l
B System Components ... . .. . . .. ... .. .. . .._.................._..._..__.................__..._._._.............
1 .OO Components List.. ..................................................................................
2.00 System Connections.. ............................................................................
C

1 -B-l
1 -B-2

Features . .. ... .... . .. .. . . ... .. . .. .. _. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .... . .. . . . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .... . .. ... .. ...._.................. 1 -C-l

D Administration . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .._............................................ 1 -D-l
1 .OO
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00

Introduction ............................................................................................
System Interface.. ..................................................................................
Programming .........................................................................................
Test ........................................................................................................
Monitor.. .................................................................................................
Backup Utility .........................................................................................

E System Configuration .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. ..._.........................................................
1 .oo
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
13.00
14.00
15.00
16.00
17.00

Basic Shelf.. ...........................................................................................
Expansion Shelf.. ...................................................................................
Attendant Console .................................................................................
CPU Card ..............................................................................................
TSW Card.. ............................................................................................
Power Unit .............................................................................................
LCOT Card ............................................................................................
GCOT Card.. ..........................................................................................
PLC Card.. .............................................................................................
SLC Card ...............................................................................................
HLC Card.. .............................................................................................
ATLC Card ....................................................................................... :. ....
DISA Card ..............................................................................................
DID Card ................................................................................................
OPX Card ..............................................................................................
DPH Card ..............................................................................................
AGC Card ..............................................................................................

l-l

1 -D-l
1 -D-l
1 -D-2
1 -D-2
1 -D-3
1 -D-3
1 -E-l
1 -E-l
1 -E-2
1 -E-3
1 -E-3
1 -E-4
1 -E-4
1 -E-5
1 -E-5
1 -E-6
1 -E-6
1 -E-7
1 -E-7
1-E-8
1 -E-8
1 -E-9
1-E-9
1-E-10

18.00
19.00
20.00
21 .OO
22.00

RMTCard.. ............................................................................................
T-SW Conference Expansion Card.. ......................................................
OHCA Card.. ..........................................................................................
T-SW OHCA Expansion Card ................................................................
OPX Power Unit.. ...................................................................................

l-2

Page
1-E-10
1 -E-l 1
1 -E-l 1
1 -E-l1
1 -E-l1

A. Overview
1 .OOThe Structure of This Manual
Section 9 System Programming (VT220 and
Compatibles)

introduction
This system reference manual provides general
technical information on Panasonic KX-T336
system.
This includes a description of the system, its
hardware and software, features and service,
environmental requirements.
This manual is intended to serve as an overall
technical reference for the system.

This section provides information for the
programming of the system database using VT220
and Compatibles.

Section 10 System Programming (Dumb)
This section provides information for the
programming of the system database using Dumb
terminal.

Organization
This manual is comprised of the following
sections.

Section 11 System Programming (PITS)

This section provides information for a certain
programming of the system database using PITS
telephone.

Section 1 System Outline
This section describes the overall information of
the system and the constnxtion of this Service
Reference Manual.

Section 12 Station Programming (PITS)
This section provides information for the
programming of various features specific to each
PITS telephone and DSS console using PITS
telephone.

Section 2 installation
This section describes how to install and start up
the system.

Section 13 Station Programming (ATT)

Section 3 System Features and Operation

This section provides information for the
programming and the back-up of the attendant
console database using the attendant console.

This section describes the basic system features.

Section 4 Station Features and Operation
(PITS)

Section 14 Maintenance (VT220 and
Compatibles)

This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of Proprietary
Integrated Telephone System (PITS) users.
The basic features and required operations for
DSS console are also described.

This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
using VT220 and Compatibles.

Section 15 Maintenance (Dumb)

Section 5 Station Feature and Operation (SLT)

This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
using Dumb terminal.

This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of Single Line
Telephone (SLT) users.

Section 16 Backup Utility-On-Site
This section provides the information for saving
and loading of the system programming data
(including attendant console database) at on-site.

Section 6 Station Feature and Operation (ATT)
This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of the Attendant
Console (ATT) Operator.

Section 17 Backup Utility-Remote Location
This section provides the information for saving
and loading the system programing data (including
attendant console database) from a remote
location.

Section 7 Preparation for Programming and
Operation (VT220 and Compatibles)
This section describes the basic usage and
available functions of VT220 and Compatibles.

Section 18 Abbreviations

Section 8 Preparation for Programming and
Operation (Dumb)

This section provides a list of abbreviations
in this manual.

This section describes the basic usage and
command reference of Dumb terminal.

Section 19 index

1 -A-l

used

2.00 Some Conventions
- This Manual

Used in
<3> shows the reference number for
programming (Dumb terminal user)

In this manual “system features” are described in
Section 3 and ‘station (PITS, SLT, AlT) features”
are described in Section 4 to Section 6. In these
sections, information for each feature is
presented under the following four headings:
Description, Programming,
Operation.

Conditions,

(Note)
In this manual, all reference numbers are
described using Section Number, Subsection
Number, and Title Number.

and

Description

2.00 System Administration
a Remote Location

Defines the feature, describes what it does for
the user, and how it is used.

Description

Programming

From a remote location, you can perform system
programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements
using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters, refer
“Communication
Interface.”

Provides tabular listing of items required for
system programming as follows:

<3>
<2>
I
Refl ence
System Programming

from

“System-Class of Service”,
Executive Busy Override
Deny
“System-Numbering
Plan’:
Busy Override Deny Set
Busy Override Deny Cancel

Conditions

Dumb

lo-c-7.00

404.01

RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
system and assign the telephone number of

9-D-6.04 lo-c-lO.oc

Interface
-

Title Number

Communicstion

Interface

1-------------__________I

interpret this table as follows:
shows the required programming
the described feature.

c-------------e
Item

items for

I----

<2> shows the reference number for
programming (VT 220 user)
For example, interpret “9-D-4.01” as follows.
9-D-4.01
L
Title Number
Subsection Number
IL
Section Number

Class

of Ssrvice

Provides instructions for a user of PITS
telephone (Section 4), Single Line Telephone
(Section 5) and Attendant Console (Section 6)
individually.

Class of Service
_________________--__-_--_________----Class of Service
------

1200 bmud

Operation

System-

Describes the applications and benefits of the
feature, followed by factors to be considered
when the feature is used.

(112)

Tile Number

SIO e1

(Terminal)
__--__ - ---, gii

Conditions

4.00 Class of Service
4.01

-----+

I NL-code
I Bmud Rate

I
I

-----___-

--------

03X) lb.
----

I Toll Restriction
Level (Cmr) ---I Toll Kestrictica
Level #i&t.)
--I Pax. Dialing Digits ------------I Call Forvardins / 90 Hot Disturb -

1 -A-2

3.00 System Description

4.00 Communications

Needs

The system can consist of one, two, or three
shelves (Basic and Expansion l(2) and
Attendant Console. Each shelf contains its own
power supply.
Basic shelf is always required and it can be
equipped with up to 96 lines (including
Extensions and CO lines).

To meet the user’s communications needs, lhis
system provides the following features.
Outgoing Call Features
Toll Restrictions allow the manager to restrict
extension users from making certain types of
calls.
Restriction is administered through outward
restriction, toll restriction, and ARS restriction.

Building Block System
Useful to enlarge system’s ability by installing the
optional Expansion Shelf.
Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to
the system.
Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to
120 lines (including Extensions and CO lines).

Automatic Route Selection tARSI provides for
the routing of calls over the telecommunication
network based on preferred routes (normally the
least expensive route available at the time the
call is made) with capacity for multiple common
carriers.

Flexible Ports
Receiving Features

Up to 336 lines (including Extensions and CO
lines) can be connected with this system.
However Extensions (including DSS consoles)
must be 288 lines or less and CO lines must be
144 lines or less.

Q&ct inward Dialina (DID1 allows outside parties
to reach specific inside parties or facilities by
direct dialing without attendant assistance.
Direct Inward Svstem Access (DlSAj allows the
outside parties to dial directly into this system
and access to certain system’s features and
facilities without attendant assistance.
After gaining access to the system, the outside
party can access certain system’s features by
dialing the appropriate feature number.

Up to two Attendant Consoles (option-with CRT
display) can be connected to the system if ATLC
card is equipped with this system.
Attendant Console can be used for call
processing and system programming in
interactive format.
Switched Loop Attendant Console Operation
makes the handling of incoming calls more
efficient than conventional system.

Uniform Call Distribution t UCDZ allows incoming
calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions. Calls to a UCD group hunt
for an idle extension in a circular way, starting at
the extension following the last one called.

Starting up the System Administration and
Maintenance of this system can be done using
VT220 (VTlOO), Compatibles, Dumb terminal or
Attendant Console.

InterceDt Routing-No Answec allows calls that are
not answered within a specified time set period to
be redirected to an individual covering extension
and/or an attendant console.

Not only Panasonic Proprietary Integrated
Telephones (PITS) but Single Line Telephones
(SLT) can be used as Extension Telephones in
this system.

Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of
incoming calls to pre-assigned extension of a
hunting group in a circular way or one way when
the called party is busy.

l-A-3

Holding Features

Conversation Features

w
allows an extension user to suspend a call.
This feature allows users to temporarily
disconnect from one conversation and either
make or answer another call. Music on-hold or
message may be provided to the held party if
available.

Conference allows up to 3 parties (maximum two
outside parties), including the originator, to join a
call.
Paging Features
&C&Q allows extension users to make
announcement through built-in speaker of
Proprietary Integrated Telephone (PITS) and/or
external Pager Equipments.

Call Park allows a user to place a call on hold,
then pick up the call at any station in the system.
The user can page another party to pick up the
parked call or may move to another location and
then re-access the call.

Other Features
IOII Message netall Recordina fa)
generates detailed call information on all CO
calls and sends this information to the printer.
SMDR also generates detailed data on Error Log
Records, System Programming Data and Traffic
Information.

Transferring Features
Jransfer allows a user to transfer any call to
another party.
This feature supports transfer of calls from the
called party to another party for completion of a
transaction.

Off Premise Fxtension (OPa allows Single Line
Telephones (SLT) installed off the premises can
be operated via a public or private network in
exactly the same way as extension on the
premise.

I;all Forwarding allows users who are away from
their phones to receive calls at another phone.
This feature supports roving personnel and
shared off ice space or company staff.

Account Code Fntrv allows a user to associate
calls with an account code for charge-back
purposes.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Item
Tenant
Operator
Speed Dialing-System
Speed Dialing-StationISLT
One Touch Dialing-Station/PITS
Call Park Area
Programmable Absent Message
Trunk Group
Equal Access Group
OCC Access Group
Toll Restriction Level
Paging Group
ICM Group
Pickup Group
UCD Group
Class of Service
Primary DN (PDN)
Message Waiting

Maximum number
2
2
200
10
23
20
10
16
4
4
16
8
8
32
32
32
3
500

1-A-4

per system/
station
system
tenant
system
station
station
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
station
system

5.00 Service Cards Description
Extension cards

CO trunk cards

Proorietarv lntearated 1 ine Circuit (PLCJ Card:
This card interfaces 8 PITS telephones, DSS
consoles and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 PITS telephones, DSS
consoles to the system per PLC card.

rt Central Off ice Trunk (LCOT) Card
This card interfaces 8 central off ice loop start
trunks and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system
per LCOT card.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
through a resistance the tip and ring (both wires)
of your telephone line.
l

Sinale Line Teleohone 1 ine Circuit ISLC) &
This card interfaces 8 SLT type telephones and
the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 SLT telephones to the
system per SLC card.
.

This card interfaces 8 central office trunks and the
TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system
per GCOT card.
A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which
one side of the two wire trunk (typically the “Ring”
conductor of the Tip and Ring) is momentarily
grounded to get dial tone.

nd Ltne Circuit fHt.Q Card;
This card interfaces PITS/SLT type telephones,
DSS consoles and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 PITS/SLT telephones/
DSS consoles to the system per HLC card.
Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card:
This card interfaces 4 off premise extensions
through off premise extension power unit.

.
. .
Console I me Crrcutt 1AILC) Card;
This card interfaces 2 Attendant Consoles and
the TOM bus.
It is available to connect 2 attendant consoles to
the system if this card is installed.

There are two types of switched trunks one can
typically lease from a focal phone companyLoop Start and Ground Start.
You must be careful to order the correct type of
trunk from your local phone company and
correctly install your telephone system at your
end - so that they both match.

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk 1DID) Card;
This card interfaces 4 central office trunks
arranged for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and the
TDM bus.

1-A-5

-_
-

Resource cards

Other cards

D’Irect Inward Svste m Access (C)ISA\ Card;
This card interfaces 4 central office trunks
arranged for Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) and the TDM bus.

!&orDhone

Automatic Gain Control IAGC) Card;
This card is used to maintain volume of CO-CO
communication.
An electronic circuit which compares the level of
an incoming signal with a previously defined
standard and automatically amplifies or
attenuates that signal so it arrives at its
destination at the correct level.

Time Switch Conference Fxoansion Card (T-SW
Conferem
This card provides 64 additional conference
trunks, and is installed on the T-SW card.
Off Hook Call mement
(OHCAI Cacd;
This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
features, and is installed on the HLC card or PLC
card.

te Circuit (RMT) Card;
This card is necessary for accessing the system
from a remote location.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Circuit IDPHJ Ca d;

This card interfaces 4 doorp:ones and the TDM
bus. Up to 4 door-phones can be connected to
the system.

Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcem
ston IT-.SW OHCA) Card;
This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
features, and is installed in the Basic Slot 2.

Item

Maximum number

HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT
DI D+LCOT/GCOT
DPH
DISA
AGC
RMT
ATLC
HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT
HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT
HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX
DSS console
External Pager
External Music Source

1 -A-6

42 cards (336 ports)
18 cards (144 ports)
1 card (4 doorphones)
4 cards (16 resources)
4 cards (16 resources)
1 card (1 resource)
1 card (2 ports)
12 cards (96 ports)
15 cards (120 ports)
12 cards (96 ports)
16 consoles (16 ports)
2
2

per system/
stat-on
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
basic shelf
expansion shelf
shelf
system
system
system

B. System

Components

1 .OO Components
Model No.
KX-T336100
KX-T336101
KX-T336102
KX-T336200
KX-T96300
KX-T96145
KX-T96186
KX-T96180
KX-T96181
KX-T96172
KX-T96174
KX-T96170
KX-T96141
KX-T96191
KX-T96182
KX-T96185
KX-T96161
KX-T96193
KX-T96196
KX-T336104
KX-T96136
KX-T336105

Model No.
KX-T30820
KX-T30830
KX-T30850
KX-T61620
KX-T61630
KX-T61650
KX-T123220
KX-T123230
KX-T123230D
KX-T123235
KX-T123250
KX-T7020
KX-T7030
KX-T7050
KX-T7130
KX-T61640
KX-T123240
KX-T7040
KX-T30865
KX-T30890
KX-A26D

List
Name

Basic Shelf
CPU card
T-SW card
Expansion Shelf
Attendant Console
Attendant Console Keyboard
Off Premise Extension Power Unit
Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT) Card
Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card
Proprietary ITS Line Circuit (PLC) Card
Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card
Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card
Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card
Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card
Automatic Gain Control(AGC) Card
Remote Circuit (RMT) Card
Time Switch Conference (T-SW Conference) Expansion Card
Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card
Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement (T-SW OHCA) Card

Name
Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 CO’s, 8 DSS’s)
Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD 12 CO’S)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD 12 CO’S)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD 12 CO’S)
Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD 12 CO’S)
Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
DSS Console (lG’DSS’s, 16 PF buttons)
DSS Console (32 DSS’s, 16 PF buttons)
DSS Console (32 DSS’s, 16 PF buttons)
Doorphone
Headset
Battery Adapter

1-B-l

2.00 System

Connections
Paging Speaker

Amplifier

Paging Speaker 2
Amplifier

Radio

Printer

Radio

12OVAC 60Hz

Automobile type batteries
Consisting of two 12VDC (24VDC)

Data Terminal

1 -B-2

Central

Off ice Lines

Doorphone

Doorphone 2

Doorphone
I

Attendant Console
KX-T96300

KX-T336 System

Off Premise EGension Power Unit
KX-T96186

(two pair)

KX-T6i 640
SingleCine
Telephone

(two pair)

KX-T61630

KX-T30830

(two pair)
KX-T123240

(two pair)

KX-T30820

KX-T61620
(two pair)
.

Data Terminal

KX-T7040
Iree pair)
KX-T-0

KX-T61650
(two pair)

KX-T123235,
KX-T123230D
HOpair)

Cordless Phone
KX-T7130
KX-T123250
Telephone with
Answering
Machine

Wo pW

KX-T123230
- @Jvopair)
c

KX-T7030
KX-T7020
l

Answering System
with Facsimile

KX-T7050

1 -B-3

KX-T123220
Parallel connections of extension is
Refer to Section 3-F-9.00

co 013 _ :‘

Removing the Top Cover

\ LED cable
2)
TOP/ oover

1. Disconnect the LED cable (on the top cover) from the LED cable connector
basic shelf).
2. Remove the top cover by loosening the four screws.

2-B-8

(on the

Front Panel
1. Rotate the key on the front panel
counterclockwise to unlock.
2. Open the front panel toward you at right
angles to the expansion shelf.
3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Side Panel

,
d

/ Screws

Guides
v

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the four screws.
2. Remove the left side panel by loosening the four screws.
2-B-9

2.03 Stacking

on the Basic Shelf

To connect the expansion shelf with basic shelf,
place the holes of the expansion shelf exactly
on the holes of the basic shelf.

Expansion
shelf

Basic shelf

When the holes are placed properly, fix them
with the three screws immediately to prevent
the expansion shelf from falling down.

Note :
If the system is to be expanded-to
“Expansion to 3-Shelf System.”

3-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-3.00

2-B-l 0

2.04 Installation

of Top Cover
To connect the top cover, place the holes of the
top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion
shelf.

Expans
shelf

Note:
Before installing the top cover, remove a screw
as shown in the illustration above. Otherwise the
top cover cannot be installed properly.
This screw is necessary for installing an
expansion shelf.
,: .
-.
_C.
Password

> Date & Time.

> Main Menu

Password

> Date & Time

> Main Menu

2-F-4

2.02 System
I

0
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Administration

Device Selection

Switch (SYSTEM)

Pre-Programmed device is assigned
Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as UO”)
VT220 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
Dumb is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
ATT1 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
ATT2 is assigned as the System Administration Device compu!sorily
Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “On)
Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as .O”)
Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)

a) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “2” through “5,” System
Administration Device will be assigned compulsorily regardless of the system
programming. Default setting is VT220. (Refer to the table above)
o) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “0,” “1,” or ‘6” through “9,” preprogrammed device becomes valid as the System Administration Device.
It is possible to change the System Administration Device assignment compulsorily
by pressing the RESET button after selecting the desired switch position, if preprogrammed System Administration Device is not available due to the hardware
troubles or something.
.

2-F-5

5-T kwo
04c;%

WI))

2.03 Operation

Sequence

for System

Starting

START
>1
Attendant Console

Connect the device to
SIO#l (upper side)

[SYSTEM=43 s”i ;;;
I

I
1

,No

-I

MODE=5

MODE=6
I

)/Off-line

mode
When system data is destroyed, the
system enters to off-line mode

destroyed, start up the
system with default
MODE=0 va’ues

MODE=1

1Press the RESET button 1

MODE=2

‘B*onw,in;l;;e

SYSTEM

2-F-6

: Of=;;~;;;,i,
: System Admmlstratlon

Device

(Example)

The following flow chart shows the operation sequence for System
Starting Up with default values using Panasonic KX-D4930 in VT mode.

Power ON reset or Press
the RESET button

Confirm the
Initial screen

\/
MODE=0
SYSTEM=2

Press the RESET button

MODE : OperationSwitch
SYSTEM : SystemAdministrationDevice
SelectionSwitch

To start up the system using Panasonic KX-D4930 in Dumb mode, set
SYSTEM switch to “3” in above sequence.

2-F-7

Section 3

System Features and Operation

(Section 3)

System Features and Operation
Contents

Page
Preparation . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .._................................................. .. . . . .._...................... 3-A-l

Basic Features . . . . . .._....................... . . . ...-.............................. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. ..s-.......... 3-B-l
1 .oo
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00

8.00

9.00
10.00

11.00
12.00
13.00
&. 14.00
15.00
16.00
C

3-B-l
Flexible Numbering.. ..............................................................................
3-B-5
..........................................................................
Directory Number (DN)
3-B-6
..........................................................
Floating Directory Number (FDN)
3-B-7
.._
....................................
...............................................
Tenant Service
3-B-8
...............................................................................................
Operator..
z-i-ip
Class of Service (COS)..........................................................................
- Group. ....................................................................................................
3-B-11
..........................................................................
7.01 Intercom Group..
7.02 Call Pickup Group ........................................................................ 3-B-l 2
7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group ........................................ 3-B-l 2
3-B-l 3
7.04 Paging Group. .............................................................................
3-B-13
..............................................................................
7.05 Trunk Group..
3-B-14
.........................................................................................
Night Service
3-B-l 5
.................................................................
8.01 Directed Night Answer
3-B-16
....................................................
8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
3-B-l 7
..................................................................
8.03 Flexible.Night Service
3-B-l 7-1
.~
.....................................................................
8.04 Fixed Night Service
3-B-l 8
......................................................
8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode
3-B-l 9
.......................................................................
Mixed Station Capacities
3-B-20
..................................................................................
Variable Time-Gut
3-B-21
Lockout ..................................................................................................
Automatic Station Release .................................................................... 3-B-21
3-B-22
Distinctive Dial Tone ..............................................................................
z.. .............................. 3-B-23
Distinctive Busy Torte.. ................................. :...:”
.............‘-3-B-24
......................................................................
Confirmation Tone
Tone and Ringing Patterns .................................................................... 3-B-25

. .. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. 3-c-1
Outgoing Call Features .. . ... . .. .. .. . .. .. ...__.___.....__........................
1.00 Toll Restriction .......................................................................................
1 .Ol Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................
1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System.. ....
1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access. ..............................................................................
1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access ....
1 .05 Operator/International Call Restriction ........................................
1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction ...............................................................
1.07 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction .............................................................
2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ..........................................................
3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion .........................................................................
4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion ....................................................................

3-c-1
3-C-2
3-c-5
3-c-7
3-c-1 0
3-c-1 3
3-c-1 5
3-C-20
3-C-21
3-C-36
3-c-37

Receiving Features.. ... .....................................................................................

Page
3-D-1

1.00 Attendant Console (ATT) Operation ......................................................
1 .Ol Load Sharing ...............................................................................
1.02 Simultaneous Ringing.. ................................................................
1.03 Interconsole IRNA .......................................................................
2.00 Attendant Console-less Operation ........................................................
2.01 Direct In Line (DIL) ......................................................................
2.02 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ..........................................
2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID). .........................................................
2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.. .............
2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-General.....................................
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with/without OGM .....................
2.07 Private CO (PCO). .......................................................................
2.08 Single CO (SCO). ........................................................................
2.09 Group CO (GCO) .........................................................................
2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment ..................................................
2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment ...........................................................
3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment ................................................................
3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment-No Ringing ....................................
3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing ...........................
4.00 Discriminating Ringing.. .........................................................................
5.00 Station Hunting ...........:.I.. ...;.;. ..............................................................
5.01 Station Hunting-Circular ..............................................................
5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal .............................................................

3-D-1
3-D-2-l
3-D-2-2
3-D-2-3
3-D-3
3-D-3
3-D-4
3-D-7
3-D-8
3-D-9
3-D-11
3-D-15
3-D-16
3-D-l 7
3-D-1 7-l
3-D-l 7-4
3-D-18
3-D-18
3-D-18
3D-19
3-D-20
3-D-20
3-D-21

Holding Features.. ............................................................................................

3-E-l

1.00 Music on Hold .......................................................................................
2.06 Held Call Reminder..: .%................................ :r.; ..;. .................................
3.08 Transfer Recall .....................................................................................

3-E-l
3-E-2 ;L
3-E-3

Other Features . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .... . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. ... . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .... .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. 3-F-l
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ..........................................
0ff Premise Extension (OPX) ................................................................
Walking Station.. ....................................................................................
outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ......................
Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA). ....................................................
Rerouting ...............................................................................................
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .......................................
CO Busy Cut ..........................................................................................
Parallel Connecttin of Extensions.. .......................................................
Voice Processing System (VPS). ...........................................................
10.01 Voice Mail Integration ................................................................
10.02 DTMF-Tone Integration .............................................................
11.oo Call Accounting Summary .....................................................................
12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone .................................................................
13.00 Timed Reminder with CGM (Wake-up Call) ..........................................
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00

3-F-l
3-F-3
3-F-3
3-F-5
3-F-8
3-F-9
3-F-l 0
3-F-11
3-F-l 2
3-F-l 3
3-F-15
3-F-21
3-F-52
3-F-62
3-F-64

- .-.

A. Preparation
This section provides the basic information on
each of the system features which are
programmed at system level.
System features are those that affect the entire
operation of the system.
In this section, system features are divided into
the following five categories.

. Basic Features
Outgoing Call Features
Receiving Features
Holding Features
Other Features
l

l
l

3-A-l

B. Basic Features
1 .OO Flexible

Numbering

Description

Conditions

This system comes wi?h a varier! S! serdli+-%
and the feature numbers used wr,en exec,:.?g

Ttie followings are examples oi feature number
conflicts:

these services can be set as required.
Feature numbers can be from one to four clglts.
‘utilizing numbers “0” through “9” as well as --”
and “#.”

Examples: 2 and 21, 32 and 321, etc.
Conversely, the following numbers can be used
without conflict:
Examples: 2 and 3,3 and 41: 41 and 42,450
and 451, etc.

Directory Numbers (DN) can be three or four
digits in length, and it is acceptable for some to
have three digits and others four digits.
When three-digit DN’s are used, any number can
be set as the initial digit; when four-digit DN’s are
used, any numbers can be set as the initial two
digits.

=*” and “#” cannot be used for extension
numbers (extension blocks).
When u*” and “#I”are included in a feature
number, it will not be possible to execute the
corresponding feature using a dial pulse type of
Single Line Telephone (SLT).

The feature numbers are set in the “SystemNumbering Plan” screens.
Two default parameters sets are provided for the
feature numbers and when either is used in its
original form, the Numbering Plan option in the
“System-Operation” screen is set to “Fixed 1” or
. “Fixed 2.”

Only “0”, ‘1” to “9”, u*A”and “#” are valid for
entering feature numbers into One Touch dial
buttons.
When “FLASH”, y-m,“PAUSE” and “SECRET” are
included into feature numbers, reorder tone is
sent and the features cannot be executed.

In this case, the settings cannot be changed in
the “System-Numbering Plan” screen. When a
feature number is to be changed, select Flex in
the “System-Operation”, Numbering Plan before
making the change in the “System-Numbering
Plan.”

“V cannot be used for the feature numbers listed
below, for those features require r$” as a
delimiter when setting the feature:
“Call Forwarding-to TrunK
“Pickup Dialing Programming”
“Speed Dialing-Station”

Programming

The feature numbers which have been set in the
“System-Numbering Plan* screens can be used
when dial tone is heard. However, feature
number for “Account Code” may be used at times
other than when dial tone is heard.

3-B-l

In addition to the feature numbers which can be
set in System-Nun&ring
Plan,” fixed feature
numbers are prcv&d
ant these are shown in
the following table
Fixed Feature Numbers
-I-

Functor!
While busy tone is heard
Call-back (for extensions only)
Busy Override

6
1

While Do Not Disturb tone is heard
DND Override

When handset is on-hook (PITS only)
Time display/date display switching
Background music onioff
Day/Night mode display

*
1
#

While talking to doorphone
Open the door

Others
Extension time and data display mode
switching
Account code delimiter
Account code delimiter (for dial pulse typeI
SLT only)
Account code re-input

INumbs

*
#
99
*

The feature numbers which are set in the
“System-Numbering Plan” are listed on the
following pages.

._ -- --.
w

e..
F

3-B-2

Flexible

feature

Number6

Operator Call (Specific)
ARS/Locaf CO Line Access
Trunk Group 01-08 Access

Trunk
17-246 Access
Trunk Group
Group 09-l
Access
Speed Dialino - System
Speed Dialing - Station
Doorphone Call (l-4)
External Paoina
Station Paaino
cxternar ragtng Answer
Station
Paaina
Answer
------.-a
Night Answer 1
Nioht
2s-------- AnswerDial Call Pickup

I
1
I
II
I

9
81

83
82
1

I
1.

83
82
dl

40
41
42
4-J
44
ss

40
41
42
45
44
45

I
I
I

HoM ExtenskSK’Retrieve
Redinl
. .--.-.

I
I

External Feature Access
Account Code

Do Not Disturb Set
Call Fowardinq/Do Not Disturb Cancel
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel

I
I

50
u#

50
*#

++,

++1

##O

61’

61+

61#

3-B-3
(30393)

Flexible

feature

NL’clbers

Remote Tmed Reminder Confirm
Remote Timed Reminder Set
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel

73
7*1
7#

3-B-4
(30393)

2.00 Directory

Number

(DN)

Description
Directory numbers are the software type logical
numbers which are programmed to match the
hardware type physical numbers (port numbers)
attached to ports of extensions.
Accordingly, directory numbers are extension
numbers.

System-Numbering

Plan

Numbering Plan (l/9)
F--S------------------------‘----r---~---~----~----,
; DGll DG21 DG31 DG41
1No. 1 Feature
;- T------------------------;----:---;---~----~---~
’
; 1 ; 1 st Hundred Block Extension
; 5 f
: - ; - ;-------,----r---1--r--T-----------------r----l
; 2 ;2nd Hundred Block Extension ; 6 ;
; - ; - i
----p---*----p---,
r--+------------------------t
1
I 3 !3rd Hundred Block Extension i 7 : 0 : - f - I
c--+------------------------i------~---~----~---~
i 4 /4th Hundred Block Extension i 8 [ 0 i - i - i

Directory numbers are assigned in “ConfigurationDN Assignment” to be three or four digits.
Only numeric characters “0 to 9” can be used as a
Directory Number.

DNs from 8000 to 8099 are assignable.

D’lrec t o ry number setting follows the setting in
“System-Numbering Plan”, 1st Hundred Block
Extension through 16th Hundred Block Extension.

DNs from 7000 to 7099 are assignable.
DNs from 600 to 699 are assignable.
DNs from 500 to 599 are assignable.

Programming

Reference
VT 1 Dumb

System Programming

9-c-3.00 lo-c-3.00
‘Configuration-DN
Assignment”
. “System-Numbering
Plan (l/9) (2/g)“, 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00
1 st Hundred Block Extension
9-D-6.02
.
.

16th Hundred Block Extension

Conditions
There are two types of directory numbers: the
Primary Directory Number (PDN) and the
Secondary Directory Number (SDN).
For further details of PDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.01
“PDN Butto??’ For SDN, refer to’Se&ion 4-B-3.02
“SDN Button.”

If you assign only one digit in “System-Numbering
Plan”, 1st Hundred Block Extension through 16th
Hundred Block Extension, you can assign threedigit DNs which start with the pre-assigned digit in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”
If you assign leading two digits in “SystemNumbering Plan,” you can assign fourdigit DNs
which start with the pre-assigned two digits in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

3-B-5

3.00 Floating
FW

Directory

Number

Description

Conditions

It is possible to assign virtual directory numbers
to resources and make them appear to be
extensions. Those directory numbers are
defined as Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).

“System-Numbering Plan”, 1 st Hundred Bloc4
Extqsion through 16th Hundred Block
Extension, as well as DN setting.

FDN setting must follow the assigmmer!

For example, if an operator receives an incoming
CO call for Remote Administration, the operator
can transfer the call to Remote Administration
resource using the FDN, in the same way as if
the operator transfers an incoming CO call to an
extension, that is, if the operator is PITS, by
pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the
FDN.
^.
FDN can be assigned to the followings:
1. Pilot number for UCD groups 01 to 32
2. General Operator Call (two FDN’s can be
programmed)
3. Attendant Console number (Al7 , AlT2)
4. Remote Administration resource
Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

9-K-3.01 1O-WLOC
‘Special Attended-UCD (l/2)“,
FDN
9-D-l .Ol 1O-c-4.00
‘System-Operation (l/3)“,
FDN for General Operator Call
9-D-l .02
“System-Operation (2/3)“,
Remote Directory Number
“Extension-Attendant Console ._..I 9-G-4.01 10-&28.00
(l/2)-, DN

3-B-6

4.00 Tenant Service
Description
To enable Tenant Service, set “SystemOperation’, Tenant Service to “Yes.”
“System-Tenanr, programming is used to
determine how the resources will be divided up
between the tenants.

A single system can be used as if two systems
were available.
This enables the configuration of two systems
which, in each case, are suited to a different
customer.

Programming

11
(Customer 1)

(Customer2)

Some of resourcescan be divided up between
the tenants and others are used in common.
A list of resources in each classification is given
below.

Conditions
The Night Mode can be operated separately
each tenant.

[Resources which can be divided up]
Trunk Groups
Attendant Consoles
Extensions
Direct inward System Access (DISA)
Automatic Gain Control (AGC). _
Number of Speed Dialing-System
External pagers
Doorphones
Background Music or Music on Hold
Number of Call Park-System parking zones
Number of Flexible Absent Messages
Number of possible Message Waiting
entrjes
. Passwords (Walking COS, PlTS‘zystem
Programming)

for

Calling to extensions in the other tenant can be
enabled by setting “System-Tenant”, Inter-Tenant
Calling to yes.”
However, even when this function has been set
to “Yes,” it is not possible to call the Attendant
Console in the other tenant.
..

l
l

l
l
l

l
l
l
l

[Common resources]
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Numbering Plan
Remote operation control
Class of Service (COS)
Administration Device
Toll restriction tables
l

l
l
l

l
l

3-B-7

5.00 Operator
Description
The system allows the operator to answer,
monitor and control the incoming calls.
Up to two operators (operator 1 and 2) can be
assigned in the system.
If tenant service is employed, up to two operators
can be assigned to each tenant individually.
Not only the ATT (attendant console) operator but
the extension user can be assigned as an
operator.
“Operator 1” must always be selected when only
one operator is assigned.
If an attendant console is connected to the
system, the operator assignment should be
arranged as follows.

(When one attendant console is connected)
operator 1
Operator 2

Fj
extension

(When two attendant consoles are connected)
Operator 1 1

AlT

Operator 2 I

ATr

The operator assignment can be done in the
system programming “System-Operation (3/3).”
dperatdr 1 and O$&tor 2.

The following list shows the special functions available with each operator.

0
0

14 Local Alarm Indication
15 Remote Timed Reminder
l

In case of an extension, only a PITS with display is available.

0
0*

0’
0

3-B-8
(40993)

: available
: not available

Invalid Operator Assignment
The following arrangement is invalid in the
operator assignment whether tenant service is
employed or not.

Programming

System Programmq

“System-Operation (3/3)“,
Operator 1
Operator 2
“System-Tenant”,
Operator 1 (Tenant 2)
Operator 2 (Tenant 2)

Reference
VT
/
Dumb
9-D1.03

10-c-5.00

902.00

10-c-5.00

Operator 1
Operator 2 fi[ ATT

Operator Call
The extension user can call the operator in the
system by dialing the feature number for
“Operator Call (General)” or “Operator Call
(Specific) .”
For further information, refer to the following:
(PITS users)
Section 4-C-l 0.60 “Operator Call”
(SLT users)
Section 5-A-8.00 “Operator Call.”

Conditions

Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and
2) can have unique operator assignment
individually. that is, up to four operators can be
assigned to the system.
In this case, the operator assignment should be
arranged as follows.
l

Tenant 1

Tenant 2

Transfer
The extension user can transfer a call to the
operators (Attendant Console or Extension) by
both screened and unscreened call transfers.
For further information, refer to the following.
.\
(PITS users)
Section 4-F-l .Ol “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station”
&t;;
4-F-l .02 “Screened Call Transfer to
. ”
l

Operator 1
Operator 2
The operator assignment can be done in the
system programming as follows.
(Tenant 1)
“System-Operation (3!3)“, Operator 1 and
Operator 2.
(Tenant 2)
“System-Tenant”, Operator 1 and Operator 2.

Section 4-F-l -06 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Attendant Console”
..ri
(SLT users)
Section 5-D-l .Ol “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station”
Section 5-D-l -02 “Screened Call Transfer to
Station”
Section 5-D-l .04 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Attendant Console”
Hold
The extension user cannot hold a call with an
attendant console operator.
l

3-B-9
(30393)

6.00 Class of Service (COS)
Description

16) Trunk groups available for an outgoing

The functions executed by the extensions users
can be restricted by the COS No. assigned for
each extension user.
A total of 32 classes of service are available.
A Class of Service is assigned to every extension
in “Extension-Station”, Class of Service. The
available options are set in “System-Class of
Service”.
Programming
System Programming
“System-Class of Service”

Heference

Dumb

9-D-4.01 lo-c-7.00
9-D-4.02

“Extension-Station”,
Class of Service

1o-c-8.00

9-G-l .Ol lo-c-22.00

Conditions
.

A list of the items which can be set in “SystemClass of Service’ are given below!
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)

call when the outgoing call is made by
specifying a trunk group. This setting is not
valid for one-touch CO line outgoing calls,
outgoing calls by specifying a Virtual Trunk
Group, and local CO line outgoing calls
including Automatic Route Selection calls.
17) Special carrier access-enable/disable
(Setting of accessible carrier when outgoing
calls are made by specifying Virtual Trunk
Group)
18) Setting of accessible paging group with
station paging
19) Setting of accessible external pager with
external paging

Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode)
Outgoing call restrictiin level (Night mode)
Maximum number of digits allowed for a CO
call
The ability to allow or deny Call Forwarding
and Do Not Disturb
The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the
called station
The ability to forward or transfer a call to an
outside party.
Forced account code operation-enable/disable
BSS/OHCA override operation-enable/disable
BSS/OHCA deny-enable/disable
Executive Busy Override of called partyenable/disable
Executive Busy Override deny-enable/disable
Electronic Station Lock Out/Walking COSenable/disable
Walking Station-enable/disable
The ability to perform PITS System
Programming-enable/disable
ARS/Local toll restriction-with restriction/no
restriction/no access

3-B-l 0

‘\

7.00

Group

7.01 Intercom

Group

Description

Conditions

Each extension is assigned to an intercom group
‘1 !o 8). The extension users in the same intercom
group can call each other by dialing the intercom
number (one or two digits) using ICM button on a
PITS telephone. It is also possible to make an
intercom call by dialing u*” and the directory
number (three or four digits) B
vt*
Refer to Section 4-C-5.02 “Intercom Calling” for
further information.

If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each intercom group is determined by the
programming in “Group-ICM/Paging Group”
screen.

The intercom group affiliation of each extension
user is determined in the “Extension-Station”, ICM
Group and the intercom numbers are set by
“Extension-Station”, Intercom Number.
All extensions (PITS and SLT) must belong to one
of eight intercom groups.

There is no limit on the number of extensions that
each Intercom Group can include, but an
extension user can be assigned to only one
Intercom Group.
Intercom numbers are composed of one or two
digits. This means that there are a maximum of
100 intercom numbers (00 through 99) per
intercom group.
Extensions belonging to different intercom
groups can have the same intercom number.

Since intercom numbers cannot be given to SLT, it
_ is only possible to call these telephones by using
their directory numbers. Also, since SLTs are not
provided with ICM buttons they can only call PITS
using the directory numbers.
.I

The relationship between intercom’groups and
paging groups is determined by programming the
‘Group-Call-Pickup Group” screen.
Programming
System Programming

UGroup-kl/P&q
Group”
“Group-Call Pickup Group”,
ICM
“Extension-Station”,
Intercom Number
ICM Group

Reference
VIDumb

9-E-2.00 10-C-l 6.00
9-E-3.00 1O-C-l 7.00
9-G-l .Ol 10-c-22.00

3-B-1 1

7.02 Call Pickup

Group

Description
Extensions belonging to a particular intercom
group can be divided into call pickup groups
which can execute the Dial Call Pickup feature.

The call pickup group belonging to an intercom
group is set by programming in the “Group-Call
Pickup Group”, ICM.
Up to 32 call pickup groups can be assigned in
the system.
Extensions programmed into call pickup groups
are set in the “Extension-Station”, Pickup Group.
It is not necessary for all extensions to be in a
pickup group.
See Section 4-D-3.01 “Dial Call Pickup” for
further information about the Dial Call Pickup
feature.
Programming

7.03 Uniform
Group

Call Distribution

(UCD)

Description
It is possible to execute UCD functions in a group
composed of one or more Call Pickup Groups.
Such a group is called a UCD group.
The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen
determines whic.J pickup group(s) will be in the
UCD group. A
Up to 32 UCD groups can be assigned in the
system.
The UCD group and the call pickup group
configuring the UCD group must belong to the
same intercom group.
See Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-without OGM” and Section 3-D-2.06
“Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with OGM” for
further information about the UCD functions.
See the previous Section 3:B-7.02 “Call Pickup
Group” for details on Call Pickup Groups.
See Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for
further information about ICM Groups.

.~~I

Programming
System Programming
“Group-Call
UCD

Conditions
Different call pickup groups can have the same
UCD and/or paging groups.

Conditions
None

See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details
on Paging Groups.
See the following Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) Group” for details on UCD
Groups.

3-B-12

Pickup Group”,

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

1 9-E-3.001 10-C-17.00 (

7.04

Paging

Group

7.05 Trunk Group

Description

It IS F;ssible :a execure paging functions in a
grol;p composed of one or more pickup groups.

To suppon efficient utilization of trunks, they can

Such a group IS called a “Paging Group.”

trunks in the group perform the same function.
The following six kinds of trunk groups can be
assigned in the system.
The items listed below are set in the “GroupTrunk Group” screen.

be grouped together

Up to eight paging groups can be assigned in the
system.
When Tenant Service is employed, the “GroupICM/Paging Group” screen sets which tenant the
paging group belongs to.
The ‘Group-Call Pickup Group” screen sets
which pickup group(s) make up a paging group.

(4 Trunk group type
@I Trunk group name
(c) Tenant selection
(d) Trunk group direction
(e) Incoming destination (Day)
1f) Incoming destination (Night)
19) Intercept Routing (Day)
(h) Intercept Routing (Night)
restriction level
;;; Toll
Toil restriction table
(k) Dialing plan selection
(1) Disconnect time selection

Programming
System Programming

(up to 16 groups) if all

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

Pause time selection
Hookswitch flash time selection
DID digit modification table selection
Entry
of PBX access code (No restriction)
(P)
Entry
of
PBX access code (Restriction)
(4)
Restriction
time on CO-CO calls
(0
DIL
(I:N)
destination
(9
0) Maximum number of digits after External
Feature Access
(u) CO appearance type

I;)
(0)

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, pickup groups
which can be used to configure a paging group
are limited,within the same tenant.
See Section 4-H-l .OO“Paging” for further
information about paging features.

The “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group determines
which trunk group the CO line belongs to.
Programming
System Programming

Referenoe
VT
Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group”

g-E-1.01
g-E-1.02

“Trunk-CO Line”. Trunk Grow

9-F-1.00

lO-CL14.00
10-C-15.00
10-C-18.00

Conditions
A single CO line cannot belong to more than one
trunk group.

3-B-l 3

8.00 Night Service
Description
Special arrangements are required to handle
attendant-seeking incoming CO calls during period
when the operator at Attendant Console is not
available, for example at night and on weekends.
Attendant-seeking incoming CO calls will be
redirected to the designated extension an&or a
group of extensions (Directed Night Answer)or will
ring an external pager (Universal N.ght Answer) in
night mode.
1. Treatment of attendant-seekina incomina CQ
calls in niaht mode

2. Treatment of other calls in niaht mode
DID and PC0 calls are not assignable to Night
Service.
A DID call will ring at the appropriate extension
and PC0 call will ring at designated extension
regardless of Day/Night mode.
The following list shows the relationship
between incoming Mode (Day) and assignable
Incoming Mode (Night) of the Trunk Group.
/ lhcomini Mode (Day) 1 IhCOg

(Night) /

(Directed Night Answer)
Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO
calls to the designated extension or a group of
extensions automatically in night mode.
(Universal Night Answer (UNA))
Erl
Allows any extension user in the system to
answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls
ringing at an external pager. by dialing the
i-lI$Fi
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.”
Note: Incoming attendant-seeking CO calls can
be redirected to the Remote Maintenance
Resource for the System Administration.

Incoming Mode (Day)
DISA

Incoming Mode (Night)
Day Mode
EFB~E

To continue the same Incoming Mode for a
trunk group both in Day and Night, set
“Incoming Mode (Night)” to Day Mode.

Night Answer Destination can be administered
either by fifed mode (Fixed Night Se&e) or
flexible mode (Flexible Night Service).
(Flexible Night Service)
Allows the Operator 1 to change the preassigned night answer destination--4. ,,
(Fixed Night Service)
The Operator 1 cannot change the pre-assigned
night answer destination.
Only the system administrator can change the
pre-assigned night answer destination.
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same.
The difference is:
Flexible

The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the night
answer destination.

Fixed

A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode
3-B-l 4
(30393)

(Note)
if Incoming Mode (Day) of a trunk group is set
to ATT, Day Mode can not be selected for
Incoming Mode (Night).
The following calls directed to the Attendant
Console in day mode can be redirected to the
designated extension in night mode.
DPH, DID, DISA and Extension calls
To utilize this redirection, assign desired
extension number in “Extension-Attendant
Console” Night.

;

8.01
3. Switchina

Directed

Night

Answer

Description

of DaviNioht Mode

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension User) at any time desired.

Lrsec ;o redirect Incoming attendant-seeking
CO
calls to !?e designated extension or a group of
extensor& (Night Answer Group) automatically in
nght moue.

(Automatic Switching)
The system willswitch the day and night modes
at the programmed time automatically each day.

To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to EXT:
xxxx or NAG (Night Answer Group).

(Manual Switching)
Operator 1 can switch the Day/Night mode at
desired time.

Night Answer Group
A single group of extensions (called the Night
Answer Group) can be created to receive Calls at
night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at

(Supplement)
The following programming items may be
assigned in a different way between day mode
and night mode.

this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

“System-Class of Service”
Toll Restriction Level (Day)
Toll Restriction Level (Night)
(Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of
Service (l/2).“)

co1

Night Answer Group

To utilize this feature, program as follows.
1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
(Night) to “FIXED.”

(W.“)
l

co3

“Group-Trunk Group”
incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
(Refer to Section 9-E-l .Ol “Trunk Group

co2

“Extension-Station”
Day Ring
Night Ring
(Refer to Section 9-G-l -02 “Station (B).“)

2. Assign ‘Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
“NAG.”
This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.

3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions
by using NAG command.

3-B-15
(30393)

8.02

Universal

Night Answer

(UNA)

Description
System Programmrg
:0-c-14.00

lG-C-18.00
10-G59.00

Programming
Conditions
1. RNA and Rerouting

lf an incoming CO call directed to a single
extension is not answered within a specified
time period, the caller will receive Rerouting
or IRNA treatment.
For further information, refer to Section 3-F-5.
00 “Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)” and
Section 3-F-6.00 “Rerouting.”
2. Remote Administration
To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select “RMT” for
“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point
assignment.
For further information about remote,.
administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote
Location .”

Allows any extension user in the system to
answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls
ringing at an external pager, by dialing the
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.”
. To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines belonging to this trunk
group are covered by this assignment.
External pager must be connected to the system
beforehand.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
the system.
To answer calls ringing at external pager 1, dial
the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer calls ringing at external pager 2, dial the
feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
For further information about external pager
assignment, refer to Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging
External Pagers.”
Programming
System Programming

“Group-TrunkGroup (1R)“,
IncomingMode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”,

3. Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1
. and 2) can have unique Night Service
arrangement individually.
In this case, Night Service assignment for
tenant 1 is determined by the system
programming “System-Operation” and Night
Service assignment for tenant 2 is determined
by the system programming “System-Tenant.”

Night Answer Point
‘System-Numbering Plan (319)
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2

3-B-l 6
(30393)

9-F-1.OO lOG18.00
9-D-6.03 10-G10.00

8.03

Flexible

Night

Service

Conditions

DescriptBon

1. UNA and TAFAS
Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS.
The difference is that TAFAS is available in
day mode and UNA is available in night
mode.
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

Flex&e Kqn: Service allows the Operator 1
(AttendaT Console or Extension user) to change
the assignea night answer destination on a CO
line bavs cy dialing the feature number for
“Flexibie Night Service.”

2. IRNA and Rerouting
If incoming CO calls are not answered for any
reason within a specified time period, the
caller will receive Rerouting or IRNA
treatment.
For further information, refer to section 3-F-6.
00 “Rerouting” and Section 3-F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
3. Remote Administration
To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select “RMT” for
‘Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point
assignment.
For further information about remote
administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote
Location.”
4. Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1
and 2) can have a unique Night Service
arrangement individually.
The affiliation pf each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
‘Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External
Pager- Tenant.
Extension users cannot answer the UNA calls
ringing at an external pager in the diierent
tenant.
Operation
Refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-l-l .Ol “Universal Night
Answer (UNA)”
(SLT)

Section 5-G-l .Ol “Universal Night
Answer (UNA)”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO
lines which belong to this trunk group are
covered by this assignment.
If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the
assigned night answer destination can not be
changed by the Operator l_
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same.
The difl erence is:
Flexible

Fixed

The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
I or Extension) can change the night
I answer destination.
’ A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
, lines in night mode
..

Programming
SystemProgramming

Refc once
VT
Dumb

“Group-Tank Group (l/2)“.
SE-1.Ol lo-c-14.00
IncomIngMode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”,
SF-l.00 10-C-18.00
Night Answer Point
“System-NumberingPlan (8/9)” SO608 1o-G10.00
Flexibia Night Service
Conditions
Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination for a CO line can only be changed by
the Operator 1 in the same tenant.
Operation
For the operation of changing the Night Answer
destination. refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-l-l .02 “Flexible Night Service”
(SLT) Section 5-G-l .02 “Flexible Night Service”
(ATT) Section 6-J-l .Ol “Flexible Night Service”
3-B-l 7
(30393)

8.04

Fixed

Night

Service

Description

Programming

Call handling in Flexrble ano Fixed nqnl seryce is
almost the same.

System Programming

The difference is:
Flexible

The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the nqht
answer destination.

Fixed

A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

Conditions
None

Operation
If FIXED is selected, the assigned night answer
destination can not be changed by the Operator

None
1.

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to “FIXED.” All CO lines
belong to this trunk group are covered by this
assignment.

. Night Answer Group
A single group of extensions (called the Night
Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at
night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at
this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

Night Answer Group
To utilize this feature, program as follows.
I

Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
(Night) to “FIXED.”

2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
“NAG.”
This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.
3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions by
using NAG command.

3-B-17-1
(30393)

Reference
VT
Dumb

8.05

Switching

of Day/Night

Mode

Description

Conditions

If Auto Stan Tvme on a certain day is not
assigned. the current mode fs continued until a
new stat7 time Is encountered.

Operator 1 must-dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.

on the same day are set identically, the current

To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “SystemOperation (s/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “SystemOperation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”
The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode can be
. established, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

-If the Start Ttme for Day mode and Night mode
mode is continued.

lf Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
at all, the current mode is continued. In other
words ii the current mode is Day then Day Mode
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
then Night Mode is continued.
Operation
Refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-l-l -03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”
(SLT) Section 5-G-l .03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”
(ATT) Section 6-J-l .02 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”

If tenant service is employed, night service
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
The assignment in “System-Operation (33)” is
applied to Tenant 1 and the assignment in
“System-Tenant” is applied to Tenant 2.

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

9431.03 lo-t-4.00
‘System-Operation (3/3)“.
Night Service
Auto Start Ttme
“System-Tenant”,
9-D-2.00 10-c-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Stan Time
“System-Numbering Plan (8/9)“. SD6.08 la-10.00
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel

3-B-l 8

9.00

Mixed

Station

Capacities
Programming

Description

The KX-T336 System supports a wide range of
telephone sets, not only PITS (Proprietary
Integrated Telephone System) telephones
but
also Standard Rotary telephones
(10 pps/20 pps)
and Standard Push-button
telephones.
. The PITS telephones
!ollows:

can be categorized

system

: KX-T30820
KX-T30830
KX-T30850

KX-T616

system

: KX-T61620
KX-T61630
KX-T6 1650

system:

KX-T7000

series

“Configuration-Slot

Conditions

None

KX-T308

KX-T1232

System Programming

KX-T123220
KX-Tl23230
KX-T123230D
KX-T123235
KX-Tl23250
: KX-T7020
KX-T7030
KX--I7050
KX-l7130

Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card or Proprietary
ITS tine Circuits (PLC) card are required for
PITS telephones.
Hybrid tine Circuits (HLC) card
or Single Line Circuits (SLC) card are required
for single line telephones.
ThB “Configuration-Slot
Assignment” screen
defines which card is installed in which slot.

3-B-l 9

Assignment”

Reference

Dumb

9-C-2.00

10-C-2.00

10.00

Variable

Time-Out

Description

Programming

The timer values listed below can be set and
changed in system programming.
Common system timer values are set by the
“System-System
Timer” screen and ‘Special
Attendant-DISA”
screen. The timer values used
with each trunk group are set by the “GroupTrunk Group” screen and the timer values used
by the CO lines are set by the “Trunk-CO Line”
screen. The timer values used with each
extension are set by the “Extension-Station”
screen.
System

<2>
~3s
c4>
<5>
<6>
c7>
<8>
<9>
~10~

~11s
~12s
cl 3>
<14>

~15

System Programming

“System-System Timer”
“Special Attended-DIM”,
Delayed Answer
Prolong Time
“Group-Trunk Group”,
CO-CO Duration Limit
Disconnect Time
Pause Time
Hook Switch Flash Time
“Trunk-CO Line”,
DTMF Duration lime
,CPC Detection
‘Extension-Station”,
Day Ring
Night Ring

timer values:
Held Call Reminder
Held Call Reminder (Attendant)
Transfer Recall
Pickup Dial Waiting
External First Digit Trme-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out (PBX)
Toll Restriction Guard Time-Out
Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out
Intercept Routing-No
Answer Time-Out
(System)
Intercept Routing-No
Answer Time-Out
(DISA)
Attendant Overflow Time
SMDR Duration Time
Delayed Answer (DISA)
Prolonged Time (DISA)

Conditions
None

Trunk group timer values:
cl>
CO-CO Duration Limit
“.X2>
Disconnect Time
~3s
Pause Time
<4>
Hook Switch Flash Time
CO Line timer values:
cl>
DTMF Duration Time
<2>
CPC Detection Time (Incoming)
Station timer values:
cl > Delayed Ringing

3-B-20

Reference
v-r
Dumb
9-D-3.00 1O-C-6.00
9-K-l 90 1O-C-40.00
9-E-l .Ol 10-C-t 4.00

9-F-l .OO 10-C-18.00
9-G-l .02 1O-G22.00

11 .OO Lockout

12.00Automatic

Station

Release

Description

If the extension user remains off-hook after the
completion
of a call, he or she will be
disconnected
from the channel after hearing
reorder tone.
.I
Lockout applies to all types of calls:Extension,
Intercom and CO line calls.

If an extension user fails to dial any digits within a
specified time period after getting a line for
making a call, he or she will be disconnected
from the channel after hearing reorder tone.
To get a line for making a call again, the
extension user must once go on-hook and then
off-hook.

Programming
When making an outgoing CO call with either
PITS and SLT, the timers set by “System-System
timers”, External First Digit Tme-Out,
External
Interdigit Time-Out and External Interdigit TimeOut (PBX) are used.

None
Conditions
If the extension user remains off-hook after the
completion
of a CO call on which “CPC
Detection” has been set to “None,“-reorder
tone
is not sent even if the other party, on the CO line,
goes on-hook.
Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control
(CPC) Signal Detection” for further information.

Programming
Reference

System Programming
“System-System
Timer n,
External First Digit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out

Dumb

9-D-3.00

10-c6.00

F’W
Conditions
This function does not work when originating
intercom call or extension call with a PITS.

This function works in the following cases when
originating a CO line call with a PITS.
cl> When nothing has been dialed before
External First Digit Time-Out expires.
timer is started after ‘CO dial tone has
heard.
c2> When the External Interdigit Time-Out
expired during dialing.
This function works in the following
originating a call with an SLT.
4 > When the first
seconds after
c2> When the time
dialed exceeds
originating an

3-B-21

the
This
been
has

cases when

digit was not dialed within
dial tone was heard.
between the digits being
five seconds (only when
extension call).

13.00
The following condi: ens apply when originating
CO call with an SLT.

Distinctive

Dial Tone

Description

Multiple dial tone patterns are presented to the
extension user to give some information
about
selected lines, features set to the lines, etc.

cl> When the first digit was not dialed within 10
seconds after dial tone was heard.
c2> When the five second interdigit timer expires
when dialing on a CO line.
<3> When the first digit was not dialed before the
External First Digit Timer Time-Out expires
after the CO diai tone was heard
c4> When the External Interdigit Time-Out
expires during dialing.

There are five dial tone types, as follows:
Dial tone 1 : Normal dial tone, sounds
calling on DN buttons.

when

Dial tone 2 : Sounds to request an account code
entry or DISA user code entry, or
sounds when an extension goes
off-hook after Timed Reminder.
Dial tone 3 : Sounds if the extension
set any of the following
l
l
l
l
l
l

user has
features:

Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarding
Absent Message
Timed Reminder
Walking Station
Walking COS

Dial tone 4 : Sounds if the extension
set UCD Log Out. .I

user has

Dial tone 5 : Sounds when intercom
for PITS’s).

calling (only

Programming
None
Conditions
The patterns for dial tone are listed in Section
B-l 6.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.”

3-B-22

14.00

Distinctive

Busy Tone

Description

Conditions

There are three busy tone patterns
Busy tone 1 : Normal

as follows:

If Automatic Callback to Trunk is programmed.
the function is automatically
set when making an
outgoing CO call and going on-hook when
hearing busy tone.
See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
Callback-Trunk”
for details.
When the Automatic Callback to Trunk function is
enabled in system programming,
special busy
tone is sent. When Automatic Callback to Trunk
is not enabled in system programming,
busy tone
1 or busy tone 2 is sent. See Section 3-B-16.00
“Tone and Ringing Patterns” for the busy tone
patterns.

busy tone.

Busy tone 2 : A unique busy tone which allows
users with busy tone detection
SLT’s to use Busy Override, etc,
when encountering
a busy line.
Busy tone 3 : A special busy tone sent when a
trunk is busy to inform the
extension user that Automatic
Callback to Trunk will be set by
going on-hook automatically.
Busy tones 1 and 2 are not used at the same
time. Only one tone is selected by “SystemOperation”, Busy Tone.
If busy tone 2 is selected,
setting.

PITS’s follow the

Programming
System Programming

“System-Operation
Busv Tone

(l/3)“,

Reference
VT
I Dumb

/ 9-D-1.01 / 10-C-4.00 1

3-B-23

15.00

Confirmation

Tone

Description

After several operations the system confirms
success of the operation by sending a
confirmation
tone to the extension user.

Confirmation
tone from external pagers can be
selected to be sent or not in “Trunk-Pager
&
Music Source”, External Pager-Tone.

the

Refer to Section 3-B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing
Patterns” for the confirmation
tone patterns.

Multiple patterns of confirmation
tone is sent
when the following operations have been
successfully
conducted:
Confirmation

Programming
System Programming

tone 1 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new
setting differs from the previous setting.
Confirmation

“System-Operation (l/3)‘,
Beep Tone for Bsy-cvr/Brg-in

9-D-l .Ol

1o-c-4.00

Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone

9-F-2.00

1O-C-l 9.00

Conditions
Dial tone is sent after confirmation
tone has been
sent. However, if the Automatic Callback to
Station function has been set, reorder tone is
sent after confirmation
tone.
When a function is set using a PITS with the
display, details of the setting appear on the

Off.

display while confirmation
tone is sent.
If any operation is performed,
the message

tone 3 :

the display will be terminated

The tone is sent when calling by OHCA,
answering by Call Pickup or by Call Hold
Retrieve-Station,
or when making and
answering the paging announcement,
or
when calling a doorphone
or starting
conference,
and so on.
Confirmation

Dumb

tone 2 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new
setting is identical to the previous setting. In
addition, the tone is sent when holding a
calling party (including Consultation
Hold and
Call Park) or setting Call Park and when
setting or releasing Message Waiting, and
setting BGM through External Pager on and

Confirmation

Reference
VT

tone 4 :

The tone is sent when converting
into a two party call.

conference

A setting can be made by programming
“SystemOperation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in
to
determine whether confirmation
tone is to be sent
or not when two party conversation
is
successfully converted into a three party
conversation
(Busy Override, Conference,
etc.).

3-B-24

at that time.

16.00

Tone and Ringing

Description
-is ,*a>
^ ^,
_. . - cffe:s
sf>\=..,
ringirc

Patterns

~arioc;s tone patterns

and

2-r listed below:

xtle:“5

Tone Patterns

Busy tone 1
Busy tone 2
Busy tone 3
Reorder

tone

Ringback

tone

Do Not Disturb
tone

(DND)

711

Confirmation

tone 1

Confirmation

tone 2

Confirmation

tone 3

Confirmation

tone 4

Warning

tone

CO-CO
warning

timeout
tone

Held Call Reminder

I
II

!-I

I
1

It
I
I

21:

3-B-25

1
I
iI
I
11

I
I

Iill
I

I l-l

I
I

I
I
I
:

/I
/
1
I

l-l

1I
I

Ringing
+-1
LO rlnglng/CO
Cail Reminder

Extension
Extension
R!&inder

Payers

secj

Held

ringing,’
Held Call

intercom

ringing

Callback

ringing

Timed Reminder/
Doorphone
ringing

See
See
See
See

Section
Section
Section
Section

3-B-l 3.00
3-B-l 4.00
3-B-l 5.00
3-D-4.00

“Distinctive Dial Tone” for details of dial tone.
“Distinctive Busy Tone” for details of busy tone.
“Confirmation
Tone” for details of confirmation
tone.
“Discriminating
Ringing.”

Programming
None

Conditions
None

3-B-26

C. Outgoing

Call

Features

1 .OO Toll Restriction
Description

The levels of extensions
are assigned in “SystemClass of Service”, Toll Restriction Level (Day) and
Toll Restriction Level (Night) as be’low:

Toll Restriction is a system program;razle
fearure
that, in conjunction with the assign&
Ciass of
Service, can prohibit selected extension users
from placing unauthorized
toll call.
Toll Restriction types depend on the following
four ways of selecting a trunk:

-I

System&
----s-----m

of Service

;OFL~R+CR+lR
__
Class of Service (COS) No.=01(112)

rTollA---------Restriction Level (Day) ..........................1 011

. Local Trunk Dial Access (Refer to Section 3-Cl .Ol)
Automatic
Route Selection (ARS)
(Refer to Section 3-C-l .02)
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (Refer to Section 3-C-l -03)
Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(Refer to Section 3-C-l .04)

1Toll Restriction Level (Night) ........................1 02 1

Level of Extension

Three Toll Restriction types below
the above listed four methods:

are common

‘7011 Restriction Level of Extension” is referred to
as YRLE” in the following.
Each Toll Restriction type can set its own level
and executes restriction by comparing its own
level with TRLE.
For example, the toll restriction level for Local
Trunk Dial Access can be programmed
in
“System-Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction
Level.

Operator/International
Call Restriction
(Refer to 3-C-l .05)
. . 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
(Refer to Section 3-Cl .06)
7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C_
l .07)
l

System-Local Access Group
--s----m---

3/6 Digit Toll Restriction and 7/l 0 Digit Toll
Restriction are used in pairs.

--1

-----r------mm-----Tofl RestrictionLevel

Flow charts and Programming
are used to
explain Toll Restriction types.
Flow chart illustrates the flow of procedures.
Programming
shows !be programming
reference and the method to execute each .: ..
program for the procedures
illustrated in the flow
chart. Each Programming
has a number, which
matches the numbers attached to the procedures
in the flow chart: cl>, c2> . . .
Toll Restriction

Toll restriction level is one of the elements used
to judge Toll Restriction.
The level consists of 16
stages from 01 to 16. 01 is the highest level and
16 is the lowest:
%

LINPR

l-,----1
I

T
Level of Local Access Group

TRLE ,... 03
Toll restriction level . . . . 08
The levels above are described as :
TRLE > Toll restriction level

> low

The higher the level of an extension is, the less
the extension is restricted. Conversely,
the lower
the level the greater the restriction.
c

In the flow charts, marks such as “>” are used to
compare TRLE and the level of each Toll
Restriction type.
When TRLE is equal to or higher than the toll
restriction level, it is described as follows:
TRLE 2 Toll restriction level
When TRLE is lower than the toll restriction level,
it is described as follows:
TRLE c Toll restriction level

Level

01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
high i

fC+Gf

3-c-1

1.01

Toll Restriction
for Local
Trunk Dial Access

Flow Chart
The llovr chat-l bebw shows the procedures
for
restricting outgoing calls when a user makes an
outgoing CO call by dialing the feature number for

“ARSbcal
CO line Access” in the system
without ARS service.

f
“AfWLocal Access” in
the Class of Service is
programmed to ‘No RSTR.”
I

cl > When

g> When ‘AR.S/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is
programmed to “W/RSTR.”
I
&Is

the selected trunk group
programmed to “Yes’ in
“Class of Service - TrunkGroup Access”?

cl> When ‘ARSRocal Access” in
the Class of Service is
programmed to “No Acts.”
I
No

Yes
<3> Is the trunk group type innSystem-Local
Access Group’: Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

No
A

c4>

Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in
“Group-Trunk Group’.PBX Access Code with Restriction ?
I
Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction
Access (TRLL).

Level of Local

No
.I

TRLEl TRLL

1TRLE
Programming

of Service”,
Access

Pol

l’G7.w

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction),
calling is
possible with restriction by “System-Class
of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.
If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is
possible with no restriction by ‘System-Class
of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

Programming

“Class of Service
Toll Restriction

Reference
VT
Dumb
9-0-4.02

<5>

System Programming

t2>

‘System-Class of Service”,
* Trunk Grout Access

Dumb

If this system works into the host PBX, PBX
access code is required to dial through the
connected PBX.
To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access
Code in “Group-Trunk
Group”, PBX Access Code
(Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without executing Toll
Restriction, register PBX Access Code in ‘GroupTrunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)

!f set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is
impossible (reorder tone is returned).

System Programming

Referexe
1

Extension users may be restricted from Local
Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class
of Service”,
ARS Local Access, as follows:

Programming

<4>

Reference
Vl
1
Dumb

(1 R)

and (Night)
“System-Local Access Group”,
Toll Restriction Level

104-8.00

43~

TRLL is assigned

System Programming

System-Local AccessGroup

--------------

10-C-7.00

40-5.00

1c-G9.00

in the item below:
I OFLl PRd LIN l DIR
I,LI-L-

-------m-w

rTofl-----Restrictii

9-D-4.01

Level (Day)

Level

&y----1

I
Toll R&triction Level of
Local Access (TRLL)

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to
“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01”
in Local Access Group is programmed
to “PBX,”
the types of the other trunk groups preset to other
“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as
“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and
“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk
group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are
used to judge.

When TRLL is programmed
higher than TRLE,
the procedure advances to the next step.
When TRLL is programmed
equal to or lower
than TRLE, the call is not restricted and
performed.

3-c-3

Programming
T
System
“System-Local
Toll Restriction

t6>
I
:

Progra;;lmlng
Access
Grow‘
Table

, . ,-

t*e??rm?
4!

w-5

5-s
l&c-330

The number that is registered in the “SystemLocal Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the
number of the Area/Office Code Table
System-Local Access Group

IOFLl
-L-L-!-L

----------

rToll-----Restrictiin Level
------

t- Toll Restriition Table

, r------T

PRd

LIN’

---L8 ---L

----

1-l

T.
Toll Restriiion-Area/Off&3 Code
---e--mAre&Mike Code Table No. =l

r-f----------l
t--f----------l

PCj
Entry

S&SEl

dO0

1 ~-f-T--rl--rl-r~

3-c-4

r30,L ‘i fiqs d
3 v-3
1.02

Toll Restriction
Route Selection

in Automatic
(AM) System

Flow Chart

feature

number for ‘AM/Local
the system with ARS service.

The flow chart below shows the toll restriction
procedures
for outgoing calls when an extension
user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

I
When =ARS/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is
programmed to ‘No RSTR.’

CO Line Access’

cl > When DARSILocal Access’ in
theClassofSewices
programmed to “No Acts.’

cl > When ‘ARSRocal Access’ in
the Class of Service is
programmed to 7N/RSTR.’

c2> ls the selected trunk group
programmed to ‘Yes’ in
“Class of Service-TrunkGroup Access”?

)

Determines whether the call is an operator call
(leading digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local
call, or long distance call.
-1
Local, or long distance call
1

c3> Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access
(TRU) with TFiLE in Class of Setvice.
I
1 TRLE Executes 316 Digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-l .06)
I
1 Not restricted

Restricted

Executes 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Restricted

-4

Not restricted
No

<5> Does the dialed number suit the dial type (A,B or
C) preset in “System-Operation”, Home Dialing
Plan ?
Yes

Prohibited by ARS

Executes ARS.
(Refer to 3-C-2.00)

Note

(~rf$ibits

(Sends reorde?

Calls

3-c-5
(40993)

Equal Access and custom calling are prohibited.

Programming

cl >
Reference
1 Dumb
9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

System Programming

“System-Class
AFWLocal

of Service”,
Access

The number

Extension users may be restricted from Local
Trunk Dial Access by the assignment
of “SystemClass of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:

Access

number

If set to ‘7NIRSTR” (With Restriction),
calling is
possible with restriction by “System-Class
of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

Toll RestrictionTable
-----,.I

Programming

VI-

r/-T-Tl-rr-T-T-1
I I I IIII

Reference
i Dumb

Programming

~52

t3~
VT

in the item below:

System-Local Access Group

I-------------Toll Restridion Level

Reference
1 Dumb

9-D-5.00

“System-Local Access Group”,
Toll Restriction Level

i
I

IOR ~PRG+R&
--

Toll Restriion-Area/Office
-------

9-D-4.02 lo-c-8.00

System Programming

TRLL is assigned

Are&office Code Table No. -1 Entry200

of Service”,

Trunk Group Access

!OFL !PRG! LIN ; DIR

-----

~2s

System Programming

SystemClass

in System-Local
Table is the
of the Area/Off ice Code Table.

r------i-

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction),
calling is
possible regardless of the assignment
of “System-class
of Service”, Trunk Group Access
assignment.

Programming

that is registered

Group”, Toll Restriction

I System-Local AccessGroup
rI Toll----RestrictionLevel x-----~
I

If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is
impossible (reorder tone is returned).

~4,

10-C-9.00

-2

Dialing Plan
There are three types of dialing plans for local calls
and long distance calls- depending
on areas, as

f0ii0ws:

!OFL f PRG! LM ! DIR

Toil Restriction
Local

Access

Long distance
Local call

call

: l-NPA-NXX-XXXX
NXX-XXXX

Long distance
Local call

call

I 08

‘T

Type A

I
Level

NPA-NXX-XXXX
NNX-XXXX

(TRLL)

We C
When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restriction advances to the next step.
When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE,
Toll Restriction advances to ARS without executing 3/6 and 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restrictions.

Long distance call
Local call (charged)
Local call

: 1 -NPA-NM-XXXX
: lNNX-XXXX
NXX-XXXX

N=2 to 9, P=O or 1, A=0 to 9, X=0 to 9
NPA : Area code
NXX, NNX : Office code
XXXX : Subscriber number
3-C-6
(40993)

1.03

Flow

Toll Restriction
for Individual
Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access
Chart

Shows
the procedures
for restricting outgoing
calls when an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by employing Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct
Trunk Access.

Start
cl> Is the selected
Class

Q
trunk group

c2> Does the selected trunk
tenant that the extension

set available

for access

group belong to the same
belongs to?

<3> Is the type of the selected

trunk group

PBX?

Yes

c4> Does the PBX access code coincide with the code
that is registered
in “Group-Trunk
Group”, PBX
Access Code (Restriction).

45~ Compares
Toll Restriction
Level of Trunk
(TRLT) with TRLE in Class of Service.
TRLEcTRLT
Local

or long distance
I

call

> Execute 316 Digit Toll
Restriction.
1 Not restricted

of Service?

Group

! LL
I
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

TRL~TRLT
”

Access

(10XxX)

with Equal Access Carrier
Code in Equal Access?

I
I

Execute 7/10 Digit Toll
Restriction.

<8> Is the selected trunk group
available
for Equal Access?

c
Notes
tl
Custom calling is performed.
*2 In case TRLEcTRLS.
determines
again if the call is
an operator
call, Equal Access, custom calling,
local
call, or long distance call. In this case, checks the
subsequent
dialed numbers
after “1OXXX.”

<9> Compares
Toll Restriction
Level of Special Carrier
Access (TRLS) with TRLE
Class of Service.

TRLEzTRLS

3-c-7

Determines
whether the call is an operator call (leading
, digit is 0). Equal Access, custom calling,
local call, or

ReskicM
t-l
I

”
in

Programming

cl>

System

Programming

of Service (l(2)“.
Restriction
Level
and (Night)
“Group-Trunk
Group”,
Toil Restriction
Level

904.0;

9-E-l .Ol

1 O-C-l 4.00

(Day)

Toll Restriction Level

10-C-14.00
IO-Gt6.00
10-C-22.00

Toll Restriction
Level
Trunk Group (TRLT)

The tenant of the selected trunk group is
assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant.
An extension should belong to one of eight ICM
groups.
The tenant that the extension belongs to is the
tenant that the ICM group belongs to.
The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is
programmed
in “Group-ICM/Paging
Group.”
The iCM group that the extension belongs to is
programmed
in “Extension-Station”,
ICM Group.

When TRLT is programmed
higher than TRLE,
Toll Restriction advances to the next step.
When TRLT is programmed
equal to or lower
than TRLE, calling is performed without
restriction.
Programming

<6>

c3>
Reference
VT
Dumb
9-E-1.02
10-C-l 4.00

System Programming

Programming

DL-C

I o-c-;

TRLT is assigned in the item below (Assuming
Trunk Group No.=01 ):

Reference
I Dumb

9-E-i .Oi
9-E-2.00
9-G-l .Ol

“Group-Trunk
Group”, Tenant
“Group-ICM/Paging
Group”
“Extension-Station”,
ICM Group

‘Group-Trunk

~2s

System Programming

Programming

Reference

Progr2mming

“Class
Toll

When the selected trunk group is assigned to
“No” in “System-Class
of Service”, Trunk Group
Access, calling is impossible.
When you want to make a trunk group
unavailable
for outgoing calls, assign the trunk
group to “No” in “System-Class
of Service”, Trunk
Group Access.

c5>

Group”.

Type

The number that is registered in “Group-Trunk
..
Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the number of
the Area/Office Code Table.

~4,
Reference
VT
I Dumb
9-E-l .02 11O-C-l 5.00

System Programming
“Group-Trunk
Group”.
PB% Access Code (No
Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction)

Trunk Group
____------I r

No.=31 (1!2)

To execute Toll Restriction, the PBX Access
Code must be registered in “Group-Trunk
Group”,
PBX Access Code (Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without Toll Restriction,
the PBX Access Code must be assigned in
“Group-Trunk
Group”, PBX Access Code (No
Restriction).

/r7-r-n-r-i-T-n
3-C-8

Programming
System

“Special
Access”,
Code

Programming

<7>
Referexe

Frogramming

Carrier
Equal

Access-Equal
Access Carrier

System Programming

Gumb

9-H-l .OO ! S-C-30.00

“Special
Access”,

TRLS

There are four types of Equal Access Tables to
check if the dialed XXX corresponds
with assigned
numbers in four types of tables.

I
,
‘r\

Equal Access No.=4

L -----------Equal Access

Access

Toll Restriction Level 1 IO

No.=1

/ Trunk Group 04 ! Yes

Toll Restriction
Level of Special
carrier Access (TRLS)

-1

-----.-.
I

When TRLS is programmed
higher than TRLE,
checks again if the call is an operator call, Equal
Access, custom calling, local call, or long
distance call.
When TRLS is programmed
equal to or lower
than TRLE, calling is performed without
restriction.

When the dialed XXX does not correspond
with
any of the tables, calling is performed
without
. restriction.
When the dialed XXX corresponds
with any table,
the procedures
in steps 8 and 9 in the flow chart
(3-C-l .03) depend on the table that the dialed
XXX corresponds
with.

<8>

System Programming

Carrier Access-Equal
Access”, Trunk Group 01-l 6

“Special

in the item below:

Access

Equal Access Carrier Code I222

is programmed

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
/ 9-H-l .OO / ! O-C-30.001

Equal Access No.=3

Special Carrier Access-Equal

Programming

Carrier Access-Equal
Toll Restriction
Level

Special Carrier Access-Equal

Equal Access No.=2

lr----

<9>

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
/ 9-H-l .OO / ! ?-C-30.001

3-c-9

1.04 Toll Restriction
for Individual
Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
Flow Chart
Shows the
calls when
CO call by
Group Diat

procedures
for restricting outgoing
an extension user makes an outgoing
employing Individual Virtual Trunk
Access.
cl>

Q
Start

Is the selected virtual trunk group
access in Class of Service?

set available

for

-1
I

Yes
Y
Determines
if the call is an operator
is 0), Equal Access, custom calling,
distance call.

call (leading digit
local call, or long
-2

Local, or long distance call
v
I
‘
&Compares
Toll Restriction
Level of Special Carrier
Access fTRLS1 in Eaual Access or OCC Access
I
with TRiE.
’
’

TRLEcTRLS

c3> Executes
3/6 Digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-l .06)

Not restricted

Executes
7/10 digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-l .07)

-11

Not restricted
c4=- Does the dialed number suit the dial type (A,B or
C) preset in “System-Operation”,
Home Dialing
Plan?

No
t-

I
I Yes

7
Modifies the dialed number, depending
on “Special
Carrier Access-Equal
Access”, Digit Modification
or
-0CC Access”, Digit Modification.

#I3

Calls
Notes
-1. When available,
aazesses
an idle trunk group that is assigned
Access” or “-CCC Access.”
02.Operator
calls, Equal Access, custom calling are prohibited.
3-c-1

to “Yes” in “Special

,
(

Carrier

SFFeorder)

Access-Equal

Programming
System

cl>

Programming

System-Class
of Service”,
Special Carrier Access

Programming

9-D-4.02

‘J-C-8.00

S,. slem

Prog:amming

“Specia.
Access-.

Carrier Access-Equal
Toll Restriction
Table

Access’.

Toll Restriction

Table

<2>

System Programming

“Special Carrier
Access”,
“Special
Access”,

Refe-2nce
1 Dumb

<3>

Access-Eqtial
Toll Restriction
Level
Carrier Access-OCC
Toll Restriction
Level

The number that is registered in “Special Carrier
Access-Equal
Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
the number of the Area/Office
Code Table.

Refe:37ce
VT
1 Dumb
9-H-l .OO 1 O-C-8.00
9-H-2.00

70-C-8.00
Czzer Access-Equal Access
f OFLkRG;
SD--------Equal Access No.=1
r-7-r

T----

Access

--------m

------

Area/Office

Toll Restriction Level of Speczi Carrier
Access (TRLS)

TRLS
below

of OCC Access is assigned in the item
(when virtual trunk group 5 is designated):

Special Carrier Access-OCC Access
OCC Access No.=1

Toll Restriction Level of Special
Carrier Access (TRLS)

When TRLS is programmed
higher than TRLE,
the procedure
advances to the next step.
When TRLS is programmed
equal to or lower
than TRLE, the procedure
advances to check the
dial type in “Home Dialing Plan” without executing
3/6 and 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restrictions.

3-c-1 1

Code

Table

No. =8

Entry=200

l---F-7-1
I

-l
I

---

TRLS of Equal Access is assigned in the item
below (when virtual trunk group 1 is designated):
pecial Carrier Access-Equal

SCRPL

The number that is registered
in “Special Carrier
Access-CCC
Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
the number of the Area/Office
Code Table.

Programming

(when

virtual trunk group

5 is designated):

<4>

There are three types of dialing plans for local
and long distance calls. Each area has one of
the three plans as mentioned
before.

\
roll Restriction-Area/Office
---------

Code Tabl

Code Table No.=8
-----e--m-r
I
Area/Office

Entry=200

1
I

3-C-12

1.05 Operator/International
- Restriction

Call

Flow chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction
procedure for Operator (telephone
company)
International
calls.

and

cl> Compares
Operator
Call Restriction
with TRLE in Class of Service.

Level

(ORLV)

TRLEcORLV
.I,
Prohibits
operator calls
international
calls.
(Sends reorder tone)

TRLE=>ORLV
Y
Is the call an international
Oil)?

call (leading

digit is 01 or

fqo
I

45 Compares
International
(IRLV) with TRLE in Class

nternational

1 Operator

Call Restriction
of Service.

Level

call is performed.

TRLE

“System-Operation

, Restrb2on

“System-Operation”,
Level-international

ORLV is assigned

in the item below:

IRLV is assigned

System-Operation
_-----_

_--_
Operat’bn( l/3)

Restriction

in the following

item:

1 OFL>RG;
SCR>EL
_-

r------l-----1

Restriction Level-Operator

RekB
VT
SD-1 01
10-C-4 C0

Programming

International Call Restriction
Level (IRLV)

Cperator Call Restrictiin
Level (ORLV)

When IRLV is programmed
equal to or lower than
TRLE, international
calls are performed.

When ORLV is programmed
higher than TRLE,
operator and international
calls are prohibited.
When ORLV is programmed
equal to or lower
than TRLE, operator calls are performed.
International
calls advances to the next
procedure.

3-c-1

1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
Flow

Chart

Local and long distance calls can be restricted by
area codes only, or by off ice codes only, or by both
area codes and off ice codes.
The procedures
are shown below:

Q
tart

l> Determines
if the call is local or tong distance,
depending
on “System-Operation”,
Home
Dialing Plan or “Group-Trunk
Group”, Dialing
1
Plan.
Local

call

Is the item “L” in Area/Office
Table assigned to “Y”?

Long distance call
or call except
types A, B and C.

Code
I

No
J

Are-i
Code
TRLE%L

Compares
“RL” in Area/Office
TRLE in Class of Service.
I

Checks

‘CC” in Area/Office
I

Is off ice code

Code

Table

Tabte with
<2>

Code

Table.

blank
I

Office
Table

(Advances

3-c-1

to 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction)

Code

Programming

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

System Programming
“loll Restriction-Area/Office
Code
Tables”
“Toll Restriction-Office
Code
Tables”

9-l-l .OO

10-C-32.00

9-I-2.00

10-C-33.00

Eight Area/Office Code Tables are prepared to
program various restrictions for calling ways
such as Local Trunk Group Dial Access,
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, etc. Each
table consists of 16 screens:

64 Off ice Code Tables are also prepared.
Each table consists of four screens:

I
.

. =64

=02

Toll ----s-m-Restriction-Office Code Tables
Office Code Table No.=01

plan

(General)

3-C-l 6

- Restricted

/RL6 I
A

Assuming that your telephone
system is located
in-the area, Area Code (AC)=200, Off ice Code
(OC)=320, accordingly,
your CO number is (1) +
200 + 320 + XXXX.
Determine the Restriction Level of each AC and
OC respectively
according to the TRLE of each
extension user (Table 1).

Table 2 Restriction

Level of each AC and OC
I

1C=213

I
I

3L=l

I
O&322

I
I

X=321

I
I

OC=322

I
!l

,
I
;

AC=205
RL=3

_ _ _ OC=321

_ _ ______

X=320
OC=320

AC-201
RL=4
_ 0~~321
_

O&320

----- OC=320
._

O&320

;OC=322
I
I
AC=200
O&321
RL=5

O&320;

-'-

- :

;
1

O&321

AC=204
RG4

:OC=320
I

.--------

o&322

OG322

O&320

j ;Lc_23

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ O&320
O’S320
I

.--------

__ __

:---,

I-----,-----I

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ O&324
RL=5
. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0~~321

OC=321

-- -- --OC=322

pzq

OC=320

OC=322

- -

O&322

; OC=320
’ RL=6

OC=322

X=322

AC=206
I RL=3

AC=202
&RL=4

I
1 _ OC=321

I
’
: O&322
t RL=5

IRL=2

1
I

I
I
;
I

AC=210

OC=320

OC=322
1

OC=321

I
I

I----

Ix=1

I
I

O&320

1
I

AC=209
RL=2 -I
oc=3;

AC=21 4

O&321

--------.

OC=320

OC=322:
’

AC=203
RL=4
I

OC=321

- - - - - _- -

- __ - - ___

_-------

OC=32

AC=208
RL=3

:
I

AC=2161

OC=321

-_-__----

2
,
I
I
I

OC=322

:
I

I
I
OC=320

AC=21
RL=2

OC=322

I
OC=322

of Area Code
of Office Code

3-c-1 7

OC=321
OC=321

I
I

OC=322

O&320

the boundaries
the boundaries

AC=207
RL=3

I
I
I
I

AC=21
RL=2

(2) Programming
the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
Plan Using “OC” field.

Now program the 3/6 digit toll restriction plan
according to the Table 1 and Table 2 using “Area/
Office Code Table.”
In this table, numbers in “Code” field can be used
either as AC or OC.
First select “N” in “L” field, and enter Restriction
Level for each AC or OC in “RL” field according to
the Table 2.
294
3-c-

When you want to restrict an outgoing call for
certain area except a district within that area,
program the toll restriction plan by entering Office
Code Table No. in “OC” field of that Area Code
and set Office Code of the destrict in that Office
Code Table.

In the area where Dialing Plan Type B is adopted,
there are no Office Codes which are identical with
Area Code, so you can assign the Restriction
Level of AC and OC respectively
using different
“Area/Off ice Code Table.” (Refer to 3-C-l .02 for
Dialing Plan.)
When there are some Office Codes which are
identical with Area Codes, refer to
“(3) Programming
the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
Plan by selecting ‘Y” in I” field.” L= LJX~L?
Toll Restriction-Area/Offi& Code Tabk>F
_-----_---

Assuming that your system is located in Area A
AG200,
and Restriction Level of Area 6 is set to
“10.”
So extension users with TRLE of 11-16 are
restricted to place a call to Area B.
Area A
AC=2001 !

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =200

O&322
RL=l6

--------'210

‘No1

I bl
I 1::
I lb’
I I

Ino I

lrnl

i O&320
f RL=16

12* I

OC=320
I

-----OC=322

I- Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Select N (Defautt Setting)
Area Code

Toil Restriction-Area/OfficeCode Tabi~~~~$R
_---------

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =300

Enter Restriction Level of
Office Code
Select N (Defautt Setting)
Office Code

3-C-l 8

I
l- ---s-w
I
I
O&323
I
I
I
L

If you do not want to restrict an extension user
from originating
CO calls for district B-l within
Area B, because calls for district B-l are
considered
local calls.
Then enter “01” in “OC” field of Area Code 201,
and register Office Code 321 in the Office Code
Table No.=1 as follows.

(3) Programming
the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
Plan by selecting “Y” in “L” field.
When your system is located in the area where
Dialing Plan Type A or Type C is adopted, some
Office Codes may be identical with Area Codes,
(Refer to 3-C-l .02 for Dialing Plan.) 3 _ c.. ,$
Assuming that your system is located in the area
(AC=200, O&320)
where Dialing Plan Type A or

roll Restriction-Area/OfficeCode Tables f ONL t PRG! SCRkEL
____-------

Type C is adopted.

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =200

OC=201

is identical

with AC=201

RL=16

/ RL=16
, System
8

roll Restridion-Office Code Tables
m--------s
Office code Table No. =
----

/2 Hundred Office ~4

‘EL

O&321

i
I

_-------------

----

EHHundred Office CodJ

OC=320

OC=322

I
I
I
II

OC=323

I
I
I
I-

Select"21"

Now Restriction Level 10 is not applied
district B-l ((1) + 201 + 321 + XXXX).

to calls for

In this case, do not assign Restriction Level of AC
and OC using different Area/Office
code table
respectively and program the toll restriction plan
as follows.

Toll Restriction-AreaIOffii Code Tables ! ONL t PRd SCR?L
--s----sArea/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry -200

rr:7-r::I-~.-j-1-7-r7
cc&

Lfnoc

cd0

L!z

LRLCC

Code LRLOC

L Enter Restriction
Select “Y
Area Code

Code LFiL.cc

cc&

YRLCC

Level of Area Code 201

Select “Y” in “L” field and enter Restriction

Level

“10” in “RL” field of Area Code 201.

When “Y” is selected in “L” field of code 201,
Restriction Level 10 is applied to AC=201 only,
and not applied to O&201
within Area A
(If you select “N” in “L” field of Area Code 201,
Restriction Level 10 is applied to both AC=201
and OC=201)
3-c-1 9

1.07 7/10

Digit Toll Restriction

Flow Chart
7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction is to restrict calls that
are not restricted by 3/6 Digit Toll Restric!ion,
employing off ice codes and subscriber numbers,
as follows:

0
Start

cl>
/

Does the dialed number suit the dial
type(A:B;rC)pr;n“System-.
Operation
, Home Dlallng Plan or In
“Group-Trunk
Group”, Dialing Plan ?

Yes

I
e2>

Is the dialed number registered in “Toll
Restriction-7/l
0 Digit Toll Restriction” ?
I

(iiiiik+

“System-Operation (l/3)“,
Home Dialing Plan
“Group-Trunk Group”,
Dialing Plan

. No

Calls

Programming

System Programming

Yes
. .

Programming

/NO

<2>
7

Reference
VT 1 Dumb
SD-1 .Ol 10-C-4.00

System Programming
“Toll Restriction-70
Restriction”

SE-1 .Ol 10-C-14.00

0 Digit Toll

Reference
VT
O&
41-3.00 10-c-34 00

Enter the off ice codes and the subscriber
numbers that you want to restrict into “Toll
Restriciton-7/10
Digit Toll Restriction” Table.
Up to 64 entries can be assigned to the table

When a call is made by ARS or individual Virtual
Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by
“System-Operation”,
Home Dialing Plan.

Note

When a call is made bv Local Trunk Dial Access
or Individual Trunk G&p
Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk
Group”, Dialing Plan.

If there are several subscribers
who have the
same off ice code and the same subscriber
number in different areas, all the calls for the
subscribers are restricted by entering the code
and the number into the 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction
Table.

3-C-20

2.00 Automatic

(Aw

Route Selection
If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is
possible regardless of the assignment
of “SystemClass of Service”, Trunk Group Access.

Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system
programmab!e
feature that automatically
selects
the least expensive route available at the time an
outgoing CO calf is made. It is executed by dialing
the feature number for ‘ARS/Local CO Line
Access” from a DN button, then making a long
distance call or local call.
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred
call routing plan in the system programming
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “SystemOperation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.”

Programming

ARS feature is not applied
specifying a trunk group.

Operation
1. Lii the handset or press the SPPHONE

“System-Operation”,
Automatic Route Selection
Home Dialing Plan
“System-Numbering Plan (2’9)‘.
AM/Local CD Line Access
‘Automatic Route Selection”,
Leading Digit Table
Offii code Tables (ARS)
Route Plan Tables
Route Lists Tables
Modified Digit Tables

Dumb

g-D-1.01

1o-c-4.00

w-6.02

lo-c-10.00

g-J-1.00
g-J-2.00
g-J-3.00
9-J-4.00
SJ-5.00

lo-c-35.00
1oG36.00
lo-c-37.00
lo-c-38.00
lo-c-39.00

3. Dial the telephone
external party.
l

is applied

after the toil

Automatic
Route Selection is ineffective for
telephone
numbers which start with “10,” “11.”
“* ” or Y#.” When a caller dials those numbers,
he hears reorder tone.
ARS is restricted by “System-Class
ARSRocai
Access. as follows:

number

of the

The system follows the preprogrammed
sequence and
selects the least expensive route.

” The dialed digits are then sent
after ARS adds or deletes digits
according to programming.

Condtions
Automatic
Route Selection
restri bn procedure.

button.

2. Dial the feature number for
ARSRocai CO Line Access “9”
(default).

Reference

SystemProgramming

to a call made by

of Service”,

If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an
outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone is
returned.)
If “WIRSTR” (With Restriction) is set , calling is
possible with restriction by “System-Class
of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.
j

3-c-21

(40993)

2.00
-

Automatic
(ARS)

Route

Selection

Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset
PHONE button.

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system
programmable
feature that automatically
selects
the least expensive route available at the time an
outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by dialing
the feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line
Access” from a DN button, then making a long
distance call or local call.
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred
call routing plan in the system programming
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “SystemOperation”, Automatic
Route Selection to “Yes.”

or press the SP-

2. Dial the feature number for
“ARSLocal
CO Line Access.”

3. Dial the telephone
external party.

number

of the

Programming
The system follows the preprogrammed
sequence
and
selects the least expensive route.

System Programming
“System-Operation”,
Automatic
Route Selection
Home Dialing Plan
“System-Numbering
Plan (2/g)“,
ARS/Local
CO Line Access
“Automatic
Route Selection”,
Leading
Digit Table
Office Code Tables (ARS)
Route Plan Tables
Route Lists Tables
Modified Digit Tables

9-D-6.02

10-C-10.00

9-J-l .OO 10-C-35.00
9-J-2.00 10-C-36.00

9J-3.00

lo-c-37.00

9-J-4.00

10-C-38.00

9-J-5.00 104-39.00

Conditions
Automatic
restriction

Route Selection
procedure.

is applied

after the toll

Automatic
Route Selection is ineffective for
telephone
numbers which start with “10,” “11,”
“?c ” or “#.” When a caller dials those numbers,
he hears reorder tone.
ARS is restricted by “System-Class
ARS/Local Access, as follows:

of Service”,

If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an
outgoing CO call is impossible
(reorder tone is
returned.)

If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) or “RSTR (No
Restriction)
is set, calling is possible regardless
the assignment
of “System-Class
of Service”,
Trunk Group Access.
ARS feature is not applied
specifying a trunk group.

to a call made by
3-C-21

The dialed digits are then sent
after ARS adds or deletes digits
according to programming.

Explanation

ARS Programming

Explains the procedures
to program ARS plan for
calling the XYi’ Company,
which has the
telephone
number “201-234-5678”
and is long
distance.
Three telephone
service companies
are available
to call the XYZ Company:
telephone
company A,
B and C.
Telephone companies
A and B are the long
distance carriers.

The following is an example to show the procedures
for programming
ARS feature.
Five types of tables are used to program ARS
feature;
The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least
expensive route as follows.
Proqrams

Routinq

Procedures
Telephone company
Local access
Authorization
Telephone company
Local access
Authorization

Dial

(Toll Restriction)

I
Leading Digit Table - - - - [Analyze
Office Code Tables

Route

Plan Tables-

Lists Tables-

- - - - Analyze

theldialed

Telephone
01.
Telephone
02.
Telephone
03.

digit]

the time of day

1
- - - - Check the restriction
level of trunk groups
and search an idle
trunk group
I

Digit Tables-

A is connected

to trunk group

company

B is connected

to trunk group

company

C is connected

to trunk group

for

high

- - Modify the dialed digits

Sends the dialed

company

Telephone companies
A, B, and C charges
Monday are as follows:

Modified

A has:
code: 765-4321
number: 012345
B has:
code: 987-6543
number: 567890

number

Charge

12
a.m.

9
+

12
3
p.m.
Time

(Table 1)

3-C-22

The companies
are shown
least to most expensive :
Hour

below

in order from

Least Costly Company

Next Less Costly Company

Most Costly Company

7:00 a.m. to 1:OO p.m.

1:OO p.m. to 6:00 p.m.

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.

(Table

Based

upon Table 2, the order

numbers connected
are shown below:

of trunk group
to the telephone companies

Priority 1

Priority 2

(Least Costly Trunk Group)

(Next Less Costly Trunk Group)

Priirity 3
(Most Costly Trunk Group)

Route List 01
(7:00 a.m. to 1:OO p.m.)

Route List 02
(1:OO p.m. to 6:00 p.m.)

Route List 03
(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.)

(Table 3)

3-C-23

When an extension user calls the XYZ Company
by selecting
trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
local access code and the authorization
number of
the telephone
company A or B before dialing the
telephone
number of XYZ Company,
as follows:
When trunk group 01 is selected
telephone
company A;
765-4321

012345

Modified

Enter the digits which you want to add
automatically
to the user dialed number into the
“Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter the number of digits which you want to
delete from the beginning
of the user dialed
number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.

to use the

201-234-5678

Deleting “012” from the beginning
of the user
dialed number and adding number ‘987”,

Dioit Table

To add the above focal access code and the
authorization
numbers of the telephone
companies
to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-24

When an extension user calls the XYi’ Company
by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
focal access code and the authorization
nut-r&r of
the telephone company A or B before dialing the
telephone
number of XYZ Company,
as follows:
When trunk group 01 is selected
telephone
company A;
54321

to use the

12345

201-234-5678

number of
company A

L Pause

-P

corqoany

to use the

2f X-234-5678

I
‘987
I
I
is died,

L Three digits are deleted and ‘987” is added
here.
‘987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.

’

company

Digits to be Inserted

When ‘9-012-3456789”
p12 345 6789

I~ Pause
Code of the telephone
LvL--

IENT.1 DELI
l---I--t------R
PI
IO41

567890
I
Authorization
number of the
telephone

Telephone
company
number of
XYz oany

Local Access

Enter 3” in “DEL’ field.
Enter ‘987” in ‘Digits to be Inserted” field.
-----------

Code of the telephone

When trunk group 02 is selected
telephone
company B;
7-6543

Deleting “012” from the beginning of the user
dialed number and adding
number ‘987”,

x=cosrQaw

* Local Access

Dioit Table

Erzer the ~C!AS which you want to add
automaticalty
to tne user dialed number into the
-Digits tc be Inserted” field.
Enter the r-rum
of digits which you want to
delete from the beginning of the user dialed
number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Axess” into DEL” field.
iExan-qle

, Authorization
the telephone

Modified

Toaddtheabovelocalaccesscodeandthe
authorization
numbers of the telephone
companies to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is ma& up in the following manner.

3-C-24

dxample

2>
When trunk group

To register the bcal access c&e and the
authorization
number of the telephone corrpany A
which you want to add automatically
when trunk
group 01 or 02 is accessed, enter those numbers
into “Digits to be Inserted” field.
When trunk group

P P

012345

201-234-5678

567890

I
Enter these numbers into “Digits to
be Inserted” field of “ENT’ 02.

01 is accessed:

P P

7654321

987-6543

02 is accessed:

201-234-5678

Enter these numbers into “Digits to
be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

I 4utornatic

Route Selection-Modified
_---------------s------s-----------

1 OFLj PRq

Digit Table

1121

SCRl

(Table 4)

.I
i

The numbers stored in “Digits to be lnserteg is
sent to the CO line first before the user dialed
number is sent.
To insert the user dialed number into the stored
number, enter “H” at the proper place. Then the
user dialed number is insarted where ‘Ii” is
entered and sent to the CO line.
The registered numbers in the above table are
sent to the CO line as follows:
When

i’

‘7654321 PPO1234” is stored:
_

7654321
m

012345
A

2012345678
r

-xz
Automatically

When

“9876543PPH56789”

is registered

9876543

User dialed

added

:
2012345678

Automatically

added

number

567890

is sent to the CO line.

Automatically
T

is sent to the CO line.

User dialed
3-C-25

number

added

number

DIR

Route Lists Table
Entering

‘TG’

Enter the trunk group nur&ers
according to the Table 3.
Enter
1:OO
Enter
6:00
Enter
7:00

the
p.m.)
the
p.m.)
the
a.m.)

numbers
in Route
numbers
in Route
numbers
in Route

Automatic

“02”
List
“02”
List
“01”
List

Route

in “TG- field

“01” “03” (7100 a.m. to
##Ol.
“03” ‘01” (1 XXI p.m. to
##02.
“02” ‘03” (6:OO p.m. to
#O3.
Selection-Route

Lists Table

I OFL 1 PRG 1 SCR I DIR

Route Lists Table (l/6)
---p&m

Gioutel

I List
I--I #ml
I #02
I #03
I *04

t
I
I
I
I
I

I #a5 I

----

1 r-T--p~~j-----i---

Priority 3
--i-

ALV 1
--I
I

i I
I

Trunk

group

M_o_ELIdALVT
I-+-+--t--

I
I

ITl

03 I

TG7 &s
I

Il
Il

l
l

I
l

I
I

number
(Table 5)

Entering

WOD”

Selact the digits that you want to add to or delete
from the telephone number depending on Modified
Digit Tabte (Table 4) and enter the applicable
“ENT” number in “MOD” fiekl.
For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.
For trunk group. 02, enter ENT “02” in.- “MOD”
field.
-

I Automatic

Route

Selectiin-Route

Lists Table
Route Liis

I~FLIPRGISCRI
Table

(l/6)

----

iii?
-t,,-l,l-

TG IMOD
I 03
I 02

1 #04

I
t-

1
1 02

“ENT’ number

in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)
(Table 6)
Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.
3-C-26

DIR 1

Entering

“ALV

It is possible to set ARS restriction levels from
“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS
restriction level into “ALV” fiekl.
k

---TG 1 MOD w

k:Drd
xJ
ärTE -+-+-i--i--i--~t--i-I--i-t-t-l--f

Entering

-.-

1 T&ODi~A~V~

yGT&

_-.-

-A.-

ALV I T$

MOD~~A~V~

‘W

It is programmable
to send the warning tone to
the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2
to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in ‘WT” field of
Priority 2.

----

1 TG TM~D,~
EJ
~-+-+-i--i--i--~t--i-1--i-+-t-l-i

TG I MODri+-r

I
TG~~J

(Table

Route Plan Table
Enter the starting Hour designated
2 in the “Start Hour” field.

in Table

Enter the Route List Number” in Route
Lists Tabfe (Table 6) depending on the
trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List
Number” field.

Route

--r1 Start

Plan Table No. =Ol

-------------1
Route List
Hour I

Number

(01-64)

I--T’T-T-7-1

r-i-t---l--

1Hour lAM/PMI MON. I TUE. IWED. I THU. I FRI. I SAT. I SUN. I

l-T--f--l--

r-t-t-t-t-1

l7lAw01l

I PM I ,-,--r-r-T-T-7--l
O2 I
I

r-r--r-l-7-1-l--,--,--I

Enter
7:00
Enter
1:00
Enter
6:00

Route
a.m. to
Route
p.m. to
Route
p.m. to

List
1:00
List
6:00
List
7:00

Number
p.m..
Number
p.m..
Number
a.m..

“01” for “Hour” :

I l

“02” for “Hour” :
“03” for “Hour” :

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route
Lists Table (Table 6) into each field
divided by hour and the day of the week.

Enter the starting

3-C-27

Hour according
(Table 9)

to Table 2.

Leadina

Didit Table/Office

1. Leading

Code Table

Digit Table
Assuming that your system is located in the area
A&200,
OG320,
that is, your CO number is
(1) + 200 + 320 + XXXX, and Route Plan Table
number for each Area Code and Offii Code are
determined
as follows.

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route
Plan Tabfe Number (RPN) for Area Code or
office code respectively.
Route Plan Table number assigned to the &ea
Code is applied to the long distance call and
Route Plan table number assigned to the Offii
Code is applied to the local call.

--.I
AC-205
RPN=13
CC=321

I
I
;

I
I

CC=322

AC=201
RPN=lO

;

OC=320

1
: OG322

OC=32Oj

-------

AC-202
RPN=lO
O&321

OC-321

_--___--

--mm---

OC=320

OC-322
OG322

OC-320
--m--v-.

RPN=l3
AC=208
-m-------

’ CC=320

OC=322

the boundaries
the boundaries

of Area Code
of Office Code

3-C-28

I
'
I

RPN=14
AC-207

Assign

Route

For Long

Plan Table

Distance

number

for each Area C&e

or Office Cc&? as follows,

Call

Automatic Route Selection
--------------------------____

- Leading

Digu Tab&

Leading
--f-,---r-r--7--r--r-~--~
Entry
AC,OC
Entry
AC,OC
~-C--I-~---C-C--$--~--t-~--~

Digit Talk

I 200
I 201
1 202
I 203

1210

110,
110,

I
1

I 220 I
I
I

1 204
205
1 206

113
06,
114:

I 207

114,

r-r

Entry

I
I

I
I
I

Enter Route

1 PRG

1 SCR

1 DIR

Entry=200
AC,OC

I
I

1 ONL

Entry

AC,OC

Entry

AC,OC

plan Table nun-her

for Area Code

For Local Call
Automatic Route Selection
-------------------------------

- Leading

Dgit Table

1 ONL

Leading Digit Table
r-r--T-,---r-~--T--r--r-7--~
Entry
AC,OC
Entry
AC,OC
Entry
AC,OC
--~-~---c-c--~--~--+-~--~
l---l-

Entry=300

I 300 I
I 301 I
I-I
Ill

I 310 I

1311 I

I-I
Ill

1 320 1
1 321 1

1 322 1

I 323 I

I 324
325 1

1.1’
I * I
I/I

Entry

, 02

330

, 02 1 , 05 1 -

1 PRG

AC,OC

1 SCR

Entry

I
1
1

1 DIR

AC,OC

I
I . ,~ I

-- I

,09
,03

1-I
I - I
I
I

Enter Route Plan Table number

Office Code

3-c-29

for Office Code

Office

Code

Table

Route Plan Table number for Area Code is
applied to the long distance call, accordingly,
the same Route Plan Table number is applied
to all Office Codes within that area.
Office Code Table is used when you want
assign another Route Plan Table number to
an Cffice Code within that area.
Assuming that your system is located in the
area AC=201, CG320,
and Route Plan Table
number 7 is applied to the calls for Area A,
AC=200.
Area A
I
- 1 d&322

AC=200
RPN=7

1
1 OC=321

OC=320
------------

1 OC=324

1 OC=325
1 RPN=5

OC=323
------m-m--OC=326

__---____

I
I O&327
I
I

I O&326
I RPN=2

the boundaries
the boundaries

Area B

O&320
lSysteml

’ O&323

of Area Code
of Office Code

In above case, usually Route Plan Table number
7 is applied to all Cffiie Codes within Area A,
AC=200.
But if you want to assign Route Plan Table
number 5 to CC=325 and Route Plan Table
number 2 to CC=328 withii Area A, program the
Leading Digit Table as follows.

3-c-30

Automatic ficute Seklron
--------------------m-----

- Leading
Leading

Enter Route

Dkjt Tabk
Dgn Table

l
’ : :
’ , ,
I
, I
I
, ,
’ , I
’ , #
’ > ,
I
”
I -------em-”
c -----

Area Code
----A*

Code Table

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

r- 200

1 SCR

No.=01(1/4)
I--3~“;red--~

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

-----------s-m

J
L-----------4
------------------1

Route Plan Table No. when hit data (0132)
-----------------

To register the Office Code 325, enter the last two digits of 325 into
“3 Hundred Office Code” fieki.
200-325-xxxx
The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number
the area, AC=200, OC=325.
Route Plan Table number
Area A.

(TabIe 9) which is applied to calls for

5 is applied to the Office Code 325 within the

3-c-31

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

:::::::::
,.,,,,25+

Enter the Area Code.

1 DIR
---

Entry=200

Office Code

:
,
,
I
>
1
I
’
’

1 PRG

Plan Table number

office
r------------f
2 Hundred
e--------s----

1 ONL

1 05

I
-I

“t

_-----__r-

_-I I

1
1
I
I
1
1
1
1
I

2 Hundred
-----__----

Office Code Table No.=01 (l/4)
--,
r------------7
Office Code
3 Hundred
I
I _----B---v-

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

: : :
, , I
, , ,
, t I
, , *
# I I
I , >
I , I
”
’
--------A--

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Office Code

:::;;::::
I>,,,,.

J
L-----------;
__------------------

Route Plan Table No. when hii data (01-32)
_---------------

I
I
I
I
I
1 02

To register the Office Code 328, enter the last two digits of 328 into
‘3 Hundred Office code” field.
200-328-xxxx

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number
for the area, AC=200, OG328.
Route Plan Table
Area A.

number

(Table 9) whiih

is applied

to calls

2 is applied to the Office Code 328 within the

3-C-32

I
J

TEnter the Area Code.

-L

I
I

,++--

r-----I

--.

The flow

chart shows

the procedures

for ARSfeature:
The user dials.
1 (After

Following
“System-Cperation”,
termines whether the leading
code or an office &de.

r
I
I
I
I
I

---

Leading

Office

code

1
Digit

Tabfe

c2wcks whether Route Plan
Table number is entered or
not in ‘CC” field.

passing

the toll restriction

Home Dialing Plan, dedigits indicate an area

‘t/’
7

I
I
I
I
I
I

/ I

Leading

r--l

/ f

Dgit

TableOffii

Not entered
(blank)

1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

*a.

Checks whether
Code is entered

dialed Area
or not in “Area
Code” of Office Code Table.

Prohibits,
sends
reorder tone

Not entered

Entered

I
Checks whether dialed Office
Code is entered in Office Code
Table which contains dialed
Area code.

from

; I
I I

.----A

-es

Table

Entered

I /
number

code

Checks whether Route Plan
Table number is entered or not
in “AC” field.

I I
Table

procedure)

Area code

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

through

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

Not entered

Entered

I
I
I

obtains applii

Route

I
I
I

\Leading

Plan

Obtains
appfii - ,_-Route Plan
Table number from Office Code
Table which contains dialed
Area Code and Office Code

Table

number from

----------

r --------

---

-t

Determines

1 I

L --A

-I

-t
---------j

Route

Lii

number

by the present

time of the day.

(Sends

reorder

tone

when

I
I

Continued
_------

---

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

from
Route

1 assigned

Route

Lists Table

L ------

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

No -I Yes

Not obtainable
1

Checks whether an idle line
is obtainable or not from the

As: si! aned
I

L
Ched
Dial details:

811

“Group-Trunk
Type

Group

(l/2)“,

Pause lime
“Group-Trunk
Group (2/2)“,
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)

He
VT

9-E-l .Ol
SE-1 .O:

PBX Access Code (Restriction)
Conditions
When the type of the top priority trunk group is
PBX with the “System-Local
Access Group”,
Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
setting, all local access is considered
to be host
PBX or Centrex line access. The data set in the
top priority trunk group is used as the data
required for the access.

201 3456
-Tephone
number

System Programmtng

Host PBX CO line
accesscode

Feature number for
selecting the CO line

In the same trunk group, the access codes set in
“PBX Access Code (No Restriition)”
and “PBX
Access Code (Restriction)” must be different.

When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)“, the pause b automatically
inserted
after dialing 9.
* When “9” is entered in ‘PBX Access Code
(Restriction)“, the pause is automatically
inserted
after dialing 9, and the outgoing restrictions are
checked for the “201 3456” phone number.
The length of the automatically
inserted pause
depends on the “Group-Trunk
Group”, Pause
Time setting.

3-c-37

D. Receiving

Features

1 .OO Attendant

Console

An incoming call from a CO line can be routed to the Attendant
Console
operator who can then transfer it to the target extension.
This function works by setting “Group-Trunk
Group’. Incoming Mode
(Day) to ATT (Attendant
Consoles).
Up to two Attendant Consoles (with CRT display - Optbnaf) can be
equipped with the KX-T336 system.
The Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Port 1 is for Attendant
Console 1 and Port 2 is for Attendant Console 2.
Outline drawings of the basic process are shown bebw.

Description

Attendant

Operation

Console

1. Single Console

Incoming

Mode

Operation
l

When Tenant

Service is employed:

When Tenant

Service is employed:

Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls
1

2. Dual Console

Operation
l

Tenant
Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls

q :--&

1 or 2
Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls
1

3-D-l
(30393)

‘.-

---

Dual Console Operation
When two attendant consoles are equipped
following three types of incoming Mode can
Options B and C work only for the incoming
line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose
assigned as “ATT.”

with the system, one of the
be selected.
outside call routed via a CO
Incoming Mode (Day) is

A. Load Sharing (Section 3-D-l .Ol)
Incoming calls are distributed evenly to two attendant
they can share the same load. (default)
B. Simultaneous
Ringing (Section 3-D-l .02)
An incoming outside call rings at two attendant
simultaneously.

consoles

so that

consoles

C. Interconsole
IRNA (Section 3-D-l .03)
If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not
answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it
will be automatically
transferred to another attendant console.
This selection can be done by entering the WS3 command
programming
mode.
Refer to “Attendant Incoming Mode” in Section 10-C-53.00
(WS3).
Programming

System

Programming

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)“.

Conditions

at Dumb
World Select 3

Reference

9-E-1.01
-

(1) The attendant console is not availabfe
Night mode (Section 3-B-8.00)
ATT-FWD mode (Sectio$&A-1.00)

Dumb
10-C-14.00

10-c-53.00

to receive

a call in:

.- 3 ,‘i

(2) What if all six LOOP keys on the attendant console are in use?
Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station (Section 6-G-2.00)
l

(3) What if an incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key is not
answered?
. Automatic Redirection
If No Answer (Section 6-G-7.00)
(4) Tenant Service
To use two attendant consoles in dual console operation
consoles should belong to either one of two Tenants.

mode,

both

(5) Operator Assignment
With Dual Console Operation, two attendant consoles must be
programmed
as operator 1 and operator 2 for the above operation
be valid. See Section 3-B-5.00 “Operator” for further information.
3-D-2
(30393)

1.01

Load Sharing

Description

When two attendant consoles are equippec with the KX-T336 system,
incoming calls directed to the attendant console
are distributed
to each
console evenly so that both consoles can share the same load.
KX-T336

System
Al-T.1

1st
3rd
2nd
4th

-------_-------.._----------------_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -----_-_------_..---________________L
---------------..-----------------Incoming call

Ll
Al-f2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.
This setting can be changed to one of the following other two settings by
using the WS3 command

Simultaneous
Interconsole
Refer to Section
l
l

Programming

at Dumb programming

mode.

Ringing (Section 3-D-l .02)
IRNA (Section 3-D-l .03)
10-C-53.00
“World Select 3 (WS3)” for further

System Programming

“Group-Trunk Group (1 LZ)“,
Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (wS3)“.

information.

Reference
1 Dumb

9-E-1.01

10-G14.00

1o-c-53.00
..

Conditions

1. General and Specific Calls
Incoming outside calls directed
“General” or “Specific.”
(General
l

to the attendant

console

Calls)

Operator Call (General)
Incoming outside calls routed via CO lines which belong
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT.”
FDN for General Operator Call

(Specific

Calls (Specific)
Number for ATT1 and 2

2. Call Distribution
General

to a Trunk

Calls)

Operator
- Directory

are categorized

Order

calls are distributed

to each console

on the basis of “First In First

Out.”
Specific

calls always arrive at the specified

3-D-2-l
(30393)

attendant

console.

3. Automatic
Redirection
If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a
Trunk Group whose incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a LOCP
key of ATT1 or 2 is not answered within a specified time (Attendant
Overflow Time), it may be redirected to the extension assigned as the
overflow destination.
Refer to Section S-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection
If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System
Al-T1

i
;o
Overflow Extension

AT-T 2

Ringing at ATT2
1
No Answer
1
lime ‘1”’(Attendant

Overflow Time)

Ringing at Overflow Extension

3-D-2-2
(30393)

1.02

Simultaneous

Description

Ringing
When two arrendanr wnsoks
are equipped with the KX-T336 system, an
incoming outside tail directed to the attendant
console will ring on a LOOP
key of both attendant
consoles simultaneously.

KX-T336 System

All-l
r _-mm-- --m-m)
a
’
:

--------------------------------~
Incoming outside call

Ringing

:
0
L _--m-e ---me)
AIT2

Ringing

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.
This “Simultaneous
Ringing’ setting can be selected by using the WS3
command at Dumb programming
mode.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WSS)” for further information.
Programming

Conditions

1. A call will ring simultaneously
l

at both AlTl

An incoming call is routed via
Group whose Incoming Mode
Both ATT1 and 2 are available
An idle LOOP key is available

Otherwise,

and 2 when:

a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
(Day) is assigned as “ATE”
to receive a call.
at both ATT1 and 2.

a call will ring at either one of two attendant

consoles.

2. Automatic Redirection
If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a
LOOP key of two attendant consoles simultaneously
is not answered
within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it may be redirected
to the extension assigned as the overflow destination.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection
If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System
Ringing
I
--------J
,

I
,
L __-.

I i
k.-.___--

Al-f2

Overflow Extension

3-D-2-3
(30393)

Ringing

!
No Answer
1
Time Out
1
Ringing at overflow extension

1.03

Interconsole

Description

IRNA
When two attendant consoles are eqd~ped
wflr: the KX-T336 system, if an
incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key o: one atiendant console is
not answered within a specified time (Attendant
Overtrow Time), it will be
redirected to another attendant
console automatically
,

KX-T336 System

Incoming outside call

I0
All-2

No Answer
1
Trne Out
1
Ringing at AlT2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the defautt setting.
This “Interconsole IRNA” setting can be selected by using the
.’ WS3
command at Dumb programming
mode.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00
“World Select 3 (WSS)” for further information.

Programming

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)“.
Conditions

1. Interconsole
l

.-.--..

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

System Programming

GE-l.01

10-C-14.00

1 o-c-53.00

IRNA works when:

An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”
An idle LOOP key is available at the second console when a call
ringing at the first console is not answered within a specified time.

2. Attendant Overflow Time
The timer which applies to the feature is “System--System
Timer”,
Attendant Overflow Time.
‘:
4’
.-._
3. Automatic Redirection If No At&&
1
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATI”) ringing on a
LOOP key of ATT2 (see illustration above) is not answered within a
specified time (Attendant Overflow Time) it may be redirected to the
extension assigned as the overflow extension.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection
If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System

Overflow

Extension

3-D-2-4
(30393)

Ringing at AlT2
1
No Answer
1
lime Out
1
Ringing at overflow

extension

2.00
2.01

Attendant
Operation
Direct

Console-less

In Line (DIL)

Description

Programming

.Once set in system program, this function makes
it possible for an incoming call from a CO line to
go directly to an-extension
without assistance of
the attendant.
This function can be performed
in two ways, as
described below.

DIL 1:l
System Programming
“Group-Trunk
Group (l/2)“,
Incoming
Mode (Day)
Incoming
Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO
Line”,
Trunk Group
Direct Termination

DIL 1 :l : For putting an incoming call from a CO
line trunk to a single destination
Assignable destinations
are:
.,.i .‘.’
Extension User
FDNfor Remote
FDN for UCD group
l

System Programming

DIL 1: N: For putting an incoming call from a CO
line to a maximum of eight destinations
simqltaneously
Assignable
destinations
are:

l
l

Refc rence
Dumb

9-E-1.01

10-C-14.00

SF-1 .oO

lO-Gl8.00

DILl:N

-Group-Trunk
Group (1 R)“,
Incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming
Mode (Night)
“Group-Trunk
Group (2Q)“.
Destination
(DIL 1: N Only)
Type and Number

Extension User
Pickup Group
ICM Group

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I
I
9-E-l .Ol 10-C-14.00

r
9-E-l .02

10-C-15.00

;d use the DIL 1 :l and DIL 1: N’&ctions,
program “Group-Trunk
Group”,IncomingKIutgoing
to Both-Way or Incoming Only.

For DIL 1 :l , set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Incoming
Mode (Day) to OIL 1:1, and program the CO
line to thii Trunk Group using Trunk- CO Line”,
Trunk Group. Then set the incoming destination
in “Trunk-CO Line”, Direct Termination.

Conditions
If CO
PITS
PC0
arrive

For DIL 1: N, program “Group-Trunk
Group”,
Incoming Mode (Day) to DIL 1: N, and program
the “Group-Trunk
Group”, Destination
(DIL 1: N
Only) Type and Number.

buttons are assigned, an incoming call to a
will arrive at one otthe CO buttons (except
button). lf no CO button is assigned, it will
at a PDN.

When a DIL 1 :l incoming call arrives at a PDN. it
will also arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
owner is that PDN.

To use these functions in the Night mode, set the
Day mode to the DIL 1 :l or DIL 1: N setting, and
set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Incoming Mode (Night)
to Day Mode.

When a DIL 1: N incoming call arrives at a PDN,
it will not arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
owner is that PDN.
It is programmable
that an incoming CO call
routed via DIL 1 :N feature anives at “CO button
only” or “CO button or PDN button.” For further
information,
refer to Section 1 O-C-53.00 “World
Select 3 (WS3).”

3-D-3

2.02 Direct Inward
(DISA)

System

Access

Description

Programming

DISA allows an outside party calling into the
system on a DTMF line to directly access certain
system features, without attendant assistance.
After gaining access to the system, the caller can
access allowed features by dialing the appropriate
feature number.
The caller is required to enter DISA User Code
before being allowed to make an outgoing CO call
via DISA feature.
Once a DISA call has gained access to the
system, it is treated as any other incoming CO
call.
Extension

System Programming
Zonfiguratbn-Sbt
Assignment”
‘System-System
limer”,
Intercept Routing Time-Out

Reference
VT
Dumb
9-c-2.00
9-D-3.00

lo-c-2.00
104-6.00

(DISA)
‘Group-Trunk

Group

(l/2)“,

9-E-l .Ol lO-Gl4.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
InterceptRouting
(Night)
Trunk-AGC
‘Special Attended-DISA”

9-F-3.00 10-C-21 .OO
9-K-l .oo 1 o-C-40.00
to 41 .oc

call via DISA is made as follows:

Conditions

JgpiEq-/-~~gbn~
L-----------------,--~
Party
Outgoing

call via DISA is made as follows:

the affiliation
by “Special

Automatic Gain Control can be used for DISA to
maintain the volume of CO-CO call via DISA
feature by equipping up to four AGC cards. lf
Tenant Service is employed, the AGC card can
be assigned to a tenant in ‘Trunk-AGC.”
Dialing *’ allows the user to call again or
disconnect the line. It is possible to disable it by
setting ‘Special Attended-DISA’,
Control Code
*“to “No.”

Outside
Party

i-1
central
off ice

.:-

*__

Outside

Party

of the following
with OGM
with OGM
(Wake-up call)
can be installed

Four digit DISA User Code is necessary for
making outgoing calls via DISA. It is assigned
“Special Attended-DISA”,
DISA User Code.
To execute Intercept Routing-No Answer and
Rerouting for DISA calls, assign “System-System
Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA) and
“Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day)
and (Night).
For further information,
refer to Section 3-F-5.00
‘Intercept Routing-No
Answer (RNA).”

To utilize DISA feature, a DISA card is required
and assign “Special Attended-DISA”,
For Use to
_
“DISA.”
It can be used as one
1. OGM 1 for UCD
2. OGM 2 for UCD
3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP
Up to four DISA cards
system.

If Tenant Service is employed,
DISA card can be programmed
Attended-DISA*,
Tenant-

four ways.

to the
3-D-4
(40993)

Conditions

Operation

DISA calls should be made from external
by DTMF dial type telephone instruments.

Calling an extension

callers

Dial the telephone
number of the
line which is programmed
as a
DISA line in this system.

I! reorder tone is returned but WW is not dialed in
10 seconds, the line will be disconnected.
Rerouting

starts in the cases below:

1) When nothing

is dialed in 10 seconds during
no tone heard after OGM is sent.
2) When a wrong extension number is dialed.
3) When the number of “Out Service” status
extension is dialed.
4) When a wrong DISA user code is dialed.

Warning tone is sent during CO-CO conversation
15 seconds before time limit programmed
in
“Group-Ttunk
Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. It
is possible to prolong the duration by dialing a
digit other than *” and Y.” Prolonging the
duration is enabled or disabled by system
programming.
It-can be selected whether dete&&
of fhe CPC
signal is done at the end of the CO-CO
conversation
or not in %unk-AGC”,
Tone Detect.

cl>

tf the calling party finishes
are disconnected.

<2>

If the receiving party finishes
tone is sent to the caller.

will

first, both lines

first, reorder

3-D-5

number

You hear ringback

When the extension
start conversation.

calls are similar to that

If “Tone Detect” is set to “Yes,” the followings
occur in each case:

You hear ringback tone u&l
the system detects your call.
When it is detected, you hear
the outgoing message if
recorded, or no tone if not
recorded.

Dial the directory
extension.

If the destination
of Intercept Routing is
programmed,
extension calls unanswered
in
programmed
period are forwarded to the
destination.
The call will be disconnected
after
60 seconds, if the destination
does not answer.
If no destination
is programmed,
extension calls
are disconnected
after 60 seconds, if
unanswered.
Procedures
for outgoing
from extensions.

from outside

of the

tone.
answers,

Calling

an external

Calling

oafly

1. Da. ye :&es-oze
-*l--aU,. -_. of the
1ir.e ivnich is orogrammez
as a
DlSA ilne ir iEqs system.
L Ak

You hear ringback tont until
the system detects yo,r call.

2. Dial the feature number
selecting a CO line.

for

idI

2. To call an extension, follow the
procedure for calling an
extension from step 2.
To call an external party, follow
the procedure for calling an
external party from step 4.

(Supplement)
If you dial u*n while hearing OGM, or hearing no
tone in 10 seconds after OGM is sent, or hearing
dial tone, you are disconnected
from the line.

3. Dial the DISA user code: four
digits.

You hear dial tone 1.

(13
q
456
7*0
*

You hear dial tone 2.

4. Dial the telephone
external party.

1. Dial I‘*.”
l

When it is detected, ycu hear
the outgoing message if
recorded, or dial tone t if not
recorded.

)

While talking with an external party, or hearing
ringback tone, busy tone, or reorder tone.

I
l

again

number

of the

5. When the external.party
answers, start conversation
CO conversation).

(CO-

with an
If you dial U*” during conversation
extension, you are not disconnected
and able to
continue the conversation.

(Supplement)
If account code entry is forced for the accessed
line by programming,
you must dial the account
code in step 4 before the telephone-number.

3-D-6

2.03 Direct

inward

Dialing

(DID)

Description

Conditions

Incoming calls can be put through directly to
extensions
in accordance with the subscriber
numbers sent from the Central Office.
Either an Attendant Console or UCD group may
serve as the destination
of the incoming calls.
DID lines are for incoming calls only. They cannot
be employed for outgoing calls.

Exactly how a subscriber number received from
the Central Office is converted into a DN or FDN
in the DID Digit Modification
Table is explained
below using an example.

“Special Attended-DID”
Table settings
Receive Digit: 4
Delete Digit: 2
Insert Dial No.: 2
Subscriber number received from the Central
Office: 43112

To make use of DID trunks, program “GroupTrunk Group”, Type to DID, and assign the CO
lines to be used for DID by programming
the
“Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk Group option. It is also
necessary to set the DID Start Arrangement
in
“Trunk-CO Line* and the DID Digit Modification
Table in “Group-Trunk
Group (2/2)“. The digit
modification
table is used to convert the
subscriber numbers sent from the Central Office
into DNs or Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).
The number of received digits, the number of
digits to be deleted and the digits to insert are
programmed
in the “Special Attended-DID”
screen.

Processing
cl> The “2” in 43112 is ignored since there are
four receive digits. This leaves 4311.
c2> “43” is deleted since there are two delete
digits. This leaves 11. Note that the digits
are deleted from the front of the number.
<3> Insert Dial No. ‘2” makes the final number
211 which serves as the DN or FDN. Note
that digits are inserted at the front of the
number.

Programming
System Programming
‘Group-Trunk
Group”,
Type
DID Digit Modification
Table
“Trunk-CO
Line”,
Trunk Group
DID Start Arrangement

“Special Attended-DID”,
Receive Digit
Delete Digit
Insert Dial No.

Rei
v-r

Reorder tone is sent to the DID caller if the
number of digits received is less than the number
programmed
in “Special Attended-DID”,
Receive
Digit.

ence
DWTlb

9-E-l .Ol 10-c-14.00
9-E-l .02 10-G15.00
9-F-l .OO 10-C-18.00
9-K-2.00

The subscriber number received from the Central
Office is converted into a DN or FDN. If it could
not be put through to the incoming call
destination,
because the DN or FDN does not
exist or the destination
is Out of Service, the call
is sent to the destinatfdn
specified by the “GroupTrunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day/Night).
If
there is nothing programmed
for intercept routing
then the call is sent to Operator 1.

1O-c-q.00

When the CO Forward Mode function has been
programmed
in “System-Class of Service” for
the DID incoming call destination,
forwarding will
not take place, and the call will be put through to
the extension.

3-D-7

2.04

Trunk Answer From Any Station
(TAFAS)-Day
Service

Description

Conditions

Incoming CO calts programmed
for TAFAS will
ring the external pager and any extension user in
the system can answer the calls by dialing the
feature number for ‘Night Answer 1” (when a call
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2”
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

If tenant service is employed
:
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined
by the system programming
in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerTenant.
Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.

To activate

this feature,

assign “Group-Trunk

Group”, incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utilize the external pager, assign “SystemOperation”, External Paging 1,2” to “Yes.”
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.
. Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to
Section 4-l-l -01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

Programming
System Propmmkg

‘System-Operation (I/3)‘.
External Paging 1,2
‘System-Numbering Plan (3B)“.
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group (I@“.
incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Lie’.
Trunk Group
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant

Reference
Dumb

9-D-l .Ol

ltMz-4.00
,l

9-D-6.03 lO-GlO.00
Q-E-1.Ol

10-C-14.00

SF-l.00

lo-C-18.00

9-F-2.00 lO-C-19.00

3-D-8

2.05

Uniform Call Distribution
General

(UCD)-

Description

UP to 32 UCD groups can he set up in the system
and they can be categorized
into the following
two types.

Calls to a UCD group are distributed unifomtly
among the group members so that each member
can share the same load.

1. UCD group with CGM (01-04)
-Section 2.06-l
2. UCD group without OGM (0532)
-Section 2.06-2

This UCD feature is particularly helpful when
certain extension receives a high volume of calls
compared with other extensions.

Detaifed information
3-D-2.06.

E=mpW
DIL 1:l

Switching system

co1

Extension

co2

Extension

co3

Extension

Calls from CO 1 akays arrive at Extension
Calls from CO 2 always arrive at Extension
Calls from CO 3 always arrive at Extension
M

is described

in the Section

A
B
C

Switching system

Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in
circular way, starting at the extension folbwing
the last one called.
Call completion
time is minimized without
attendant
assistance.

a
.*i7-.

The UCD group is comprised of one or more
pickup groups in the same Intercom group.
An extension can be in only one UCD group.
Members can leave the group temporarity, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension
o-ogw
-

3-D-9
(40993)

2.06 Uniform Call Distribution
with/without
OGM

(UCD)-

2.06-l UCD Group with OGM (01-04)
Description
UCD Groups 0144 are provided
receiving outside calls.

exclusively

a call (All Logout

for

A call will be redirected-to
another
(Overflow destination)
immediately.

destination

1
1 UCDW) 1

;;
(All busy)

, lrj-LJyl]
EXLlOi

(only one for each

Ext.101

<
I

Programming

--la
VT

Ext.102

UCD group (01-04)

If all group

members

“Group-Trunk Group (1 R)
incoming Mod& (Dayj
-DIL 1 :l
Incoming Mode (Night)
.’
-Day Mode
“Group-Call Piiup Group”. UCD
Trunk-CO Line”,
Direct Termination-DN
‘Extension-Station (1 n)“,

are busy

A caller may receive an answer delay
announcement
(OGM 1,Z) and be placed in the
waiting queue until any one of busy group

member goes on-hook, or be redirected to
another destination
(Overflow destination),
receive any other treatments.
A type of treatments
may diier depending
preprogrammed
UCD Timetable.

group)

Pickup

01 to 04
Special
Aftended-UCD

3-D-l 1
(40993)

9-E-3.00
SF-l.00

1&c-17.00
lo-c-18.00

9-G-1.01

10-GZOO

SK-l.00

1O-C-4O.00

SK-3101

1O-G44.00

9-K-3.02

1tX-45.00

Group

“Special Attended-DISA”,
For Use
“Special Attended-UCD (1 R)".

on the

SE-l.01

(2f2)

Condttions
Then depending on your software
call is handled as follows.

1. Calts which can arrive at a UCD group (with
OGM) are:
l

Incoming outside calls via DIL( 1 :l) for which
destination
is set as FDN of a UCD group
Incoming outside calls via DID by dialing
FDN of a UCD group
Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing
FDN of a UCD group
incoming
attendant

2. Login

outside calls transferred
console or extension

and Logout

5 Overflow

3. Busy status

When ‘Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call
Forwarding”
has been set to the extension.

the extension

Attendant

Extension

Another

Console
UCD Group

(0%04),

of the calls transferred
(OFDN))

(1) What-if the.overfbw

destination

The call is put in the waiting
begin to ring at the overflow
soon as it becomes idle.

(0532)
to the overflow
is busy?
queue, and will
destination
as

is off-hook.

The call may begin to ring at a group
member’s extension, if it becomes idle while
overflow destination
is still busy.

When a group member does not answer a call
more than a set time period (“Call ForwardingNo Answer Time-Out”), the call will be
automatically
transferred to another member’s
extension.
If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in
succession,
the extension is automatically
set
to bgout status.

)

destination

(Treatment
destination

4. Auto-Logout

What if all members

XX and above)
the overflow destination
Auto-Logout.
6.XX versions.

One of the following three destinations
can be
assigned as the overflow destination
(OFDN)
per UCD group (0144).

When any one of PDN has been used.
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension)
When

the

(Software version 6.XX and below)
The call is put in the wafting queue.
But continues to hear ringback tone.
Not timetable.

by an

Members can leave the group temporarily
when they will be away from their desks, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension.
o-ogw
They can return to the group when they are
ready to answer a call. (Login)
Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call
Diiributlon
(UCD)-Log Out” for more
information
on login and logout.

(Software version 8.
The call overflows to
immediately
after the
This is changed from

version,

Thecallisputin
the waiting queue.

*No

Is ovetfbw
destination

idle?

are logged-out?

Assuming that a UCD group has three
members and twc are already logged out, and
a call rings into the UCD.
lf the member that is logged-in does not
answer after two cycles, “Auto-Logout
happens.

The call begins to
ring at overflow
1 destination.

3-D-l 2
(40993)

(2) What if a call rinoina at overflow
/AlT/EXT.)
is not answered?

destination

7. UCD TImetable
When all extensions
in a UCD group are busy,
calls are handled according to the preprogrammed
timetable.
The timetable is assigned to the system by
employing “UCD Time Table-UCD (2Q)” in
system programming.

Overfbw

destination

(1) Number of timetables
Each UCD group (01 to 04) has own timetable
respectively.

(ATT/EXT.)

I
(No answer)

(2) Up to 16 steps can be registered par timetable
by selecting a command listed below.
Command

(A) A call which comes in directly on the overflow
destination*’
continues to ring on it.
(B) A call which
destination
once by the
automatically,
destination
l
l

Functions

Callers are put in the waiting queue
for 15 seconds.
Callers are put in the waiting queue
for 30 seconds.
Callers are put in the waiting queue
for 45 seconds.
Callers are put in the waiting queue
for 60 seconds.
When OGMl is in use, wait until
OGMl becomes available and then
OGMl is sent to the caller.
When OGM2 is in use, wait until
OGM2 becomes available and then
OGM2 is sent to the caller.
OGMl is sent to the caller if
available.
When OGMl is in use, skips to the
next step without sending OGMl .
OGM2 is sent to the caller if
available.
When OGM2 is in use, skips to the
next step without sending OGM2.
Music-on-Hold
is sent to the caller.
Transfers a call to the overflow
destination
set by “OFDN” of
“Special Attended-UCD(
l/2)” in
system programming.
Disconnects
the outside call.

3T
4T
OlW

’ A call via DIL 1 :l , DID.
2 A call via DISA, transferred
by ATT or
Extension, or a call held by the system as a
treatment
of the UCD Time Table.

6. OGMl

Command

comes in on the overflow
after being answered or held
system’2 will be disconnected
if not answered by the overflow
within 60 seconds.

02w

01s

and OGM2

To utilize OGM, install Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) card to the system and assign
the usage of DISA card to ffiM1
and/or
OGM2 by system programming
in advance.
The Operator 1 can record OGM.
Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the
system.
Four OGMs per DISA card can be sent to
outside callers simultaneously.
Refer to Section 3-F-4.00,4-l-l
3.00 and
6-J-6.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back,” tor further
information.

02s

H
TR

OFF
Note:

3-D-13
(40993)

list and functions

Any command
function.

after “TR” or “OFF” does not

(3) Music on Hold is sent to the caller in the
queue until a group member answers it.

Timetable
(Example

operation
1)

01s

(Example)

examples
-+ 4T -+ 2T+
I

+ TR

(3)

(4)

(2)

(1)

In the following case, Music on Hold is sent to
the caller, during 4T (60 seconds) interval.

02s

OlW+4T

--L

Sends

UCD Group
MJsic on Hold

(1) The caller hears OGMl

, if available.

(Example)

Sorry, all lines are busy.
Please wait a moment
I

atdOGM1

is&&

Steps (1) and (2) will be skipped.
The caller hears OGM2, if
available (Go to Step 3).
lf “01 W is used instead of ‘YXS.’
the caller first hears ringback tone
and then will hear OGMl as soon
as it becomes available (Go to
Step 2).
.

at rf ffiM1

IS Out of Service?

Steps (1). (2) a& (3) will be
skipped. The caller is directly
transferred to the Overflow
destination
(Go to Step 4).
(2) The caller hears Music on Hold for
90 seconds (4T + 2T).
(3) The caller hears OGM2.
(E=mW

Sorry, all lines are still busy.
Calling the Operator.
I

(4) The caller is transferred
to the
Overflow destination
(Operator or
covering extension).
Note:
l

3-D-l 4
(40993)

During steps (1) through (3), the
caller will be connected to a UCD
group member as soon as
anyone of members becomes
available to answer the call.

(Example

01S+&-+4T-+2T--+02S-+H
+TR

(Example

OtS+
(1)

2T+02W+OFF
(2)
(3)

H +
(1)

If “H” command
is used as shown
above, Music on Hold is always
sent to the caller whether OGMs
are In Service or not.
(Example

1
UCD Group

(1) The caller hears Music on Hold until
anyone of the group members or
Overflow destination
becomes idle.

(4)

Note:

UCD Group
(1) The caller hears OGMl

(E=wle)

(Example

H +
(1)
L

If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,
thii step will be skipped.
Then the caller hears ringback
tone.

If ‘IT” command
is used instead
of “H,” the caller hears ringback
tone instead of Music on Hold.
01s + TR
(2)

(3)

i
UCDGroup

’

(1) This step is skipped automatically.
“H” does not function.

(2) The caller hears Music on Hold for
30 seconds (2T).

(2) The caller hears O&l
Music on Hold.

followed

(3) The caller is transferred
Overflow destination.

to the

(3) The caller hears OGM2.
WwW

If OGM2 is busy, the caller first
hears ringback tone and then will
hear OGM2 as soon as it becomes
available.
,
(4) The caller is disconnected
switch.

from the

3-D-14-1
(40993)

2.08 Single

CO (SCO)

Description

CO line which can be assigned
is:

To support prompt handling of outside calls. a CO
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS
telephone.
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.
SC0 button feature provides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and

. A CO line which

assigned
whose

“Extension-Station
(2/3)“.
Type and Number

e efenca
Dumb

m-1 a

lo-c24.00

Conditions
. Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
function is set, it is overridden
by an outgoing
call made by pressing the Single CO button.
. The Single CO button indicator
in the following circumstances.

with 011 1: 1 feature

will light up red

cl> When the Single CO is not.@ Service

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed,
SC0 button
can be assigned to the PITSfelephone
programmed
as the destination
of DIL 1: 1
feature.
If SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS
telephone,
an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
button on it.

<2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
status
<3> Idle status and Single CO in trunk route
control status
When the Single CO button is pressed in
any of these statuses, its indicator
lights up
“i
Lt.green but busy tone is heati.-

The table below shows the relationsmetween
the DN button programmed
as Single CO and the
CO line status:

In the following cases, the Single CO button
indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is
sent.

CO Line Status

Indicator

Only and

Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL

System Programming

. SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone
in conjunction
with DIL 1:l or DIL 1 :N feature.
SC0 button

to a trunk group

or Incoming

Programming

SC0 button can be used either one-way service
(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
service (Both-Way).
\

Incoming

button

. A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
assigned as Outgoing Only.

receive many outside calls.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO line
by simpiy pressing the SC0 button without
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
outside call can be directed to the PITS
telephone via dedicated SC0 button without
assistance of the Operator.
In addition, the associated status LED provides
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

belongs

as Bothway

as a SC0

Party Control signal has
been detected during a call using the
Single CO.

4 > When Calling
off
Lights green
Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink
Green 240 wink
Lights red
\.-

Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink
Red 240 wink

Idle
l-use
l-hold
hold, consultation
unattended conference
Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)

l-exclusive

~2>

hold,

Other-use,
exclusive
hold
Other-hold
Privacy release possible
Incoming
call (DIL 1: N)

3-D-16
(30393)

When outgoing restriction applies to an
outgoing call made from the Single CO.

2.06

Uniform Call Distribution
with/without OGM

2.06-Z UCD Group without

(UCD)-

OGM (05-32)

DescrlptCon

are not

UCD Groups (05-32) are provided
extension and outside calls.

a call (All Loaout)

to receive both

A call will be redirected to another
(Overflow destination)
immediately.

destination

UCD (05)

2%
(All busy)

(All logout)

1
r-.

Overflow

(01

timeout

.
Overflow

Extlll

Extw

destination

(OFDN)

UCD group

(05-32)

Programming
System
Programming

If all qmup members are busy
A call is placed in the waiting queue and the
caller hears ringbadc tone.

“Group-Trunk
Incoming
-DIL 1:l

A call in the queue will be redirected to another
destination
(Overflow destination)
it all group
members are still busy after a specified time
period (Overflow hmer - OT) has elapsed.

Group (l/2)
Mode (Day)

Refemloe
VT
Dumb
SE-101

l&C14.0(

Incoming Mode (Night)
-Day Mode
‘GroupCall Pickup Group”, UCD Q-E-3.00 lO-Gl7.oL
‘Trunk-CC

tine”,

SF-1 .OO lo-C18.00

Direct Termination-DN
‘Extension-Station
(In)“,
Pickup Group
‘Special Attended-UCD
(112)”
05to32

3-D-14-2
(40993)

9-G-l .Ol

10-C-22.00

SK-3.07

lW-44.0(1

Condftlons
1. Calls which can arrive at UCD group
are:
(1) Outside

(0532)

4. Overflow

One of the following three destinations
can be
assigned as the overflow destination
(OFDN)
per UCD group (0532)

calls

Incoming outside calls via DIL (1 :l) for ’
which call destination
is set as FDN of a
UCD group

Attendant Console
Extension
Another UCD Group

Incoming c&ide calls via DID by dialing
FDN of a UCD group

Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing
FDN of a UCD group

Incoming outside calls transferred
Extension or Attendant Console

(2) Extension

by the

calls

Calls made by extension or attendant
console by dialing FDN of UCD group

Calls transferred by extension or attendant
console by dialing FDN of UCD group.

I-

(Extension

of the calls transferred
(OFDN))

Thecallisputin
the waiting queue.
I

is off-hook.
user only)

UCD group

08 1

destination

to the overflow
is busy?

The call may begin to ring at a group
member’s extension,
if it becomes idle while
overfbw destination
is still busy.

When all extensions within a UCD group are
busy, the display, if provided, of the callets PITS
shows:

FDN

GRP

When any one of PDN is used.
(Induding
using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension)
. When the extension

user only)

The caff is put in the waiting queue, and will
begin to ring at the overfbw destination
as
soon as it becomes idle.
”

When ‘Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call
Forwarding.
has been set to the extension.

display>

5678: UCD

(Treatment
destination

3. Busy status

The call will be disconnected
automatically,
if not answered within 60 seconds.
Logout

When an extension in a UCD group does not
answer more than a set time period’, the call
will be automatically
transferred
to another
membel’s extension.
If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in
succession,
the extension is automatically
set
to logout status.
l

or press the SP-

button.

&==

L-l

(Transfer&call)

5. Automatic

1. Lii the handset

PHONE

1. When the call ringing at overflow
destination
has originally arrived to a UCD
group by call transfer.

to a UCD group

“Call Forwarding-No

Answer

Time-Out”

3-D-1 4-4
(40993)

2.07

Private CO (PCO)

Description

Conditions

It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were
connected
directly to a DN button on a PITS.
This operation
is called Private CO (PCO).
It is then no longer possible to place outgoing
calls from other extensions using this CO line.
Also, an incoming call from the CO line assigned
as PC0 will arrive only at this PITS.

A Private CO button
below.

To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk
Group’, Type to PVL and program the CO line to
the Private trunk group in ‘Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
Group.
Also, program the DN button on the PITS to
PRV-CO using “Extension-Station
(Z/S)“, Type
and assign the physical number of the Private
CO line under Number.

lights up red at the times

1) When the Private

CO line is not In Service.

2) When the Private
CO Busy-Out.

CO line has been set to

3) When access using the Trunk Verify
function is made by the Attendant
Console.
A call held on a Private CO button can not be
retrieved by other extensions,
however, an
incoming call to a Private CO button can be
transferred.
When an incoming
instantly. Delayed

CO calf arrives, ringing occurs
ringing is not available.

Programming
Retefence
1 Dumb
I

System Programming

‘Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
Type

9-E-l .ot

10-C-14.00

“Trunk-CO

9-F-1.00
g-G-1.02

10-C-18.00
10-c-24.00

Line”, Trunk Group

“Extension-Station
Type

(2/a)“,

and Number

zF.+.

-.-iye.+-.

3-D-l 5

2.08 Single

CO (SCO)

Description

CO line which can be assigned
is:

To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS
telephone.
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.
SC0 button feature provides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and
receive many outside calls.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO line
by simply pressing the SC0 button without
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
outside call can be directed to the PITS
telephone via dedicated SC0 button without
assistance of the Operator.
In addition, the associated status LED provides
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

button with DIL 1: 1 feature

Green 240 wink
Lights red
Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink
Red 240 wink

The Single CO button indicator
in the following circumstances.

c3>

will light up red
Service

Idle status and Single CO in trunk route
control status
When the Single CO button is pressed in
any of these statuses, its indicator lights up
;-:..
green but busy tone is heard?

In the following cases, the Single CO button
indicator remains fit green and reorder tone is
sent.

CO Line Status
Idle
l-use
l-hold
l-exclusive hold, consultation
unattended conference
Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)
Other-use, exclusive hold
Other-hold
Privacy release possible
Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
function is set, it is ovemdden
by an outgoing
call made by pressing the Single CO button.

<2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
status

The table below shows the relations@&tween
the DN button programmed
as Single CO and the
CO line status:

off
Lights green
Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink

A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
assigned as Outgoing Only.

cl> When the Single CO is not&

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed,
SC0 button
can be assigned to the PlTSfelephone
programmed
as the destination
of DIL 1: 1
feature.
lf SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS
telephone,
an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
button on it.

Indicator

A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and
whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL
1: N.

Conditions

. SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone
in conjunction
with DIL 1 :l or DIL 1 :N feature.
SC0

button

Programming

SC0 button can be used either one-way service
(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
service (Both-Way).
\

as a SC0

cl> When Calling Party Control signal has
been detected during a call using the
Single CO.
hold,

<2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
outgoing call made from the Single CO.

3-D-l 6
(30393)

2.09

Group

CO (GCO)

Description
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a
group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned
to a DN button on a PITS telephone.
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a
PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.
GCO button feature provides better service with
a given number-of CO lines.

Trunk group which
button is:

can be assigned

as a GCO

A trunk group assigned as Bothway or
Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode
(Day) is DIL 1 :l or DIL 1: N.

A trunk group

assigned

as Outgoing

Only.

Programming
GCO button can be assigned to a PITS
telephone
in conjunction with DIL 1: N feature.
incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group
can be directed to a maximum of eight
destinations
(extension user, ICM group, pickup
group) simultaneousty.
In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons
on the PITS telephone.
If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls
via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.
To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user
can access an idle CO line in the group by simply
pressing the dedicated GCO button.
The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed
as Group CO and the
CO line status:
Indicator
off
Lights green
Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink
Green 240 wink
Lights red
Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink
Red 240 wink

CO Line Status

Conditions

..
When the ARS function is set, it is overridden
outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.

Pressing a Group CO button when it is red
serves to set the ‘Automatic Callback to Trunk”
function.
See Section 4-C-6.01,5-A-4.01
“Automatic
Callback-Trunk”
for details.
In the following cases, the Group CO button
indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.
cl> When Calling
been detected
Group CO.

Free CO line in trunk group and no
incoming CO call
l-use
l-hold
l-exclusive hotd. consuhation hold,
unattended conference
No idle CO lines in trunk group
and no incoming call in trunk
group
CO line receiving an incoming call
in trunk group

c2> When

outgoing

3-D-l 7
(30393)

Party Control signal has
during a call using the

outgoing restriction applies to an
call made from a Group CO.

2.10

Flexible

SCOlGCO

Descrtption

Assignment

1. Restricxns”on
SCOGCO
Assianment
has been lifted.
Therefore.
CO lines of the same trunk group can be assigned
(as a group unit) and SC0 (as a single unit) at a time.
*’ Refer to CO Appearance
Assuming

Type in Section

that Trunk Group 01 consists

to both GCO

9-E-l .02 “Trunk Group

of the following

(U2).”

CO lines.

Case 1.

Case 2.

Case 3.

-1

r-l

rsco-1011
sco-1012
x0-01

EXT.100

EXT.1 00

1 Case 2

Case 1

Old version

Available

New version

1 Avaifabfe

Case 3
Not Available

*2 In old version. either Case 1 or 2 is avail&k
for the Trunk Group
depending on the setting of “Group-Trunk
Group: CO,Appearance
Type.
(Appearance
of the call indication in Case 3.)
SC0 has priority over GCO when incoming CO calls come.
When an outside call via CO line-l 011 comes in on an extension,
call indication appears on SCO-1011, not on GCO-01.
However

it may appear

3-D-17-1
(40993)

on GCO-01,

if SCO-1011

the

is in use as follows.

(Example)
1. SCO-1011

is in use.

2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.100
appears on (X0-01
.*’
7.

via CO line-1011

sco-1011

SCO-1012

GCO-01

EXT.100

EXT. 100

SCO-1011 is lit
in green.

GCO-01 is flashing
in red or green.

*’ In old version, SCO-1011 cannot be assigned together with GCC-01 at
single PtTS in Case 3.
A call comes in on Ext.1 00 via CO line-l 011 is put on waiting status
until (X0-01
becomes available.
2. Retrieving

a call held on GCO from SCO.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following
GCO and SC0 buttons are assigned as follows.
TGOl

- - .

GCO-01

CO line

1011

CO line
CO line

1012
1013

CO line

1014
_ ,-... . ..

“ ,

is in use at EXT.100

CO lines and
.,

now.

I IGco-ol
EXT. 100

sco-1011

Ei
m

;z:::3’
sco-1014

EXT.101

GCO-01 is lit in
green*.

=a In case, CO line 1011 is captured

3-D-l 7-2
(40993)

SCO-1011 is lit
in red*.

by pressing

GCO-01.

When a call on GCO-01 is put on hold at EXT.1 00. GCO-01 begins to
flash in green and SCO-1011 on En.101
%xyx 1:: t!ash in fed as

follows:

sco-1011

sco-1012
sco-1013
sco-1014

sco-01
L

EXT.101

EXT.101 can retrieve
flashing SCO-1011.

a call held on GCO-01

Programming

Conditions

None

- --i--

3-D-l 7-3
(40993)

by simply pressing

the red

2.11

Multiple

Description

GCO Assignment
Restrictions

on GCO button

assignment

Therefore,
more than one GCO button
assigned to a srngle PlTS extension.
(Example)
Assuming

Case

that Trunk Group

01 consists

has been lifted.
of the same trunk group

of the following

CO lines.

qmGCO-0
CD

Ext.1 00

Case

can be

GCO-01

Ext.101

a
II
a

GCO-01
GCO-01
GCO-01
Ext.1 00

Ext.101

Case 1
Old version
1 New version

Available
1

Case 2
r-.
Not Available

Available

Programming
System Programming
“Extension-Station
(213)“.
Type and Number

3-D-l 7-4
(30393)

Fteference
VT
I Dumb

Conditions

(1)

Appearance
of the call indication in case 2
If more than one outside call (via CO lines of the same trunk group)
comes in under the following situation. the seCOnd call will appear on
the next GCO button of the same extension.

(Example)

Direct Termination

CO Lines
Trunk Group

CO Line

1011
Ext. 100

Incoming

Mode (Day):

CO Line

1012

CO Line

1013
Ext. 101

DIL 1: 1
CO Line

1. GCO-01

1014

is in use at Ext.1 00.

2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.1 00 via a CO line of
Trunk Group 01 appears on another GCO of Ext.100.’
2

L
El
I

GCO-01

c3co-01

GCO-01

Ext.1 00

Ext. 100

In case 1 (Old version),
GCO-01 on the Ext.100

3-D-l 7-5
(30393)

the indication of this call does not appear
becomes available.

until

3.00

Flexible

Ringing

3.01 Flexible Ringing
No Ringing

Assignment

Assignment-

3.02 Flexible
Delayed

Assignment

Description

Each line access button on the PITS telephone
can be programmed
to ring or not to ring when
incoming calls arrive during the day or at night.
When incoming calls are placed to PITS from
extensions,
CO lines or doorphones,
the
indicators of the PDN: SDN, SCO, GCO and PC0
buttons corresponding
to the respective incoming
calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing
is sent to the phone.
It is possible to disable the ringing and have
different settings in the day and night mode.

When incoming calls are placed to PITS from
extensions,
CO lines or door-phones, the
indicators of the PDN, SDN, SC0 and+GCO
buttons corresponding
to the respective incoming
calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing
is sent to the phone.
It is possible to delay the ringing and have
different settings in the day and night mode.

“Extension-Station”,
set to No Ring.

“Extension-Station”,
Day Ring and Night Ring are
set to delayed ringing.
The delay time can be set to any one of three
values.

Day Ring and Night Ring are

Delayed
Programming
System Programming
“Extension-Station
Day Ring
Night Ring

(2/3)“,

Delayed

Reference
i Dumb

9-G-l .02

Delayed

1 O-C-24.00

1: 5 seconds after placement of
the incoming call
3: 15 seconds after placement of
the incoming call
6: 30 seconds after placement of
the incoming call

::f-..

Programming
System Programming

Conditions

..;$

Ringing
Ringing

When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,
SCO, GCO or PC0 button for which no-ringing
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call
flashing in 240 wink. In other words, responding
to incoming calls is not affected by no ringing
assignment
in any way.

“Extension-Station

(2/3)“,

. s Reference
VT
Dumb
9-G-l .02

1 O-C-24.00

Day Ring
Night Ring

Conditions
When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,
SC0 or GCO button for which delayed ringing
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call
flashing in 240 wink before ringing begins. In
other words, responding to incoming calls is not
affected by delayed ringing assignment
in any
way.

3-D-l 8

4.00

Discriminating

Ringing

Description
It is possible to identify the type of an incoming
by the ringing pattern.
The ringing patterns are listed on Section
00 ‘Tone and Ringing Patterns.”

call

3-B-l 6.

In an SLT, the Held Call Reminder for CO cats :s
the same as the CO line incoming ringing
pattern. The ringing for extension hold is the
same as the extension incoming ringing pattern.
There is no distinction made for calls to an Off
Premise Extension (OPX): The CO line incoming
ringing pattern only.

Programming
None
Conditions
All Transfer Recall signals have the same ringing
pattern as Held Call Reminder.
If there are multiple incoming calls on an extension
when the extension user goes on-hook, the calls
are rung in the following sequence.

cl > Consultation
Held Call Reminder
c2> tn a PITS, an incoming call from a line in which
the Prime Line Preference
(incoming) function
has been set
<3> Call Waiting. The call was waiting when the
user was off-hook.
<4> CO line incoming call, extension incoming call,
intercom incoming call, door-phone incoming
call, Held Call Reminder, Transfer Recall,
Unattended
Conference
Recall.
When there is more than one of the above
incoming calls in a PITS, the calls are
prioritized in DN sequence (PDN takes top
priority). Intercom incoming calls have the
lowest priority.
.<5> Automatic Callback
“F. . ..-,*.
<6> Timed Reminder
When a multiple number of incoming calls arrive at
a PITS in the on-hook status, priority as to which
calls should be rung is generally on a “first-come
first-served” basis. However, when the Prime tine
Preference
(incoming) function has been set. this
line takes precedence.
When there are multiple calls placed to an SLT
which is on-hook, priority as to which calls should
be rung is generally on a “first-come first-served”
basis.

3-D-i 9

.I.;.

e..

5.00

Station

5.01 Station

Hunting
Hunting-Circular

Description
Station Hunting provides
incoming calls to an idle
when the called extension
are automatically
hunted
hunting sequence
set in
the call is put through to

See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
See Section 3-D-2.05,
2.06 “Uniform Call
Distribution
(UCD)-without
OGM/-with
OGM” for
details on the UCD function.

automatic
redirection of
member of a hunt group
is busy. Idle extensions
in accordance
with the
the system program, and
an idle extension.

The following calls do not receive
Hunting treatment.

The hunting sequence is set by “ExtensionStation”, Next Hunt Station.
The group formed by this setting is called a
hunting group.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDNs
for the extension and when the extension is Out of
Service or in fault condition.

Circular hunting is enabled when the last DN in the
hunting group sets the first DN as the Next Hunt
Station as follows.

incoming call

A call on the ICM button.
An incoming outside call routed
or Private CO feature.
A call on the SDN button.

When the incoming
any of the following
is %ccomplished.
Status
Idle PDN

t--

: Hunting

DN 120

Status

via DIL 1 :N

destination
extension is in
statuses, the operation below

Operation
Incoming call processed
hears ringback tone)
FWD processing
DND processing

Depending
on the status
extensions,
the operation
after hunting starts.

FWD setting
DND setting

DN 100
DN 200
J
DN 110

the Station

(caller

of the hunted
below is accomplished

Operation

Hunting Group - Circular
;3

When an incoming
even after hunting
the hunting group,
w-W.

call cannot be put through
all the extensions
belonging to
busy tone is sent to the calling

Hunting proceeds to next station
The call forwarded
to a busy extension/Voice
Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing
System (VPS)” for further information.

Programming

A call redirected to another PITS extension by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
on a SC0 or GCO button.

Conditions
Extensions

can be in only one hunting

group.

\
Extensions in a UCD group cannot belong to
hunting groups.
Similarly, extensions
in hunting
groups cannot belong to UCD groups.
3-D-20
(21292)

5.02

Station

Hunting-Terminal

Description
Station Hunting provides
incoming calls to an idle
when the called extension
are automatically
hunted
hunting sequence
set in
the call is put through to

See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-without
OGM/-with
OGM” for
details on the UCD function.

automatic redirection of
member of a hum group
is busy. Idle ex!ensions
in accordance
v&f-r the
the system program, and
an idle extension.

The hunting sequence
is set by “ExtensiocStation”, Next Hunt Station.
The group formed by this setting is called a
hunting group.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDN’s
for the extension and when the extension Is Out of
Service or in fault condition.
Terminal hunting is selected when the last station
in the hunt leaves the Next Hunt Station blank.

The following calls do not receive the Station
Hunting treatment.
A call on the ICM button.
An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1 :N
or Private CO feature.
A call on the SDN button.
l
l

When the incoming destination
extension is in
any of the following statuses, the operation
below
is accomplished
instead.

I status I
Idle PDN

Example

FWD setting
DND setting

DN 100
DN 200
.L
DN 110
A
DN 120

Incoming call
t--

Operation
Incoming cell processed
hears ringback tone)
FWD processing
DND processing

Depending
on the status
extensions,
the operation
after hunting starts.

: Hunting

Status

_. :
Hunting Group - Circular

Idle PDN
Busy
FWD setting
DND setting

When an incoming call cannot be put through
even after hunting up to the last extension in the
hunting group, busy tone is sent to the calling
party.

I
(caller

of the hunted
below is accomplished

Open&on
Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
Hunting proceeds to next station
Hunting proceeds to next station
Hunting proceeds to next station

The call forwarded
to a busy extension/Voice
Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing
System (VPS)” for further information.

Programming

(1
A call redirected to another PITS extension
by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
on a SC0 or GCO button.

Conditions
An extension
group.

can belong

to only one hunting

Extensions belonging to a UCD group cannot
belong to hunting groups.
Similarly, extensions
belonging
to hunting groups cannot belong to UCD
groups.
3-D-21
(21292)

E. Holding
1.00

Music

Features
on Hold
Conditions

Description

The external
accommodated

sends

music device (up to two units can be
by this system) automatically

Music on Hold is not sent to the party on Hold
unless the settings outlined in description
have
been made.

Music on Hold to a party on Hold.

This function will only be executed when
“System-Operation”,
External Music Source 1,2
is set to Yes, “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source - For Use set either to “HOLD” or
“HOLD & BGM” and the external music device
has been connected.

If Tenant Service is employed, the “Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”, Music Source - Tenant setting
determines which tenant the external music
device belongs to.
When both external music devices are
accommodated
in the same tenant and the
applications of both devices are set identically,
the device connected
to port 1 is used as the
Music on Hold.
An example of this is given below.

Programming

System

Programming

“System-Operation (l/3)“,
External Music Source 1.2
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source - For Use
Music Source - Tenant

$efyen&

9-D-1 .Ol

10-c-4.00

9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00

Port
number

3-E-l

Trunk-Pager

& Music Source

Tenant

For Use

HOLD
HOLD

2.00

Held Call Reminder

Description

Conditions

When the Hold, Exclusive Hold or Call Pa-<
(system or station) function has been activated,
the party on Hold cannot be kept waiting icnger
than a specific time. A call (when on-hook or call
waiting tone (when off-hook) is generated :s the
attendant console or extension as a reminier that
there is a party on Hold.
The alarm tone sent when the handset is c?f
hook, is heard through the speaker of a PITS and
through the handset of an SLT.

If more than one call is placed on hold at an
extension, this function is executed starting with
the earliest held call.
In a PITS, the CO line and extension Held Call
Reminder call signals have respectively the
same ringing pattern as the CO line and
extension incoming call signals, and a monotone
call signal is sent.
While the Held Call Reminder call signal or call
waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
display, it shows:

To execute this function, set “System-Operation”,
Held Call Reminder to “Yes.”
The extension and Attendant times for this
function to be activated are respectively stt by
“System-System
Timer”, Held Call Remincsr and
Held Call Reminder (ATT).
in order for the call waiting tone to be seni the
feature number for “Call Waiting Set” mus: be set.

In an SLT, the CO line and extension Held Call
Reminder call signals are exactly the same as
the CO line and extension incoming call signals.

Programming
System

Programming

Referenz
VT

:cJmb

‘System-Operation (l/3)“,
9-D-l .Ol 1 C-X.00
Held Call Reminder
“System-System Timer”,
9-D-3.00 lC-X.00
Held Call Reminder
Held Call Reminder (AU)
“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 1 C-Z-10.00
Call Waiting Set

3-E-2

3.00

Transfer

Recall

Description

Conditions

If a call tratsferrec
by the Unscreened
Call
Transfer. Camp-@
Transfer or Ringing Transfer
function is not answered by the destination
party
within a preprogrammed
time period, the call will
return to the extension user or attendant console
that transferred
the call.
When the handset is on-hook or off-hook, the
Transfer Recall call signal or call waiting tone,
respectively,
enables the party attempting the
transfer to be advised that the call has not been
answered. The call waiting tone sent when the
handset is off-hook, is heard through the speaker
in the case of a PITS and through the handset in
the case of an SLT.

When there are more than one parties on hold,
this function is started from the earliest time for
the transfer operation.
In a PITS, the CO line and extension Transfer
Recall call signals have the same ringing pattern
as the CO line and extension incoming call
signals, and a monotone call signal is sent.
While the Transfer Recall call signal or call
waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
display, it shows:
l

The time taken to ac$ivate this function for the
extension or attendant console is set by “SystemSystem Timer”, Transfer Recall.

When the transfer destination
not have a name programmed:

extension

does

RCL:

Ext 1234

Programming

System Programming

“System-System
Transfer

-r

Reference
VT

Dumb

TimeP,

Recall

When the transfer
name programmed:

Extension

destination

number

extension

(DN)
has a

In an SLT, the CO line and extension Transfer
Recall signals are exactly the same as the CO
line and extension incoming call signals.
~.

_..

3-E-3

F. Other

Features

1.00 Station Message
Detail
Recording
(SMDR)
SMDR Parameters

Description

Page Length

When an output device such as the printer
‘provided with RS-232C interface etc., is
connected
to the system, it is possible to print out
the foliowing information.
l

Information
about outgoing
Information
about incoming
Error log data
Programming
data
Traffic data

The page length may be selected to position a
title and data on each page.
_ ,,
A page length code indicates the number of
lines per page.
A title will be printed on the first three lines of
each page.

CO calls
CO calls

To execute SMDR, connect the output device to
SIO #2 port of RS-232C on the basic shelf (KXT3361 CO) and set ‘System-Operation”,
SMDR to
“Yes.”
To print out the information
about outgoing CO
calls, set ‘System-Operation”,
Outgoing Duration
Log to -Yes.”
To print out the information
about incoming CO
calls, set “System-Operation”,
Incoming Duration
Log to -All Call.”
To print out error log data, set “SystemOperation”,
Error Log to “Yes.”
To prinr out programming
data, set “SystemOperaiion”,
Programming
to “Yes.”
To prinT out traffic data, set ‘System-Operation”,
Tra’ffic io “Yes.”

4
.
.
.

4 lines per page
.
.
.

9’9

b9 lines per page

Standard

Continuous

Paper

g-e -w-s
T !
T
page
66
lines
x
length
8
Fi
o-----o
:

8%T

JJDefault)

machine
H perforation

Programming

(11 inches)

:
i

skip
1 perforation

0’
E
8
!

To print data, page length must be longer than
skip perforation
by four or more lines.

System Programming

Skip’ Perforation

;ysterr;-Operation”,
SMDR
Page Length (4-99)
Skip Perf (O-95)

The skip perforation
code indicates the number
of lines to be skipped.
When the print head
reaches the line designated,
the print head
moves to the top position of the next page.

OutGoing Duration Log
Incorning
Duration
Log
Atiendant
Duration
Special Carrier Name
Prim Secret Dial
Error Log/Programming/Traffic
System-Communication
Interface”

0
1
2
.

.
I.I
/,‘,I

3-F-l

Print head does not skip. (Default)
Print head skips the last line.
Print head skips the last two lines.
.
.
.
Print head skips the last 95 lines.
l

Typical

SMDR

Call Detail Report

(Informatiorl

abodt

CO ca!Is)

t*tC*~r**tfttl.l*ttt**.*.........*..~..*~.~~

. ..I
D a1 Number

Date
Time
T CD Sour
f**t*t****t*trtttt****...*..*.~*~..~~.~~..*..**~

Dest

03/24/91
03/24/91

T1017
T1014

1011 ~23456'3?0123456
1011 4222144

10:03AM
10:05AM

1
1

El011
El012

(6)

(1)

...'
)
(2)

(6)

00:05'12
00:01'24

Time (start of call)
10:05AM
5a.m.orp.m.
-r- minute
I
hour

(7)

Dest (destination:
EXXXIEXXXX
A0
Al/A2

DN (directory

xxxlxxxx
(Blank)

(10)

called party)
: extension number
: DISA, OGM-UCD
: Attendant Console number
: trunk physical number

number)
: used directory number
: when using CO button

(8)

Dial Number
Dial Number printout type changes
depending on the setting of “SystemOperation”, Special Carrier Name.
When it is set to “Dial”:
The number dialed to the CO line is
printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.
When it is set to “User Name”:
The name stored in “Special Carrier
Access”, Name is printed out in three
letters or marks.
When it is set to “Default”:
When using Equal Access, “EC?1 to EQ4”
is printed out.
When using OCC Access, “OCl to OC4”
is printed out.

(9)

Duration (duration of call)
00 : 01 ’24
71 second
minute
I’- hour

number)

(4) CD (condition code)
A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD
handling
Al : Attendant Console 1 handling
A2 : Attendant Console 2 handling
Dl : DISA code 1
D2 : DlSAcode 2
D3 : DlSAcode 3
04 : DISA code4
D5 : DISA code 5
D6 : DlSAcode 6
D7 : DISA code 7
D8 : DlSAcode 8
FW : Call Forwarding to Trunk
RM : Remote Maintenance
RA : Remote Alarm
TR : Transfer
OR : COS Override (Dial transfer,
Walking COS)

1234567890

(9)

TXXXX

lor2

(5)

Duration
Act code
r-~tf*tttt~*ft*l**tt**

ia,

(7)

Date (start of call)
03124191
Iyear
day
IT month

(3) T (tenant
5

..*tff.tt****ttltfr.1*

(10) Act code (account code)
Account code is printed
10 digits.

Sour (source: calling party)
EXXXIEXXXX
: extension number
A0
: DISA, OGM-UCD
Al IA2
: Attendant Console number
TXXXX
: trunk physical number

3-F-2

out at a maximum

2.00 Off Premise
(OW

3.00 Walking

Extension

Station

Description

It is possible to move an extension to a new
location without re-programming.
When moving a telephone,
dial the feature
number for “Walking Station Set” at both the
source and destination
telephones.
After the move, dial the feature number for
“Walking Station Cancel” and the original
extension number of the moved extension.
Up
to two telephones
in a system can be moved
simultaneously.
Before executing this function, assign ‘SystemClass of Service (1/2)n, Walking Station to “Yes”
for the extension.

Single line telephones
.-staI!ed c” the premise
can be operated via a public or prrvate network in
exactly the same way as extension which are on
the premise.
Up to 80 Off Premise Extensions can be installed
per system.
The OPX card and OPX Power Unit are required.
OPX must be set in the ‘Configuration-Slot
Assignment.”
Programming

Programming
Reference

System Programming
System-Class

Dumb

(l/2)“,

9-D-4.01

10-C-7.00

Plan (7/g)“,
Set
Cancel

9-D-6.07

10-C-10.00

of Service

Walking Station
“System-Numbering
Walking Station
Walking Station

Conditions
When an incoming call is placed to OPX, ringing
is heard in all the CO line incoming patterns.
A doorphone
incoming call cannot be sent to an
OPX telephone.

-.y,

Conditions
It is possible to move a telephone to an extension
which is in the preinstall
status. .Ln this case, dial
the feature number for “Walking Station Set” only
at the extension to be moved, and dial the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
original extension number at the destination
extension.
With a PITS, this function
;” <&‘DN.

is executed
t

from a

The telephone type (PITS, SLT, OPX) must be the
same at the source and destination.
If a busy tone is heard when dialing the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
extension number, it means that the moving
extension is being used (possibly by another
station with an SDN of the moving station) and
the function cannot be completed.
In cases like
this, dial a ain. If our PITS has a display, it
shows: ckd
Try Agarn
Dialing the feature number for “Walking Station
Cancel” and the extension number at the move
destination in a PITS cannot be done with the SPPHONE on.
First lift the handset and then proceed.
3-F-3

Operation
Before proceeding
with the move, complete steps
1 lo 3 at the source and destination
extensions.
1. Lift the handset
PHONE button.

t23
q
4s.
7..
I

6. Replace

the handset
SP-PHONE
button

or press the

or press the SP(Supplement)

2. Dial the feature
“Walking Station

number

When moving to an extension in the pre-iniialied
status, follow steps 1 to 3 for the extension
before moving it.
No settings are required for an extension in the
pre-installed
status.

for

Set.”

. Confirmation
tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
WST (E xxxx) ON
$
Extension

3. Replace the handset
SP-PHONE button.

number
or press the

After the move, complete steps 4 to 6 at the
move destination
extension.
4. Lii the handset
B-

5. First dial the feature number for
“Walking Station Cancel” and
then dial the original extension
number.
Confirmation
tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
l

1 WST (E xxxx) OFF ]

3-F-4

Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back

4.00

Description

Conditions

Up to four types of OGM’s can be recorded by the
Operator 1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so
that different messages can be used for different
situations.

( 1) Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each DISA card is determined
by the system
programming
“Special Attendant-DISA”
tenant.
The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and
play back the OGM within the same tenant.

The following four types of OGM can be recorded
respectively:
DISA, UCDl, UCDP and W-UP (Wake-up)
OGM for outside

(2) Recording of OGM
. OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
following four types:

parties

OGM for DISA is played to the outside patty who
called the system via DISA feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA).“)

1. OGMl for UCD with OGM
2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM
3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)

OGM for UCD 1 and UCD 2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-with
OGM.“)
OGM for extension

(3) Playing back of OGM
The following two ways are available:

OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wakeup message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 Tmed
Reminder y-ith
OGM (Wake-up Call).“)
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds

If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
same in a tenant, the same message is
recorded for them at a time.

users

A. By selecting an OGM type
B. By designating
the logical number
each DISA card directly.

long.
l

A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be installed to the system.
..;
Usage of each DISA card is determined
by the’
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-l .OO “Special Attended-DISA.“)

System

Programming

‘System-Numbering
OGM Record

Plan

(g/9)‘,

9-06.09

10-C-10.00

For Use

9-K-1.00

10-G40.00

OGM Playback
‘Special

Attended-DISA”.

3-F-5
(40993)

If there are multiile DISA cards of the same
type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number.

(4) o?hers
Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.

Programming

Operation
Recording
Attendant
“Outgoing
Back.“)

OGM from PITS (For Operation from
Console, refer to Section 6-J-8.00
Message (OGM) Recording and Playing

If your PITS has a display,
shows:

+
T

1 xxxxxxxx
1. Lift the handset
PHONE button.

or press the SP-

UCD-OGMl
UCD-OGM2
DISA-OGM

Dial the feature number for CGM
Record ‘791” (default) and the
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.

In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is
terminated and playback starts automatically.
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
.\
afterward.

Rec. : 00

In step 3 if you wish to change the message
during recording, you can start recording again
by dialing I’++.”

T
Indicates recording
time, counts up by
second.

In step 4 if you wish to intenupt and finish
playback, press the MEMORY button.

or
or
or WkupOGM

3. Begin your message.

NJ-m
qWY

4. As soon as you finish, press the
MEMORY button.

The MEMORY
red.

indicator

or press the

(Supplement)

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

T
UCD-OGMl
UCD-OGM2
DISA-OGM

or
or
or Wkup-GGM

Replace the handset
SP-PHONE button.

The MEMORY indicator flashes
in red 60 wink, confirmation
tone
3 is heard.

xxxxxxxx

When playback is finished, the
MEMORY indicator goes out.
You hear confirmation
tone 3,
then no tone.

(Resource number)
1 : OGMl for UCD
2 : OGM2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
--’
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

Play : 00

Indicates playback
time, counts up by
second.

; You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

lights in

After confirmation
tone 3
sounds, the recorded message
is played back automatically.

3-F-6
(40993)

Playing

back OGM

(Supplement)

1. Lift the handset
PHONE button.
L

or press the SP-

In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish
playback, press the MEMORY button.

During playback you can start pfaybadc
from the beginning
by dialing rc .2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Playback 792” (default) and a
number below in succession.
(Resource number)
1 : OGMl for UCD
2: OGM2forUCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
(“” and
l 1:
* 2:
* 3:
*m
--

DISA No.)
selectscard
selects card
selects card
card

1
2
3
4

The MEMORY indicator lights in
fed.
You hear confirmation
tone 3,
then the message.

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

(DISA-OGM

Play: 00

; -When playback is finished, you
hear confirmation
tone 3, then
no tone.
l

The MEMORY

indicator

goes

Out.

3. Replace the handset
SP-PHONE button.

or press the

3-F-7
(40993)

again

5.00

Intercept
Routing-No
Answer (IRNA)

Description

Programming

If an incoming outside call directed to a single
extension is not answered in a specified time:
period, it can be redirected to another destination
in the system.

System

“Group-Trunk
Intercept
Intercept
“System-System
Intercept
(System)

Another destination
can be:
An Attendant Console
An extension user
A Voice Mail extension
l

For further information about IRNA and a Voice
Mail extension, refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice
Processing System (VPS).”
-*This feature also applies to the following calls.

i
l

When an
extension
answered
Reminder

Conditions
Intercept
following

incoming outside call rings back at the
who once put the call on hold, is not
in a specified time period. (Held
Call)

Routing-No Answer
incoming CO calls.

works for the

1. All incoming CO calls other than calls
placed on DlLl : N, Private CO, Attendant
Consoles, Remote and UCD
2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to
Attendant Consoles)
3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to
Attendant Consoles, calls on Exclusive
Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)
4. An incoming outside call via DISAIDID
which comes in on an extension in the DND
mode.

When an incoming outside call rings back at the
extension who once transferred
the call to
another extension, is not answered in a
specified time period. (Transfer Recall)

The destination
of Intercept Routing during day
and night are assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”,
Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing
(Night) on a trunk group basis.
Set the duration
“System-System
Out (System).

Group (11’2)“.
Routing (Day)
Routing (Night)
Timer”.
Routing Time-Out

Intercept Routing Time-Out
WW

Programming

Call Forwarding
or Do Not Disturb feature
assigned on the IRNA destination
does not work
on the call which has been transferred to it by the
IRNA feature.

to start Intercept Routing in
lamer”, Intercept Routing Time-

If the IRNA destination
is not currently available to
answer the call transferred
by the IRNA feature,
the call may receive the treatment of the Station
Hunting feature.

The duration to start Intercept Routing for D&A
calls follows the setting in “System-System
Timer”.
Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA).
For details about DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA).”

If the destination
extension of a direct incoming
outside call is in the data line security mode,
IRNA feature does not work on it.
Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 “Data Line Security” for
further information.
If the destination

is a PITS with display, it shows:

3-F-8
(30393)

CO: PANASONIC/

6.00

Rerouting

Description

Programming

If an incoming outside call cannot be placed
anywhere, the call can be routed to another
destination.
This is called Rerouting.
Rerouting will take place in the following cases.

,l.

lf the system cannot determine
the
destination
to place the call (for example,
no destination
is assigned).
2. if the system determines
the destination
but
the destination cannot currently receive the
call (for example, it is not “In Service”).
3. If a call arrives at a trunk which is set to
“Outgoing Only.”

If a call is rerouted, the call will be s&
following destinatiotis:

Conditions
If a call is rerouted to an extension user and the
user’s PITS has a display, if shows:
-&le>
--w

CO : PANASONIC

to the
Indicates

1. lf “Group-Trunk
Group”, Intercept Routing
(Day/Night)
is assigned, the call is sent to
the assigned destination.*
2. If it is not assigned, the call is sent to
Operator 1 in the receiving tenant.
* If the assigned destination
is a Voice Mail
extension, the call is not sent to it.
Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing
System (VPS). for further information.

3-F-9
(21292)

f
the name of the CO line.

7.00

Calling Party Control
Signal Detection

(CPC)

Description

Programming

CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is the on-hook
indication (disconnect signal) sent through the CO
line when either calling or called party goes onhook.
To support efficient utilization of the CO lines, the
system monitors the status of the CO lines, and
when CPC signal is detected, the system
disconnects
the CO lines connected compulsorily.
In default mode, CPC signal detection works on
incoming CO calls, and does not work on outgoing
CO calls (except once they are placed on hold or
consultation
hold).
In this case, if the extension user remains off-hook
after the completion of an outgoing CO call, the
system does not release ail the switches used to
establish the connection,
and a CO line connected
will continue to be seized by the extension user
ineffectively.
To prevent the extension users from such invalid
. seizure of CO lines, it is administrable
to make
CPC signal detection effect on outgoing CO calls
by using CPC command at dumb programming
mode.
This feature is assignable on a CO line basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-49.00 “CPC Detect TimingOutgoing CO Calls (CPC)” for further information.

3-F-i 0

System Programming

“Trunk-CO Line”, CPC Detection
‘CPC Signal Detect TimingOutgoing CO Calls (CPC).

Reference
VT ( Dumb

9-F-l .OO 1O-C-18.00
1o-c-49.00

Conditions
Some switching system of the central office may
send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence and the
attempt of making a call may be terminated.
If your switching system does not send CPC-like
signal in dialing sequence, we recommend
to
make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO
calls.
CPC signal detection can be assigned to
incoming CO calls only or both on incoming and
outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is
assigned to.outgoing
CO calls only, it does not
function.

CO Busy Out

8.00

Description

Operation

Allows the operator 1 (extension user or attendant
console) to busy out the invalid CO lines.
Any user (including the operator at attendant
console) cannot seize the busied-out CO lines.
To busy out the invalid CO line, dial the feature
number for “Busy Out Trunk” and trunk port
physical number of the associated
CO line.
To return the busied-out CO line to service, dial the
feature number for “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk-port
physical number of the associated
CO line.

Setting CO Busy Out to a CO line (from operator
1)
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
You hear dial tone.

2. Dial the feature number for “Busy
Out Trunk” and trunk port physical
number.

It is assignable to busy out the invalid CO lines
automatically
by using ABC command at dumb
programming
mode.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-50.00 “Automatic Busy-Out
Count (ABC)n for further information.
For CO Busy Out from Attendant Console, refer to
Section 6-J-l 0.00 “CO Access Control.”

You hear confirmation
tone.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 Busy Out: T xxxx 1
-?Trunk port physical
number

Programming
System Programming
System-Numbering
Busy Out Trunk
Unbusy Trunk
“Automatic
Busy-Out
(ABC)”

Plan (9/g)“,

Count

3. Replace the handset
SP-PHONE button.

Reference
v-r
Dumb
9-O-6.09

104-10.00

10-c-50.00

Canceling

CO Busy Out (from dperator
1. Lift the handset
PHONE button.

Conditions

913
q

None

45s
,a*
Is

or press the

or press the SP-

You hear dial tone.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Unbusy Trunk” and trunk port
physical number.
l

You hear confirmation
tone.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Unbusy:

T xxxx 1

T
Trunk port physical
number
3. Replace the handset
SP-PHONE button.

3-F-l 1

or press the

9.00

Parallel Connection
Extensions

of
Programming

Description
An): ‘+g!e L,?e Telep3one can be conneced
parallely with a PITS telephone.
When para!!ei connection
is made, an extension
user caq make and answer a call by usinc either of
both telephones.

However, the operation of parallely
Single Line Telephone is somewhat
follows:

connected
restriced

Conditions

Not only a Single Line Telephone but an
answering machine, a facsimile, or a modem
(personal computer) can be connected parallely
with certain PITS telephones.

Features not available are:
External Feature Access
Conference
Pickup Dialing
Account Code Entry
l
l

The parallel connection
of a Single Line
Telephone and a PITS telephone becomes
available under the following conditions.

l
l

Cannot make a call when parallely conneded
telephone
is:
In the BGM mode
Being paged through built-in speaker
In the PITS programming
mode

PITS
-

l
l

Will not ring if parallely connected
PITS telephone
is:
In the Intercom Automatic Answer mode
In the Voice Alerting mode
l

To make parallel connection
effective, assign
“Extension-Station,”
Parallel Connect to “Yes” at
parallely connected PITS telephone side.

3-F-l 2

Parallely connected PITS telephones
are
interfaced with HLC card.
The number of Single Line Telephones
which
can be connected
parallely with PITS
telephones
must be within 48 lines per shelf.

10.00 Voice

Processing

System

(VPS)

Description

The KX-T336 system provides the following features
Voice Processing System (VPS) - KX-TVP15D.
Voice Mail Integration (Section 3-F-l 0.01)

to enhance

the performance

of th,e

DTMF Tone Integration

(Section

3-F-l 0.02)

Voice Mail lntearation
The KX-T336

system can forward

callers directly to the called extension’s

mailbox.

(Configuration)
incoming
DIL 1 fl

MO& (Day):
ATT
co

DIL 13
DISA
DID
co

DIL 1 :I
DISA
DID
co

v
ExLlI

Ext.

Hunting

ATT

Console

VPS

Hunting

FWD (Follow on ID is sent)
i

IRNA (Follow on ID is sent)
FWD (Follow on ID is sent)

FWD (Follow on ID is sent)

3-F-l 3
(21292)

VPS

DTMF Tone lntearation
The KX-T336 syste-r: can serd codes (DTMF tones) to indicate
ringing, disconnect,
e!c.) in addition ?o the normal call progress
(Configuration

the state of the call (busy, answered,
tones.

1)
DIL 1 :l
DlSA
DID
co

Ext. 1
Transfer

Ext.
I
Hunting

,!s,

] FWD(FollowonIDissent)*

VPS
$
Hunting

Hunting

*Available if the Voice Mail
Integration feature is enabled.

(Configuration

2)
DIL 1:l
DISA
DID

I co I
FWD

(Follow

on ID is sent)

nL
l

Hunting

Hunting
I

1 Hunting

*Available if the Voice Mail
Integration feature is enabled.

3-F-l 4
(21292)

10.01

Voice

Mail

Integration

Description

The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension’s
voice mailbox, if the caller is forwarded to a Voice Mail Port (all calls, busy
or no answer) and this feature is enabled by the extension user.
The KX-T336 system automatically
sends the digits of mailbox number of
the called extension with DTMF tones to the Voice Mail Port before
connecting
the caller.
These digits are commonly known as the Follow on ID.
A max of 16 extension ports (HLC or SLC card) of the KX-T336 system
can be programmed
for connection to the Voice Processing System
KX-TVP150.
This feature

applies

Calls transferred

to the following

calls.

by :

Call Forwarding

All Calls

Call Forwarding

Busy/Off-hook

Call Forwarding

No Answer

Call Forwarding
- Busy/No Answer
(including the calls transferred
to the extensions on which one of the
above mentioned Call Forwarding feature is assigned.)

Intercept Routing - No Answer (RNA)
(including the transfer recalled outside call and held reminder
call)
l

outside

Extensions assigned as Voice Mail Port are not allowed to connect to
each other. For example, an Automated
Attendant Port is not allowed to
connect to another Voice Mail Port.
Note this feature
Programming
(Dumb programming

mode)

can be programmed

in Dumb

mode only.

1) Press [CTRLI key and
key simultaneously
screen is displayed at VT programming
mode.

when Main Menu

2) Enter m F] I[
and press [G/
key when Dumb programming
mode initial prompt ( ; > ) is displayed.
Then programming
mode initial
prompt ( ; PRG > ) is displayed on the screen.
3) Program

the required

3-F-l 5
(21292)

items as follows:

Voice Mail Port Assignment:
Input Format

PRG>VMD

AT i;eT yk -::&r

1 ’.: 5~

1; 7

Input Value for
Item Number

To remove the existing setting, use ‘%CLR” command.
For further information
about prcgrammng,
refer to Section
“Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD).”

Mailbox

Number

Assignment:

Input Format

PRG>MBN
index

Input Value for
Item Number

AT index Number

Number

Item

= Physical
-* Assigning

Number
Items

CR
of Extension

Input Value

’

Mailbox

Number

Up to 10 digits of numeric
characters
(O-9), “*” and ” # ”
(Default

Mailbox
number)

“Mailbox

Group

= Extension

Number specific to each extension (same
is assigned to all extensions
by default.

To remove
For further

Hunting

Port or DN

Number
None

Conditions
1) Station

1 O-C-54.00

the existing
information

Number

Number)

as the extension

setting, use “$CLR” command.
..
about programming,
refer to Section

1 O-C-55.00

(MBN).”

- Circular
To use the Voice Mail Integration
feature efficiently, we recommend
to
program a station hunting group among the Voice Mail (VM) Extensions,
this would reduce the possibility of the callers encountering
the busy

status.
When “Station Hunting

Group - Circular” is programmed
among the VM
Extensions,
a cal! transferred
to the busy VM Extension (including “Not
INS” status) by Call Forwarding
(FWD) or Intercept
Routing
No Answer
(RNA) feature will be automatically
transferred
to an idle VM Extension.

3-F-l 6
(2 1292)

2) Call Forwarding

and Station

Hunting
The KX-T336 system can send the Follow on ID (the digits of mailbox
number of tne called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the caller is

forwarded :3 a Voice Mail Port.
The foilowng simplified flow chart shows the treatment
forwarded to a VM extension.
Is FWD destination

of the call

a VM extension?

t
Follow on ID is not sent.
No

Does It have the next hunt station

Yes

The treatment of the call
depends on the types of
the Call Forwarding
feature assigned.
(Refer to “5. Treatment
of the call forwarded to
the busy extension/VPS”
on page 3-F-46 for
further information.)

Is there any idle VM extension
Hunting Group?

‘&LStation

within

Yes
I

I
Callers are forwarded to the called
extension’s mailbox directly.

3-F-l 7
(21292)

3) intercept

Routing

No Answer

(IRNA)

and Station

Hunting

The KX-T336 system car! seti the Follow on ID (the digits of
mailbox number o! i% cali+z efle-slonj
to the Voice Mail Port, if the
caller is transferred
10 a Voke Ma2 Port by IRNA feature.
The following simplified flow than shows the treatment of the call
which has been transferred
10 a VM extension by the IRNA feature.

No
Is IRNA destination
I

a VM extension?

Follow on ID is not sent.
No

Yes

NO
. -I

Jv
I
1 Does it have the next hunt station?*
Yes

I
1

(Refer to “8. Treatment
of
the call transferred
to the 4
busy extensionNPS”
on
page 3-F-51 for further
information.)

Is there any idle VM extension
a Station Hunting Group?

Caller are transferred

within

to the called

If a call transferred to a b&y i&l extension by IRNA feature is “Transfer
recalled call” or “Held Reminder Call.” it will be put on the waiting status
whether the IRNA destination has the next station assignment or not.

3-F-l 8
(21292)

4) Call Transfer

and Voice

Mail MegratIon
Nor only an morning
call directed to the extension,
but a transferred
call
jbo? screened and unscreened
call transfer) is applied to the Voice Mail

Integration
Camp-on

teature.
Transfer

to a VM extension

and Transfer

Recall

Example
VM. 108 (busy)

VM.107 (busy)

VM.106 (busy)

Ext.101

Ext.100
I>

Making a
call

Transferring
a call

FWD-All Calls
to VM.106

1. The Ext.1 00 makes a call to the Ext.1 01.
2. The Ext.101 answers the call from the Ext.100. and transfers
Ext.1 02 (Call Forwarding - All Calls to VM 106 is assigned).
replaces the handset.
3. Since FWD destination
Station Hunting Group
waiting status.

it to the
Then

VM.106 and all other VM extensions in the
are busy, the call from Ext.1 00 is put on the

&-on
Transfer to a VM extension>
If VM.106 becomes idle before the transfer recall timer has been elapsed,
the call is connected to the VM.106, and the caller can access the
Mailbox of the fZxt.100 automatically.
Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension is only available
Forwarding-All
Calls” is assigned to the Ext.1 02.

If kM.106 is still busy after the transfer
call will ring back at Ext. 101.

when “Call

.
recall timer has been elapsed,

What if Call Forwarding
(FWD)-No Answer
extension
where a call has been transferred
(Unscreened
Call Transfer)
?

the

is assigned
on the
without announcement

A call is forwarded to the FWD destination after the Call Forwarding
No
Answer timer has been expired.
If the FWD destination
is busy, the forwarded call will ring back at the
extension who transferred
the call.
(Note)
In above case, if the destination of Call Forwarding-No
Answer is an
Attendant Console, the transferred call is not forwarded to an Attendant
Console.
The transferred call rings back at the extension who transferred
the call
after the Call Forwarding
No Answer timer has been expired.
3-F-l 9
(21292)

5) Others
(a) If the extension to which calls are to be ‘cwardec! :!seif is !n a call
forward mode, a call will not be forward=
t,nnerrve
arc ir IS
connected to the first forwarded extension.
Example
Ext. 100
Anincomingcall

Ext.101

(Programming)

__j

Forward to :
Ext.1 01

Ext.

102

‘1

Forward to :
Ext.102

An incoming call is forwarded to Ext.1 01 and connected
forwarded to Ext.1 02 furthermore.

tc tt, not

(b) If an Operator calls to the extension in a call forward mode by
employing “One time FWD cancel” feature, a call is not forwarded
furthermore
and rings on the FWD setting extension.
(c) Conference

call

The VM extension

Reference

can not originate

a conference

call.

(Example)
During a call with the Party 1 while putting the Party 2 on consultation
hold.
If an SLT extension (not a VM extension) presses the switchhook,
a
conference
call among three parties is established.
.I
In case of a VM extension, it will be connected to the Party 2 and the
Party 1 is disconnected.

Station Hunting
Intercept

Routing

Call Fowarding

Circular
No Answer

(Section

3-D-5.02)

(IRNA) (Section

(FWD) (Section

3-F-5.00)

4-F-2.00,
.-_ Section 5-D-2.00)
Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD) (Section 1 O-C-54.00)
Mailbox Number (MBN) (Section 1 O-C-55.00)

3-F-20
(21292)

10.02

DTMF Tone Integration

Description

enabled, the KX-T336
On extensions
~7 +.he Vz+ce Ma:! Port parameter
system can set-c =36es 3 7vtF xnesj to indicate the sate of the call
(busy, answered.
- -qing. sscorrect,
etc.) in addition to the normal call
ccces erable the Voice Processing system to
progress tones. ‘;lese
I
immediately
recoqxe
:ne zrrez
state of the call and improve its call
handling performaxe.
These codes apply to all incoming calls: Outside
calls only indicate 5sconnect
(provided the KX-T336 system is
programmed
properly for CPC detection and the Central Office sends the
CPC signal).

Programming

1) Press m
key and 13 key simultaneously
screen is displayed
at VT programming
mode.

when Main Menu

2) Enter p/ /R) EI and press j-1
key when Dumb programming
mode initial prompt (;>) is displayed.
Then programming
mode initial
prompt (; PRG>) is displayed on the screen.
3) At the programming
;PRG>WS3

AT31

prompt

(PRG>),

type:

(J)

The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT
; PRG>WS3
AT3
DTMF-Tone
Integration . . .. .._....... N
3
:
t
INPUT >>
I

4) At the Input prompt

(INPUT

>>), type:

; PRG>WS3
AT3
3
:
DTMF-Tone
Integration
,
INPUT >> Y fl (--I )
,
5) The screen
follows:
‘.S...

*;.

; PRG
3
,
.
.
1
>

displays

>>) as follows:

. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . N

the Input prompt

(INPUT

>>) for Item 1 as

_
> WS 3 AT 3
-As _
N
: DTMF-Tone
Integration . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .
INPUT >> Y
: DIL 1 N CO Key Only .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. N
INPUT >> I

6) To store the nets assignment
(INPUT >>), type:

to the system,

::-i-,

.%*

at Input prompt

; PRG>WS3
AT3
3 : DTMF-Tone
Integration .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. N
INPUT >> Y
,
1 : DIL 1 :N CO Key Only .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .._ N
INPUT >> $ EOD m (-I)
This assigns
programming

the DTMF-Tone
Integration
feature to the system,
prompt (PRG>) appears on the screen again.
3-F-21
(21292)

and the

Conditions

The following

the DTMF codes,

condition

system would

Code

table describes
where the KX-T336
Call State
Ringback

call state and typicai

send the code.
Typical Conditions

Tone

Sent to the VPS when the exteqsion

17 ,

dialed is ringing.

mIl

Busy Tone

Sent to the VPS when the extension
dialed is busy.

@ml

Reorder

Sent to the VPS if it dials an invaiid
extension number or if it is
inadvertently
connected to another
VPS.

Tone

DND Tone

Sent to the VPS if the dialed extension
has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).

mzl

Answer

Sent to the VPS when the called
extension answers the call.

IZIEI

Forwarded
to Voice
Mail (Ringing)

Sent to the VPS if the caller is
forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is available to accept
the call.

Elrzl

Forwarded
to Voice
Mail (Busy)

Sent to the VPS if the caller is
forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is not avaiiable to
accept the call.

Forwarded
Extension

Sent to the VPS if the caller is
forwarded to another, non-voice
extension.

to
(Ringing)

Confirmation

Tone

Disconnect
(Reorder Tone)

3-F-22

(21292)

mail,

Sent to the VPS when it successfully _
dials a message waiting lamp on or
message waiting lamp off code.
Sent to the VPS when the calling party
disconnects.

A. Treatment

1. Direct

of the call transferred
by the VPS
The treatment of the call from a VPS extensiosvaries depending
on the
conditions.
The following detailed information
expiains the Treatment of a call from a
VPS extension by the types of the cai:.

Call
l-l.

To an extension

Transfer
Ext. 1
The type of the DTMF

called extension
Code

l-2.

Tone

on the status of the

Conditions

Call State
Ringback

lmzl

tones sent to the VPS depends
as follows.

The Ext.1 is idle.

Busy Tone

The Ext.1 is busy.

IBIn

DND Tone

The Ext.1 is in the DND mode.

mzl

Answer

The Ext.1 answers

111

To another

VPS extension

A call from a VPS extension~doeis
it is idle or not.
Code
mzl

the call.

Call State
Reorder

Tone

3-F-23
(21292)

ring on another

VPS extensibn

whether

Conditions

The VPS 1 is inadvertently
to the VPS 2

connected

2. Station

Hunting
2-l.

All members

of a huntino

arouo are non-VPS

extensions

Hunting~EkP~

f
Ext.1

Transfer

Hunting1

Code

Call State
Ringback

Tone

Busy Tone

2-2.

All members

of a huntina

Hunting
Hunting
~

Group

Ext.2

Code
lmzl

Call State
Busy Tone

3-F-24
(21292)

IHunting

Conditions

At least one extension
group is idle.
All members
busy.

of a hunting

group are

arouo are VPS extensions

VPS3

A call from a VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

does not ring on another

VPS extension

Conditions
The VPS I is inadvertently
to another VPS.

connected

2. Station

Hunting

(continued)
2-3.

Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions

A) When the destination

of a huntina

are members

aroup

is a VPS extension

A call from a VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

does not ring on another

VPS extension

Conditions
The VPS 1 is inadvertently

to another

B) When the destination

is a non-VPS

VPS 1

extension.

Ext.1
*

The call hunts for the idle non-VPS
Code

Call State

(A ii]

Ringback

13 /?$

Busy Tone

Tone

connected

VPS.

Hunting Group
~

extension

vps

2 ,

1 Hunting

only.
Conditions

The Ext.1 or 2 is idle.
Both Ext.1 and 2 are busy. *

* This way, the VPS 1, typically an A&omatad-Attendant,
knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-25

(21292)

3. Call Forwarding

(FWD)
3-1.

FWD to a non-VPS

extension

Caller

Forward

VPS 1

Ext.2

FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)
Code
Ringback

Ell3l
[a

Call State

111

(FWD-No

Conditions

Tone

The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone

The Ext.2 is busy.

Answer)
Conditions

Code

Call State

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
^
Ext.2 and ringing on it)

The Ext.2 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is y ng at the Ext.1 )

The Ext.2 is busy.

Em
Em

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.
The call is still ringing at the
Ext.1.

3-F-26
(21292)

Time

3. Call Forwarding

(FWD)
3-2.

(continued)

FWD

to a VPS

extension

Transfer

Forward

. 4

VPs

FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)
Call State

Code
Em

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
VPS 2.) *’

Conditions
The VPS 2 is idle.

The VPS 2 is busy.

Call State

Conditions

(A( 111 ’ Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
.L
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
L
@ 111
RingbackTone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2.) *’

The VPS 2 is idle.

1x1 FJ

The VPS 2 is busy.

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer Trme
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone **

*1 This way. the VPS 1, typically an Automa!ed-Attendant,
the VPS 2 and take another incoming
c&i.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to tie VPS 2.
**

I
/
I
I
:I

Answer)

Code

El@/

to the

Busy Tone **

(FWD-No

;
/

This way, the VPS
caller an opportunity

1, typically
to leave

3-F-27
(21292)

J
can release

the call to

an Automated-Attendant,
knows it must give the
a message
before releasing
the call.

4. Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting
4-l.
FWD to a non-VPS
(All members

extension

of a titinting

group

are non-VPS

extensions)

FWD r:ode

(FWD-Ail/Busy)

El131

Ringback

Elm

Busy Tone

(FWD-No

At least one extension
group is idle.

Tone

All members
busy.

El111

of a hunting

group

are

Conditions

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is rtging

At least dhe extension
of a hunting group is
idle.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.

Elm

of a hunting

Answer)

Code

ElII]

Conditions

Call State

Code

Time

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
to an idle
extension of a hunting group
~ and ringing on it.)
Ringback Tone
(The call is r:ging

All extensions
hunting group

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.

Time

The call is still ringing at Ext.1.

3-F-28
(21292)

of a
are busy.

4. Call Forwarding

and Station

4-2.

Hunting

(continued)

FWD to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting

group

are VPS extensions)

FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

qn1
c

121

(MID-No

At least one VPS
extension of a hunting
to an idle VPS
1 group is idle.
and ringing on it.) *l

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded

1 &tension

Answer)

q q
111

Conditions

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is r?ng

%lm

At least one VPS
extension of a hunting
group is idle.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
-L
RingbackTone
(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS
extension and ringing on it.) *1
Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.l)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.
L
Ringback Tone **

All members of a
hunting group are busy.
Time

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
can release
an idle VPS extension
and take another incoming
call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext. 1 is sent to an idle VPS extension.
**

-.I

All members of a hunting
group are busy.

Busy Tone *2

Code

Conditions

Call State

Code

This way, the VPS
caller an opportunity

1, typically
to leave

3-F-29
(21292)

the call to

an Automated-Attendant,
knows it must give the
a message
before releasing
the call.

4. Call Forwarding

and Station

Hunting

(continued)

(Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions

are members

of a hunting

group)

FWD mode

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS
following the programmed
order.

extensions

in a hunting

group

(FWD-All/Busy)
Code

Conditions

Call State

14 131

Ringback Tone (The call is ringing at Ext.2)

The Ext.2 is idle.

IZIEI

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
VPS 2.) *’

The Ext.2 is busy but
the VPS 2 is idle.

lclm

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.3)

to the

The Ext.%and
are busy.

VPS 2

The Ext.3 and the VPS
3 are idle.

121

All members of a
hunting group are busy.

Busy Tone **

*l This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the

Ext.1

can release the call to

is sent to the VPS 2.

** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-30
(21292)

Call Forwarding

and

Station

Hunting

(FWD-No

(continued)

Answer)

Code

Conditions

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer l7me
has been elapsed.
.lRingback Tone
(The call is forwarded
to the Ext.2

IAIm

The Ext.2 is idle.

and ringing on it.)
Em

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
.L
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
L
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *I

The Ext.2 is busy.
The VPS 2 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is ying

The Ext.2 and VPS 2
are busy.

Call Forwarding
No Answer TTme
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it.)

Ringback Tone
(The call is yging

q
*l

at Ext.1)

121

All member. of a
hunting group are busy.

--at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone *2

Time

This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow

The Ext.3 and the VPS
3 are idle.

can release

the call to

on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.

*2 This way, the VPS
caller an opportunity

1, typically
to leave

3-F-31
(21292)

an Automated-Attendant,
knows it must give the
a message before releasing
the call.

Call

Forwarding

and
--1 I

Station

Hunting

(continued)

‘:v’:3 io a VPS extension
3~::

cz ,e:

VPS and non-VPS

extensio-s

are members

i
t-i,-ting

4,
/

of a hunting
Ext.2

group)

;
Hunting

I_
Hunting Group

FWD mode

A
1 Hunting
I

H-t:ing

The call hunts for both VPS and ncn-VPS
following the programmed
order.

extensions

in a hunting

group

(FWD-All/Busy)
Call State

Code

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

E!iIl

q q

(qq
(FWD-No

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.3)

Busy Tone *z

Conditions

I
I

1 The VPS 2 is idle.
1
I
i The VPS 2.3 and 4 are
i busy.
/ The Ext.3 is idle.

I
1
I

j All members of a
1 hunting group are busy.

Answer)
Call State

Code

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

111

Ringback Toie
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *l

Conditions
The VPS 2 is idle.

Continued

3-F-32
(21292)

4. Call Forwarding

and

Station

Hunting

(continued)
Continued

Code
m

111

131

111

Conditions

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is Tging

The VPS 2,3 and 4 are
busy.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer mrne
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.3 and ringing on it.)
RingbackTone
(The call is rying

All members of a
hunting group are busy.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone **

The Ext.3 is idle.

lime

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.

can release the call to

The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant,
knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

. t. . i

3-F-33
(21292)

B. Treatment

of the call placed

by the extension

The treaiJ%nr
depending
on
The ;en :!y CC j::nation

~5 a non-VPS

extension.

Hunting

riEkl
Hunting

Ext.1
Hunting

Call State
Ringback

Tone

Hunting

v
I
/

Group

1 Hunting

Conditions
l

‘.l *

Busy Tone

At least one member
group is idle.
All members
busy.

of a hunting

group

are

In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l, DISA,DID)
In an incoming outside call is not answered
by the extension
in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred
to another destination.
- IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
l

Z The KX-T336
system sends Follow on ID (mailbox
number
extension)
when a ‘JPS extension
answers the call.

3-F-37
(21292)

of the called
\

...-.
.__

3. Call Forwarding

(FWD)
3-l _

FWD to a non-VPS

extension

Ext./CO

Ext.2

Ext. 1
FWD mode

(FM/D-All/Busy)
Call State
Ringback

The Ext.2 is idle.

Tone *’

Busy Tone *’
(FWD-No

Conditions

The Ext.2 is busy.

Answer)
Call State

Ringback Tone
(The call is ying

Conditions
The Ext.2 is idle.

at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it) *’
Ringback Tone
(The call is ying

The Ext.2 is busy. ~
at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
1
The call is still ringing _at_ the
Ext.1. *

*I In ease of outside calls (DIL 1 :l, DISA,DID)
In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
** The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extensionNPS”
information.

3-F-38
(21292)

for further

3. Call

Forwarding

(FWD) (continued)
3-2.
FWD to a VPS

extension
Fo-&-a-c

(Ext.iCO

Ext.1
FWD mode

(FWD-All

Busy)

Call State

Conditions

The VPS : is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
VPS I.,) *:

to the

Busy Tone *’
(FWD-No

The VPS 1 is busy.

Answer)
Call State

Ringback

Conditions
The VPS 1 is idle.

Tone

(The call is Fing

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer
has been elapsed.
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
VPS 1.) *’

: ._

Trne

to the

Ringback Tone
(The call is rfinging at Ext.1)

The VPS 1 is busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Ime
has been elapsed.
&
Ringback Tone **
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1 .)
*I

The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox
number
extension)
when a VPS extension
answers the call.

of the called

** The treatment
of calls differs depending
on the types of calls.
Refer to -5. Treatment
of the call forwarded
to the busy extensionNPS”
information.

3-F-39
(21292)

for further

4. Call Forwarding

and Station
4-1.

FWD

Hunting
tc a non-VPS

(All members

extension

of a hunting

are non-VPS

group

Hunting

extensions)

r’=+l

Hunting

t
Ext.2
FWD mode

Hunting

Ext.3

(FWD-Ail/Busy)
Call State
Ringback

Tone *’

Busy Tone O2

(RND-No

Conditions
At least one extension
group is idle.
l

of a hunting

All members (including the Ext.1) of a
hunting group are busy.

Answer)
Call State

Ringback Tone
(The call is ying

Conditions
At least one extension of
a hunting group is idle.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.

Time

The call is forwarded
to an idle
extension of a hunting group
and ringing on it. *’
Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
1
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
3.
The call is still ringing at Ext.1. w

All extensions of a
hunting group are busy.

*’ In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID)
In an incoming
outside call is not answered
by the extension
in a specified
time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred
to another destination.
- IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*p The treatment
of calls differs depending
on the types of calls.
Refer to ‘5. Treatment
of the call forwarded
to the busy extension/VPS”
information.
3-F-40
(21292)

for further

4. Call Forwarding

and Station
4-2.

Hunting

(continued)

FWD to a VPS extension
(All members

of a hunting

group

are VPS extensions)

Hunting

pzI

Huntrng

f
Hunting

VPS 1
FWD mode

Group

Hunting

(FWD-All/Busy)
Conditions

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle
VPS extension and ringing on it.) l ’

At least one VPS
extension of a hunting
group is idle.

Busy Tone +’

All members of a hunting
group are busy.

(FWD-No

Answer)
Conditions

Call State
Ringback

At least one VPS
extension of a hunting
group is busy.

Tone

(The call is ringing

at Ext.1)

1
Call Forwarding No Answer
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone

Time

(The call is forwarded to an idle
VPS extension and ringing on it.)*’

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
-1
Call Fonvarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
L
Ringback Tone l 2
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1 .)
l 1

All members of a hunting
group are busy.
‘.’

The KX-T336
system sends Follow on ID (mailbox
number
extension)
when a VPS extension
answers the call.

rZ The treatment

of calls differs depending

Refer to “5. Treatment
information.

of the call forwarded

3-F-41
(21292)

of the called

on the types of calls.
to the busy

extension/VPS”

for further

4. Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting
(continued)
FWD to a non-VPS extension

4.3

(Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions

are members

Hunting

of a hunting

group)

rm+j

Hunting

$
Ext./CO

Ext.2
FWD mcde

Hunting

VPS 1
‘The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS
following the programmed
order.

)

extensions

in a hunting

group

(PWD-All/Busy)
Call State

Conditions

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.2)*’

The Ext.2 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) **

The Ext.2 is busy but the
VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.3) *’

The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are
..
busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.
Ail members of a hunting
group are busy.

Busy Tone *’

4,‘:
*I In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID)
In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and ‘7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
** The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*’ The treatment of calls diirs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to 4. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS”
information.

3-F-42
(21292)

for further

4. Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting
(continued)
(FWD-No Answer)
Conditions

Call State

The Ext.2 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is Fing

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
3.
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
to the Ext.2
and ringing on it.) *’
Ringback Tone
(The call is Fing

- ...

The Ext.2 is busy.
The VPS 1 is idle.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
to the VPS
1 and ringin on it.) *2
Ringback Tone
(The call is Fng

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded
and ringing on it.) *’
-..

The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are
busy.

Ringback Tone
(The call is rfirging

Time

The Ext.3 is idle.

to the Ext.3

at Ext.1)

‘. All members ofa?iunting
group are busy.

Call Forwarding
No Answer IRrne
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is still tinging at Ext.1) *3
*’ In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID)
In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it wilt be transferred to another destination. - IRNA
Refer to ‘6. intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

3-F-43
(21292)

4. Call Forwarding

and Station
*I

4.4

Hunting

(continued)

The KX-T336
system sends Follow on ID (mailbox
number
extension)
when a VPS extension
answers the call.

of the called

’ The treatment
of calls differs depending
on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment
of the call forwarded
to the busy extensionNPS”
information.

-MD to a VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions

are members

of a hunting

for further

group)

Hunting/-ET
Forward

Ext.1
FWD mode

’

Hunti;

VPS 1
L

blunting

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS
following the programmed
order.

Hunting

vps2

extensions

VPS 3

Group

in a hunting

(FWD-Ail/Busy)
Conditions

Call State
Ringbaok Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
2 and ringing on it.) *’

The VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *I

The VPS 1,2 and 3 are
busy.
-.

Busy Tone *’

The Ext.2 is idle.
All members of a hunting
group are busy.

3-F-44
(21292)

] Hunting

group

4. Call Forwarding

and Station

(FWD-No

Hunting

(continued)

Answer)
Conditions

Call State

The VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is y ing at Ext.1)
Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
1
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
1 and ringing on it) *’
Ringback Tone
(The call is yging

The VPS 1,2 and 3 are
busy.

at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding
No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
J.
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.
2 and ringing on it.) *2
Ringback Tone
(The call is Fing

,‘...C’
.--

All members of a hunting
group are busy.

at Ext.i)

Call Forwarding
No Answer
has been elapsed.

The Ext.2 is idle.

Time

Ringback Tone
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *’
*I In case of outside calls (DIL l:l, DISA,DID) _
In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (RNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and 7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further infonnation.
*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*’ The treatment

of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to ‘5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS”
information.

3-F-45
(21292)

for further

Treatment

of the call forwarded

to the busy

extensionNPS

The following table shows the treatment
of the call forwarded to the busy
extension or VPS (including all members of the Station Hunting Group are
busy) by types of the Call Forwarding feature assigned.
Extension

Call Forwarding

- All Calls:

Call

Outside Call
DID

The caller hears busy tone.

__*

Call Forwarding

When the call ringing at
Ext.1 is not answered.

If Ext.1 is
anSLTora
PlTS with
all PDN
buttons are
in use.
When
Ext.1 is
busy or
off-hook.

Call Forwarding

The call
continues to
ring at Ext.1.

Call Forwarding

DISA

The call is put on the waiting status,
and it will be connected to the FWD
destination as soon as it becomes
idle. If the FWD destination is still
busy after the IRNA timer has been
elapsed. a call will be transferred to
the IRNA destination.
_________________-------------If the IRNA destination is not
programmed.
-------‘--------r------‘--------I Thecallwillbe
The call is put
on the waiting
! disconnected
status until the
f within60
FWD destination I seconds after the
becomes idle.
i IRNA timer has
,I beenelapsed.

does not function.
The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be
transferred to the IRNA destination after a
specified time period* has been elapsed.
-__--------------------------------------If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
..
--------‘--T’-‘--------------------------The call
/ The call is disconnected within 60
continues
seconds after the IRNA timer has
to ring at Ii been elapsed.
Ext.1.
I
does not function.

The caller hears busy tone.

Call Forwarding
If Ext.1 isa
PITS and
one or two
PDN
buttons on
it are not in
use.

DIL 1 :l

The 4
continues to
ring on an idle
pDN of f=fi.

No Answer timer + IRNA timer

3-F-46
(21292)

does not function.
The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be
transferred to the IRNA destination after the IRNA
timer has been elapsed.
___----____________----------------------If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
-----------T----------------------------The call
! The call will be disconnected within
continues
i 60 seconds after the IRNA timer
to ring at I has been elapsed.
Ext.1.
I

6. Intercept

Routing

No Answer
6-1.

(IRNA)

IRNA to a non-VPS

extension
Ext.2

co
DIL 1:l
DISA
DID

Call State
Ringback

Conditions
The Ext.2 is idle.

Tone

The Ext.2 is busy.

Busy Tone *
*

6-2.

Refer to S. Treatment of the call transferred
feature’ for further information.

to the busy extensionNPS

by IRNA

IRNA to a VPS extension
VPS 1

co
DIL 1:i
DISA
DID

Call State
Ringback Tone
(The call is transferred
VPS 1.) *’

Conditions

The VPS 1 is idle.
to the

The VPS 1 is busy.

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
** Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred
feature” for further information.

3-F-47
(21292)

to the busy extension/VPS

by IRNA

7. IRNA and Station

Hunting

7-t

IWA

to a non-VPS

(All memoers

extension

of a hunting

group

are non-VPS

extensions)

Hunting +X+1

Hunting

+
Ext.1

Ext.2

OIL 1:i
DISA
DID

Hunting 1

Call State
Ringback

7-2.

1 Hunting

Conditions

Tone

Busy Tone *

Ext.3

At least one extension
is idle.
*.

All members

in a hunting

Refer to ‘8. Treatment of the call transferred
feature” for further information.

IRNA to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting

group

in a hunting

group

group are busy.

to the busy extension/VPS

are non-VPS

by RNA

extensions)

Hunting rkq

t
VPS 1

Ext.1
DIL 1:l
DISA
DID

Hunting L

The call hunts for an idle VPS extension
programmed
order.
Call State
Tone
1
(The call is transferred
VPS extension.) *’

Hunting Group
vps2

in a hunting

1 Hunting

group following

the

Conditions

Ringback

Busy Tone *2

Hunting

to an idle

At least one VPS
extension in a hunting
group is idle.

All members in a hunting
group are busy.

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*I Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.
3-F-48
(21292)

7. IRNA and Station Hunting
(continued)
7.3
to
IRNA
(Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions

are members

of a hunting

group)

Hunting FE/

Hunting

$
Ext.2
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

Hunting L

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS

following

the programmed

vpS

extensions

1 Hunting

in a hunting

group

order.

Calf State

Conditions

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing at Ex-t.2)

The Ext.2 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) *’

The Ext.2 is busy but the
VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone
(The call is ringing

The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are
busy.

at Ext.3)

:::.::.
. _.

The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.

All members of a hunting
group are busy.

Busy Tone **

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
-ACV AT
; Class of Service No. 01 . .. . .. . . . . . N
INPUT>>
I Class of Service No. 02 . .. . .. . .. . . N
INPUT>> Y
I Class of Service No. 03 ... . . .. . . .. N
INPUT>> $ EOD
; PRG>
( Section 1O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )
ACL

_. - ._

-..

; PRG>ACL ATcCR>
; Class of Service No. 01 . . . . . . . . . . . N
INPUT>>
I Class of Service No. 02 . . . . . . . . . . . N
INPUT>> Y
I Class of Service No. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . N
INPUT>> $ EOD
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-57.00 “Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)” )

3-F-58
(21292)

3. To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Speed Dialing
area into two areas by entering the SPB command as follows.
To assign 80 Speed Dialing Codes and 120 System Account Codes in the
Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.

; PRG>SPB AT&R>
; Speed Dial Boundary . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. 200
INPUT>> 080
; Speed Dial Boundary . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. 080
INPUT>> $ EOD
: PRG>

( Section 1O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )
Then you can register the System Account Codes into the System Speed
Dialing Codes from No.081 to 200 as follows.
bsta

----

Swd

Dialis

Smtca SF& Dial Ik. = odl

.
I no. I Tm I

1062 IO1
lo83lOlI
lD84lOll
l085l01l
loss IO2

I5678

lo67 IO2

lca8 IO2
ID69 ID2

I
I

IO90 loo
lo9I IO9
loIlL IO9

I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
+

IO94 I 16 I

~aaonllllllla

atpa>

I
I

Did

h8lI#m234

IOOI IO9

I On I PEG1 SX I DII
: --c--c-

- Smtu

00:llcwu
01:Prtrictia
02:Putrictim

Lnel-01
Lad-D2

Ds:Rutrictim
Led-03
04:lsrtrktim
Qb:trtrictfml
o6:btrietim
UMutrlctim
CWutrictiaa
og:tatrictim
1o:wictim
ll:xrtrictim
P:Pu~ietia
l3:htrictim
14:BmMeticP

LeeI-D4
Led-(15
Lwel-06
tevel-U?
Level-l
Lad-00
Level-10
Lad-11
Level-l2
Level-11
M-14
lwartrictim Led- I5
Y:PesWtti011 Level- 16

gmlDwY#

Section 9-D-8.00 ‘Speed Dialing - System”
Section 1O-C-l 2.OQ3peed Dialing - S.ptem (SPD)” j

3-F-59
(21292)

When the prog-zmming procedures from 1 to 5 have already been done, the
treatment of an outside call made by an extension user (whose COS.No. is
02) depends or rhe operation as follows.
(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.“)
PITS
Result

Operation

9 + [( 1 j - 201+] 204xxxx
cl

9 i3 OrI

iWD/DND

Restricted.
(Call is not
&-nplet&.)

+ 1234# + [(l) i- 201+] 204xxxx

i
i
,
:
i
;

The outside number dialed
is Restricted by “Toll
Restriction Table.”
The account code
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.
(Call is completed.)

SLT

c
Result

Operation

pJ + [(l) + 201+] 204xXxX

psJ+
Eq

+34!56#+

[(1)+201+]204xxxx

pJ+q

+1234#+

[(1)+201+]204xxxx

Restricted.
(Cell is not
completed.)

:
i
,
i
:
f

The outside number dialed
is Restricted by “Toll
Restriction Table.”
The a-unt code
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.
(Call is completed.)

(In case of ‘Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.“)
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
When making an outside call by specifying the trunk group 02.
PITS
Result

Operation
1

pq-qm+

[(1)+201+]204xxxx
Restricted.

1 2 + FW’/DN’ + 1234#+ ((1)+ ‘O’+] 204~
3 q8 unn

3-P-60
(21292)

i The outside number dialed
i is Restricted by 7011
, Restriction Table.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

(call is completed)

SLT
Result

Operation

mr;l

~+[(1)+201+]204xxxx
Restricted.
(Call is not

mr;?

r;;l+mm

+3456#+[(1)+201+]204xxxx

[-i-&-j

•+~]~j

+1234#+[(1)+201+]204xxxx

amp/&&.)

f The outside number dialer j
i is Restricted by ‘Toll
, Restriction Table.”
j
; The account code
; entered is -Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.
(Call is completed.)

Direct Trunk Access
PITS
I

I I

-~-I--

II
1

Result

Operation

-1:

[(I) + 201+] 204xxxx
Restricted.

+ 3456#! + [(l) + 201+] 2D4xxxx

(Call is not
completed.)

i The outside number dialec
; is Restricted by ‘Toll
: Restriction Table.”

i
; The account coda
: entered is ‘Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.
(Call is completed.)

% CO buttons which belong to the trunk group 02.

3-F-61
(21292)

I-

--..

12.00 Waiting for Second

Dial tone

Description
In some areas. upor: zcmore!Y)n of area code entry, the extension user must
ensure the receptkor; o! the second dial tone from the central office before
continuing to dial the rest of tne telephone number.
The following dialing procedures assume that the required system
programming has already been done.

Dialina Procedures
(1)

Manual Dialing
1.
2.

1 Feature number for selectinq a CO line 1 + 1Area Code 1 is dialed.
1
CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. I* ‘1
L

3.
4.

Area code dialed is sent to the Central Office.
1
Second CO dial tone is returned in a delayed timing. I* *. 3 ‘I
1
The rest of the telephone number dialed at an extension is sent to
the Central Off ice.
l

(2) Memory Dialing
1.
2.
3.

1 One Touch Dialing] / -1
I m]
I m]
1
CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. ~~~~
-1
Leading one through four digits (Area code) of the memorized
number is sent to the Central Office automatically. I* 2 3. 4,
3.
Second CO dial tone is returned in a debyed timing. I* *. a .I
1
l

The rest of the memorized number is sent to the CO line
automatically. I* * ’ 4’
l

To support the WSD dialing procedure, the following system programming
should be done beforehand.

3-F-62
(30393)

Note:
. Assrgn “CO Accxs Instantly (CAI)” feature to “Yes” on a trunk group by
entering the CAI command.
This feature is programmable on a rrunk group basis.
In case of Local Trunk Dial Access, the system decides the mode by the
top trunk group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence.
Refer to Section 1O-C-58.00 “CO Access instantly (CAI)” for further
information.
‘* * Set the WSO (Waiting Second Dial tone) mode to “Yes” by entering the

WS3 command.
Refer to Section I O-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further
information.
I- a Assign “External First Digit Time-out” timer longer than a delayed timing
of the second dial tone from Central Office.
I* ti Register the required area code and pause time by entering the WSD
command.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-61 .OO“Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD)” for
further information
Programming
System Programming
“System--System Ttmef,
External First Digit Time-Out
“World Selecf 3 (WS3)”
“CO Access Instantly (CAI)”
_.
“Waiting Second Dial Tone (WSD)”
Conditions
External First Digit Time-Out
This timer is usually used to set the waiting time albwed between CO dial
tone or pseudo dial tone and the lime-out first digit dialed.
However, if the WSD feature is utilized by system programming, this timer
works to set the waiting time atbwed between area code dialed and the
remaining number dialed.

3-F-63
(30393)

13.00 Timed Reminder
Description

with OGM (Wake-up

Call)

A wake-up call can be set erther by any extenson

user to his or her own

extension, or by the Optraror 1 3r 2 (Attendant Console or Extension) to any
extension.
When this feature is activated, the extension user can hear a wake-up message
by going off-hook after being alerted by the alarm tone at a specified time.
To utilize this feature, a wake-up message should be recorded by the Operator
1 beforehand.
(Refer to Section 3-F-4.00, 4-I-13.00 and 6-J-8.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back.“)
This feature is functionally equivalent to %ned Reminder” (if set by the
extension user himself) or ‘Remote Timed Reminder” ( if set by the Operators).
The difference is, this feature provides the wake-up message instead of the
second dial tone when the extension user goes off-hook.
Up to four extension users per DISA card can initially hear the wake-up
message at a time, and a maximum of four DISA cards can be installed to the
system. That is, up to 16 extension users can initially hear the wake-up
message at a time, if a maximum of four DISA cards are installed.

Assuming that one DISA card (For Use is W-UP) is installed in the system, and
six extension users have set the wake-up call to ring at 7:30 A.M.
..

1. At 7:30 A-M, timed reminder tone (alarm tone) begins to ring at six
extensions simuttaneously.
~

‘q.*Pl

) .*:*- ‘.:wg.-

..-.g

..:;dwg

. .:..g

.::g..

2. Each extension user goes off-hook respectively.
The first four extensi& users (who go off-hook earlier than two other
extensions) can hear the wake-up message and two other extensions hear
BGM. ’
l

3. Two other extension users will hear the wake-up message instead of BGM
when:
l

Next playback of the message begins.
A DiSA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after
hearing the wake-up message.

3-F-64
(40993)

Note:
- To urdue BGM. set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold 8 BGM.”
If set to ‘Hold.’ other two extensions hear the second dial tone instead of BGM
and vnll not be able to hear a wake-up message.
(See Secton 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.“)
l

Programming

a Endless bop OGM
A wake-up message is abays played back from the beginning of it to the
extension user when he or she goes off-hook to hear a wake-up message.
It is played back repeatedly until the extension goes on-hook.

Reference
VT 1 Dumb

System Programming
“Special Attended - DISA”,
For Use
‘System - Operation (113)“.
External Music Source I, 2
Trunk - Pager 8 Music Source”,
Music Source - For use
Musice Source - Tenant

conditions

9-K-l.oo

1O-C-4O.00

9-D-1.01

1o-G4.00

SF-200

104-20.00

The following simpfified fbwchart shows the treatment of the extension user
who goes off-hook after being alerted by an afann tone.

Intermittenttone (dial tone 2)
is sent to the extension when
he or she goes off-hook

DlSAfor
wake-upis
assigned?

’

Yes
No -

9GMis

l ’

assigned?

YOS

YeS
BGM is sent to the
extension when he of
she goes off-hook.

DtSAcerd
‘INS-?

OGMresouroe
is idle?
Yes

wake-up
messageis
sent to the
extension
when he or
she goes offhook.
3-F-65
(40993)

Note:
l

’ This feature works if the extension user goes off-hook while the alarm tone IS
ringing for 2 minutes.

‘2 Tenant Service
If the tenant service is employed,

each tenant (1 and 2) can have its unique

wake-up message respectively.
In this case, afflications of the wake-up message and the extension should be
the same tenant.
l

S Operating Status
Refer to Section 14-C-2.00 “Definition of Operating Status.”
’ OGM busy
Up to four extensions per DISA card can initially receive a wake-up message at
a time.
To utilize BGM, set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”
(Refer to Section 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.“)

’ From BGM to a wake-up m&sage
The extension who currently hears BGM will hear the wake-up message instead
of BGM when:
l

Next playback of the message begins.
A DISA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after
hearing the message.

3-F-66
(40993)

Section 4

Station Features and Operation
Proprietary

Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

: Section 4)

Station
Proprietary

Features and Operation

Integrated

Telephone

System

(PITS)

Contents

1.oo
2.00

3.00
4.00

Page
4-A-l

Preparation . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . ..-......-................................................
Outline ..___.
..-..................................................................... . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . ..
Configuration .. . . . ... . .._..._.._. ...-.................................................................
2.01 Location of Feature Buttons . . .. . . .. . ..f............................................
2.02 Controls . . . ...-.......-........................................................................
LED Indication Patterns .-...-......-............................................................
Display-LCD .. .. ..-......................--.....-......................................................
4.01 Trne and Date Display . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. ... . .. ... .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . ... . . .
4.02 Dialed Number Display . . . . . ..-........................................................
4.03 Duration Trne of Call Display .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . . ... .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . ..
4.04 Incoming Call Source Display .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. .. .. . ..
4.05 Station Programmed Data Display . .. .. .. . ... . ... ... . . . . . . . ... . . . . .. .. . . . ... .. . .
4.06 Station Name Display . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . ... . .. .. .. . .... .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. ... ..

4-A- 1
4-A-l
4-A-2
4-A-l 5
4-A-l 9
4-A-20
4-A-20
4-A-21
4-A-21
4-A-22
4-A-22
4-A-23

Feature Buttons .... . ......................................................... .................................

4-B-l

1 .oo Fixed Feature Buttons ........................................ ...................................
Assignable Feature Buttons ... .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. ............................................
Line Access Buttons ..............................................................................
............
3.01 PDN Button ................................................ ..................................
3.02 SDN Button ................................................... ...............................
3.03 ICM Button ...................................................................................
3.04 PC0 Button ................................................ .................................
3.05 SC0 Button ................................................ .................................
3.06 GCO Button .................................................................................

4-B-l
4-B-4
&‘B-6
4-B-6
4-B-7
4-B-7
4-B-8
4-B-9
4-B-10

2.00
3.00

;

C Outgoing Call Features . . ..-...--..........................................................................
1 .oo Line Selection-Calling .. . . . .. .. ... ... . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . ... .. . .. . . . . .
1.Ol Prime Line Preference-Calling .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . ... . ... .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.02 Idle tine Preference-Calling . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . ... .. .. . .... .
1.03 No tine Preference-Calling . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . ... ... .. . . . . . .
2.00 On-Hook Dialing . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. ... . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... ... . .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .
3.00 Making Outside Calls . . . . .. . .. . .. ... . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . ... . .. ... .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.01 Local Think Dial Access . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .... . . . .. . .. .._....
3.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access ..
3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access ... .. . .. .. . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. ..
3.04 Direct Trunk Access .-.............................................., .. . . . . ..-...........
............................

....................

............

...........................................

4-1

4-C-l
4-c-i
4-C-2
4-c-3
4-c-4
4-c-4
4-C-6
4-C-6
4-c-7
4-C-8
4-c-9

Page
4.00 Automatic Dialing.. .................................................................................
4.01 One Touch Dialing .......................................................................
4.02 Speed Dialing-System.. ...............................................................
4.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) ..........................................................
4.04 Automatic Redial .........................................................................
4.05 Saved Number Redial (SNR) ......................................................
5.00 Making Internal Calls .............................................................................
5.01 Inter Office Calling .......................................................................
5.02 Intercom Calling.. .........................................................................
5.03 Intercom-Voice Calling.. ...............................................................
5.04 Intercom-Busy Station Signaling (BSS) .......................................
5.05 Intercom Oft-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ....................... . .
6.00 Automatic Callback.. ..............................................................................
6.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ...........................................................
6.02 Automatic Callback-Station .........................................................
7.00 Executive Busy Override .......................................................................
8.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override ........... . .................................................
9.00 Walking COS (Class of Service). ...........................................................
10.00 Operator Call .........................................................................................
D

Receiving Features ..........................................................................................
- ..
1.00 Line Selection-Answering ......................................................................
1.01 Ringing Line Preference-Answering.. ..........................................
1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering ...............................................
1.03 No Line Preference-Answering.. ..................................................
1.04 Direct Answering (Pre-selection) .................................................
2.00 Intercom Answer ....................................................................................
2.01 Intercom Hands-Free Answerback ..............................................
2.02 Intercom Answer Voice Calling Deny ..........................................
2.03 Intercom Answer BSSIOHCA Deny.. ...........................................
3.00 Call Pickup .............................................................................................
3.01 Dial Call Pickup ...........................................................................
3.02 Directed Call Pickup ....................................................................
3.03 Call Pickup Deny .........................................................................
4.00 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.. .......................
5.00 Executive Busy Override Deny ..............................................................
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) .............................. .............................................
7.00 Call Waiting ............................................................................................
8.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out.. .............................................

4-2

4-c-10
4-c-10
4-c-11

4-c-14
4-c-1
4-C-1

5
6
4-c-17
4-c-l 7
4-c-l 8
4-c-19
4-C-20
4-C-21
4-C-22
4-C-22
4-C-24
4-C-25
4-C-26
4-C-27
4-C-28
4-0-l
4-0-l
4-D-l
4-o-2
4-O-3
4-O-3 ”
4-D-4
4-D-4
4-D-5
4-D-6
4-D-7
4-D-7
4-D-6
4-D-9
4-O-10
4-D-11
4-D-l 2
4-D-15
4-D-l 7

Holding Features _.......__...___._....
._...

Page
4-E-1

.._..

............
1 .OO Hold ..............................................................
.......................................................................
2.00 Exclusive Hold
3.00 Consultation Hold ...........................................................................
4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station ....................................................................
5.00 -Call Park ...............................................................................................
5.01 Call Park-System.. .......................................................................
5.02 Call Park-Station .........................................................................
6.00 Call Splitting ....................... ..i............................_ ....................................
F

4-E-l
4-E-2

4-E-3
4-E-S
4-E-6
4-E-6
4-E-8
4-E-l 0

Transferring Features . . .. .. .. . .. . ... . .. .. .. . . .._......_......................-............................. 4-F-l
1 .OO Call Transfer ..........................................................................................
1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to Station.. ..........................................
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station ................................................
1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk ..................................................
1.04 Ringing Transfer. .........................................................................
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote ..........................................
1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Consob.. .......................
1.07 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) .............
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) .........................................................................
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls .............................................................
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook ................................................. . .
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer .........................................................
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo

Answer ................................

2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk .............................................................

4-F-l
4-F-l
4-F-2
4-F-3
4-F-4
4-F-5
4-F-5-l
4-F-5-2
4-F-6

4-F-6
4-F-9
4-F-12
4-F-l 5

8
.4-F-l
.

G Conversation Features . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . .. ... . . .. .. . . .. . .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . 4-G-l
1 .oo Programmable Privacy.. ........................................................................
2.00 Privacy Release .....................................................................................
3.00 privacy Attach ........................................................................................
4.00 Hands-Free Conversation ......................................................................
5.00 Conference ............................................................................................
5.01 Conference-One Appearance ......................................................
5.02 Conference-Two Appearances ....................................................
Unattended
Conference .........................................................................
6.00
6.01
6.02

7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.oo
12.00

Unattended

Conference-One

Appearance..

................................

Unattended Conference-Two Appearances ................................
Doorphone .............................................................................................
Flash ......................................................................................................
External Feature Access.. ......................................................................
Microphone Mute ...................................................................................
Intercom Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ...................................
Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling). ........................................

4-G-l
4-G-2
4-G-3
4-G-4
4-G-5
4-e-5
4-G-7
4-G-9
4-G-9
4-G-11
4-G-13
4-G-14
4-G-15
4-G-16
4-G-1 7
4-G-18

Paging Features ...............................................................................................

Page
4-H-l

1 .OO Paging.. ..................................................................................................
1 .Ol Paging All Extensions.. ........... .....................................................
1.02 Group Paging ..............................................................................

4-H-l
4-H-l

Other Features ................................................................................................

4-l-l

4-H-3
1.03 Paging External Pagers.. ............................................................. 4-H-5
- 1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ............................... 4-H-7
2.00 Background Music (BGM) !hrough External Pager.. .............................. 4-H-9
I

1.00

2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
13.00
14.00

Night Service .........................................................................................
1 .Ol Universal Night Answer (UNA) ....................................................
1.02 Flexible Night Service.. ................................................................
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode ......................................................
Account Code Entry ...............................................................................
Timed Reminder ....................................................................................
Background Music (BGM) ......................................................................
Secret Dialing ........................................................................................
Data Line Security .................................................................................
Absent Message Capability ..................................................................
Message Waiting ...................................................................................
Electronic Station Lock Cut ...................................................................
Assigned Feature Clear .........................................................................
Remote Station Feature Control ............................................................
DSS Console .........................................................................................
12.01 Automatic Transfer ....................................................................
Outgoing Message @GM) Recording and Playing Back ......................
Remote limed Reminder - One Ti
...................................................

(23)

4-l-l
4-l-l
4-l-2
4-l-3
4-l-5
4-l-7
4-l-9
4-l-l 0
4-I-l 1
4-l-l 2
4-l-15
4-l-l 8
4-l-19
4-I-20
4-l-22
4-l-24
4-l-25
4-l-28

A. Preparation
1 .OO Outline
Panasonic EMSS PITS (Proprietary Integrated
Telephone System) telephones are provided to
utilize the various features of the KX-T336
system, in addition to supporting basic telephone
service (making and answering calls).

This section describes special features and
required operatigm of PITS telephones.

4-A-1

2.00

Configuration

PITS telephones can be categorized as the
following four types.
Type 20

KX-T30820,

KX-T61620,

1 Type 30

KX-T30830,

KX-T61630, KX-T123230, KX-T1232300, KX-T123235

Type 50

KX-T30860,

WC-T61 650, KX-T123250

7000 Series

KX-T123220

KX-l7020, KX-l7030, KX-77050,

KX-T/130

2.01 Location of Feature Buttons
crype 20)
!

Common
Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is
common to all Type 20 PITS telephones.

1
-

Refer to the
following page.

-4

2
3

-5

-6
-7
-6

I
9

1
2
3
4
5
6

I
IO

I
11

7
8
9
10
11
12

PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
CONF Button and Indicator
FVVDIDND Button and lrtckator
PAUSE Button
TRANSFER Button
AUTO/MEMORY Button and indicator

4-A-2

I
12

L-L-

Microphone

AUTO ANSMUTE Button and Indicator
SP-PHONE Button and ~hdiior
SAVE Button
REDIAL Button
FLASH Button
HOLD Button

Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.
KX-T123220

KX-T30820

MESSAGE
(Message
Waiting) Button
and Indicator
DN3

DN (Directory
Number) Buttons
and Indicators

ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator
KX-T61620

Number) Buttons
and lndlcators

ICM (lnterwm)
Buttonand
indicator

4-A-3

DN2
DNl

DN (Directory
Number) Buttons
and Indicators

ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator

Programmable

Feature buttons

PFO5
PFO2
/

-Y

I
2

PFOl

’

PF04

t
5

’

Et8

PFlO

74
&%

B’

PFO6
I

3
i

PF03
1

kzi
8

PF07

f&-

Ii&

+----

PFO9

”

4-A-4

PF12

Common
Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is
common to all Type 30 PITS telephones.

the
page-

3-.

Microphone

8 AUTO ANSMUTE Button and Indiior
9 SP-PHONE Button and lndicabr

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
2 PF (ProgrammabIe Feature) Butms
3 CONFButtonandhdicaw
4 WD/DNDBut!onandI~
5 PAUSE Button
6TRANSFERButton
7 AlJTOmAEhdORYButton a& Indkaor

1osAvEButton

REDIAL Button
12 FLASHButton
13 HOLDButton
11

4-A-5

-xation

of DN buzons is specific to each model as follows.

-‘X-T1 23230,

KX-T: 232300,

KX-Tl23235

KX-130830

MESSAGE
I-- (Message
Waiting) Button
and Indicator

DSS (Direct
Station Selection)
Buttons and
Indicators

. DN (Directory
Number)
Buttons and
Indicators

DN (Directory
J Number) Buttons
and indicators

iLDNI

ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator
KX-T61630

DN6

DN5
DN4

ON (Dlrectow
Number)
a
Buttonsand
Indicators

Indicator

4-A-6

I-

ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator

Proprnmable

Featux

buttons

PF05

PFOl

PF03

PF04

PFO6

PF07

PFO9

PFlO

PF12

PFi 1

PFO8

4-A-7

Common
Location of Feature Bucons kstrared below is
common to all Type 50 PITS telephones.
Panasonic

Memory Card

Refer to the
following page.

.:.

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
2 TRANSFER Button
..._
3 AUTO/MEMORY
Button
4

PAUSE

MONITOR

Button
Button

4-A-8

6
7

CONFButton
REDIAL Button

FLASH Button

HOLD Button

Lxx~on

of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

k-x-T? I*33250

KX-T30850

DN (Directory
Number) Buttons
and ln&atoE

ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator
Buttonand
Indicator
I

KX-T61650

~@i=w

Number)
Butkmsand
IMibtOrS

ICM (htercom)
Buttonand
Indicator

4-A-9

Programmable

Feawe

x%ns

..
f

4-A- 10

(7000

Series)

Preliminary

Remarks:

Some x. -tons orovided for the KX-T7020, KX-T7030, KX-17050 and KX-T7130 are
caikd 2, names sther ?han the ones described in this manual.
If yol: ZSP these Todels, please press the equivalent buttons shown below instead of
the buttons described in this manual.
1 Description here

) Equivalent button

KX-T7020
Panasonic 7

‘0

HYBRID SYSTEM

-2

3
4

’

-7
-a
-9
-10”

.; .;:

-11

9 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
10 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
Indicator
11 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
12 REDIAL Button
13 FLASH Button
14 HOLD Button

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and
Indicators
3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator
4 CONF Button and Indicator
5 FWD/DND Button and Indicator
6 MESSAGE Button and Indicator
7 TRANSFER Button
8 PAUSE Button
4-A-l 1

KX-T7030

HYBRID
SYSTEM
v1

4
5

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and
Indicators
4 INTERCOM Button and indicator
5. CONF Button and indicator
6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator
7 MESSAGE Button and Indicator
8 TRANSFER Button

PAUSE Button

10 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
11 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
- ..

12
13
14
15

4-A- 12

Indicator
SP-PHOsButton
REDIAL Button
FLASH Button
HOLD Button

and Indicator

‘*’

KX-T7050

Panasonic.
I

HYBRID SYSTEM
-1

-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
"7
-8
-9

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and
indicators
k
3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator
4 MESSAGE Button and indicator
5 TRANSFER Button
6 PAUSE Button

7 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and indicator
8 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
indicator
9 MONImd Button and Indicator
10 REDIAL Button
11 FLASH Button
12 HOLD Button

...
_ .4!

4-A-l 3

KX-l7130

000000
nooaII0
HYBRID SYSTEM

‘000000

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and.
Indicators
4 INTERCOM Button and Indicator
5 CONF Button and Indicator
6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator
7 SAVE Button
8 MESSAGE Button and Indicator

9 TRANSFER Button
10 PAUSE Button
11 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
12 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
Indicator
13 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
14 REDIAL Button
15 FLASH Button
16 HOLD Button

4-A-l 4

2.02

Controls

Various controls are provided for each type of PITS telephones

as sh3wr Seiow

Type
20/50

Type
30

SET Normal operation
PROGRAM: Local station programming
(See Sections 11 and 12)

opio

RINGER Volume
Selector

HIGH/LOW: Sets the desired ringervolume
OFF: The telephone does not ring

HANDSET VOLUME
Selector

NORMAUHIGH: Determines the desired
handset volume

VOLUME Control

A sliding lever used to control the speaker
volume

Set to “LOW,” “MID” or ‘HIGH” to choose
the best display intensity

Controls
MEMORY Switch

CONTRAST Selector

Usage

HANDSET/HEADSET HANDSET: Normal operation
HEADSET: When using an optional
Selector
headset, KX-T30890

702c
] x5:

7C3G
7’ 30

0
:-‘

POWER FAILURE
Switch

OFF: Normal operation
ON: When power failure occurs
(See Section 14-H-l 40)

DIALING MODE
Selector

This is used to set the dialing mode during
power failure.
TONE: Sets tone dialing mode
PULSE: Sets pulse dialing mode

4-A-l 5

-‘)-

: provided

: not provided

Location
(Type 20/50)

VOLUME Control

RINGER Volume Selector

MEMORY Switch
.sEl..PRo3Ak4

4-A- 16

(Type 30)

123

456

.,.

VOLUME Control

RINGER Volume Selector

CONTRAST Selector

DIALING MODE Selector

MAX -

vauts

YIN

POWER FAILURE Switch

MEMORY Switch

HANDSET/HEADSET Selector

-lmlTUUE..FlLSE
El is

4-A-l 7

(7000 series)
KX-T7020,

KX-T7050

Left

HANDSET VOLUME Selector
RINGER VOLUME Selector
VOLUME Control

)
Rear

MEMORY Switch

KXJ7030,

KX-T7130

Left

HANDSET VOLUME Selector
RINGER VOLUME Selector
VOLUME Control

Rear

MEMORY Switch
HANDSET/HEADSET Selector
CONTRAST Selector
4-A-l

3.00 LED Indication
Line conditions

I
I

are displayed

Patterns
by three patterns of flashing

LED indicators on PITS buttons, as follows.

I
I
0

I
I

Pattern 2
(60 wink)
I

Pattern 3
(120 wink)

Pattern 1 : Shows call arriving with 240 winks/min and is called 240 wink.”
Pattern 2 : Shows holding a call with 60 winks/min and is called “60 wink.”
Pattern 3 : Shows Unattended Conference and Privacy Release with 120 winks/min and is called “120
wink.”
Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status.

4-A-l 9

4.00 Display-LCD
4.01 Time and Date Display
Description

Operation

This is a function for a PITS provided with the
display to offer a display either of the present
time or of the date and the day of the week. It is
indicated on the display when the PITS is onhook and the SP-PHONE is off.

Changing the time display mode to the dare
display mode

Two display modes are available: the time
display mode and the date display mode. For
instance, the displays for “January 1, Friday, 12:
00 a.m., 1999” in each mode are as follows:

In1

Be sure the telephone set is on-hook and the SPPHONE is off.

Changing the date display mode to the time
display mode.

In the date display mode:
Jan 1.1999 FRI

•l

”

Setting the time and date is executed by “Date &
Time Set Up Screen” and “Change Date & Time.”
Extensions assigned to a “Class of Service” in
which Maintenance Capability is set to “Yes” can
also set the time and date. Refer to Section llC-2.00 “Setting Date and Time.”
Programming

~1
“System-Class of Service (l/2).,

94-4~01 10-i-7.00

PITS System Programming

Reference

Setting Date and Time

1. Dial ‘*.”

To alternate the modes, dial U*” while on-hook
and SP-PHONE off.

11-c-2.00

Conditions
\

The message on the display of
PITS changes to the daie
display mode.

In the time display mode:
1 Jan 1 12:00 AM 1

::$

1. Dial “*.n

None

4-A-20

The message on the display
changes to the time display
mode.

4.02 Dialed

Display

Number

4.03 Duration

Time of Call Display

Description

This is a function for the user of a PITS with the
display to see the dialed number of the other

This function permits a PITS with the display to
show the duration of an incoming or outgoing CO

party shown on the display. It is displayed when

call by second.
This function does not apply to extension calls.

the user is calling an extension or an outside
party and also when talking with it.

An example of the display is shown below:
Programming
1 DDD02 1:30’25

None
Conditions

None

]
minute
second
hour

Operation

For an incoming call from an outside party, the
duration starts at the time an extension answers
the call.

The following is an example of the display when
calling an extension.
..
Operation:
Display:

For outgoing calls to outside patties, the starting
time of count is assignable in “System-System
Timer”, SMDR Duration Time.

Lift the handset.
Dial “1 .n

1 I

Dial “2.”
Dial “3.”

Programming

System Programming

‘System-SystemTmW.
SMDR DurationTime

12
I

Callina the extension. 1 1 2 3 : Jack

Reference
VT
I Dumb

9-D-3.001o-G6.00
.

1231

Conditions

Holding of an outside party or in conference with
outside parties is also counted as part of the
duration. Consequently when returning to the
conversation with the party after retrieving the
hold or after concluding the conference, the
display shows the continued period including the
period of the hold or the conference.
The display duration is held for five seconds after
the handset is replaced.
Operation
None

4-A-21

.-..

4.04 Incoming

Call Source

4.05 Station Programmed

Display

Data Display

Description

If the user of a PITS prc\/lded with the display is
called by somebody, :?e use7 can see the name, if
pre-assigned, of me ca:;tr.g oarty on the display.

When a PITS provided with the display is on-hook
and the SP-PHONE button is off? pressing the
following buttons provides the display of the kind
of the pressed button or the content assigned to
the button on the display for five seconds:

The display contents defier according to the type of
arriving calls as illustrated below:.
When called by an extension using the DN button :
i:

1 23 4: Tony
l-l-

station name
directory number

REDIAL or LNR (Last Number Redial) button
SAVE or SNR (Saved Number Redial) button
MESSAGE (Message Waiting) button
PF (Programmable feature) buttons
FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb)
button

Programming
When called by an extension using the ICM
(intercom) button :
KM1 2: Tony

None

Conditions
1

?_15_

When the assigned data exceeds 16 characters,
.&” appears on the mostright side of the display.
~~~~nmuember

Operation
When called by an outside party :
1 CO:

Press the button to be confirmed.

PANASONIC 1

-lLIEi

~~~~~~

name

A station name or a trunk name does not appear
unless they are assigned in ‘Extension-Station”,
Station Name or “Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk Name.
3

Programming
System Programming
“Trunk-CO tine”,
‘Extension-Station
Station Name

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I

Trunk Name
(l/3)”

Conditions
None

Operation
None

4-A-22

4.06 Station

Name Display

Description
This s a func:ion that shows the user of a PITS
.Cth :ne display the other extension’s directory
~7%’ and, if stored, its name. This is
.
displayed when the user is calling or called by or
takng with an extension party.

[Example]
When calling/called by/talking with an extension
on the DN button :

The example below shows the display on the
calling station when calling an extension
assigned to Call Forwarding on the DN button :

[Example]
Extension 2000 calls extension 1000.
Extension 1000 sets the destination of Call
Forwarding-No Answer to extension 1001.
The following display appears on the dis$ay of
extension 2000 :
] +

1001: Jack

The following display appears on the display of
extension 1001 :
When calling/called by/talking with an extension
on the ICM button :

1 +
Operation

ICM12: Tony
-Lb

None
Fzizzzlber

Station names do not appear unless they are
assigned in “Extension-Station”, Station Name.
Programming

Cohditions

When calling an extension on the DN button, if
the called party answers on the SDN button, the
display on the calling station changes as follows:
When calling extension 1234 :
1 1234: Tony
After extension 1000, whose SDN is owned by
extension 1234, answers the call:
[I

4-A-23

2000: Betty

B. Feature Buttons
1.00 Fixed Feature Buttons
Description
Feature Buttons, like features, are either fixed or assrgnable.
Fixed Feature Buttons, (for example m
,) have specific :JCIIO~S permanently
associated with them.
The following table shows all Fixed Feature Buttons provided on the PITS telephone
by each type.
_’
Feature Button
SP-PHONE
‘t

AUTO/MEMORY
-------------------------

Type 50

7020/7030

OS’

Type 20/30 I

7050

7130

“’

AUTO DIAUSTORE

PAUSE *

I REDIAL (LNR)
I SAVE (SNR)

lololololol
1

None *2 I - None ‘2

None “2 j

ICM *
------------------------INTERCOM

AUTO ANSIMUTE
-------------------------

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE

I
I
I

HOLD

lololololol

TRANSFER
FWDIDND

I CONF

Nonei3~T

None *3 171

lololololol
lololololol

FLASH *
MESSAGE

0 *4I 0 *4I

[Note]
In the above list, Feature Buttons marked * have an LED indicator.
33’The MONITOR button is provided instead of the SP-PHONE
‘2 The SAVE button can be assigned to the PFl button.
*3 The FWD/DND button can be assigned to the PF 3 button.

4-B-i

button.

I 0

g4 The MESSAGE button is not provided on rhe PITS’s listed below, but can be assigned to the
assignable burl-tons respxrively.
as !oilcws

PITS not providea with MESSAGE

1 Assignable

KX-T30830

DSS 8

KX-T30820, KX-T30850

DN3

I- KX-T61620,
__~ KX-T61630, KX-T61650
For the assignment

Buttons 1

DN6

of the FWD/DND: SAVE and MESSAGE buttons, refer to the

following.
FVVD/DND button
SAVE button

Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)”
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment”

MESSAGE button

Section 9-G-l .02 “Station (U3)”
Section 9-G-l -03 “Station (313)”

Usage
SP-PHONE (MONITOR) Button and Indicator
This key allows the set user to receive or originate calls without using the handset.
Each time the SP-PHONE button is pressed, the speaker and microphone are
alternately switched on and off.
AUTO/MEMORY. AUTO DIAUSTORE Button and Indicator
This button is used for dialing system speed dial numbers and for storing the
results of a local programming operation.
PAUSE Button
This button is used to insert a pause in a speed dial number.
REDIAL (LNR) Button
This button is causes the last number dialed to be redialed when the key is
pressed.
SAVE (SNR) Button
This button allows the set user to store the telephone number to make the same
call again by pressing the key.
ICM, INTERCOM Button and Indicator
This button is used to make or receive an intercom call.
AUTO ANS/MUTE. AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and Indicator
This dual function button is used to automatically answer an intercom call or
disable the microphone during handsfree operation.
HOLD Button and Indicator
This button allows the set user to place any call at the set on hold.
TRANSFER Button
This is used to transfer an outside or an intercom call to another extension.

4-B-2

FWD/DND Button
This button can be used for setting or canceling the Call Forwarding or Do Not
Disturb feature.
CONF Button and Indicator
Allows the user to perform a three party conference.
FLASH Button
This button causes a flash signal to be sent’to the Central Office.

MFSSAGF mton and Indicabx
This button can be used for Message Waiting feature.

4-B-3

2.00 Assignable

Feature

Buttons

Description

Assignable Feature Buttons can have features assigned !o them. oy the System
Programming or by the PITS Station Programming.
The following three types of Assignable Feature Buttons are provided on :tie PITS
telephones. l
l
l

DN button
DSS button (KX-T30830 only)
PF button

(Note)
DSS button and PF button are also provided on the DSS consoles.
The following list shows all features available to Assignable Feature Buttons by type of
buttons.

DSS DN (Direct Station Selection-DN)
DSS ICM (Direct Station Selection-ICM)

PRV-CHG
EXT FEAT (Privacy
(ExternalChange)
Feature Access)

CALL PAR (Call Park-System)

&’

CALL STA (Call Park-Station)

RNG TRN (Ringing Transfer)

SPLIT (Call Split)
FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb)

0
X

0
x

0
OS’

0
x

(Tone Through Break)
SAVE (Saved Number Redial)

0
x

0
OS2

0
x

ONETOUCH

TONE-BRK

(One Touch Dialing)

4-B-4

Conditions

In the list on the previous page:
u On indicates that the feature is assignable.
I‘X ” indicates that the feature is not assignable.

A code number for any of the iollowing foarxes
can be assigned on only one DN buttcn of a
PITS.
Assigning the same number to multiple buttons o+
a PITS is impossible.

For example, “PDN” is assignable to DN button
only and “Call Park-System” is assignable to all
types of Assignable Feature Buttons (DN, DSS,
PF).

l
l

The assignable features in the shaded part can
be assigned and canceled by the system
programming only.

l
l

%l
The FWD/DND button is not provided on the
PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 as a Fixed Feature
Button but can be assigned to the PF3 button.

SDN 100 and SDN 100
Group CO 01 and Group CO 01
Each of the following features can be assigned to
only one Assignable Feature button of a PITS.
Assigning the same feature to multiple buttons of
a PITS is impossible.

352

The SAVE button is not provided on the following
PITS telephones, but the SAVE function can be
assigned to the PFl button of them.
PITS type 50
KX-l7020
KX-T7030
KX-T7050

l
l
l
l
l

Programming
Reference
VT
1 Dumb

System Programming

“Extension-Station(l/3)“,

9-G-l .Ol 10-C-22.00

Primary Directory Number
“Extension-Station
(2/3)“,
“Extension-Station
(3/3)“,
PF Key Type and Number
DSS Key Type and Number
‘Extension-DSS Console (2/3)“,
‘Extension-DSS
Console (3/3)”

9-G-l .02 1OC24.00
9-G-l .03 10-G25.00

9-G-2.02 lgQ6.00
9-G-2.03

PITS Station Programming
Assigning
Buttons
Assigning
Buttons
Assigning
Selection)

Reference

DN (Directory Number)

12Cl .oo

PF (Programmable

12-C-2.00

Feature)

(Direct Station
Buttons

DSS

Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
Private CO
Single CO
Group CO

12-C-3.00

4-B-5

Off-Hook Call Announcement
Message Waiting
UCD Log In
Local Alarm
Privacy Change

3.00 Line Access

Buttons

3.01 PDN Button
Programming

Description

When the KX-T336 System is installed, a Primary
Directory Number (PDN) button is always
assigned to every PITS telephone.
A PDN is a user’s extension number.
Each PITS telephone has at least one PDN
button that is used not only to make and receive
calls but to access system features.
The DN-01 button is fixed to PDN.
Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned to
each PITS telephone.
If you assign three PDN buttons, they must be
arranged consecutively.
PDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”,
Type and Number.
By default setting, PDN button is seized
automatically by simply lifting the handset or
pressing the SP-PHONE button.
DN-03
I I
I
DN-02
I
I
DN-01

1
ICM
11

System Programming
I

“Extension-Station (2/3)‘.
DN Key Type and Number

Reterence
i
Dumb

9 G 1 02 1 10-C-24.00
I --.
1

Conditions

The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button and the CO line status.
Indicator
off
Lights green
Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink
Green 240 wink
Lights red
Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink

PDN

(DN buttons-PITS type 20,30,50)
PDN-.

.--

-1

(DN buttons - PITS 7000 series)

4-B-6

CO Line Status
Idle
l-use
l-hold
l-exclusive hold, consultation
hold or unattended conference
Incoming call
Other-use, exdusive hold - Other-hold
Privacy release possible

3.02 SDN Button

3.03 ICM Button

Description

Allows an extension user to assign PDN buttons
of other extensions on DN buttons of PITS. This
assigned DN buttons are called SDN buttons.
The assignment of SDN buttons make it easier to
transfer or answer other extensions.
SDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”,
Type and Number.

Allows an extension user to make/receive an
intercom call within an ICM (Intercom) group.

Programming
Reference
VT
I Dumb

System Programming

“Extension-Station (l/3)“,
Intercom Number

Programming

Conditions
The table below shows the relationship between
the indicator and the intercom status.

Conditions

off

The table below shows the relationship betieen
the DN button and the CO line status.
. 1

Indicator
Off
Lights green
Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink

Red 240 wink

Preferential

CO Line Status

tights green
Green 240 wink
I

idle
l-use
I-hold
l-exclusive hold, consultation
hold or unattended conference
Other-use, exclusive hold
Other-hold
Privacy release possible
Incoming call

order of SDN indicators is as follows:

1. l-use, hold, exclusive hold, consultation
hold, unattended conference : Lights green,
Green 60 wink, Green 120 wink
2. Incoming call : Red 240 wink
3. Other-hold

Indicator

: Red 60 wink

4. Privacy Release : Red 120 wink
5. Busy : Lights red
6. Idle : Off

4-B-7

Intercom Status

I Idle

l-use, Off-Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA)
Incoming call

3.04 PC0 Button
Description

Conditions

It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were
connected directly to a DN button on a PITS.
This operation is called Private CO.
ft is then no longer possible to place outgoing
calls from other extensions using this CO line.
Also, an incoming call from the CO line will arrive
only at this PITS.

A Private CO button lights up red at the times
below.
1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.
2) When the Private CO line has been set to
Busy-Out.
3) When access using the Trunk Verify
function is made by the Attendant Console.

To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Type to PVL and program the CO line to
the Private trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
Group.
Also, program the DN button on the PITS to
PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (2/3)“, Type
and assign the physical number of the Private
CO line under Number.

A call held on a Private CO button can not be
retrieved by other extensions, however, an
incoming call to a Private CO button can be
transferred.
When an incoming call arrives, ringing occurs
instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.

Programming
System Programming
“Group-Trunk Group (l/Z)“,
Type
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group
“Extension-Station
(2/3)“,
Tvoe and Number

Reference
I Dumb
VT
9-E-l .Ol

10-C-14.00

9-F-l .OO 1O-C-18.00
9-G-l .02 1O-C-24.00

4-B-8

3.05 SC0 Button
Description
To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS
telephone.
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.
SC0 button feat_ureprovides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and
receive many outside calls.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO iine
by simply pressing the SC0 button without
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
outside call can be directed to the PITS
telephone via dedicated SC0 button without
assistance of the Operator.
In addition, the associated status LED provides
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.
SC0 button can be used Qither one-way service
(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
service (Both-Way).

CO line which can be assigned as a SC0 button
is:
A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and
whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL
l:N.
A CO iine which belongs to a trunk group
assigned as Outgoing Only.
Programming

Conditions
Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing
call made by pressing the Single CO button.

SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone
in conjunction with DIL 1:l or DIL 1 :N feature.

The Single CO button indicator will light up red
in the following circumstances.

SC0 button with DIL 1: 1 feature

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SC0 button
can be assigned to the PITS telephone
programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1
feature.
If SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS
telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
button on it.
j

c2> idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
status

The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed as Single CO and the
CO line status:
CO Line Status

Green 60 wink
Green 120 wink
Green 240 wink
Lights red
Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink
1 Red 240 wink

idle
I-use
I-hold
I-exclusive hold, consultation
unattended conference
Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)
Other-use, exclusive hold
Other-hold
Privacy release possible
Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

> When the Single CO is not. In Service

<3> idle status and Single CO in trunk route
control status
When the Single CO button is pressed in
any of these statuses, its indicator lights up
green but busy tone is heard.
In the following cases, the Single CO button
indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is
sent.
cl> When Calling Patty Control signal has
been detected during a call using the
Single CO.
c2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
outgoing call made from the Single CO.

hold.

4-B-9
(30393)

3.06 GCO Button
Description

Trunk

To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a
group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned
to a ON button on a PITS telephone.
’
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a
PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.
GCO button feature provides better service with
a given number if CO lines.

button is:
l

group which

can be assigned as a GCO

A trunk group assigned as Bothway or
Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode
(Day) is DIL 13 or DIL 1: N.
A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.

Programming
GCO button can be assigned to a PITS
telephone in conjunction with DIl 1: N feature.
Incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group
can be directed to a maximum of eight
destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup
group) simultaneously.
In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons
on the PITS telephone.
If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls
via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.
To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user
can access an idle CO line in the group by simply
pressing the dedicated GCO button.
The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed as Group CO and the
CO line status:

I~ ~Indicator
off

Conditions
When the ARS function is set. it is overridden by
outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.
Pressing a Group CO button when it is red
serves to set the “Automatic Callback to Trunk”
function.
See Section 4-C-6.01.5-A-4.01 “Automatic
Callback-Trunk” for details.
In the following cases, the Group CO button
indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.

CO Line Status

When Calling Party Comrol sig+l has
been detected during a call using the
Group CO.

Free CO tine in trunk group and no
incoming CO call

Lights green
l-use
Green 60 wink I-ho@
Green 120 wink l-exclusive hold, consultation hold,
unattended

~2s When outgoing restriction applies to an
outgoing call made from a Group CO.

conference

Green240 wink No idle CO lines in trunk group
tights red
Red 60 wink
Red 120 wink
Red 240 wink

and no incoming call in trunk
group
CO line receiving an incoming call
1 in trunk group

4-B-l 0
(30393)

C. Outgoing

Call Features

1 .OO Line Selection-Calling
Description

!.dQ&

PITS telephones may have many line access
buttons and the set user can access a desired line
either directly by pressing the button or by
employing automatic line selection feature.
This Line Selection-Calling feature offers the
following three line-preferen&and
the user can
select only one preference for his or her PITS set:

Line access buttons that are available for a PITS
telephone are:

l
l
l

Prime Line Preference-Calling (default)
Idle Line Preference-Calling
No Line Preference-Calling

If Prime Line Preference or Idle tine Preference is
selected, the user can get the programmed line
automatically for making a call by simply lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button (OnHook Dialing).
If No Line Preference is selected, no line is
accessed until the user directly presses the
desired button.
Every PITS telephone is assigned to Prime tine
Preference on PDN button by default setting. This
can be changed on a PITS telephone basis using
PITS station programming. Refer to Section 12-C
4.00 “Automatic Line Hunting (Calling).”
Line Preference-Calling feature newly assigned on
a PITS telephone overrides the previous
assignment.

4-c-1

DN buttons... Primary Directory Number
(PDN) buttons
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN) buttons
(Refer to Section 4-B-3.01
through 3.02.)
CO buttons... Private CO (PCO), Single CO
(SCO), Group CO (GCO)
(Refer to Section 4-B-3.04
through 3.06.)
ICM (Intercom) button
(Refer to Section 4-B-3.03.)

1 .Ol Prime Line Preference-Calling
This feature is available when a PITS telephone

Description

has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone
does not answer an incoming call automatically
by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing Line
Preference-Answering” overrides “Prime Line
Preference-Calling.”
Refer to Section 4-D-l .Ol “Ringing tine
Preference-Answering” for further information.
_..
The user can override the preferred line
temporarily to access another line (Preselection). To override the line, without lifting the
handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,
press the desired line access button .listed below:

Automatically connects a PITS telephone to a
line pre-assigned as Prime Line by simply lifting
the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
Once the Prime tine Preference is selected from
the Preference Calling features, one of the
following buttons should be assigned as the
Prime tine of the PITS telephone:
l
l
l

DN button - PDN (default), SDN
CO button - PCO, SCO, GCO
KM button

Programming

. PDN button
Private CO button
Single CO button
l

l
l

Group CO button
ICM button

Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Conditions
I

A line access button except PDN and ICM cannot
be assigned as the Prime tine unless it has been
assigned to a PITS telephone by system
programming.

The indicator on the button
assigned as the prime line
lights in green.
Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.

2. Call the other p&ty depending on
the assigned line.

PDN button and ICM button are fixed feature
buttons and always provided on PITS
telephones.
However, SDN, PCO, SC0 and GCO buttons are
assignable feature buttons.
If you assign SDN, PCO, SC0 or GCO button as
Prime tine, pre-assignment as a line access- _
button on a PITS telephone must be dbne
beforehand by system programming.
Silence when going off-hook indicates that the
prime line is busy.
When two or more PDN buttons are assigned on
a PITS (up to three PDN buttons can be
assigned per PITS), line selection feature always
functions if at least one PDN button is available.

4-C-2

1.02 Idle Line Preference-Calling
Operation

Oescription

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

S-s of :ne idle DN buttons (PDN, SDN) or CO
x:ons !PCO, SCO, GCO) on a PITS telephone
*i.j & automatically selected by lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

It is determined by the system programming that
which button (DN or CO) will be selected as an
idle line.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “System-Operation
(l/3)” for programming.

2. Call the other party depending on
the selected line.

Programming

.“r

Reference

PITS Station Programming

Automatictine Hunting (Calling)
Selection

12c4.00

Conditions

Silence when going off-hook indicates that no
idle line is available on the PITS telephone.
ICM button is not selected automatically by this
feature.
This feature is available when a PITS telephone
has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone
does not answer an incoming call automatically
by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing tine
Preference-Answering” overrides “Idle tine
Preference-Calling.”
Refer to Section 4-D-l .Ol “Ringing tine
Preference-Answering” for further information.
The user can override the preferred line
temporarily to access another line (Preselection). To override the line, without lifting the
handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,
press the desired line access button listed below:
l
l
l

PDN button
Private CO button
Single CO button

l
l

The indicator on the selected
idle line access button lights in
green.
You hear dial tone 1.

Group CO button
ICM button

4-c-3

2.00 On-Hook

1.03 No Line Preference-Calling
Description

Dialing

Description

If No Line Preference is assigned to a PITS
telephone, no line is automatically connected to a
PITS telephone when it goes off-hook.
To get a line for making a call, the extension user
must press the desired DN (PDN or SDN) or CO
(PCO, SC0 or GCO) or ICM button on a PITS
telephone.

On-Hook Dialing enables various hands-free
dialing operation. This permits the PITS
telephone users without lifting the handset to
access a line and dial telephone numbers,
intercom numbers, and feature numbers, or do
other dialing performances.

This feature can be assigned on a PITS
telephone basis.

Programming
None

Programming

Conditions
Reference

PITS Station Programming
Automatic
Selection

If Prime tine Preference or Idle Line Preference
is assigned to a PITS, pressing the SP-PHONE
button automatically selects the preprogrammed
line.

12-c-4.00

Line Hunting (Calling)
I

If No tine Preference is assigned to a PITS
telephone, no tone sounds when SP-PHONE
button is pressed, and to get a line for making a
call, press the appropriate line access button.

Condition
Going off-hook selects no line and no tone is
heard.
Operation

The SP-PHONE button is turned off
automatically, if no operation is made within 15
seconds in the following states after the SPI
PHONE button is pressed.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

You hear no tone.

The states are:

2. Press the desired line access
button.
l

The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.

3. Call the other party depending on
the pressed button.

4-c-4

While hearing one of the following tones;
Dial tone
Busy tone
Reorder tone
DND tone
...
While no tone is heard

Operation
Without lifting the -aodset. Dress Fe desired iine
access button iis:ti below axt pedorm an
appropriate dialing operatwl
l
l

SP-PHONE button
PDN button
Private CO button

By using the Single CO button
1

Single CO button
Grow CO button
= ICM button
l

By pressing the SP-PHONE button

IjyEq

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
l

By using the Group CO button

Press the Group CO button.

By using the PDN button

By using the ICM button
,F-,
n

By using the Private CO button

1. Press the Private CO button.

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Group CO
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1.

Dial the telephone number of the
external party.

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the telephone number of the
other party.

1. Press the PDN button.

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Single CO
button lights in green.
. You hear dial tone 1.

2. Dial the telephone number of the
external party.

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the telephone number of the
other party.

1. Press the Single CO button.

1. Press the ICM button.
. The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the ICM
button lights in green.
. You hear dial tone 5.
2. Dial the intercom number of the
other extension.

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Private
CO button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1.

2. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

4-c-5

3.00 Making Outside
3.01 Local

Trunk

Calls

Dial Access
Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO

calls by automatic selection of an idle CO line.
Dialing the feature number for ARSILocal CO
Line Access” enables you to execute this
function.

‘.“’
2. Dial the feature number for
“ARS/Local CO Line Access.”

To activate this feature, set “System-Operation”,

Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If set to
‘Yes,’ ARS feature is activated instead of this
feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)” for further information.

1 .A4 I

You hear dial tone 1.”

3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

Programming
System Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Reference
-y

9-D-l .Ol 10-C-4.00
“System-Operation(l/3)“,
I
Automatic Route Selection
“System-LocalAccess Group”, 9-D-5.00 1o-c-9.00
Hunt Sequence
“System-NumberingPlan (2/9) 9-O-6.02 10-ClO.oC
APB/Local CO Line Access

Conditions
An idle CO fine available and hunting sequence
is determined by the system programming
“System-Local Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.
If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no
idle CO line available.
If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user
is restricted from accessing this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-l .Ol “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further information.
If tenant service is employed, accessible trunk
groups are limited to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.
The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk
group in hunt sequence 01 in ‘System-Local
Access Group.”

4-C-6

3.02 individual
Access

Trunk Group

Dial

Description

Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
as follows:

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO
calls via an idle CO line in the specified trunk
group by dialing the feature number for Yrunl(
Group 01-08 Access” or Yrunk Group 09-l 6
Access.”

TrunkGroup
Trunk Group
Specifying Number Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
i Dumb
10-C-8.00

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08

2-2 Specifying one trunk group
from 09 to 16
11 Dial the feature number for
“Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access.”
2) Dial the number for specifying
the trunk group: 1 to 8.
I

Conditions
Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the
ones assigried in ‘System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access.
.j

If an extension user hears busy tone, all CO lines
in the specified trunk group are not available.

drunk Group
specifying Number
..
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user
is restricted from accessing the specified trunk
group.
Refer to Section 3-C-l .03 roll Restriction for
individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct Trunk
Access,” for further information.

Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.’

456
,(I0
*

2-l

Trunk Group
Number
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

123
q
l

Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
as follows:

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Specifying one trunk group
from 01 to 08.

1) Dial the feature number for

“Trunk Group 01-08 Access.”
2) Dial the number for specifying
the trunk group: 1 to 8.

4-c-7

3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group
Dial Access
Description

Operation

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO
calls using Special Carrier Facilities by simply
dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 1724 Access.”
Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization codes, required to Special Carder
Access must be programmed beforehand in
“Special Carrier Access” screen.
Trunk groups available for Special Carder
Access is also defined in the same screen.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
I

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Trunk Group 17-24 Access.”

3. Dial the number for specifying
the virtual trunk group: 1 to 8.

Special carriers available for each extension user
is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)
Special Carrier Access.

It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier
Access on system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 1O-C-52.00 “World Select 2ECWOCC Access Assignment” for further
information.
Programming
System Programming

Reference

Virtual trunk group number
matches virtual trunk group
specifying number and digit
modification table number
(Equal access table number 1
to 4, OCC access table number
1 to 4 which should be
assigned beforehand), as
follows:

Virtual Trunk
Digit Modiition
Group Number ~~ro~e~pecffyingTable Number

virtual Trunk

‘System-Class of Service (2/2)“,
Special Carrier Access

“System-NumberingPlan (2/g)“,
Trunk Group 17-24 Access
“Special Canier Access-Equal
Access/OCC Access”
World Select 2”

18
19

Equal access I
table number 2

20
21
22
23
24

45
6
7
8

OCCaccess
J

;’

.*.. 2.
A,

Condition
None

4. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

4-C-8

3.04 Direct Trunk Access
Operation

Description

1. Press the desired CO button.

Allows a PITS telephone user one-button access
to a CO line.

You can make an outgoing CO call without
dialing the feature number for CO line access.

This feature requires a CO button assignment on
a PITS telephone.
There are three types of CO buttons available in
this system: Private CO (PCO), Single CO (SCO)
and Group CO (GCO) buttons.
r.:
For further information about CO button features,
refer to Section 3-D-2.07 through 2.09.

The indicator on the CO button
lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1.

2. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

‘Extension-Station(2/3)“.
/ 961.02/ lo-G24.00 /
DN Key Type and Number
.:<..

Condition
\

. Direct trunk access (for making calls) can be
done by simply pressing the appropriate CO
button without lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button.
Refer to Section 4-C-2.00 “On-Hook Dialing” for
related information.

4-c-9

4.00 Automatic
4.01

Dialing

One Touch Dialing

For calling an outside party automatically:
AFWLocal CO Line Access - telephonenumber

Description
Extension users can program frequently dialed
telephone numbers (of bolh extensions and
outside parties) or feature numbers into memory
on the following PITS telephone’s Assignable
Feature buttons.
PF buttons
DN buttons
DSS buttons (KX-T30830 only)

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:
ARS/Local CO tine Access
Trunk Group 01-08 Access
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access
Trunk Group 17-24 Access
l
l

To dial a number stored in an assignable feature
button, the extension user just press the button
and the PITS telephone automatically dials the
number.
This feature can be programmed by either
system programming and PITS station
programming.

Operation

Programming

System Programming

Making a call using One Touch Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

Reference

PITS StaMn Programming

Reference

.. Stored number is sent.
l

(Supplement)
In step 2, dialing a feature number for selecting a
CO line before pressing the One Touch button
ignores the stored feature number and seizes the
CO line selected by manual operation.
instead of the operation in step 1, pressing the
Private CO, the Single CO, or the Group CO
button ignores the stored feature number for
selecting a CO line and seizes the CO line of the
pressed button.
..._
ea..
One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, La% iz%ber
Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing
can be used in combination.

DN (Directory Number)Button
Assignme’nt
.
PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment
DSS (Direct Station
Assignment

2. Press the One Touch button.

1”

‘Extension-Station(2/3)“,
DN Key Type, Number
‘Extension-Station(3/3)“,
1O-c-25.00
PF Key Type, Number
1O-C-26.00
DSS Key Type, Number
‘Extension-DSS Console (l/3)“, 9-G-2.01
1 O-C-24.00
DSS Key Type, Number
‘Extension-DSS Console Q/3)“, 9-G-2.02
1o-c-25.00
PF Key Type, Number

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Selection)Button

An extension user can store a number consisting
of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in
two assignable feature buttons.
In this case, feature number for selecting a CO
line should not be stored on the second button.

Conditions
Each stored number can have up to 16 digits
including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” %,’ “#,”
“PAUSE,” ‘FLASH,” y-” and “SECRET” can be
registered.
For employing One Touch Dialing for calling an
outside party, stored number must include a
feature number for selecting a CO line as leading
digits.

To dial the number, first press the first One Touch
button, and then press the second One Touch
button.

4-c-1 0

4.02 Speed Dialing-System
Description

Operation

System Speed Dialing allows any extension user
ro call oti:s;de paflies by simply pressing the
AUTO buttor: and dialirg a pre-assigned 3-digit
code (001 to 200) common to any extension user
in the system.
Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be registered

Calling an outside party using Speed DialingSystem
1. Lift the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

to the system

The Speed Dialing Codes are registered in

“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and toll
restriction level unique to each speed-dialing code
can be assigned In the same screen.
Refer to 7011 Restriction Plan for System Speed
Dialing” on next page for further information.

2. Press the AUTO button.
l

‘i

If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing
Codes can be divided by two tenants. In this
case, one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing
Codes which belong to the other tenant.

I 44

Programming

(Supplement)

“System-Tenant”, Speed
Dialing-System Boundary
‘System-Speed Dialing-

9-D-9.00 1O-C-l2.00

System”

....:)

Storing Speed Dialing-System

Reference
11-c-3.00

When you register a telephone number to a
System Speed Dialing Code, a feature number for
selecting a CO line must be stored as leading
digits.
The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:
l

ARS/Local CO tine Access
Trunk Group 01-08 Access

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

The registered number is sent.

While dialing a speed dialing code in step 3,
cancelit@ the code is possible by pressing the
AUTO button. Then repeat steps 2 to 3 for the
new entry.

Each stored number can have up to 32 digits
including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” =*,- Y,,
“PAUSE,” “FLASH,” Y-n and “SECRET” can be
registered.

Instead of the operation in step 1, pressing
Private CO, Single CO or Group CO ignores the
feature number for selecting a CO line stored in
the speed dialing codes and makes a call to an
outside party through the pressed CO line.

Conditions

You hear no tone.

Before pressing the AUTO button in step 2,
dialing a feature number for selecting a CO line
seizes the dialed CO line and starts outpulsing,
ignoring the feature number for selecting a CO
line registered in the speed dialing code.

9-D-2.00 1O-c-5.00

PITS System Programming

The indicator on the AUTO
button lights.

3. Dial the speed dialing code.

Reference
Dumb
VT

System Programming

The indicator on the SPPHONE button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, Last Number
Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing
can be used in combination.

An extension user can store a number consisting
of 33 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in
two speed dialing codes. In this case, a feature
number for selecting a CO line should not be
stored on the second speed dialing code.
To dial the number, first press the AUTO button
and dial the first speed dialing code, and then
press the AUTO button and dial the second
speed dialing code.

4-C-l 1

The system administrator can assign Toll
Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing
(referred to as “TRLSD” in the following) to each
code as follows:

(TRLE) with TRLSD.
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD
(TRLE2TRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is
lower than TRLSD (TRLEcTRLSD), a call is
checked against System Toll Restriction
feature.
For further information about TRLE, refer to
Section 3-C-l .OO“Toll Restriction.”

System - Speed Dialing - System
----------------_--------------------System Speed Dial No. =OOl
+ .-em- ---w--m--- --

-I-------------

:No.
i
; -------. 4
:001
I
i 002

;

; 003
8

:
:

Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16), the system
compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6
is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLE>TRLSD), so a
call is made.

Toll Restriction Level of System
Speed Dialing (TRLSD)
TRLSD consists of 17 levels (YOO”
and “01 to 16”)
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from
TRLSDs “01 to 16.”
In TRLSD “01 to 16,” Iy)l“ is the highest level and
“16” is the lowest.
1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing
Code (TRLSD=OO)
When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing
a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=OO),
extension users receive standard toll
restriction treatment.
If selected speed dialing code includes Looal
Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against 7011 Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”
If selected speed dialing code includes
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll
Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access.”
For further information about System Toll
Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-l .OO
“Toll Restriction.”
2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing
Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16)
When an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing
4-c-1 2

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
Dialing Code (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLE of 6
is lower than TRLSD of 4 (TRLEcTRLSD), so a
call is checked against the System Toll
Restriction feature.

The following flowchart shows rhe simplified procedure of toll restriction plan for
System Speed Diaikg.

Start
i

When an outgoing CO cari is, made by
dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=Ol to 16)

When an outgoing CO call is made by
dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD*OO)

)‘
Compares TRLSD with TRLE

‘I
Checks a call against System Toll
Restriction feature

.-+
TRLEcTRLSD

TRLEzTRLSD’
v

not restricted

restricted

The call is made
(Transmit the registered
number to CO line)

* In this case, ‘Local Trunk Dial Access restriction” and ‘Individual Trunk Group Dial
..
Access restriction” assigned in Class of Service are disregarded.

4-c-13

4.03 Last Number

Rediai (LNR)

Description

Operation

:,:~ma: :a!ly saves the last outside number
3 2 sd frs~ a PITS telephone and allows the
-h:tiris.;n &er to make the same outgoing CO
tail aga$n by simply pressing the REDIAL (or
LNR j button.

Calling an outside party by LNR on the DN button
or the CO button
1. Press the DN button or the CO
button.

Programming

The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

None
l

Conditions

2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

Up to 32 digits except the feature number for
selecting a CO line can be memorized
automatically as the last dialed number.

If the last call was made on the
CO button, calling by the DN
button is unavailable and
pressing the REDIAL (LNR)
button is ignored.

“+ ” “#,” “PAUSE,” or “SECRET” are counted as
on’e digit respectively.

Calling by LNR after dialing a feature number for
selecting a CO line
5
1. Press the DN button.

Last number redialing memory is renewed
automatically every time you make a new
outgoing CO call and even one digit is sent to CO
line. Dialing a feature number for selecting a CO
line only does not renew the memorized number.

The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
..
2. Dial a feature number for
selecting a CO line.
l

3. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

Interrupting redialing
While you hear busy tone, ring back tone, or
reorder tone,

n
RENAL

4-c-14

1. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

4.04 Automatic

Redial
pq;am=~ng. Refer to Section 1O-C-51.OO
-;Vc:id Select 1 (WSl)” for further information.)

Description
Automatic Redialing is activated by pressing the
SP-PHONE button and REDIAL (LNR) button
successively (On-hook dialing).
Redialing will be repeated 15 times automatically
at 40-second intervals until the called party
answers.
(These settings can be changed by system

F*ioanswer after dialing 15 times conclude this
function, turning the SP-PHONE button off.

Automatic Redialing is available with the
following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX-T7130, KXT7030, KX-T7050
, .I
I
Press the REDIAL (LNR) button in hands-free status
I
Redialing automatically
I

When no idle line is
available

When the opposite
station is busy

The other party answers
I

Busy tone sounds
for five seconds

.:)

c Conversation

Stand by for 40 seconds.
(During this time, the indicator
on the SP-PHONE button
flashes in red slowly. In other
status, indicator lights).

I
Programming
None

When ringbaLk tone sounds
from the other party

If a CO line is not seized, busy tone sounds for
five seconds. a
.
Turning the SP-PHONE off while hearing busy
tone activates Automatic Callback-Trunk.
For further information, refer to Section 4-C-6.01
“Automatic Callback-Trunk.”

-L

Conditions
Besides the number, this function memorizes the
button used for the last call and executes
automatic redial on that button.
Pressing the REDIAL (LNR) button while the last
used button is in use causes the system to wait
until the button becomes idle. As soon as the
button becomes idle, this function is executed.
If the last used button was the PDN and multiple
PDNs are available, the system selects any idle
PDN.

Operation
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.
l

Automatic Redialing is terminated, if any key
operation is made during Automatic Redialing.

4-c-1 5

The indicator on the SPPHONE button flashes in red
slowly for 40 seconds of
standby status.

4.05 Saved Number

Redial (SNR)
2. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.

Description
Saved Number Rediar allows rhe exte-sion zxr
to store the telephone numbe- ot me ourside
party when the called line is sC;sy 3’ -ftkng a

If the saved call was on the CO
button, calling on the DN

button is ineffective: pressing
the SAVE (SNR) button is
ignored.

conversaion and make the same ca!l again by
simply pressing the dedicated feature buttor::
SAVE or SNR button.

Calling by SNR after dialing a feature number for
selecting a CO line

Programming
None

1. Press the DN button.

Conditions
l

Up to 32 digits of a dialing number can be stored
for this function, not counting the feature number
for selecting a CO line.
y *,” “#,* “PAUSE” or “SECRET” is counted as
one digit.

The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial a feature number for
selecting a CO line.

Saved Number Redialing memory remains intact
until another number is stored in memory.
. ..’

3. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.

Operation
Storing the phone number into SNR memory
When you are speaking on the CO line or when
the called CO line is busy

r-l

Interrupting redialing
While hearing busy tone, ring back tone, or
reorder tone from a CO line

1. Press the AUTO button.

WNORY

1. Press the SAVE (SNR) button.
2. Press the SAVE (SNR) but%%.
+& System saves the:dialed
telephone number.
l

rl,z,
I

(Supplement)
SAVE button is not provided on the following
PITS telephones:

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

PITS type 50, KX-l7020, KX-T7030,
KX-T7050

However, the SAVE button can be assigned to
the PFl button of the above listed PITS
telephones.
Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3) and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment” for further information.

Calling an outside party by SNR on the DN
button or the CO button
1. Press the DN button or the CO
button.
I

I
l

The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4-C-l 6

5.00 Making Internal Calls
5.01 Inter Office Calling
Description

Operation

Inter Office Calling allows the extension user to
call another extension user within the system by
dialing the directory number (three or four digits)
on a DN button.

Calling an extension

mth the handset

1. Lift the handset.

Programming
None

Dial the directory number of the
other extension.

Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling
to the other tenant (inter-tenant calling) can be
enabled or disabled by programming.
Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 =Tenant Service” for

La
t

further information.

You hear ringback tone.

3. When the other party answers,
start conversation.

After concluding conversation,
replace the handset.

Calling an extension hands-free

SP-PlmNe
0

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

Dial the directory number of the
other extension.

)

You hear ringback tone.

Ll
SP-PHONE

3. When the other party answers,
start conversation.

0
El

4-C-l 7

4. Press the SP-PHONE button
after concluding conversation.

5.02 Intercom

Calling
Dperation

Description

1. Lift the handset or press

Intercom Calling allows the extension Jspr to ca.l
another extension user in the same ktercom
group by dialing the intercom Number (one or
two digits) on the ICt,vl button.

the SP-PHONE

Refer to Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for
details about Intercom group.

El
ICY

Besides Intercom Calling, Intercom facility offers
the following features:
l
l
l

2. Press the ICM button.
l
l

Intercom - Voice Calling
Intercom - Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Intercom - Off-Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA)

l
l

Programming

‘Bxtension-8tetion(l/3)",
Intercom Number
ICM Group

You hear dial tone 5.
The indicator on the ICM
button lights in green.

Dial the intercom number of the
other extension.

Refer to descriptions on the following pages.

System Programming

button.

Reference
VT
I Dumb

You hear ringback tone.
An intercom number is one or
two digit(s).

1431

4. When the other party answers,

start conversation.

9-G-l .Ol 104-22.00

After finishing conversation,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
Intercom Calling is available within the same
Intercom group.
(Supplement)

SLT telephone users can neither execute nor
receive Intercom Calling.

In step 3, you can also call the other party by
pressing “*,” then dialing the directory number of
the extension, instead of dialing the intercom
number.
* .I_

--m
.- .--

4-C-18

5.03 Intercom-Voice

Calling
Canceling the Voice Cailing mo&

Description
Intercom-Voice Calling allows an extension user
to call another extension user in the same
Intercom group through intercom Calling with his
voice instead of ringing.
While calling an extension, the user can change

1. Lift the handse: CT z-zss 1-e SF’-

PHONE button.
l

the voice calling mode to the ringing mode by
pressing “ *.” The ringing mode cannot be
changed to the voice caliing mode while calling.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Voice Calling Mode Cancel.”
-’

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
I Dumb

‘System-Numbering Plan (6/9)n, 9-D-6.0610-C-10.00

Voice Calling Mode Set
Voice Calling Mode Cancel

The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Tone Ringing

Changing to the ringing mode during IntercomVoice Calling

Conditions
If the called extension has enabled Voice Calling
Deny, Intercom-Voice Calling resujts in ringing
call even though the caller sets “Voice Calling
. Mode Set.”

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

For further information about Voice Calling Deny,
refer to Section 4-D-2.02 ‘Intercom Answer Voice
Calling Deny.”
Use PDN button to set or cancel this feature.

Press the ICM button.

Operation
Dial the intercom number of the
other extension.

Setting the Voice Calling mode
)

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

l
l

The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 7 or 3 or 4.

/o/

4. Dial *.”

2. Dial the feature number for
‘voice Calling Mode Set.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 3.
Start Ini%$rcom-VoiceCalling t6 the opposite party.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Voice Alerting ]

4-c-1 9

l
l

Ringing the other party starts .
You hear ringback tone.

5.04 Intercom-Busy

Station

Signaling
3. Dial the IntercOrn number of the
c!her extension.

Description
When the called extension user is busy talking on

a DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,
Intercom-Busy Station Signaling informs the
other extension user that he or she is called by
another extension through Intercom Calling with
the flashing ICM button.
The called extension user’s telephone must be
off -hook.

l
l

You hear ringback tone.
The indicator on the ICM
button of the other station
flashes in 240 wink.

(Supplement)
If the ICM button of the other station is occupied,
the caller hears busy tone.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, BSS/OHCA to “Yes.’

Answering the call
If the called extension user’s telephone is PITS
KX-T1232300, KX-T123235 or KX-l7130, Busy
Station Signaling turns into Intercom Off-Hook
Call Announcement (OHCA).
Refer to the next page for further information.
BSS feature is available between the extension
users in the same Intercom group.

The indicator on the ICM button flashes in 240
wink and you hear call waiting tone.
Talking to the second caller by disconnecting the
fira Party
1. Press the ICM button.
l
l

.~,

Talktothesecond party.
The indicator on the ICM
button lights;

Talking to the second caller by holding the first
..

‘System-Class of Sentice (l/2)-, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Conditions

r-l
H

1. Press the HOLD button.

r=l

Intercom-Busy Station Signaling is effective if the
called extension is preset to either of the
following functions:
Y
-.
‘System-Class~~f Service*, BSSJOHCA
Deny is set to y/es.
‘System-Class of Service-, Call Forwardin@
Do Not Disturb is set to Yes.”

The first party is placed on
hold.

2. Pre&?6

ICM button.

Operation

l
l

Speak to the second party.
The indicator on the ICM
button lights.

3. Press the button that is flashing
in 60 wink to talk to the first party
again.

Calling an extension
1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the ICM button.

4-C-20

The second party is
disconnected. Talk to the first
Party.

5.05 Intercom Off-Hook Call
Announcement
(OHCA)
Description

Conditions

When the called extension is busy talking on a
DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,
OHCA allows the calling extension user to inform
the called party that another call is waiting,
through the built-in speaker of the called party’s
PITS telephone.

OHCA does not work if the called extension is
under one of the following conditions:
l
l
l

OHCA works under the following conditions:
l

The ICM buttons on both the calling
extension’s telephone and the called
extension’s telephone are idle.
The called extension’s telephone is PITS
KX-T1232300, KX-T123235 or KX-l7130.
The called extension’s handset is off the
hook.

The ICM button is not idle.
Talking in the speaker phone mode.
“System-Class of Service”, BSSOHCA
Deny is set to “‘Yes.”
“System-Class of Service”, Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is set to “Yes.”

Operation
Executing OHCA
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

To activate this function, install T-SW OHCA card
(KX-T336105) in the Basic Slot 02, and OHCA
card (KX-T96136) on the PLC or HLC card.
Refer to Section 2-C-3.02 “T-SW OHCA Card
(KX-T336105)” and Section 2-C-3.03 ‘OHCA
Card (KX-T96136)’ for further information.
In the system programming, assign ‘SystemClass of Service (l/2)“, BSS/OHCA to “Yes” at
calling extension, and assign ‘Extension-Station
(l/3)“, OHCA Circuit to “Yes” at the called
extension.

2. Press the ICM button.

3. Dial the intercom number of the
extension.
.
l

Programming

System Programming

-L_

L_.

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
SSS/OHCA
9-G-l .Ol 1o-c-22.00
‘Extension-Station (l/3)“,
OHCA Circuit

4-C-21

When the extension is offhook, you hear confirmation
tone 3.

4. Talk to the other party.
A-

6.00 Automatic
6.01 Automatic

Callback
Callback-Trunk

Description

Operation

if no idle CO line is available when dialing a
feature number for selecting a CO line and the
telephone number of an outside party, the caller

Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk (1)
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

hears special busy tone.
On-hook while hearing the special busy tone
calls back the caller as soon as a CO line
becomes idle: call-back ringing. Off-hook or
pressing the SP-PHONE button catches the CO
line automatically, and sends the last dialed
telephone number to the CO line.

EI
E!tl
122

4ss
TO*
*

Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing
cancels this function.
Also no answer in four ringings (within 10
seconds) after the start of callback ringing
cancels this function.

2. Dial the feature number for
selecting a CO line.
l

(22
4SS
72*
*

To activate “Automatic Callback-Trunk,” assign
“Extension-Station”, Automatic Callback-Trunk to
“Yes.”
This setting is assignable on an extension basis.

Reference
VT 1 Dumb
I

You hear dial tone 1.

3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.
l

You hear busy tone 3.

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Programming
System Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.

1
l

“Extension-Station(l/3)“,
Automatic &&a&Trunk

If your PITS has..a display, it
shows:
1 Trunk Queuing 1

(Supplement)
The following four feature numbers are available
for selecting a CO line:

Conditions
Multiple.exiensions are able to set this function to
one or more CO lines at the same time.
A maximum of 64 Automatic Callback-Trunk can
be active in the system.

l
l
l
l

If 64 extensions already set this function to one
or more CO lines, another caller’s attempt to
execute this setting is rejected by normal busy
tone, not by special busy tone.
Even if an extension user sets Call ForwardingNo Answer or Do Not Disturb, he or she can set
Automatic Callback-Trunk: callback ringing is
effective to the extension.
Automatic Callback-Trunk cannot be set by the
extension which has a consultation hold call.
4-C-22

AF?S/Local CO tine Access
Trunk Group 01-08 Access
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access
Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk

Answering callback ringing

(2)

As soon as the specified CO line or a CO line in
the specified trunk group becomes idle, callback
ringing starts.

1. Press the CO button (PCO,
SCO* or GCO) which is lit in
red without lifting the handset.
l

The indicator on the pressed

CO button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1.
You are in hands-free mode.

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.
I-

121 outside party.
.-.
You hear busy tone 3.
‘) E!ll
*
Press the SP-PHONE button.
BP-PHONE
If your PITS has a display, it
r-l
shows:
799

The last dialed number is sent
and

calling the other party starts.

.99

1 TrunkQueuing

to the line automatically

2. Dial the telephone number of the

In non-privacy system, pressing the SC0
button does not set Automatic Callback-Trunk
but establishes a three-party conversation.
Refer to Section 4-G-l .OO“Programmable
Privacy” for further information.

4-C-23

6.02 Automatic

Callback-Station
Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

If busy tone is heard when calling an extension
user, dialing “6” and hanging up causes

Automatic Callback to the caller as soon as the
called party concludes conversation:

l
l

When callback ringing for the caller starts,
answering by off-hook or pressing the SPPHONE button offers calling the other party
automatically.

You hear dial tone 1.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.

2. Dial the directory number of the
other extension.

Off-hook prior to the start of till-back ringing
cancels this function.
Also no answer during four ringings after the start
of call-back ringing cancels this function.

Programming

3. Dial “6.”
l

None

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

Conditions

You hear confirmation tone 2
and reorder tone.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Callback Ext xxxx 1

Up to four extensions are able to assign this
function to one extension at the same time.
. The fifth extension attempting to set this function
is rejected by reorder tone.

Direct&y number
4. Replace the handset.

If you do not dial “6” within 10 seconds after
hearing busy tone, you hear reorder tone and
cannot execute this feature.

Answering callback ringing

Even if an extension user sets Call ForwardingNo Answer or Do Not Disturb, Automatic
Callback-Station is effective to that extension.

As soon as the other extension user concludes
the conversation, callback ringing starts.

Automatic Callback-Station cannot be set by tRe,.,
extension which has a call on consultation hold.

1, Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

4-C-24

You hear ringback tone.
Calling the other extension
starts.

7.00 Executive

Busy Override
Operation

Description

To utilize this feature, assign ‘System-Class 3f
Service”, Executive Busy Override to ‘Yes,” =t
overriding extension.

In entering into a three-party conversation, aJ the

I AL

It is programmable to send this tone or not &
‘System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Srgin.

-- .~‘“‘”

“System-Class of Service (l/2)‘,

Reference
VT
t
DC&I

9-D-4.01

10-G: 90

Conditions
Busy status means that all PDN buttons on he
called extension are in use.
In this status, busy tone sounds.
Executive Busy Override does not function when
the other patty is any one of the following status;

- 1
1

l
l
l
l

Three-party conversation
OHCA conversation
ICM conversation
Private CO conversation

-:__

Executive Busy Override does not function ?
either of two parties in conversation has set the
followings.
l

•l

Programming
Programming

The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the
other extension.

three parties hear confirmation tone.

System

Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Executive Busy Override allows the etiensiouser to intrude on a busy line. and then a 3-&zfty
conversation is established. This feature is
accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone.

Executive Busy Override Deny
(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.)
Data tine Security
(Refer to Section 4-I-6.00.)

4-C-25

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

3. Dial ‘1.”
l

After you hear confirmation
tone 3, start a three-patty
conversation.

8.00 Do Not Disturb
Overt ide

(DND)
Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Do Not Disturb Override allows an extension to
call another extension which has set Do Not
Disturb.
Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides
calling the extension.
Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 ‘Do Not Disturb
(DND)” for further information about DND feature.

2. Dial the directory number of the
other extension.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Do Not Disturb Override to “Yes.”

Programming
System !hgramming

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)‘,
Do Not Distuti Override I

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I
9-D-4.01 1067.00

The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

m
I

3. Dial ‘1 .II
l
l

Conditions

if the other extension sets DND
(Do Not Disturb), you hear
DND tone.

You hear ringback tone.
Calling the other party starts.

::a..
‘

When dialing ‘1; if the other extension is busy,
the caller hears busy tone. In this case, it is
possible to assign Automatic Callback-Station,
etc.,.
For Automatic Callback-Station, refer to Section
4-C-6.02 UAutomatic Callback-Station.”
If “System-Class of Service,” Do Not Disturb
Override is set to ‘No,” the caller hears reorder
tone after dialing ‘1” and cannot call the other
party.

4-C-26

9.00 Walking
Service)

COS (Class Of
3. Dial the four-digit Walking COS

Description

Password.

Allows an ex:er,slo:: user 10 call an outside party
from another extension preset to a lower COS
(Class of Servvlce) by using a higher COS of his
or her own extension temporarily.
This is generally used for making .toll calls from a
toll restricted extension.

123
q

4. Dial the extension number of
your own station.

42s
12,
l

After conclusion of one call to an outside party,
Class of Setvce of the employed station returns
to the original class automatically.

You hear confirmation tone 2.
If your PITS has a displtiy, it
shows:
t Set COS of Exxxx 1

Each tenant has a four digit Walking COS
Password programmed in system program.
The password allows a user to set Walking COS.

Directory number

Programming
I

System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

g-D-1.03 1O-C-S.00
‘System-Operation (3/3)“,
Walking COS Password
10-GS.W
w-2.00
“System-Tenant”,
Walking COS Password
(Tenant 2)
“System-Numbering Plan (719)‘) ~ 9-D-6.07 1fl-G10.00
Walking COS Set
Walking COS Cancel

5. Call an outside party by using a
higher COS of your own station.

Canceling Walking COS
It is possible to cancel Walking COS without
making any call to an outside party as follows:
1. Lift the handset ot,press the SPPHONE button.

Conditions
2. Dial the feature number for
Waking COS Cancel.”

Use the PDN button to set and cancel Walking
cos.
x?z
-**.?I

Operation

Setting Walking COS

You he.& confirmation tone 2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
I

From a lower COS telephone,
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

‘Walking COS Set.”

4-C-27

Restored COS

COS returns to the original
grade.

10.00 Operator

Call

Description

Operation

Allow extension users to call the operator by
dialing the feature number for “Operator Call
cGen&al)” or “Operator Call (Specific).”

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Up to two operators are assignable for the whole
system. If Tenant Service is available, two
operators are assignable for each tenant, that
makes four operators available for the whole
system.

2. Calling an operator without
specifying
1) Dial the feature number for
“Operator Call (General).”

If two operators are assigned in the system, or in

Calling an operator by specifying
1) Dial the feature number for
Qperator Call (Specific).”
2) Dial ‘1 I to specify operator 1.
Dial ‘2’ to specify operator 2.

4‘
.
*7.2
L!fl
I22

the tenant (if tenant Service is employed),

extension users can specify the operator (in the
same tenant) by dialing the feature number for
“Operator Call (Specific).”
Programming

(Supplement)
. If your PITS has a display, the following

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I
Plan (2/g)‘, 94-6.02 1O-G10.00

System Programming
r

message appears on the display:

‘System-Numbering
Operator Call (Specific)
Operator Call (General)

When the called operator is at an Attendant
Console:
1 AlTConsole

Conditions

When the called operator is at an extension:
&le>

When calling an operator by dialing the feature
number for “Operator Call (General),” the
operator is selected according to the type of the
operators’ stations as shown below:

1 1000:Mary
T-z

Type of Station
Operator 1 Operator 2

- bperator
8elected

-TzFATT

ATT

s:
-1

EXT

T”
onfy

operalorf

only

Al-T

operator1

on&

EXT

Operator 1 only

When no operators are assigned, a user hears
reorder tone during executing Operator Call.
For the assignment of operators, refer to Section
3-B-5.00 “Operator.”

4-C-28

J
extension name
directory number

:::.,I

D. Receiving

Features
Line Preference-Answering

1 .OO Line Selection-Answering

1 .Ol Ringing

Description

Line Selection-Answering feature allows a PITS
telephone user to answer an incoming call on it
by simply lifting the handset or pressing the SPPHONE button.

Air:~maxally
connects a PITS telephone user to
an incoming call ringing at PITS telephone by
simply lifting the handset.
Line access buttons that can be selected by this
feature include PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SC0 and
GCO buttons.

One of the following three Line SelectionAnswering features can be assigned to a PITS
telephone individually.
l
l
l

Programming

Ringing Line Preference - Answering
Prime tine Preference - Answering
No Line Preference - Answering

PITS Station Programming

Automatic Answering Selection

Ringing Line Preference-Answering is assigned
to all PITS telephones by default.
This assignment can be changed on a PITS
telephone basis in PITS station programming
mode.

I Reference I

1 12-c-5.001

Conditions
It two or more line on a PITS are ringing
simultaneously, a PITS telephone user is
connectedto the first line to start ringing.

To prevent a PITS telephone from automatically
*
answering an incoming call by simply going offhook, assign No Line Preference-Answering
feature to the PITS telephone.
If No Line Preference-Answering is assigned,
press the appropriate button on a PITS telephone
to answer a call.
tine Selection-Answering feature newly assigned
on a PITS overrides the pre-assigned tine
Selection-Answering feature.

If a PITS telephone user wishes to answer a line
other than the first rfnging line, the desired line
access button must be pressed prior to going offhook (Refer to Section 4-D-l .04 “Direct
Answering (Pm-selection).?
This feature functions only for incoming calls
..
ringing at a PITS telephone.
Consequently, if an incoming call arrives at a line
access button on which delayed ringing is
assigned, that is, no rlnging occurs while the
indicator flashes in 240 wink, in this case
extension user must press the appropriate line
access button to answer the incoming call.
Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information about delayed ringing.
Operation
An incoming call is ringing at your telephone.
Also the indicator light on the call-receiving button
flashes in 240 wink, showing the arrfval of the call.
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

4-D-l

You can automatically answer
the incoming call ringing, and
the indicator on the button
lights in green.
Talk to the caller.

1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering
Description

Operation

Automatically connects a PITS Wmhore :s
answer an incoming call assigned as “P%e Line
(Answering)” on a PITS telephone.
Line access buttons that can be selected by this
feature include PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SC0 and

A call arrives at the assigned prime line and your
telephone is ringing. The indicator on the line
access button assigned as Prime line flashes in
240 wink.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

GCO buttons.
Even if two or more lines on a PITS are ringing

simultaneously, PITS telephone is automatically
connected to an incoming call on a line assigned
as Prime Line-Answering by simply lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
Programming

PITS Station Programming

Automatic Answering Selection

I Reference I
I

12-GWO

Conditions
. When a call or calls are coming on a line or lines
other than the prime line, lifting the handset or
pressing the SP-PHONE button is considered as
a calling operation. If you wish to answer the call
at the time, press the desired line access button.
Refer to Section 4-C-i .Ol ‘Prime tine
Preference-calling” for related information.
It is possible to answer desired incoming call by
pressing the appropriate DN or CO button
directly without lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button (Direct Answering).
Refer to Sectft~&D-1.04 “Direct Ar%wexing
(Pre-selection)” for further information.

4-D-2

The indicator on the call-

receiving button lights in green.
Talk to the caller.

1.03 No Line Preference-Answering

1.04 Direct Answering

(Pre-selection)

Description

if this feature is assigned to a PITS telephone,
the extension user cannot answer an incoming
call by simply lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button.
To answer an incoming call, the user must pr&s
the appropriate line access button.

Allows the user to answer an ircoming cz: zJ
simply pressing the appropriate DN butte- .PDp;
SDN), CO button (PCO, SCO, GCO) or rCM
button on which a call is coming without ilfting :ne
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Direct Answering provides hands-free
conversation

mode automatically.

Programming

Programming
PITS Station Programming

Automatic Answering Selection

Reference
I
I
I

12-Gs.00

None

Conditions
None

Conditions

Operation

In case your PITS teiephone is KX-T30820 (only
three DN buttons are provided) and all DN
buttons are assigned as PDN buttons:

A call arrives and the indicator on the DN, the CO
or the ICM button flashes in 240 wink.

If all three PDN buttons are occupied by
incoming calls, no tone is heard when you lift
the handset or press the SP-PHONE buttons.

1. Press the button that is flashing
in 240 wink.

If two PDN buttons are occupied by the
incoming calls and the other one is idle, PITS
telephone is connected to the idle PDN
automatically and dial tone is heard, when
you lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button since going off-hook is regarded as
calling operation.

Operation
3

A call arrives and your telephone is ringing. The
indicator:on the button which the call is reaching
flashes in 240 wink.
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button, then press the
button on which the call is
coming.
l

The indicator on the callreceiving button lights in green.
Talk to the caller.

4-D-3

The pressed button lights in
green and hands-free
conversation is established
automatically. ,.

2.00 Intercom

Answer

2.01 Intercom Hands-Free
Answerback
Description

Operation

Hands-Free Answerback enables the extension
user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset
when he receives an intercom call.
When Intercom Hands-Free Answerback mode is
established, a calling extension user hears
confirmation tone and a called extension hears a
beep tone.
This feature applies to Intercom calling only.

Setting Hands-Free Answerback
Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SPPHONE is off.

cl
*vTO*w

1. Press the AUTO ANS button.

Programming

The indicator on the AUTO
ANS button lights.

Canceling Hands-Free Answerback

None

Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SPPHONE is off.

Conditions

1. Press the AUTO ANS button.

Type 50 and KX-l7050 PITS telephones cannot
use this function.

4-D-4

The indicator liiht on the
AUTO ANS button goes out.

2.02 Intercom
Deny

Answer

Voice Calling

Description

Operation

Allows extension Users to deny the intercom
Voice Calling from other extension users.
When an extension sets this function, another
extension’s attempt to execute Voice Calling is
ignored and turned into normal ringing alert
automatically.
For further information about Voice Calling, refer
to Section 4-C-5.03 ‘Intercom-Voice Calling.”

To deny Intercom Answer Voice Calling
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Dial the feature number for
“Voice Calling Deny Set.”

To deny Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature
number for “Voice Calling Deny Set.”
To allow Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature
number for “Voice Calling Deny Cancel.”

Programming
System Programming

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
pKi%ipq

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I

-System-NumberingPlan (s/s)“, 9-D-6.06IO-C-10.00
Voice Calling Deny Set
Voice Calling Deny Cancel

El
s,

3. Replace the handset or press the
SPYPHONE button.

To allow Intercom Answer Voice Calling
Conditions
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button. ”

This setting must be executed on the PDN
button.

2. Dial the feature’number for
Voice Calling Deny Cancel.”
. You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-D-5

2.03 Intercom

Answer

BSS/OHCA

Deny
Description

Operation

Allows an extension user to deny “Intercom-Busy
Station Signaling (BSS)” and “Intercom Off-Hook
Call Announcement (OHCA)” from other
extension users. If an user sets this function,
another’s attempt to execute BSSIOHCA is
rejected with busy tone.
For further information about BSS/OHCA
function, refer to Section 4-C-5.04 “IntercomBusy Station Signaling (BSS)” and Section 4-C5.05 “Intercom-Off-Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA).”

To deny Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BSS/
OHCA Deny Set.”
l

Assigning and canceling this function are
executed by dialing the feature number for
‘BSSIOHCA Deny Set” and ‘BSS/OHCA Deny
Cancel.”

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

To perform this function with the feature number
for “BSS/OHCA Deny Set,” assjgn “System-Class
of Service”, BSS/OHCA Deny to yes” on an
extension user basis.

I.‘..
To allow Intercom Answer BSSlOHCA

Programming
SystemPrqamming

Lift the handset or press the SP-

Reference
VT
Dumb

PHONE button.

j “System-Classof Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
BSSIOHCA Deny
i “System-NumberingPlan (5/g)“, &O-6.05 10-C-10.00
BSS/OHCA Deny Set
BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel
Conditions

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Use the PDN button to assign and cancel this
function.

Dial the feature number for
“BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it’

shows:

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-D-6

3.00 Call Pickup
3.01 Dial Call Pickup
If extension users attempt to pick up the above
mentioned calls, reorder tone sounds after dialing
the feature number for “Dial Call Pickup” and the
following message appears on the display, if
provided:

Description
Dial Call Pickup allows an extension user 13
answer !he call that is ringing at another
telephone in the same call pickup group.
To answer a call at nearby extension, simpy lift
the handset and dial the feature number fcl- “Dial
Call Pickup.”

-I

No Incoming Call
Operation

An extension user can be assigned to only one
call pickup group.
Up to 32 call pickup groups are assignable in the
whole system.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

For further information about call pickup gnup,
refer to Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup Grola.’

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup.”

Programming
l

System Programming

. “System-NumberingPlan (3/g)“,
Dial Call Pickup
I

Referen=
VT
1 Zumb
I
9-D-6.-33l@--1-iO.00

Conditions

It is possible to execute this function after Tolding
the current call.
An extension user who has Do Not Distuti
assigned can answer a call that is ringing zt other
extensions.
This feature is not available to &ver
following calls:

cl > A call ringing at an extension outside :f the
same call pickup group
c2>

A call ringing at an extension on whit- Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Piti
Deny” for further information.)

c3>

A call ringing on PC0 button

c4>

A call ringing on ICM button

After you hear confirmation
tone 3, you can answer the call
arriving at another telephone in
the same call pickup group.
Start conversation.

A call arriving at an extension but nor inging
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Enging
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for furer
information.)

4-D-7

3.02 Directed

Call Pickup

Description

Operation

Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to
answer the call ringing at an extension in any call
pickup group by dialing the feature number for

Picking up a call ringing at an extension in the
different call pickup group

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

“Directed Call Pickup,’ and then the directory
number of the ringing extension.
Programming
System Programming

2. Dial the feature number for
“Directed Call Pickup.”

Reference
VT
I Dumb

‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)”
Directed Call Pickup

3. Dial the directory number of the
ringing extension.

Conditions
It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup
after holding the current call.

l
l

An extension user who has Do Not Disturb
assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other

extensions.
This feature is not available to answer the
following calls:
cl> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 %afl Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
&

A call ringing on PC0 button

<3> A call ringing on ICM button
<4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
+ L (Refer to Section 3-D-3.O~Flexipie Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing’ for further
information.)
For the above calls, reorder tone sounds after
dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup” and the following message appears on
the display, if provided:
No Incoming Call

4-D-8

You hear confirmation tone 3.
Talk to the caller.

3.03 Call Pickup

Deny

Description

Operation

Call Pickup Deny allows an extension user to
prohibit the other extension users from picking up
calls ringing at his or her extension by the call
pickup feature (whether Dial Call Pickup or
Directed Call Pickup).

Assigning Call Pickup Deny
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

To assign or cancel this function; dial the feature
number for “Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Set.”

Programming

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

3. Replace the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call
Pickup Deny.

Canceling Call Pickup Deny

Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny
assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call
Pickup or Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing at
other extensions.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
=%f your PITS has a dispfay, it
shows:
l

z-*

1 C. Pikuo Allow 1
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-D-9

4.00 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day
Service
Description

Conditions

Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will
ring the external pager and any extension user in
the system can answer the calls by dialing the
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

If tenant service is employed :
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerTenant.
Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.

To activate this feature. assign “Group-Trunk
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO tine” Trunk Group to ‘1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utiiize the external pager, assign ‘SystemOperation”, External Paging 1, 2” to ‘Yes.’

Operation
Answering incoming CO calls programmed for
TAFAS
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.

Up to two external pagers can be connected to
this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.

.l . Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to
Section 4-l-l .Ol ‘Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

System Programming

‘System-Operation(l/3)‘.
External Paging 1,2

Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenan?

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. If a call is ringing at external
pager 1: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 1 .*
If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 2.”
7 I
“Y
3. Talk to the caller.

Reference - .
VT
Dumb
.9-D-1.01 lO-c-4xM

‘System-Numbeting Plan (3/g)“, W-8.03 10-C-10.00
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
9-E-1.01 10-G14.00
%roup-Trunk-Group (l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)
Trunk-CO tine”,
Trunk Group

SF-l.00 10678.00
9-F-2.00 1O-C-19.00

4-D-l 0

5.00 Executive
Deny

Busy Override
Operation

Description
Assigning

and canceling

Busy Override

Assigning Executive Busy Override Deny

Deny are

a,dallable to each extension.
If an extension sets this function, another
extension’s attempt to perform Executive Busy
Override on the extension is rejected with busy
tone.
Refer to Section 4-C-7.00 “Executive Busy
Override” for further information.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Busy
Override Deny Set.”

To set or cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Busy Override Deny Set” or “Busy
Override Deny Cancel.”

System programming is required to assign this
feature.
Assign “System-Class of Service”, Executive
Busy Override

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Busy Ovrde Deny 1
-.

Deny to ‘Yes.”

rlx

Programming
System Programming

“System-Class of Senrice(la)“,
Executive Busy Override

Refemlce
vi

Dumb

W-4.01

10-C-7.00

W-6.05

10440.00

Canceling Ekutive

Busy Override Deny
..
1. Lii the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Deny
“System-Numbering Plan (5B)“.

Busy Override Deny Set
Busy Override Deny Cancel
conditions

To assign and cancel Executive Busy Override
Deny, use the PDN button.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

(21
q
.,‘
1..
.

2. Dial the feature number for ‘Busy
_,
Ch@cte Deny Cancel.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2andthendialtonel
or3or4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
t Busv Ovrde Albw 1

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-D-1 I

6.00 Do Not Disturb

(DND)

Description

(4)

Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to
appear busy to all incoming calls (intercom,
extension and outside calls).

Fowarding feature pre-assigned on the
extension and vice versa.
Refer to Section 4-F-2.00 “Call Forwarding
(FWD)” for further information.

To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes”
beforehand by system programming.
This feature can be assigned and canceled either
by dialing the feature number or using the
FWDIDND button.

(5)

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“.

BSS/OHCA
DND is effective for BSSIOHCA.
Refer to Section 4-C-5.04 and 4-C-5.05 for
further information.

(6) DND Override

Programming
System Programming

FWD/DND
Setting DND feature cancels any Call

“Do Not Disturb Overrfde” allows extension
users to override ‘Do Not Disturb” feature
assigned on the called extension user.
Refer to Section 4-C-8.00 ‘Do Not Disturb
Override” for further information.

Fkterence
v-r
Dumb
SW.01

lW-7.00

Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb
“System-NumberingPlan (S/9)‘. 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
Do Not Disturb Set
..
Call Forwarding/Do Not

Operation
Assigning Do Not Disturb (1)

Disturb Cancel

1. Lift the handset or press

Conditions
(1) IRNA - Automatically
If a catl via DWUDID is directed to an
extension in the DND mode, it will be
automatically redirected to another extension
(including VPS extension) or an Attendant
Console assigned as the IRNA destination.
Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 “fntercept Routrng
- No Answer (IRNA) for further information.
(2) Making Calls

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for Do
Not Disturb Set yy*l” (default).
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
~--+*e-#your PITS has a display, it shows:
l

.-t&2

An extension in the DND mode can still be
used to make calls and access any other
features available to that extension.

1 Do Not Disturb 1
3. Replace the handset or press the

(3) Answering Calts

SP-PHONE button.

An extension in the DND mode is available:
l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

To answer a call if its indiiion of arrival is
showi, on his or her extension.
Refer to (Supplement 2) on page 4-D-14 for
further information.

J
l

To answer a call ringing at another
extension by “Call Pickup” feature.
Refer to Section 4-D-3.00 “Call Pickup” for
further information.

4-D-12
(30393)

The FWD/DND indicator lights.

Assigning

Do Not Disturb (2)

Canceling Do Not Disturb (2)

1. Lift the handse: or press ‘79 SPPHONE button

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

2.
FWD/DND button.’
FWWDND
rl[1
Press the

1-1

3. Dial “1.”
l

The indicator light on the
FWDIDND button goes out.

2. Press the FWDaND button.

- ‘.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

•l
OW

3. Dial “0.”

9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 FWD/DND Cancel f
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

The FWD/DND-indicator lights.

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
I

I
l

The FWD/DND indicator
remains off.

Canceling Do Not Disturb (1)
(Supplement)

I. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l
l

Type 50 and the KX-T7050 PITS telephones are
not provided with the FWD/DND button. To do
step 2 using them, assign a PF button to be
FWDIDND button in “Extension-Station”, PF Key
Type or PITS station program mode.
For further information atkut Pll% station
program mode. refer to Section 12-C-2.00 “PF
Button Assignment.” - .? ;.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The FWDIDND indicator goes
Out.

2. Dial the feature number for Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel Y#O” (default).
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

The FWD/DND indicator
remains off.

4-D-13
(30393)

(Su;olement

The :a3le bebw sncws w?o!her an extension which has DND assigned
rirgs or not and how its P3N indicator Ights, when it receives a call.
Alsc shows whethe: the o:her extensions which has the extension’s
PDt4 assigned rings cr not and how their SON indicators light, when the
extension having DND receives a call

Extension which
has DND assigned
PW
indicator off
Noring *1

Extension which has
SDN assigned (SDN)

Yes

Green 240 wink
No ring

Red 240 wink
Ring

Indicator off
No ring *l

Yes

Green 240 wink
No ring

Type of call arriving at 1 Other extensions
has SDN assigned
setting extension

or not
Extension call

Attendant Console call

DIL (1 :N) call to PDN

No
Yes

DIL (1:l) call to PDN

DID call

Green 240 wink
No ring

Green 240 wink
Ring

Yes

Green 240 wink
Norillg

..
Red 240 wink

1 lndiiator off
Noring
--+rr.-

lndlcator off
Noring

No
Yes

lndiior off
No ring

DIL (1 :N) call to Group
CO/Single CO

Red 240 wink
No ring

DIL (1 :l) Call to Single
co

Green 240 wink
Ring

Other calls

Indicator off
No ring -1

-1

Lights on in red
No ring

No
Yes

DISA call

Red 240 wink
Ring

DND tone is sent to the caller.

4-D-l 4

Indicator off
No ring

7.00 Call Waiting
Call waiting tone can k ass;g;es :c ?:/c :joes bb
specifying the timing according ;c :r.? vw of
arriving Call.% Calls from outside parr:es cr cdl&
from extensions, as illustrated oeiow :

Description
Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates
that another call (extension or CO line) is waiting.
To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call Waiting
Cancel.”

Programming

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“,
Call Waiting Set
Call Waiting Cancel

15.0 sets

,,
CL

YLiLii
>

Tone 2
for calls from outside parties:

Reference

System Programming

l-l

Tone 1 -

1 Dumb
I

j 9-D-6.05 ~CGlO.00~

for calls from extensions:

Conditions
Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call
Waiting.

For selecting tone 1 or tone 2, refer to Section
12-C-6.00 “Call Waiting Tone Selection.”

. While Call Waiting is active, the waiting tone and
the display, if provided, are executed by the
following timing :
Call waiting tone:
l-l
<

15.0 sets

)

4-D-l 5

Operation
A.7.srver-c Call LVairing

Setting Call Waiting

A cdl f-zwhile l2.q

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature ‘number for “Call
Waiting Set.”

an extension or an outside party arrives
a zxversation.

The mdiitor on the DN or the CO button
f!asnes irr 240 wink.

. You Qear call waiting tone.
Talking to the new caller by concluding the current

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3.

call
1. Press the flashing DN or CO

button.

3. Replace the handset.
D

l
l

Canceling Call Waiting

Talking to the new caller by holding the current call

HOLO
0cl

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

1. Press the HOLD button to hold
the current
_. party.
l

2. Dial the feature number for “call
waiting Cancel.”
l

The current call is diinnected.
Talk to the new caller on the
pressed DN or CO button.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Press the DN or CO button flashing

in 240 wink
l
l

3. Replace the handset.

EJ.

4-D-l 6

You hear no tbne.

.:-

Talk to the new ‘caller.
To condude the new call and talk
to the held party again, press the
DN or CO button flashing in 60
wink.

8.00 Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-Log Out
Description

Operation

UCD group members may leave the group
temporarily by dialing the feature number for
“UCD Log Out” or using the programmable UCD
Log In button to prevent UCD calls being sent to
their extensions.

Setting UCD Log Out (1)
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section
3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with
OGM.”

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD
Log Out.”
l

Programming

“System-Numbering
UCD Leg In
UCD Log Cut
“Extension-Station
DN Key Type,
“Extension-Station
DSS Key Type

RE
VT

Plan p/9)“,

(2/3)“,

9-G-l .oz

(3n)“,

9-G-l .03

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

t UCD Losoa 1

9-o-6.09
3.

Conditicm

%place the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Setting UCD Log Out (2)

To set or cancel UCD Log Out, use the PDN
button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

When an extension of the UCD group set for Log
Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be
heard.

(sewnd) 0

You hear confmation tone 1 or
2.

System Ptcgrammirg

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

- 2

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Press the UCD Log In button.

p-;‘
l

You hear conknation tone 1 or
2.
The indicator

uiii
4-D-l 7

on the UCD Log
In button lights in red.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Rep&e the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

.:.

Canceling UCD Log Out (1)

Canceling UCD Log Out (2)
I_ Ly f+ “areP%NE
b&

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.
l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD
Log In.”
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

You

hear

;r ;iess ::e SP-

dk x-32 * of 3 or 4.

111 .
.

-1

2. Press the UCD Lq In button.
You hear wcfirmation tone 1 or
2.
The indicator iight on the UCD
Loglnbuttongoesout.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
,
1 UCD Login /

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-18

E. Holding
1.00

Features

Hold

Description

Operation

Allows an extension user to hold the current call
and either call or answer another extension or
outside party.

Placing a Call on Hold
In conversation
button

To place a call on hold, press the HOLD button.
To retrieve a held call, simply press the flashing
line access button on which a call is held.

1. Press the HOLD button.
If the call is on the DN or SC0
or GCO button, the indicator on
the button flashes in green 60
wink. If the call is on the PC0
button, the indicator on the
button flashes in green 120
wink. You hear confirmation
tone 2 and then no tone.
. The other party is placed on
Hold.
. You can hang up without
loosing a held call.
.

A call placed on hold can be retrieved at the
extension that put the call on hold or at an
extension that shares the held line.
A PITS telephone user can place as many calls
on hold as it has line access button (PCO, GCO,
SCO, PDN, SDN).
Programming
None

Retrieving a Held Call

Conditions

From the holding extension

. The extension users can not hold the following
calls.
l
l
l
l

on the DN, SCO, GCO or PC0

1. Press the green button that is
flashing in 60 wink or 120 wink.
..
The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
Talk to the other party again.

A call on ICM button
A call with Attendant Console
A call with Doorphone
Paging Announcement through built-in
speaker of PITS

A call held on PC0 button can not be retrieved
from the other extensions.

From another extension that shares the held line
I

If a held calf has not been an-d
more than a
preassigned time, a warning tone may sound at
extension which placed a call on hold.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”
for further information.

+a2
t
t
I

If a held call is not answered more than 30
minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

1. Press the red button that is
slowly flashirS$ in 6o‘wink
The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
. Start conversation with the
retrieved party.
.

(Supplement)
Any extension user can retrieve the call held at
another extension by dialing the feature number
for “Hold Extension Retrieve.”
For further information, refer to Section 4-E-4.00
“Call Hold Retrieve-Station.”

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-l .OO‘Music on Hold” for further information.

4-E-l

2.00 Exclusive

Hold

Description

Operation

Allows an extension user to place a call on hold
exclusively and either make or answer another
extension or outside @I.
A call held by “Exclusive Hold” can not be
retrieved from any other extension.

Placing a Call on Exclusive Hold
During a conversation with the other party
1. Press the HOLD button.
l

To place a call on exclusive hold, press the
HOLD button twice.
To retrieve a call placed on exclusive hold, simply
press the flashing line access button (PCO,
GCO, SCO, PDN, SDN) on which a call is held.
A call on exclusive hold can be retrieved only at
the extension that put a call on exclusive hold.

2. Press the HOLD button again.
l

A PITS telephone user can place as many calls
on exclusive hold as it has line access buttons.

The indicator on the button in
use flashes in green 60 wink.
You hear confirmation tone 2
and then no tone.

The flashing indicator changes
to green 120 wink.
The other party is held
exclusively.

Programming
Retrieving a Call on Exclusive Hold

None

1. Press the green button that is
flashing in 120 wink.

Conditions
The extension users can not place the following
calls on exclusive hold.
l
l
l
l

A call on ICM button
A call with Attendant Console
A call with Doorphone
Paging Announcement through built-in
speaker of PITS

l
l

The indiitor on the pressed
button lights in green.
The held party is retrieved.
Talk to the other party again.

(Supplement)
To change ‘Exclusive Hold’ to ‘Hold, press the
HOLD button again. ExclusiveHold and Hold
alternate with each pressing of the HOLD button.
::
?

A call held on PC0 buttonis always treated as
exclusive hold and therefore it can not be
retrieved from any other exter&&If a held call has not been answered within the
pre-assigned time, a warning tone may sound at
extension which placed a call on hold.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 ‘Held Call Reminder”
for further information.
If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it
will be disconnected automatically.
Music on Hold will be sent to the held patty if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-l .OO“Music on Hold” for further information.

4-E-2

3.00 Consultation

‘t

Hold

Description

Operation

Allows extension users to place a call on hold
temporarily on purpose to transfer a call or make
a conference call.
Other extension users cannot retrieve the calls
‘on Consultation Hold.

Placing a call on Consultation
button

Consultation Hold is performed by pressing the
TRANSFER button or the CONF button. If the
TRANSFER button is pressed, a call is held until
the user dials the telephone number to transfer
the call. If the CONF button is pressed, a call is
held until the user dials the telephone number of
the conference member and presses the CONF
button again.

TRANSFER 1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF

button.

q
CONF

The extension users can not place the following
. calls on consultation hold.

The DN button in use is still lit
in green, you hear confirmation

tone 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or
4.
The call is placed on
Consultation Hold.
You can make another call on
the same DN button.

(Supplement)
In step 1, if the CO button is used instead of the
DN button, the CO button starts flashing in 120
wink, and an idle DN button is automatically
selected.

Conditions

None

Programming

Hold on one DN

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (1)

A call on ICM button
A call with Attendant Console
A call with Doorphone
Paging Announcement through built-in
speaker of PITS

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

Consultation Hold Recall starts.

Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Consultation Hold Recall tone sound immediately
if the extension user replaces the handset while
having a call on consultation hold.

If an extension user mzl@& a call b,’ pressing the
FLASH button while having a call on consultation
hold, Consultation Hold Recall tone does not
sound.

A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved.
Talk to the other party.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (2)
You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
are in conversation with another party on the DN
button.

Consultation Hoki Recall tone sounds in the
same way as Held Call Reminder.
If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it
will be disconnected automatically.

1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
button.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-l .OO“Music on Hold” for further information.

. A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved and you can talk to
the retrieved party.
Another party is placed on
Consultation Hold.
The DN button is still lit in
green.
l

4-E-3

Placing a call on Consuitation
buttons

Retrieving a call on Consultation

Hold on twc DN

1. Press the TRANSFER

You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
are talking on another DN or CO button.

-mAreFER
q

or CONF

button.
or

1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
button.

The DN button in use is still lit

in green, you hear confirmation
tone 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or

CCNF

n
El

4.
l

The call is placed on
Consultation Hold.

63
0

The pressed button lights in
green, you hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.
You can call another party from
the seleoted DN or CO button.
The DN button where a call
has been held changes from
being lit in green to flashing in
green 120 wink.

You have placed a call on Consukation Hold and
are talking on another DN or CO button.
1. Press the DN or CO button
where the call has been held and
flashing in green 120 wink.

You placed a call on Consultation hold and press
another DN or CO button.

A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved and you can talk to
the retrieved party.
The DN or CO button changes
from flashing in green 120 wink
to being lit in green.
Another call is disconnected
and the,green indicator light on
the button goes out.

1. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

The indicator light on the
pressed DN or?0 button goes
Out.

Consul&&en Hold Recall starts.

2. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.
l

A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved and you can talk to
the retrieved pa;ty.
The DN or CO button changes
from flashing in green 120 wink
to being lit in green.
Another party in conversation
is placed on Consultation Hold
and the DN button changes
from being lit in green to
flashing in green 120 wink.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (3)

Retrieving a call on Consuttation Hold (1)

I-

2. Press another DN or CO button.
l

Hold (2)

call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved You can talk to the
Party
The DN button changes from
flashing in 120 wink to being lit
in green.

4-E-4

4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station
Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

kilows an extension user to talk to the other par;y
oy remeving a call held by another extension.

This function is performed by dialing the feature
number for “Hold Extension Retrieve” and
extension number on which a call is placed on
hold (directory number: three or four digits).

Dial the feature number for
“Hold Extension Retrieve.”

Programming
Dial the directory number of the
holding extension : three or four
digits.
. After hearing confirmation tone
3, start conversation with the
retrieved party.

Conditions
Even if the other extension has held multiple
calls, there is no preferential order for retrieving
calls.

.:.

In case of a failure to retrieve a call (the other
extension holds no call), reorder tone is returned
and the following message appears on the
display, if provided:
1 No Hold Call

The following calls cannot be retrieved from other
extensions.
l
l
l

A call held on PC0 button
A call placed on Exclusive Hold
A call place on Consultation Hold

4-E-5

5.00 Call Park
5.01

Call Park-System

Description

Conditions

Allows an extension user to hold a call on the DN
or CO button (both extension and outside) into a
parking area common to the system.
The parked call can be retrieved from any
extension in the system.
Call Park can be used whenever an extension
user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere,
and wishes to complete the call from another
extension.

If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas
can be split between two tenants in ‘SystemTenant”, Call Park Boundary.
A parked call will be disconnected automatically
by the system, if it is not answered within 30
minutes.
When a call on PC0 or SC0 button is parked in
the system parking area, the green indicator light
on PC0 or SC0 button turns to red.
When a call on DN or GCO button is parked in
the system parking area, the green indicator light
on DN or GCO button turns off.

Two methods are available for Call Park-System.
cl > By dialing the feature number for “Call ParkSystem.”
<2> By pressing the Call Park System button
(Assignable Feature button).
To retrieve a larked call, dial the feature number .for %all Park Retrieve-System.”
20 parking areas are available common to the
system.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
.%
3-E-l .OO‘Music on Hold.’

Programming
Rel
VT

SystemProgramming
‘System-Ten&,
Call Park 6olJndary
‘System-NumberingPlan (4&)
Call Park-System
Call Perk Retrieve6ystem
‘+ension-Station (2M)“.
DN Key Type
‘Extension-Station(3/3)l,
PF Key Type
DSS Key Type

Parking a call in the system parking area by
pressing the Call Park System button is ignored
by the system if the extension user has already
consultation hold call.

9-o-2.00
9-o-6.04
9-Gl.02

lO-G24.00

9-G-1.03

PITS Statkm Pmgramming
DN (DirectoryNumber)Button
Assignment
PF (ProgrammableFeature)Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

10625.00
1o-c-26.00

Reference
12-c-1.00
12-c-2.00
12c-3.00

4-E-6

3. Replace the handset or press
SP-PHONE button.

Operation
Parking 2 2:

.d,-:ns 2 :o7\~-sa;ion on the DN or

CO buttor
TRANSFER 1. Press :ne TRANSFER button,
then alal the feature number for
“Cal! Park-System.” or press only
El
the “Call Park System” button.
l

3P,
*
2l

The other party is placed on
Consultation Hold. You hear
confirmation tone 2 then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(Supplement)
In step 1, when you are talking on the CO button,
pressing the Call Park System button is ignored if
there is no idle DN button.
..

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the parking area number in
two digits : 01 to 20.
l

When you succeed in Call
Park-System, you hear
confirmation tone 2 then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Park Retrieve-System.”

3. Dial the parking area number :
01 to 20.

[ Call Parked at xx 1
+
parking area
number (01 to 20)
l

If a call cannot be parked on
the selected parking area,
(another call is already parked
in the parking area), you hear
busy tone 1 or 2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 Parked at xx N/AI

When you succeed in retrieving
the parked call, you hear
confirmation tone 2. Then talk
to the other party,
If no call is parked on the
selected parking area, you
hear reorder tone.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 No Hold Call

v :’
+
parking area
number (01 to 20)
l

Retrieving a call parked in the system parking
area

In this case, dialing another
parking area number (01 to 20)
allows you to try a new call
park destination.
To talk to the party placed on
Consultation Hold again while
hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow
the same procedure as
retrieving Consultation Hold.
Refer to Section 4-E-3.00
“Consultation Hold.”

4-E-7

5.02 Call Park-Station
Description

Conditions

P o*.us ar: extension user to hold a call on the DN
c- SO button (both extension and outside) into
-.!s own parking area, then retrieve the parked

A parked call will be disconnected automatically
by the system, if it is not answered within 30

minutes.

call from any extension in the system.
During a conversation on the PC0 or SC0
button, executing Call Park-Station makes the
indicator on the button light in red.

Call Park also allows extension users to answer
a call from any extension or outside party when
paged.
Each extension has its own parking area.

During a conversation on the DN or GCO button,
executing Call Park-Station makes the indicator
light on the button go out.

Two ways are available for Call Park-Station.

1 1234: RMT Access 1
t
Remote Directory Number:
three or four digits

Conditions
If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends
Music on Hold to the transferred party during the
transferring operation.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO‘Music
on Hold.”

. If Remote Maintenance

Resource is not in use, the
held party hears modem
answer tone and start
communication with Remote
instantly.

If Remote Maintenance Resouq&isin use, busy
tone is returned to the held party. Automatic
Callback does not function in this case, so the
party should call Remote again when it becomes
idle.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

If extensions other than operators dial the Remote
Directory Number, reorder tone is returned.

4-F-5

1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer
-to
Attendant Console
Description

Operation

Allows an extenson user to transfer a call (both
extenson and outsde) to an Attendant Console
without announcement.

During a conversation
outside party.

Programming

Press the TRANSFER

None
l

Conditions
1) Transfer Recall
A call transferred by this feature will not ring
back at the extension who transferred the call
even if the Attendant Console does not
answer the call after the transfer recall timer

has been elapsed.

2) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)

A call transferred to an Attendant Console will

If your PITS has a display. it
shows:

2 Make a call to an Attendant
Console.
l

You hear ringback tone.

Calling an Attendant Console
starts.

3 Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
At an Attendant Console:
The call is displayed as a
transfer recall.

does not answer the call after the IRNA timer
has been elapsed.

3) What if ail six Loop keys on the Attendant
Console are not idle?
A call is put in the call waiting queue of the
Attendant Console.
4) What if the Attendant Console is in ATT-FWD
mode?
This feature does not function.
A call is simpiy put on Consultation Hoid, that
is, a call will ring back at the extension who
tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she
goes on-hook.

button.

The other party is put on
Consuttation Hoid.
You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

1 Transfer to 1

not be transferred to another extension by
IRNA feature even if the Attendant Console
i

,
1

with an extension or an

(Supplement)
The feature numbers and DN’s for making a call
to an Attendant Console are:

Operator Call (General)
Operator Call (Specifii)

FDN for General Operator Call

DN for ATT1 and ATT2

5) Music on Hold
tf Music on Hoid is avaiiabie. the system
sends Music on Hoid to the transferred party,
from the start of the transferring operation till
the destination party answers.

4-F-5-1
(21292)

1.07

Unscreened Call Transfer
-to a UCD Group (with OGM)

Description

Feature References

Allows any extension user to transfer an outside
call to a UCD Group from 01 to 04 (with OGM
type).

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with /without
O-GM (Section 3-D-2.06)

From version 8.xX, not only the operators but
any extension user can transfer an outside call to
a UCD group (with OGM).

Programming

conattons

lf all group members are not available to answer
the call, il will be redirected to the Overflow
destination. In thii case, the call will be
disconnected if not answered by the Overflow
destination withii 60 seconds.
See page 3-D-l 3 for further information.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside party.

r===l

1 Press the TRANSFER button.

0
I

’Theotherpaftyisputon
Consultation Hold.
. You hear confiib~ tone 2
1 or3or4.
. andthendialtona
If your PlTS has a display, it
2

OhI the FDN for UCD group (01
tOO4).
You hear confirmation tone 3 *
and then diil tone 1 or 3 or 4.
l

3 Rep&e the handset or press the
SP-PHON E button.

4-F-5-2
(40993)

2.00 Call Forwarding

(FWD)

2.01 Call Forwarding-All

Calls

Description

Conditions

Call Forwarding-All Calls allows extension users
who are away from their phones to receive
incoming calls (both extension and CO) at
another extension.

To set or cancel this function, use the PDN
button.
An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators (Attendant
Console or Extension).
‘FDN for General Operator Call” can be used to
assign operators as the destination of Call
Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

Call Forwarding-All Calls feature functions even if
the extension is in the PITS programming mode.
If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the ‘Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l

7
&4

l
l

A
A
A
A
A

call
call
call
call
call

appearing on ICM button
from doorphone
appearing on PC0 button
routed via DIL 1: N feature
directed to a UCD group

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to ‘Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant
Console.

To execute Call Fonvarding-All Calls, assign
‘System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb to “Yes.”
To set or cancel this function, the following two
methods are available:
cl> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
c2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-All Calls Ser and
“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if
he or she attempts:

Programming
l

SystemProgramming

Rei
VT
l

“System-Classof Service (l/2)=, 9-O-4.01 13c7.00
Call Forwarding& Not
Disturb
‘System-NumberingPlan (4/g)“, 9-0-6.04 10-6-10.00
Call Forwarding-AllCall Set
‘System-NumberingPlan (5/9)“, 9-O-6.05 10-c-10.00
Call ForwardinglDoNot
Disturb Cancel

To set the destination to an extension in the
other tenant when Tenant Service is employed.
To set the destination to another extension that
presets its own destination to the users
extension.
To call another extension that presets its
destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-1~11.OORemote Station Feature
Control.”

4-F-6
(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.
Type of Call Arriving
at Setting Extension
Extension call

Condition of Destination

0
0
0
0

Idle status

Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1:l) or DISA call Idle status
Busy status

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.
Busy tone is sent from destination.
DND tone is sent from destination.
Busy tone is sent from destination.

)(

Call is placed on setting extension.

0
0

Call is forwarded to destination.
Call is forwarded and kept waiting
at destination.

Same as call reaching DND. See
Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode

Call is forwarded and kept waiting
at destination.

Conditions except In Service *

Call is placed on setting extension.

Idle status

0
0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Assigned to DND

DID call

Forwarding
Execution

Busy status
Assigned to DND

Busy tone is sent from destination
Same as call reaching DND. See
Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Distu$
(DND).”

-‘z4 ^

‘Ii

PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *

0
X

Busy tone is sent from desti‘nation
Call is placed on destination.

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

4-F-7

Conditions are Qut of Service,”
‘Fault” and ‘Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 ‘Port” for details.

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-All

Calls

Canceling Call Forwarding-All

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE
l

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “2.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-All Call Set.”

Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or “FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as
the destination:

(All) Ext xxxx
-

Directory number:
three or four digits
When setting operators as the
destination:

..-.)

/o/

cl
,z,

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)
Type 50 and KX-l7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWDIDND button.
Refer to Section 9-G-l -03 “Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
further information.
_- *.- .*

I
1

-?Directory number:
three or four digits
Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
e if your PITS has a display, it
shows:
l

[ FWD/DND Cancel

If an operator is extension
IFWD (All) Ext xxxx

The indicator light flashing on
the FWD/DND button goes out.

0OW
FrEl

If an operator is Attendant
Console
1FWD (All) AT-T

button.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

Calls

The indicator on the FWDIDND
button starts flashing.

4-F-8
(21292)

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
Description

Conditions

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook provides
automatic call transfer to a preset destination
when the user’s extension is busy.
Busy status means all PDNs are used, or off-hook
status (including hands-free status) or in the PITS
programming mode.

To set or cancel this function, use the PDN
button.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call’ is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)’ for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l
l
l

A
A
A
A
A

call
call
call
call
call

appearing on ICM button
from doorphone
appearing on PC0 button
routed via DK 1: N feature
directed to a UCD group

To set this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to ‘Yes.”
For setting and canceling this function, two
methods are available:
cl > By pressing the FWD/DND button.
<2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Fonnrarding-BusySer and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be
- ..
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer feature.
If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to Yes’ by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
.another tenant if the destination of C&II
Forwarding-Busy/Off-t-look is set to an Attendant
Console.
Calls from any VM extension will’not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if
he or she attempts:
l

Programming
Q-m

prosrammins

Reterence
Dumb
VT

%ystem-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 lOG7.00
Call ForwardingKb Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Pian (WY, 9-D-6.04 10420.00
Call Forwarding-Busy Set
‘System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 104-10.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

To set the destination to an extension in the
other tenant when Tenant Setice is employed.
To set the destination to another extension that
presets its own destination to the user’s
extension.
To call another extension that presets its
destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-l-11 90 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

4-F-9
(21292)

The followmg table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.
Type of Call Arriving
at Setting Extension
j IExtension call

forwardins
Execution

Condition of Destination
Idle status

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

j
/

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded -.to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service * /
DIL (1 :I) or DISA cal I Idle status

Busy status
I

Assigned to DND
j
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Sewice * i
DID call

Idle status
Busy status

i
/
L

Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode

i
r

Conditions except In Service * :

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

4-F-l 0

Conditions are Wut of Service,”
“Fault” and ‘Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Canceling

Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.
l

2. Press the FWD!DND button, then
dial “3.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-Busy Set.”

Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail ports,
or “FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination.
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

When setting an extension as
the destination:
IFWD(BSY) Ext=

TDirectory number:
three or four digits
When setting operators as the
destination:

(Supplement)
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 ‘Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 ‘PF Button Assignment” for
further information.

1
lf an operator is extension

pwD(BsY)Extxxxx1
$

Directory number:
three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

iii2

IFWD (BSY) A-IT

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
FWD/DND Cancel

If an operator is Attendant
2
Console

The indicator light flashing on
the FWD/DND button goes out.

Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
l

-Hook

The indicator on the FWD/DND
button starts flashing.

4-F-l 1
(21292)

2.03 Call Forwarding-No

Answer

Description

Programming

Call Forwarding-No ?~srer orc~~~!esautomatic
call transfer to a prese: desiina:ion if the
extension user cannof answer the call in a
determined period (tha! IS, if the caller is not
answered while hearing ringback tone in a
specified period).

System Frogramming
“System-Sys:em
Timer”,
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Time-Out
“System-Class of Service (l/2)“,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering
Plan (4/g)“,

If the extension setting this function is in the PITS
programming mode. Call Forwarding-No Answer
is disabled and the calier hears busy tone.
, .:.
I

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
A
A
A
. A
A

l
l

call
call
call
call
call

appearing on ICM button
from doorphone
appearing on PC0 button
routed via DIL 1: N feature
directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb to “Yes.”
For setting or canceling this function, two
methods are available:
cl > By pressing the FWD/DND button.
c2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

9-D-3.00

1O-C-6.00

9-D-4.01

1O-C-7.00

9-D-6.04

1O-C-10.00

Call Forwarding-NoAnswer
Set
“System-NumberingPlan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb Cancel

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer lime-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
.Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

Reference
Dumb
VT

Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded
itself is in a call forward mode, a call is not
forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the first
forwarded extension. In case of an outside call, if
not answered in a specified time period, the call will
be routed to another destination, if available, based
on the “Intercept Flouting-No Answer” feature.
When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming, a call
from another tenant will not be forwarded if
*_- forwarding destinatJon is an Attendant Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if
forwarding destination is another VM extension.
An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if he
or she attempts:
l

To set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant when Tenant Service is employed.
To set the destination to another extension that
presets its own destination to the user’s extension.
To call another extension that presets its
destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-l-11 .OO“Remote Station Feature Control.”
4-F-l 2
(21292)

-3
c

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
;-is function depencing on the conditions of the preset destination.
T@+z of Call Arriving
3r Setting Extension
4

Extension call

Condition of Destination

Forwardin!
Execution

Idle status

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status
Assigned

to DND

PITS programming mode

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1 :l) or DISA call Idle status
Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DID call

Idle status
Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

4-F-l 3

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-No Answer
-.I‘*. :he handset or press
::e SP-PHONE button.

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

- The indicator light flashing on
!he FWD/DND button goes out.
WOiDNO

•l

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “4.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set.”

GHI

El
QW

/o/
0

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or “FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination.
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as
the destination:
FWD (NA) Ext xxxx
-T
Directory number:
three or four digits
When setting operators as the
destination:
If an operator is Attendant
Console

FWD/DND Cancel

l-l
I

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button.. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
further information.

-.>+

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
I

(Supplement)

3Directory number:
three or four digits

,x,

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

I
If an operator is extension
FWD (NA) Ext xxxx

. You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1FWD (NA) ATT

2. Press the FWDIDND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
‘Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

FWODNO

The indicator on the FWD/DND
button starts flashing.

4-F-l 4
(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy.
Answer

Off-Hook/No
Programming

Description
Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
provides automatic call transfer to a preset
destination if the user’s extension is busy or the
user cannot answer the call in a determined period
(that is, if the caller is not answered while hearing
ringback tone in a specified period).

I-

System

Programming

ence
v-r
Dumb
9-D-3.00 1O-C-6.00

“System-System Timer,
Call Forwarding-No Answer
lime-Out
‘System-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 1o-c-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, 9-D-6.04 1O-c-10.00
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer
“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 1O-C-10.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

Busy status means .all PDNs are used, or off-hook
status (including hands-free status) or in the PITS
programming mode.
If the extension setting this function is in the PITS
programming mode, Call Forwarding-Busy/OffHooWNo Answer is disabled and the caller hears
busy tone.

Conditions

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by ‘System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.

An extension user may have only one type of Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
assigned type is canceled.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
0A
A
A
A
A
l
l

l
l

call
call
call
call
call

appearing on ICM button
from doorphone
appearing on PC0 button
routed via DIL 1: N feature
directed to a UCD group

To set this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes.”
For setting or canceling this function, two methods
are available:
cl > By pressing the FWD/DND button.
c2>
By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes”by programming, a call
from another tenant will not be forwarded if
forwarding destination
is an Attendant Console.
1’h
Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if
forwarding destination is another VM extension.
An extension user will be rejected with reorder tone
if he or she attempts:
l

To set the destination

to an extension in the other

tenant when Tenant Service is employed.
l

To set the destination to another extension that
presets its own destination to the user’s extension.
To call another extension that presets its
destination to the user’s extension.

(21292)

Condition of Destination
Idle status

Forwarding
Execution

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1 :I) or DISA call Idle status
Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
C,’

Conditions except In Service *
DID call

Idle status

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *
0

-:- .Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

4-F-l 6

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo

Answer

Canceling
Answer

I. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

Call Fcrwardirg-Btisy.

E-Hook

1. Lft the handset cr Dress
the SP-WCNE
burron.
l

2. Press the FWDIDND button, then

The indicator :ght flashing on
the FWD/DND button goes out.

dial “6.”

Or, dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.”

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.’
l

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail port, or
“FDN for General Operator Call” to
be set as the destination.
l

1 FWD/DND Cancel

You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as
the destination:
kWD (B/N) Ext xxxx

Directory number:
three or four digits
When setting operators as the
destination:
_

(Supplement)
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignmenr for
further information.
. ‘iE

If an operator is extension
FWD (B/N) Ext xxxx
f
Directory number:
three or four digits
4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.
I

1
l

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

If an operator is AttenConsole
1FWD (B/N) A-f-l-

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

The indicator on the FWD/DND
button starts flashing.

4-F-l 7
(21292)

2.05 Call Forwarding

to Trunk

Description

Programming

Call Forwarding to Trunk allows extension users
who are away from their phones to receive
incoming calls (both CO and extension) at outside
place.

System Programming

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
CO Forward Mode
“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“,
Call Forwarding-to Trunk
“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
‘Group-TrunkGroup (l/2)“,
CO-CO Duration Limit

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l
l
l

A
A
A
A
A

call
call
call
call
tail

appearing on ICM button
from doorphone
appearing on PC0 button
routed via DIL 1: N feature
directed to a UCD group

When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the
pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to
CO call via this system is established. Duration
time of CO to CO call is restricted by ‘GroupTrunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving
CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both
. parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time
is expired, and when expired the system
disconnects both parties compulsively.

Reference
VT
Dumb

9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

SD-6.04 10-C-10.00
9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
9-E-l .Ol 1O-C-14.00

Conditions
To set or cancel this function, use the PDN button.
An extension user may have only one type of Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
assigned type is canceled.

To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb and CO forward Mode to “Yes.”

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension’tisers. Refer to
Section 4-l-l 1 .OO“Remote Station Feature
Control.”

For setting and canceling this function, two
methods are available:
cl> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
~2s.
By dialing the feature number for
1s.T.
“Call Forwarding-to Trunk” and
*Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and ‘* ”
can be entered as the telephone number of the
destination. CO line access code must be
entered as the leading digit of each entry.

4-F-18

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.
Type of Call Arriving
at Setting Extension
I

Extension call

Condition of Destination
I

idle status

I
1 Busy status

I Conditions except in Service *
1DIL (1 :l) or DISA calll Idle status

II Busy status

Conditions except In Service *

Forwarding

Result

Execution

Call is forwarded to external
destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to external
destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

DID call

*
I

Call is placed on setting extension.

I Conditions except In Service o
0

: Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

4-F-l 9

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-lns’t’alled.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding to Trunk

Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk

1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “5.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding to Trunk.”

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
l

3. Dial the feature number for
selecting the CO line and the
telephone number of the
destination and “#” in succession.
l

I
l

1 FWD/DND Cancel

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

(Supplement)
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Refer to Section Q-G-1.03 ‘Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
further information.

IFWD (CO) 92011234 1
If the assigned number exceeds
the display capacity:

]

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

IFWD (CO) 9201123 &I
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
-.. The indicator on the FWD/DND
button starts flashing.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

(Supplement)
The system does not check the dialed number,
toll restriction level, and the feature number for
selecting a CO line when the extension user is
setting this function.

4-F-20

G. Conversation
1 .OO Programmable

Features
Privacy

Description

2. In non-privacy

The extension user can intrude on a busy line by
pressing the red lit PDN, SDN or SC0 button, if
the system is set to non-privacy.
In default mode, the system is set to privacy.
This means that a third party cannot intrude on a
busy line.

Pressing PDN
or SDN
Allows a three
party conversation
(ignored if
conference
trunk is
unavailable)

It is administrable to make system privacy or nonprivacy by “System-Operation”,
Privacy on DN
Key.

system:
Pressing SC0

Pressing GCO
or PC0

Cause Automatic
Allows a three.
patty conversation Callback-Trunk *
(reorder tone
sounds if conference trunk is
unavailable

e Refer to Section 4-C-5.01 ‘Automatic
Trunk.”

Programming

Callback-

Operation
hi

Intruding on a busy line in non-privacy

Conditions

The following example shows the procedure to be
used by extension B whose SDN is owned by the
PDN of extension A, who is talking with party C
on the PDN button.

The table shows the other party to be barged in
by pressing the red lit PDN, SDN and Single CO
. buttons in the non-privacy system.

Extension A

Extension C

A call to be barged in

Button Pressed
PDN

A call on the SDN button owned
by this PDN.

SDN

A call on PDN button which is

Extension B

owner (including SLT) of this
SDN.
SC0

system

0 Extension B has the
SDN button owned by
extension A’s PDN.

I-J

SDNCJ

A call on the pressed Single CO
button.

The indicator on the SDN button of extension
lit in red.

; >..
2.z
Privacy and non-privacy can be temporarily
changed.
For further details, refer to Section 4-G-2.00
“Privacy Release” and Section 4-G-3.00 “Privacy
Attach.”

1”. Prezi the SDN button (on
extension B) lit in red.

Extension A

In privacy and non-privacy system, pressing a
button which is lit in red results in the following:
1. In privacy system:
Pressing PDN or SDN Pressing SCO, GCO, or PC0

4-G-l

Extension

B is

2.00 Privacy

Release

Description

Conditions

In the privacy system, Privacy Release feature
temwrarily releases the privacy by pressing the
Privacy Change button (Assignable Feature
button), and allows the extension user to let
another extension user intrude on a busy line on
PDN, SDN or SC0 button then a 3-party
conference will be established.

Privacy Release feature overrides Data Line
Security feature assigned to the extension.
Operation
The following example shows the procedure for
the extensions A and B.
Extension A is talking on the PDN button.
Extension B has the SDN button owned by the
PDN button of extension A.
es..
Canceling the privacy system by extension A

Privacy change button must be assigned on a
PITS telephone beforehand.
For the assignment of Privacy Change button,
refer to Section 9-G-l .OO“Station” and Section
12 “Station Programming (PITS).*

1. Press the Privacy Change button.

The table shows the relationship between the
employed button and the extension to be
released:
Button Employed
by the Talking
Extension

The Other Extension to be
Allowed to Override

SDN

The PITS having the PDN that
is the owner of the SDN

PDN

All PITS’s having the SDN’s
owned by the PDN

Single CO

All PITS’s having the same
Single CO

El
l

The indicator on the Privacy
Change button lights in red.
The indicator on the SDN
button of extension B changes
from being lit in red to flashing
in red 120 wink.
Privacy system is canceled
temporarily.

Overriding by extension B
1. Press the red SDN button that is
flashing in 120 wink.
El

“System-Operation (l/3)“;
Privacy on DN Key
“Extension-Station (2/3)“,
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)“,
DSS Key Type

Start a three party conversation.

(Supplement)

Programming
System Programming

Pressing the Privacy Change button on extension
A again while the indicator is lit in red turns out
the light and returns privacy system.
At the same time the indicator on the SDN button
of extension B stops flashing and lights in red.

Reference
VT
Dumb
9-D-l .Ol 1C-C-4.00
9-G-l 62 1O-C-24.00
9-G-l 93 1O-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming

DN (Directory Number) Button
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

Reference

12-c-l .oo
12-C-3.00

4-G-2

3.00 Privacy Attach
Description

Operation

,,Vhen the system is in non-privacy, pressing the
?rivacy Change button (Assignable Feature
out-ton) when the extension user is talking on the
?DN, SDN, or Single CO button enables system
10 be in privacy mode temporarily and prohibits
another extension from intruding on a busy line
oy pressing the PDN, SDN, or Single CO button.

Setti rg Privacy Attach
1. Press the Privacy Change button.
l

Canceling

Privacy Attach
1. Press the Privacy Change button
lit in red.

While this function is enabled, the indicator on
the Privacy Change button is lit in red.

Programming
Sys?em Programming

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

‘System-Operation (l/3)“,
Privacy on DN Key

‘Extension-Station (2/3)“,
DN Key Type
‘Extension-Station (3/3)“,
DSS Key Type

PITS Station Programming
DN (Directory Number) Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

Reference
12c1.00
12-G3.00

Conditions
An extension user can assign Privacy Attach by
pressing the Privacy Change button in any status
such as on-hook, conversation and so an.

.. _.

It is possible to cancel Privacy Attach by pressing
the Privacy Change button lit in red again,
regardless of the status of extensions such as
on-hook.
if either or both of the two extensions
conversation in a non-privacy system
Privacy Attach, no other extension is
override the conversation by pressing
SDN, or Single CO button.

The indicator on the Privacy
Change button lights in red.

in
sets
able to
the PDN,

4-G-3

The indicator light on the
Privacy Change button goes
out.

4.00 Hands-Free

Conversation

Description

Operation

Turning the BP-PHC’JE buttcc :P wj:-:;t lirting
the handset offers hands-free ooeWcn a’ld
conversation status.

Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SPPHONE button is off.
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
l

Programming
None

The microphone and the
speaker for the speakerphone
are activated and hands-free
operation and conversation is
available:

Conditions
Changing the handset conversation mode to the
hands-free conversation mode

One minute of hands-free status without any
operation after turning the SP-PHDNE button on
cancels the status automatically, that is, turns the
SP-PHONE button off.

-1

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
l

The microphone and the
speaker for the speakerphone
are activated, and the handset
sends no tone.

2. Replace the handset.
l

(Supplement)

Continue the conversation
using the speakerphone.
..

Lifting the handset in the hands-free mode turns
the speakerphone off and changes to the handset
mode.

4-G-4

5.00 Conference
5.01 Conference-One

Appearance
Programming

Description
During a conversation with an extension or an ’
outside party, the extension user can add another
party (extensicn or outside party) on the current
conversation and hold a three party conference
on one DN button : this is called Conference-One
Appearance.

Conditions

On the TSW card, there are eight standard
conference trunks provided for this purpose.- ’
By equipping the optional conference expansion
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”

Pressing the HOLD button during a conference is
ignored.
Pressing the CONF button after calling the
second party offers conference status. If no
conference trunks are available, pressing the
CONF button is ignored and conference is. not
established.

When two members in the conference are
outside parties, two conference trunks are
necessary. In all other cases, one conference
trunk is enough.

Pressing the TRANSFER button by the
conference originator during a conference
restores the conversation with the previous party,
placing the later party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button again
establishes the conversation with the later party,
placing the previous party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the CONF button restores the
conference.

If a member in the conference is using the PITS
provided with a display, the following message
appears on the display of the PITS during the
conference, showing the other two members.
. When both of the other members are
extensions:

Pressing the TRANSFER button by a conference
member other than the conference originator
during the conference is ignored.

1 El234 & E5678 1
-1
u
Directory numbers of the
extensions
When one is an extension and the other is an
outside party:

El 234 & Panas
I
-

Leading five digits of the
CO line’s name

When both of the other members are outside
parties:
Matsu & Panas

4-G-5

Operation
Establishing a Conference-One

Appeamce

>;~“ciilc

-3

2_ Cz=r:farence-One

Extension A is having a conversation with party E
(another extension or an outside party on the DN
button).
The following is the operation from the standpoint
of extension A.

Fieplace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

- If both B and C are outside
parties, both parties are
disconnected.
If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension user, a conversation
between B and C is
established.

= .
I-J
II

1. Press the CONF button.

The indicator on the CONF
button starts flashing in red 60
wink
. The other patty B is placed on
Consultation Hold. Extension A
hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(Supplement)
If the conference originator presses another DN,
ICM, or CO button during a conference, the
originator seizes the line on the pressed button
and leaves the conference. The remaining two
parties are treated in the same way as if the
originator concluded the conference by replacing
the handset or by pressing the SP-PHONE
button.

2. Call another party C (an extension
or an outside party).
l

Talk to station C on the DN
button.

3. Press the CONF button.
l

The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red, conference
among the parties A, B and C
on the DN button is established.

(Supplement)

Appearance

Pressing the TRANSFER button is available
instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.
In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is
off in step 1, then in step 3 it lights in red by
pressing the CONF button.
To change the conference member after step 2,
press the FLASH button and execute slep 2
again.

4-G-6

5.02 Conference-Two

Appearances
Programming

Description
During a conversation with ar exrensic- CT zn
outside party on the DN or the CO bu;rzr
employing another DN or CO button .-s:eac z!
currently using button allows another party :a:
extension or an outside party) to join the
conversation and offers Conference-Two

Conditions

Appearances.

Pressing the CONF button after calling the
second party establishes conference. If no
conference trunks are available, pressing the
CONF button is ignored and conference is not
established.

On the TSW card, there are eight standard

conference trunks provided for this purpose.
By equipping the optional conference expanson
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”

Pressing the TRANSFER button by the
originator during a conference
restores conversation with the previous party,
placing the latter party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button again offers
conversation with the latter party, placing the
previous party on Consultation Hold. Pressing
the CONF button in this status restores the
conference.

conference

If two members of the conference are outside
parties, two conference trunks are necessary.
In other cases, one conference trunk is enough.
If a member of the conference is using the PITS
. provided with a display, the following message
appears on the display, showing the other two
members:

Pressing the TRANSFER buttons by a conference
member other than the conference originator
during the conference is ignored.

When both of the other members are
extensions:

1 El234 & E5678 1
-l--lDirectory numbers of the
extensions
When one is an extension and the other is an
outside party:

1 El234 & Panas 1
I
I
Leading five digits of the
CO line’s name
l

When both of the other members are outside
parties:
1 Matsu & Panas 1

4-G-7

Operation
Establishing

a Conference-Two

Appearances

Concluding a Confererce

1. Rcc 3;e 5-e -~-zsE:
SF-PHONE
D-Ton.

Extension A is having a conversation with party B
(an extension or an outside party) on the DN or
CO button.

El
j-_
D

disconnected.
If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension users: a conference
between B and C is
established.

1. Press the CONF button.
The indicator on the CONF
button starts flashing in red 60
wink.
The other party B is placed on
Consultation Hold. Extension A
hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Press another idle DN or CO
button.
The pressed DN or CO button
lights in green.

Placing the two other parties on hold during a
conference

3. Call another party C through
extension call if the pressed
button is DN or through CO call if
the pressed button is CO.
l

0’ press the

If both B XC C z-a cutside
parties: bcth oar,:es are

The following is the operation from the standpoint
of extension A.
CONF

-T&c Pooearances

1. Press the HOLD button.

Start conversation with the party
C on the pressed DN or CO
button.

l
l

The two parties,are held.
The indicator on the DN or CO
button flashes in green 60 wink.
You hear no tone.

4. Press the CONF button.
l

Having a conversation with one party, by
dropping the other party

The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red. Conference
conversation among the parties
A, B and C is established.

L--l
L-l

(Supplement)
Pressing the TRANSFER button is available
instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.
In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is
off in step 1, then it lights in red in step 4 by
pressing the CONF button.

1. Press the DN or CO button of the
desired party.

. Conversation with the party of
the pressed button is
established.
The other party is disconnected
and the indicator light on the
button goes out.

To change the conference member after step 3,
press the FLASH button and execute step 3
again.

4-G-8

6.00 Unattended
6.01 Unattended
Appearance

Conference
Conference-One

Description

Conditions

When an extension is in a conference with two
outside parties on one DN button, the extension
can leave the conference and establishes the
CO-to-CO call between other two parties by
pressing the CONF button: this is called
Unattended Conference-One Appearance.

If rhe extension is not allowed to execute this
function in Class of Service, or either or both of
the other parties are not outside ones, pressing
the CONF button during the conference is
ignored.
When the two occupied CO lines belong to
different trunk groups, the following time limits
apply to each case:

During an unattended conference between the
two outside parties, the indicator on the DN
button flashes in 120 wink.

In the case one parry is an outgoing CO
call, the other is an incoming CO call; The
duration limit follows to the trunk group of
the incoming CO call.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.”
The duration of the Unattended Conference is
limited by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration
Limit.

If both are outgoing CO calls or both are
incoming CO calls; The longest duration
limit assigned to one of the two trunk
groups is used.

Programming

In the above cases, if an incoming call via DID
line is included in a conference, no limit applies to
the duration of the conference. .*

System Programming

“System-Classof Service (l/2)“,
CO Transfer Mode
“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
CO-CO Duration Limit

Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds
before the time limit.
30 seconds of no answer after the start of the
Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept
Routing-No Answer.
For further details, refer to Section%F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
Warning tone is sent to both outside parties 15
seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO
Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside
parties are disconnected.

4-G-9

Operation
Establishing
Appearance

an Unattended

During a conference
one DN button

Answering

Conference-One

The indicator on the DN button
flashes in green 120 wink.
You leave the conference.
CO-to-CO call between the
other two parties is
established.
The indicator light on the
CONF button goes out.

1. Press the green DN button that is
flashing in 120 wink.

Retail

1. Press the green DN button that 1s
flashing in 120 wink.

Returning to a conference

Conference

If on-hook, Unattended Conference Rem.. S:ZX:
If off-hook, call waiting tone sounds.

with two outside parties on

1. Press the CONF button.
l

Unattended

You join the conference again.
The indicator on the DN button
lights in green.
The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.

l
l

You return to the conference.
The indicator on the DN button
lights in green.

(Supplement)
If no conference trunks are available at the time,
returning to the conference and answering
Unattended Conference Recall results in
conversation with the first party, placing the other
party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate
conversation with the two parties.
Pressing the CONF button again restores the
Unattended Conference.

4-G-l 0

6.02 Unattended Conference-Two
Appearances
Description

Conditions

When an extension is in a Conference-Two
Appearances with two outside parties, the
extension can leave the conference and
establishes the CO-to-CO call between other two
parties by pressing the CONF button: this is
called Unattended Conference Two
Appearances.

If the extension is not arioweo tc execute rnis
function in Class of Service, Oi antheror Dorh 0:
the other parties are not otitside ones. Dressing
the CONF button is ignored.

During an unattended conference between the
two outside parties, the indicators on both
^
buttons (both are DNs, or one is DN and the
other is CO, or both are COs) flash in 120 wink.
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.”
The duration of the Unattended Conference is
restricted by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO
Duration Limit.

When the two occupied CO lines belong to
different trunk groups, the following time limits
apply to each case:
If one party is an outgoing CO call and the
other is an incoming CO call; The duration
limit follows the trunk group of the incoming
CO call.
If both are outgoing CO calls or both are
incoming CO calls; The longest duration
limit assigned to one of the two trunks is
used.
In the above cases, if an incoming call via DID
line is included in a conference, no limit applies to
the duration of the conference.

. Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

‘System-Classof Service (l/2)“,

9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

CO Transfer Mode
“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
CO-CO Duration Limit

9-E-l .Ol 1O-C-14.00

Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds
before the time limit.
30 seconds of no answer after the start of the
Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept
Routing-No Answer.
For the further detail, refer to Section 3-F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
Alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15
seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO
Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside
parties are disconnected.

4-G-l 1

Operation
Establishing an Unattended
Appearances
During a Conference
two outside parties
CONF

Conference-Two

on Two Appearances

Answering

Unattended

Recall

If on-hook, Unattended Conference Recall stat%.
If off-hook, call waiting tone sounds.

with

1. Press either of the two buttons
flashing in green 120 wink.

1. Press the CONF button.

Conference

The indicators on the two
buttons (both DN buttons or
one DN and one CO or both
CO buttons) flash in 120 wink.
You leave the conference. CO-to-CO call between the
other two parties is
established.
The indicator light on the
CONF button goes out.

You join the conference again.

Both the indicators on the

buttons light in green.
The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.

(Supplement)
If no conference trunks are available at the time,
returning to the conference and answering
Unattended Conference Recall results in
conversation with the party on the pressed
button, placing the other party on Consultation
Hold.

Returning to a conference
1. Press either of the two buttons
flashing in green 120 wink.
l
l

Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate
conversation with the two p+?ies,:, ________
_,_-._.
Pressing the CONF button again restores the
Unattended Conference.

You join the conference again.
Both the indicators on the two
buttons light in green.
The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.

4-G-l 2

x%-i

7.00 Doorphone
Description

Conditions

Up to four doorphones can be connected to the
system. This provides conversations between
extensions and doorphones.

Only conversations are available for the doorphone call. The other functions such as Hold,
Transfer are all ineffective.

Any extension user can call the doorphones
within the same tenant on the DN button by
dialing the feature number for “Doorphone Call
(l-4).” It is possible to direct calls from
doorphones to specified extensions, intercom
groups, pickup groups or Attendant Consoles in
“Extension-Doorphone”, Doorphone Call
Assignment.

When a visitor presses the button on the doorphone, ping-pong tone sounds twice, then
doorphone call ringing starts.
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone call.
Dialing “5” again while the door is open enables
the user to prolong the opening duration to the
specified duration assigned in ‘ExtensionDoorphone”, Open Duration.

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
each doorphone can be determined by the
system programming in “Extension- Doorphone”,
Tenant.

When a call from a doorphone reaches the preset
extensions, the indicators on the SDN buttons
whose owners are the receiving extensions light
in red.

Set the duration of the door opener in “ExtensionDoor-phone”, Open Duration. When Open
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is
unavailable.

:::::s:

Operation
Calling from a doorphone
1. Press the button on the
doorphone.

Opening the door is available to Attendant
Consoles and the extensions which are able to
receive calls from doorphones: the extensions
belonging to intercom groups and pickup groups
that are able to receive calls from doorphones.
They can open the door by dialing “5” during
conversation with the doorphone.

l
l

You hear ping-pang tone.
When the other party answers,
start talking to the other party.

Answering a doorphone call
Programming
i
I

System Programming

i “System-Numbering
Plan (3/g)“,
Dootphone Call (l-4)
\ “Extension-Doorphone”

When your telephone set receivesadoorphone
call and rings,

Reference
v-r
Dumb

1. Lift the hand set or press the SPPHONE button.

9-D-6.03 1O-C-10.00
9-G-3.00 1 O-C-27.00

. Start conversation with the
calter from the doorphone.

4-G-l 3

8.00 Flash

Calling a doorphone
Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Description

After dialing the feature number
for “Doorphone Call (l-4),” dial
the doorphone number: 1 to 4.

Flash aliows the extension user to get a line for
making a call on the selected line access button
again without hanging up. The FLASH button
can be used for this procedure. While still on the
CO, DN, or ICM line, press the FLASH button and
dial tone will be returned.

After hearing confirmation tone
3, start conversation over the
specified doorphone.

While or after talking on a CO line, the system
releases the CO DC loop after the FLASH button
is pressed for the specified period assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Disconnect Time.

.i 0z 3.

After concluding conversation,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Programming
System Programming

Opening the door

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
Disconnect Time

During a conversation over the doorphone
JKL
•l

1. Dial “5.”
l

Reference
I Dumb

ISE-1.011 l&C-14.001

Conditions

The door opens for the
specified duration.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

While or after talking on a CO line, pressing the
FLASH button renews conversation duration,
inserts the automatic pause, and checks toll
restriction level again.
Flash stored in “System-Speed Dial-System”,
Speed Dialing-Station or One Touch dialing etc.,
functions as External Feature Access, not as this
feature.
Operation
Using Flash

.”
While hearing any tone, while dialing, or during a
conversation
1. Press the FLASH button.
l

After hearing dial tone 1 or 3 or

4, dial the telephone number.

4-G-l

9.00 External

Feature Access

Description

Operation

Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows
the extension to gain access to the features
offered by the host PBX, or to receive centrex
service provided by the central office, such as
Call Waiting and so on.

Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
Waiting) (1)
A call arrives from another outside party during a
conversation with an outside party.
1. Press the TRANSFER button.

Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

System Programming

v-f

Reference
Dumb

tat

“System-NumberingPlan (3/g)‘,
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
External FeatureAccess
9-E-1.Ol 1O-C-l 4.00
“Group-TrunkGroup (l/2)“,
Hook Switch Flash Time
9-E-1.0210-C-15.00
“Group-TrunkGroup (2/2)“,
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal
g-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
“Extension-Station(2/3)“,
DN Key Type
'Extension=statioTI

You hear call waiting tone.

External Feature Access is effective only during a
1 :l conversation with an outside party.

(3/3)".

9-G-l .03

PF Key Type
DSS Key Type

4tie
780
*
E!a

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Feature Access.”
The first party is held. Start
conversation with the second
party.

Finishing conversation with the second party and
starting conversation with the first party again
1. Press the TRANSFER button.

1o-c-25.00
1O-C-26.00

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

PITS Station Programming

DN (Directory Number)Button
Assignment
PF (ProgrammableFeature)Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

Reference

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Feature. Access.”

12-c-l90
12-c-2.00

0 Start conversation with the first
party.

12-G3.00

Conditions
External Feature Access is ineffective when
“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash lime is
assigned to “None.”

Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
Waiting) (2)
A call arrives from another outside party during a
conversation with an outside party.
. You hear call waiting tone.

The maximum dialing digits to be sent to the CO
line after sending the flash signal are restricted
by “Group-Trunk Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA
Signal.
The longest time limit among the following
assignments determines the time limit between
dialing digits.
l

1. Press the External Feature
Access button.
The first party is held. Start
conversation with the second
PW.

Finishing conversation with the second party and
starting conversation with the first party again

“System-System 3mer”, External Firstdigit
Time-Out.
“System-System Timer, External Interdigit
Time-Out.
“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction
Guard Time-Out.

I. Press the External Feature
Access button again.
l

4-G-l 5

Start conversation with the first
PaW.

10.00 Microphone

Mute

Description
Microphcrs

Operation
Setting Microphone Mute

b.!,~~ 5..~‘6 ar ex:;ens;on user to

disable the mcrcf’ o-e of !“e speakerphone.
This is useful w/x? the user needs to speak
privately with soF+cne in :he office while on an
inside, an outside. or a door-phone call.
If the user presses the AUTO ANSIMUTE button
during a hands-free conversation with
speakerphone on. the other party cannot hear the
user until he or sie presses the button again.

During a hands-free conversation
1. Press the AUTO ANSMUTE
button.
l

Programming
None

The indicator on the AUTO
ANS/ MUTE button flashes in
60 wink.
The microphone of the SPPHONE becomes mute status.

Canceling Microphone Mute
1. Press the flashing AUTO
ANS/MUTE button again.

Conditions
Microphone Mute does not disable the
microphones in t3e handsets.

Setting and canceling this function is available
only when the SP-PHONE is on. Pressing the
AUTO ANSMUTE button when the SP-PHONE
. is off sets Hands-Free Answer-back.
Refer to Section 1-D-2.01 “Intercom Hands-Free
Answerback.”

While Microphone Mute is set, the indicator on
the AUTO ANSMUTE button flashes in 60 wink.

4-G-l 6

The indicator light on the AUTO
ANS/MUTE button goes out.
Microphone Mute is canceled.

11 .OOintercom Off-Hook Call
Announcement
(OHCA)
Description

Operation

During a conversation using the handset by PITS
:eiephone KX-T7130, KX-Ti 23235 or KXT123230D, the extension user can receive
another call from intercom Calling or from
Attendant Console, unless the current call is
made by Intercom Calling.

Answering OHCA
You are having a conversation using the handset.
1. When the indicator on the ICM
button lights in green, you hear
two beeps. At the same time the
microphone and the speaker for
hands-free turn on automatically.
Talk to the caller over the
speaker.

To execute this function, optional T-SW OHCA
Expansion card (KX-T336105) and OHCA card
;KX-T96136) are necessary.

Finishing the original call during a conversation by
OHCA

Programming

You are having conversations with the original
caller and the OHCA caller.
1. Replace the handset.
l

Conditions
OHCA can be received only with the PITS KXT7130, KX-T123235, and KX-T123230D
telephones.

SP+l#?lE

OHCA does not work if the receiving extension is
in the following situations:
l

Talking in speaker phone mode.

Do Not Disturb is set.

l
l

ICM button is not idle.
“System-Class of Service”,
BSSIOHCA Deny is set to yes.”

4-G-l 7

The original call is finished. The
OHCA call changes to handsfree mode.

2. After finishing conversation, press
the SP-PHONE button.

12.00 Tone Through (End to End
DTMF Signaling)
Description

Operation

During a call (extension, outside or doorphcne,,
this function allows the PITS telephone use- :c
send DTMF (touch tone) signals to the voice path
when a dial pad button is pressed.
Tone Through mode is established automatically
after the dialing sequence.

During a call (extension, outside or doorphone)

End-To-End DTMF Signaling permits the
extension user to access network services suet,
as OCC access which requires touch-tone
signals.

Canceling Tone Through

1. Dial the telephone number.
l

I dh

1. Press the Tone Through Break
button.
l

13
EKI
15s
789
*

Programming
Reference
VT
Dumb
9-G-l .02 10-c-24.00
9-G-l 43

PITS Station Programming
DN (Directory Number) Button
a
Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

1o-c-25.00
1O-C-26.00
Rekfence
12-C-l .oo
12-Z-2.00
12-Z-3.00

Conditions
The maximum dialing digits after canceling Tone
Through mode is restricted by ‘Group-Trur7i
Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal.
The longest time limit among the following
assignments determines the time limit between
dialing digits:
l

“System-System TimeT, External First Digit
Time Out
“System-System Timef, External Inter Digit
lime Out
“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction
Guard Time Out
4-G-i

Tone Through is canceled.

2. Dial the telephone number.
l

“Extension-Station
(2/a)“,
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station
(3/3)“,
PF Key Type
DSS Key Type

DTMF signal is sent to the other
party while dialing.

During an outside call

Only during a conversation with an outside party,
Tone Through mode can be canceled by pressing
the Tone Through Break button (Assignable
Feature Button).

System Programming

The dialed number is sent in
accordance with the CO line
dial mode.
When the dialing sequence is
finished, Tone Through mode is
established again.

H. Paging Features
1.00 Paging
1.01 Paging

All Extensions

Description

Conditions

Paging Ai! Ex:ezs,c,zs allows any extension -ser
to perform paging on !he DN button to the a!
PITS telephone users at the same time through
the built-in speakers of PITS telephones.

Single Line Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.
If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are
being paged by another page, busy tone is
returned to the new paging performer.
If any of the extensions is not being paged,
paging is executed.

The Class of Service of the user’s extensior
determines the extensions that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access and also if they belong to the same
tenant as the performer.
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group’ for de-u’ls
of paging groups.

If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,
you cannot set Automatic Callback function.
Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic CallbackStation” for further information.
When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access within the same tenant, the performer
hears reorder tone.

To perform Paging All Extensions, dial the feature
number for “Station Paging” and “0.” To answer
paging, dial the feature number for “Station
Paging Answer.”

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SPPHONES of on-hook PITS telephones.

Programming
System Programming

Reference
1 Dumb

4-H-l

Operation
Performing

Transipr

Paging All Extensions

123
q

1 Pw;
l

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging,” then dial “0.”
After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

~sir;

Dag!?g All Extensions

Durlrc 2 XXJE-S;:~ 0~ ,k,:n an 2xrension or
outside SZT~

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

456
789
*

-; a -3

t?e TRANSFER

button.

T/X c:ner party is placed on
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and dial “0.”
l
l

1 Group Page All 1

\
I3

3. After making the announcement,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

You near confirmation tone 3.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 Group Page All 1

3. Start paging.

h ha

Answering Paging All Extensions while being
. paged
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

---

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”
l

_----“1.

__.

--,

4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

4-H-2

The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

-..-

1.02 Group

Paging

Description
Group Paging provides paging on the DN Su?tor
to a group of extensions specified from eight
paging groups through the built-in speakers of
their PITSs.

Conditions
Srngle tine Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.
If the designated paging group is being paged by
another page, busy tone is returned to the new
paging performer.
However, he can do paging within the range not
overlapping the previous paging range.
For instance, when paging is being done to group
1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
paging.

The Class of Service of the user’s extension
determines the paging groups that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access and also if they belong to the same
tenant as the user’s extension.
See Section 3-B-7.04 ‘Paging Group” for details
of paging groups.

If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,
you cannot set Automatic Callback function.
Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic CallbackStation” for further information.

To execute Group Paging, dial the feature
number for “Station Paging” and paging group
specifying number. To answer paging, dial the
feature number for “Station Paging Answer.”

When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
in ‘System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access within the same tenant, the performer
hears reorder tone.

Programming
System Programming

Re
VT

“System-Classof Service (2/2)“, 9-o-4.02
Station PagingAccess
‘System-NumberingPlan (3/g)‘, 9-D-6.03
Station Paging
Station PagingAnswer

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SPPHONES of on-hook PITS sets.
.\

4-H-3

Operation

Transferring a call using Group Pag.ng

Performing Grcup Paging

During a conversation with an extension or ar
outside party

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

1. Press the TRANSFER button
l

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging.”

The other party is placed on
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.

Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and paging
group number: 1 to 8.

3. Dial the paging group number: 1
to 8.

. You hear confirmation tone 3.
. If your PITS has a display, it

After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

shows:
lGroupPagexj

1 Group Page x 1
-

T
paging group
number: 1 to 8

paging group
number: 1 to 8

Start paging.

4. After paging, replace the handset
or press the SP-PHONE button.
When an extension answers,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Answering Group Paging while being paged
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

jl
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”
l

After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

4-H-4

The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

:.:<. . -._

1.03 Paging

External

Pagers

Description

Conditions

Allows extension users to perform paging through
the external pager belonging to the same tenant
by employing the DN button.
If two external pagers are available in the same
tenant, two methods are available: one is to page
by designating one external pager, and the other
is to page using two pagers simultaneously.

If the designalec page- :s beirc tised, busy tone
tc ?ne pagq ~effc~~!er.

is returned

If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are
being used, it is not possibie !o page using two
pagers. Busy tone is rettirned to the user.

If external pagers are not assigned in system
programming, reorder tone sounds.

To execute this function, dial the feature number
for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,
dial the feature number for “External Paging
Answer”

The followings show the paging priorities:
(1) Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Console
(2) TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
(Refer to Section 4-D-4.00 Yrunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.“)
(3) Paging External Pager from an extension
(this function)
(4) BGM through External Pager

Even if an external pager is connected to this
system, this function does not operate unless
“System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2 is
assigned to “Yes.”
If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each
external pager to belong to a tenant is possible
-~lq+fnmk~
fvlusic Source”, External
Pager-Tenant.

If a lower priority page is active, and a higher
priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower
one: for instance, if Paging External Pager is
overridden by another higher priority, reorder
tone is returned to the performer of Paging
External Pager. If TAFAS signal or BGM is
overridden by another higher priority, it is
interrupted and starts again when the higher
priority is finished.

Confirmation tone from external pagers is
selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone.
Programming
System Programming
“System-Operation
(l/3)“,
External Paging I,2
“System-Class of Serice (2/2)“,
External Paging
p
“System-Numbering
Plan (3/g)“,
External Paging
External Paging Answer
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant
External Pager-Tone

v-r

Rei rence
Dumb

9-D-l .Ol 1 O-c-4.00
9-D-4.02 1O-C-8.00
9-D-6.03 lo-c-10.00

9-F-2.00 10-C-l 9.00

4-H-5

Operation
;ag;;g

External Pagers

3. Dial the number of the external
pager: 1 or 2.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

After you hear confirmation tone
3, talk to the caller who made
the page.

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging.”

Transferring

a call using Paging External Pagers

During a conversation
outside party
1

3. Dial the number for specifying an
external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or
2.

Press the TRANSFER

Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and external
pager specifying number; 0, 1 or
2.

After you hear confirmation
tone 3, start paging through
the external pager(s).
If your PITS has a dispiay, it
shows:

0: specifies external pagers 1
_. .-._...
-.
and2
1: specifies external pager 1
2: specifies external pager 2

External page xxx

You hear confirmation tone 3.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

-T
The number which
specifies an
external pager or
pagers:
All: specifies the external pagers
1 and 2.
1: specifies external pager 1.
2: specifies external pager 2.

j *T

+
j {+gs{

button.

The other party is placed on
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.

0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2.
1: specifies external pager 1.
2: specifies external pager 2.

with an extension or an

External page xxx

a
i

4. After paging, replace the handset
or press the SP-PHONE button.

“a..

-T
Pager specifying
number

3. Start paging.

L h!

,q
4.
q

‘I

When an extension answers,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

:.nswering the external paging announcement
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging Answer.”

4-H-6

The held party and the paged
extension s:art conversation.

1.04 Paging

All Extensions
External Pagers

and

Description

Operation

Paging All Extensions and External Pagers offers
both Paging All Extensions and Paging Externai
Pagers at the same time. It provides paging
through the preprogrammed external pagers and
the built-in speakers in PlTSs of the extensions
within the range of the tenant that the user
belongs to.

Performing

Paging All Extensions

Pagers
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” or the feature
number for “External Paging,”
then dial =*.”

The user’s “System-Class of Service”, Station
Paging Access determines the paging groups of
the extensions that can receive paging and also
External Paging determines the external pagers
that can receive paging.

After hearing confirmation

3, start paging.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Programming
System Programming

‘System-Class of Service (2/Z)“.
Station Paging Access
External Paging 1,2
‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“,
External Paging
Station Paging
External Paging Answer
Station Paging Answer

v-r

Reference
Dumb

tone

1 All Call Page 1

9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00

3. After paging, replace the handset
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

or press the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
Refer to Section 4-H-l .Ol “Paging All Extensions”
and Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging External Pagers.”
.-

and External

‘5,:

4-H-7

Transferring a call using Paging Ail Extensions
and External Pagers

Answering paging while being paged
Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

During a conversation
outside party

with an extension

1. Press the TRANSFER

Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer,” or the
feature number for “External
Paging Answer” and the number
of the external pager: 1 or 2.
l

or an
button.

The other party is placed on
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” or the feature
number for “External Paging,”
then dial ‘*.”

After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

You hear confirmation tone 3.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

l
l

All Call Page 1
\
i

3. Start paging.

I h6
4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
..
The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.
l

4-H-8

. ..

2.00 Background Music (BGM)
through External Pager
Programming

Description
The system can provide up to two external music
sources. The music source can be broadcast as
background music (BGM) through external
pagers.

System Programming
“System-Operation
(l/3)“,
External Paging 1,2
External Music Source 1,2
“System-Numbering
Plan (8/g)“,
BGM Through External Paging
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant
External Pager-BGM
Music Source-Tenant
Music Source-For Use

Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the
operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user)
in the same tenant that the external pagers and
external music equipment belong to. For
executing this function by PITS, use the DN
button.
To start and stop this function, use the same
feature number for “BGM Through External
Pager.”
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on stops
BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM is off.

Reference
VT
Dumb
9-D-l .Ol 10-C-4.00

9-D-6.08 1C-C-l 0.00
9-F-2.00
1O-c-l 9.00
10-c-20.00

Conditions
This function is effective when an external pager
and an external music equipment are connected
and programming has been completed.
Otherwise, the user hears reorder tone after
executing the operation to activate this function.

To utilize this feature, first connect external music
equipments and external pagers to the system,
’ then assign “System-Operation”, External Music
Source 1,2 and External Paging 1,2 to “Yes.”
If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each
external music equipment and external pager to a
tenant is possible by using Trunk-Pager & Music
Source”, External Pager-Tenant and Music
Source-Tenant.
Assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External
Pager-BGM to “Yes”to use this function. This
assignmeptcan be done to eacb.external pager.
Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold &
BGM.” This assignment can be done to each
external music equipment individually.

4-H-9

Operation
Turning BGM off when BGM is on

Turning BGM on when BGM is off

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM
Through External Pager.”

After you hear confirmation tone
2, BGM from the external pager
(s) stops.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

After you hear confirmation tone
2, BGM sounds from the
external pager(s).
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
1 External BGM On 1

Lif-t the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

’ ‘-

External BGM Off
Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-H-l 0

I. Other Features
1 .OO Night Service
1 .Ol Universal

Night Answer

(UNA)

Description

Conditions

Allows any extension user in the system tc
answer the incoming CO calls ringing at ar.
external pager, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Answer 1 or 2.”

To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select “RMT” for “TrunkCO tine” Night Answer Point assignment.
For further information about remote
administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Location.”

To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines that belong to this trtink
group are covered by this assignment.

If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and
2) can have unique Night Service arrangement
individually.
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerTenant.
The extension user cannot answer the UNA call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.

External pager must be connected to the system
beforehand.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
the system.
To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial
the feature number for “Night Answer I ,” and to
answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the
feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
For further information about external pager
assignment, refer to Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging
External Pagers.”

Operation
Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.

Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”
Prsgramming
System Programming
‘Group-Trunk Group (l/Z)“,
Incoming Mode (Night)
j ‘Trunk-CO Line”,
I
Night Answer Point
1 ‘System-Numbering
Plan (3/g)‘,
Night Answer 1
/
Night Answer 2

;%t

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
l

2. ..lf a call is ringing at exterr+a&+
pager 1: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 1.”

Referents
%mb
VT
9-E-l .Ol

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

1K-1 4.00

I
c

9-F-l .OO 1C-3-: 8.00
9-O-6.03 lC-Z-10.00

I hl

4-l-l

If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 2.”
3. Talk to the caller.

1.02

Flexible

Night

Service
2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72”
(default) and CO physical
number and destination
extension number.

Description
Flexibie Night Service allows the Operator 1
‘A!tenc~nt Console or extension user) to change
the assgned night answer destination on a CO
lme basis by dialing the feature number for
“Flexible Night Set-vice.”

. You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
lncomng Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. Ail CO
lines that belong to this trunk group are covered
by this assignment.
If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the
assigned night answer destination can not be
changed by the Operator 1.

NAP: Txxxx => Exxxx
TPhysical
number

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same.

T
Extension
number

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

The difference is:
Flexible
-.

Fixed

The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the night
answer destination.

Changing a night answer destination to the
remote maintenance port
1. Lift the handSet or press the SPPHONE button.

A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

92s
q
.s.
.7..

Programming
SystemProgramming

Reference
VT

Dumb

Plan (8/g)“. 9-D-8.08 10-C-10.00
Flexible NQht Smite
9-E-1.Ol lo-G14.00
“Group-Trunk Group (1 Q)",
incoming Mode (Night)
9-F-l.OO lO-Gl8.00
“Trunk-CO Line”,
Ni9ht Answer Point

2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service 72”
(default) and CO physical
number and FDN for remote.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2-u

7&;.

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
NAP: Txxxx => RMT
T
Physical
number

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Operation
\

Changing a night answer destination to an
extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
4-l-2
(30393)

1.03 Switching
Changing a night answer destination
(Universal Night Answer)

PHONE button.

2. -Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72
(default) and CO physical number,
* and 1 for external pager 1 or *
and 2 for external pager 2.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
NAP: Txxxx => UNAx
-?-Physical
number

+
1 or 2

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Mode

Description

to a UNA

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

*
Dl
L!J

of Day/Night

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel’ for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.
To utiliie Auto Switching mode, set “SystemOperation (s/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.
To utiliie Manual Switching mode, set “SystemOperation (s/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”
The Operator 1, however, can overrfde the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is
established. by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode. the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
If tenant service is employed, night service
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
In this case, the assignment in “SysfemOperation (363)”is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment in “System-Tenant” is applied to
Tenant 2.
* -&x&.
I- .

Programming
SystemProgramming
“System-Operation (3/3)“.

Reference
Dumb

9-0-1.03

10-C-4.00

Night Service
Auto Start Tme

“System-Tenant”,

Q-D-2.00 10-G5.00

Night Service (Tenant 2)

Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan (8/g)“, SD6.08 lWlO.OC
Night
Night
Night
Set
Night

Mode Set
Mode Cancel
Service Manual Mode
Service Manual Mode

Cancel

4-l-3
(30393)

Swlrching Auto mode to Manuzl mode

Conditions

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

If Auto Start Time on a cerar:: da. s -c:
assigned, the current moae IS COT: xsc ~1. 2
new start time is encountered.
If the Start Time for Day mode and Night -ccc
on the same day are set identically, the current
mode is continued.

Dial the feature number for “Night
Service Manual Mode Set.”

If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
at all, the current mode is continued. In other
words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
then Night Mode is continued.

You hear confirmation tone I or
2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 Day/Night : Man 1

Operation
‘3

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Switching Day mode to Night mode
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Switching Manual mode to Auto mode
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

2. Dial the feature number for “Night
Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

1 Night Mode 1

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

0
z

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Day/Night : Auto

Switching Night mode to Day mode

3. Replace the handset or press the
Sf?GWONE button.
:. -

y 1. Wft the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Cancel.”
. You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
. If your PITS has a display, it

shows:
[Day
3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-l-4

2.00 Account

Code Entry
Operation

Description
Account Code f?ri

‘5 cwc: !o icewfy

Entering an account code when calling an
outside party in the Forced mode

incoming

and outgoing CO calls ‘3: account:ng and billing
purposes.
Entry of the code is appended to :he SMDR call
record and can be used later.
The account code can include up to 10 digits.
The validity of the entered account code is not
checked by the system.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
You hear dial tone1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
selecting a CO line.

Entry of account codes can be forced or optional.
In the forced mode, the account code must be
entered before making an outgoing CO call.
In the option mode, enter the account code, if
necessary.

You hear dial tone 1.
The indicator on the FWD/DND
button flashes.

l
l

=
l-l

Programming

..
.

3. Press the FWD/DND button.
You hear dial tone 2.
The indicator on the FWD/DND
button lights in red.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Enter ACCNT Code

Conditions

4. Dial the account code.

Only numerical characters “0 to 9” can be
entered as account codes.

Up to 10 digits can be entered
as an account code.

Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds
the alarm tone.

•l

Be sure to enter ‘W after dialing a code, since “#”
delimits the code.

5. Dial “#.”
l

The indicator light on the
FWDIDND button goes out.
Youh&rdial tone 1.

6. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

4-l-5

Entering an account code when receiving a call
from an outside party in the Forced mode

Correctrng an error after dialing a wrong account
code

1. Press the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
l

1 Press the FWD/DND button.

The indicator on the FWD/DND
button flashes.
Talk to the other party

2. Dial the conect account code.

Press the FWD/DND button.
The indicator on the FWD/DND
button lights.
If your PITS has a display,-it
shows:

3. Dial “#.”

1 Enter ACCNT Code 1
(Supplement)

3. Dial the account code.
l

•l

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the
PF3 button on them can be programmed to be
the FWDIDND button.
Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
further information.

Maximum digits for an account
code is 10.

4. Dial “#I.”

The indicator light on the
FWD/DND button goes out.

Entering an account code after calling an outside
party or after receiving a call from an outside
party in the Option mode

1. Press the FWD/DND button
during a conversation with the
outside party.
The indicator on the FWD/DND.-__*
C.-w:
button lights.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Enter ACCNT Code
2. Dial the account code.
l

Maximum digits for an account
code is 10.

3. Dial 3.”
l

The indicator light on the FWD/
DND button goes out.

4-l-6

3.00 Timed Reminder (Alarm Clock)
Description

(4)

The extension user can use his or her PITS
telephone as an alarm clock.
When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2
minutes at the programmed time from the built-m
speaker of your PITS telephone.

Newly programmed time overrides the old one.
Only the latest setting is valid at a single
extension whether it was set by the extension
itsetf or by the operator.

(5) Tone Pattern
Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:

By going off-hook, the extension user can hear
the wake-up message, if it has been recorded
beforehand.
The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent
tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up
message.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Trmed Reminder with
OGM (wake-up call).7

Operation
Setting the alarm time
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

This feature can be set to operate only once or
everyday at a specitied time.

Programming

System Pmgfamming

2. Dial the feature number for Timed
Reminder set r* 51” (default).

Reference
VT
I Dumb

3. Dial %our” with two digits: 01 to
12.

conclltlons
4. Dial 9ninute” with two digits: 00 to
59.

(1) What if the extension is busy or off-hook at the
programmed time?
Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes
on-hook.

5. Dial ‘0” for a.m. or dial ‘1” for p.m..

(2) What if a call comes in when alarm tone is
ringing?
The call comes in on an extension (call
irukation is shown)’ but does not ring.
lt will ring after alarm tone stops to ring.
l

6. Dial “0” for limed Reminderone
time, or diil ‘1” Trmed Reminderevery day.

The caller hears busy tone if the call is
coming to a PDN button and the extension
has only one PDN.

(3) Remote limed Reminder
l

This feature can also be set by the Operator 1
or 2 to any extension.
(See Section 4-I-14.00 and Section
6-J-13.00.)
4-l-7
(40993)

hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
lf your PlTS has a display, it
shows:

You

It executing every day at 9:00 a.m.
is preset:

Executing once at lo:15 a.m.:

Alarm lo:15 AM

Alarm 9:00 AM *

Executing every day at lo:15 a.m.:
[ Alarm 10:X AM* 1

p&
r-l

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
(Supplement)
When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set
without display, reorder tone is heard.

Canceling the alarm time programmed
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

To stop the ringing of alarm tone
When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.
If your PITS has a display, it shows:

Dial the feature number for Timed
Reminder Cancel ‘#5” (default).

piii%sq

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
_. :
. Alarm tone stops and you hear a
wake-up message or BGM, or
“intermittent tone” (dial tone 2):

Alarm Cancelled

rl
s

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

2. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Confirming the alarm time programmed (PITS with
=*.display or&)

. This @determined by the system programming.

1. Lii the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Refer to Section 3-F-13-00 “Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).’
(Supplement)

Dial the feature number for Timed
Reminder Confirm “*50” (defauft).
l

The display on your PITS
shows:

In step 1, if you press any button (including dial
keypad) except SP-PHONE without going offhook, alarm tone stops and then no tone sounds.
Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following timing:

When no time is set:
[ Alarm Not Stored 1

-nnn+l.osec~

4-l-8
(40993)

4.00 Background

Music (BGM)

Description

Operation

Background Music can be supplied to any PITS
teiephone user in the system through the built-in
speaker of the PITS, when the PITS is on-hook.
An external music source (customer-supplied)
should be connected to the system beforehand.

Hearing BGM
1. Dial ‘1” in on-hook status.
1

BGM sounds from the built-in
speaker of PITS.
lf your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Liiing the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE
button stops BGM temporarily.
Going back on-hook restarts BGM.

t BGMOn 1

To set and cancel this function, use the same
feature number ‘1.”
While BGM is set, dialing “1” cancels BGM.
reversely it sets BGM when BGM is not set.

Canceling BGM

To execute this function, connect an external
music source, then set “System-Operation”,
External Music Source 1,2 to “Yes”and set
Vunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-For
Use to either ‘BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”
This setting (BGM or Hold 8 BGM) is assignable
to each external pager.

While hearing BGM
1. Dial “1” in on-hook status.
l

Programming
System Programming

Fkference
Dumb
v-r

901.01
1o-c-4.00
‘System-Operation(1/3y,
External Music Source 1,2
“Trunk-Pager8 Music Source”, 9-F-2.00lO-C-20oO
Music Source-Tenant
Music
Source-ForUse
*
-,i --

conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of the
external pager is determined by the following
system programming.
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music SourceTenant.

4-l-9

BGM from the built-in speaker of
PlTS stops.
lf your PlTS has a display, it
shows:

5.00 Secret Dialing
Description

Conditions

When using the PITS with a display, Secret
Dialing provides concealing all or part of the
registered telephone numbers that appear on the
display.
The telephone numbers are registered by
“System-Speed Dial-System” or stored into
Programmable Feature buttons on PITS and
DSS consoles. When storing a number, bracket
the secret part that you want to hide with [ j.
Then the part does not appear on the display
when the number is sent.

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line can
not be concealed by this feature.
If the telephone number “9-l -[201]-431-2111” is
stored in speed dialing code 01 by “System-Speed
Dial-System”, the following message appears on
the display when call is made:

It is assignable to print out the secret part onto
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) or not
by “System-Operation”, Print Secret Dial.

Operation

9-l -***-431-2111
When storing a speed dialing code, entering y [ ”
only without entering “I n causes ail the digits
entered after” [“to be hidden.

None

Programming
System Programming
“System-Operation
(2/3)“,
Print Secret Dial
“System-Speed
Dialing-System”,
Dial

r--

I
I

Reference
DuFIp

v-r

9-D-l .02 1O-W.31

-9-D-8.00 10-C-l MO

PITS Station Programming

DN (Directory

Number) Button

Refer-

12-c-i .4

Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

12-G2.N
12-c-3.3

4-l-l 0

6.00 Data Line Security
Description

Operation

Used to maintain the communication properly by
prohibiting various tones such as call waiting tone
or Held Call Reminder from sounding at the
extension in data communication mode. It also
prohibits other extensions from executing
overriding functions such as Busy Override.

Assigning

Data Line Security

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data
tine Security Set.”

To assign Data Line Security, assign “ExtensionStation”, Data tine Security to “Yes.”

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
if your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Setting or canceling this function is executed
using the feature number for “Data tine Security
Set” or “Data tine Security Cancel.”

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT 1 Dumb

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Data Line Security
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.
..

Conditions
Use the PDN button to set and cancel Data Line
Security mode.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data
tine Security Cancel.”

Assigning Data Line Security always offers the
user conversation privacy unless Privacy
Release is executed.

. . If there is a conversation between the extension
setting Data tine Security and the extension not
setting it, Data Line Security applies to the both
extensions.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 thendial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If yo%r”PITS has a display, it
shows:
p2iiGzq

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-l-l 1

’

7.00

Absent

Message

Capability

Descrrption

Conditions

J-ovides an absent message on the display of a
cailinq extension if the called extension has
assigned an absent message.

If Tenant Service is employed, 10 programmable
messages can be split between two tenants by
assigning the boundary number in “SystemTenant”, Absent Message Boundary.
Six fixed absent messages are shared with two
tenants.

An absent message appears only on the PITS
telephones provided with the display.
There are six fixed and 10 programmable absent
messages that are common to the system and
can be assigned by system programming.
The following are the six fixed messages (the “x”
means a parameter to be entered when
3

An extension user can select oniy one message

from six fixed and 10 programmable messages to
assign at a time. Setting multiple messages

assigning a message at individual stations):

When setting fixed messages 4), 5), 6) at a
station, the system checks the parameters entered
: for example, the parameters of “hour,” “minute,”
“a.m./p.m.” are checked in fixed message 4). In
case of a wrong entry, the user hears reorder tone.

1) Will Return Soon

2) Gone Home
3) In a Meeting
4, BackAt

“i:‘“-

_ 5) Out Until x x/x

m/;.

When setting a flexible message by the system
programming, up to six parameters: “%” can be
entered. These are used to allow an extension
user to enter the desired parameters later at his
PITS set.

6) At Ext

xxxx
1

fzlltlth

If a flexible message contains any parameter to be
entered, use “0 to 9”, cI*” and “#.”
If the user enters fewer or more parameters than
the assigned parameters, or enters characters
except “0 to 9 ” =*’ and “#,” reorder tone is heard.

directorynumber
(threeor four digits)

To set and cancel this function at individual PITS
sets, use the feature numbers for “Absent
Message Set” and “Absent Message Cancel.”

When an extension has set both an absent
message and Call Forwarding-No Answer feature,
Call Forwarding-No Answer is activated when the
extension’& called.
Refer to Section 4-F-2.03 “Call Forwarding-No
Answer” for further information.

Programming
System Programming
“System-Tenant”,
Absent Message Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan (6/g)“,
Absent Message Set
Absent Message Cancel
“System-Absent Message”,
Fixed Message
Flexible Message

impossible.

Refl ence _i ..
Dumb
VT
9-D-2.00 1o-c-5.00
9-D-6.06 10-c-10.00
9-D-9.00 10-c-13.00

4-l-l 2

Operation
Setting fixed messages

Setting fixed message l), Z), or 3)

4), 5) or 6)

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Set.”

2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Set.”
3. Dial “04” for fixed message 4), or
dial “05” for fixed message 5), or
dial “06” for fixed message 6).

3. Dial “01” for fixed message l), or
dial “02” for fixed message 2), or
dial ‘03” for fixed message 3).

4. Dial “TIME” for fixed message 4),
or dial “DATE” for the fixed
message 5), or dial “directory
number” for fixed message 6) as
follows:

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting fixed message 1):

Input format
for “TIME” : HH MM AM/PM

I Will Return Soon i
When setting fixed message 2):
Gone Home

0 for a.m., 1 for p.m.

Input format for “DATE” : --MM DD
01 to 12 (month) 01 to 31 (day)

When setting fixed message 3):
In a Meeting

Input format for “directory number”:
three or four digits.

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

You hear confirmation tone, then
di&one.
If your PlTS has a display, it
shows:
When setting fixed message 4):

1 Backatxx:xxxx

When setting fixed message 5):
Out Until x x /x x
When setting fixed message 6):
At Ext. x x x x

5. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-l-l 3

Canceling the assigned message

Setting a flexible nwssage
7. L$ ?he handset or press the SFP+ONE button.

I. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dral the feature number for
‘Absent Message Set.”

2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Cancel.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Dial the two digit message

number 07 to 16.
If the message requires any
parameters, enter all the
parameters.
l

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display. it
shows the entered message.

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

--a;>

_.--

4-l-14

1’.

8.00 Message

Waiting

Description
Allows an
exiensmn
by turning
the called

(1) Receiver’s extension
extension user to indicate to another
that a message is waiting for him or her,

A Single Line Telephone without
MESSAGE lamp.

If your PITS has a display, it shows:
MW Not Accepted

Up to 500 message waiting indications can be set
for the whole system.

3. Tenant Service
The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is
determined by “System-Tenant” Message
Waiting Boundary.

Programming
System Programming

4. Setting of the multiple message waiting
indications

“System-Tenant’,
Message Waiting Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan (7/9)“.
Message Cancel

(1) More than one message sender can leave
message waiting indications to the same
extension at the same time.

“Extension-Station (Z/3)“.
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)-,
DSS Key Type

(2) Even if the same message sender sets
message waiting indications to the same
extension more than once, this leaves only
one message on the called extension.

Conditions
_

- .Anendant Conso@%
A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
button.’
Any Single Line Telephone
l

.‘” .‘i

(2) Message Receiver

without a MESSAGE

(2) The maximum number of message wafting
indications available for the system or
tenant l/2 has been assigned.

This feature is useful when the calied extension is
busy or does not answer the call.

PITS telephone

button.

on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on
extension.
The extension user who received the message
waiting indication can call back the message
sender by simply going off-hook and pressing the
red lit MESSAGE indicator (button).

1. Suitable Telephones:
(1) Message Sender

is:

A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
button:
A Single Line Telephone with
MESSAGE lamp.

5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message
receiver’s extension will be turned off when:
‘a;
(1) The message receiver c% back the
message sender by pressing the red lit
MESSAGE button, and it was answered by
the message sender (or by another
extension using Call Pickup or an SDN
button). 1
l

(2) Message waiting indication is canceled by
the message sender. ’
l

(3) Message waiting indications are canceled
by the message receiver.’ *

* Refer to on page 4-l-17 for
further information.
l

2. Reorder Tone
A caller who attempts to leave message waiting
indication may hear the reorder tone in the
following cases:

’ The indicator may not be turned off, if there are
other message waiting indications sent by other
extensions.
7 All message waiting indications are canceled at
once.

4-l-l 5
(30393)

Operation by Caller

Operation by Receiver

(At message

(A’ message recetvsrs extension;

sender’s extension)

Setting the Message Waiting Indication

Cahng back the message sender

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

PHONE button.

2. Dial the extension number of the
other party.
l

-1

2. Press the MESSAGE button that
is lit.

You hear ringback tone, or
busy tone 1 or 2, or DND tone.

.
.

3. Press the MESSAGE button.
l

You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

The MESSAGE indicator of the
other extension lights.
l

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

At the conclusion of the
conversations with all the
message senders, the
MESSAGE indicator goes out.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

1. Lii the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the ieature number for
f@essa$+e.Cancel?V9”(default)
and your own extension number
in succession.

2. Dial the feature number for
%&sage Cancel Y#9”j&fault)
and the extension number of the
message receiver successively.

If you received multiple
messages, catfing back the first
message sender is performed.
At the conclusion of the
conversation, the first message
is canceled.

Canceling all Message Waiting tndications on
your extension

Canceling the Message Wafting Indication on
receiver’s extension set by a caller

You hear ringback tone. When
the message sender answers,
start conversation.

You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

If the other extension received
only one message, the

MESSAGE indicator of the
other extension goes out.

You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The MESSAGE indicator on
receiver’s extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE buttoh.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-l-l 6

(30393)

2. Press the MESSAGE
is lit again.

Confirming the message sender by the rxssage
receiver (for PITS with the disolaf oniy) arc
changing the calling o:der ,! munxxe messages
are left (for all PITSs).
In on-hook condition or SP-PH3NE
MEGGAGE

1. Press the MESSAGE
is lit.

button that

- If multiple messages are left,
the second message Sender iS
displayed. The calling order of
the first message sender
becomes the last, and the
second message sender
becomes the first.

on
br;tton that

- If your PITS has a dispfay. it
shows:
When the message sender is
an extension user:
l

(Note)

Repeating step 2 displays the message sender
on the display of PITS type 30 one by one in
receiving order.
The calling order also changes at the same time.
The illustration below shows the change at every
pressing of the MESSAGE button:
“e
* in the illustration means pressing of the
MESSAGE button.

[WI
When the message sender is
an Attendant Console:

The order of
calling back

C------------------J

Displaying the first caller

Displaying Time and Date

A MESSAGE button is not provided on the PITS’s listed below, but can be
assigned to the assignable buttons respectively, as follows:
PITS not provided with MESSAGE button

I KX-T30820, KX-T30850

Assignable
DSS 8
!
DN3
I

I KX-T61620, KX-T61630. KX-T61650

KX-T30830

DN 6

4-l-17

(30393)

ButtOns

I
I

Displaying the second caller

9.00 Electronic

Station

Lock Out

Description

Operation

Electronic Station Lock Out allows an extension,
user to prohibit other extension users from making

Setting Electronic S:axn

Lx3

1. Lift the hanase: 3’ yess

outgoing CO calls from his or her extension.

tt?e SP-

PHONE button.

Any three-digit number (000 to 999) can be used
as a lock code.
Dial the feature number for
“Station Lock Set.”

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Station Lock to “Yes.”
Programming

-I

Dial the lock code: 000 to 999.

System Programming

Reference
VT
f
Dun-b

‘System-Classof Service(i/2)“,

9-O-4.01 IO-C-T.X

Station Lock
‘System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“,
Station Lock Set
Station Lock Cancel

Dial the same lock code again.

9-D-6.07 lO-G;O.oC

l
l

You hear confirmation tone 2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Conditions

Locked No. : xxx

Both Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or
Attendant Console) can also set and cancel this
function.
Once the operator locks an extension, the
extension user cannot unlock it.
See Section 4-i-l 1 .OO“Remote Station Feature
Control” for the details.

rlz 5.

T
lock code

Replace the handset.
.I

Canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

Set and cancel Electronic Station Lock Out on the
PDN button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
‘Station Lock Cancel.”

3. Dial the lock code.
l
l

You hear confirmation tone 2.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 Unlocked

4. Replace the handset.

4-l-l 8

10.00 Assigned

Feature Clear

Description

Operation

Allows an extension user to clear the following
features assigned on it by dialing the feature
number for “Station Program Clear” :

Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

(a) Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
(b) Absent Message
(c) Timed Reminder

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Program Clear.”

Programming
Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I
“System-Numbering
Plan (7/g)“, 1 9-D-6.071 lOC10.00 1
Station Program Clear
System Programming

You hear confirmation tone 3.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1I Ext Data Clear 1I

Conditions

3. Replace the handset.

Execute Assigned Feature Clear on the PDN
button.

4-l-l

11 .OO Remote Station
Control

Feature

Description

Operation

Allows the Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or
Attendant Console) to cancel or set the following
features assigned to each extension:

Setting/canceling Do Not Disturb to/from an
extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

Features to be canceled:
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Electronic Station Lock Out
FWD (Call Forwarding)
(It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily.)
l
l
l

2. Setting : Dial the feature number
for ‘Remote DND Set.”

Features to be set:
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Electronic Station Lock Out

Canceling : Dial the feature
number for “Remote
DND Cancel.”

l
l

Programming
System Programming

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension.

Reference
VT I Dumb

“System-Numbering
Plan (8/g)“,
Remote Station Lock Set
Remote Station Lock Card
Remote DND Set
Remote DND Cancel
Remote FWD Cancel
Remote FWD Cancel-OneTime

9-D-6,

1O-c-l 0.00

When setting:
DND Set: E xxxx
.I
3Extension Number

Conditions

When canceling:

When an extension is locked by the operator,
unlocking by the locked extension itself is
impossible.

$
_.
.

Confirmation tone 1 or 2 sounds.
If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

I-

DND Cancel: E xxxx
TExtension Number
/
x-u+:4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-I-20

Setting/canceling Electronic Station Lock Out
to/from an extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

I
2. Dial the teaWe w=%’
2. Setting : Dial the feature number
for “Remote Station Lock
Set.”
Canceling : Dial the feature
number for “Remote
Station Lock Cancel.”
3. Dial the directory number of the
extension.

‘or

“Remote FWC “,ar.c;.

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension.

EFI
123

456
709
*

. You hear confirmation tone 1 Or
2.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

FWD cancel: E xxxx
3Extension number

When setting:

/-Tzzzq
T
Extension number

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Call Forwarding from an extension
temporarily

When canceling:
Unlocked: E xxxx

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

-T
Extension number

(23
*
Etl

4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
‘+.
c-

4se
700

2. Dial the feature number for
“Remote FWD Canc&-Qne Time.”

Dial the directory number of the
extension.
Call Forwarding is canceled
temporarily.
. Calling the extension starts.

4-l-21

.:;.,.
-a.-

12.00 DSS Console
Description

DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)

The DSS Console is used to monitor the
busy/idle status of the extension users in the
system, and make a call to an extension user by
simply pressing the associated DSS (Direct
Station Selection) button.
The DSS Console provides a convenient way to
transfer an incoming CO call to an extension user
by simply pressing the associated DN*DSS
button instead of pressing the TRANSFER button
and dialing the extension number.
(See 4-l-l 2.01 “Automatic Transfer.” )

I I

The DSS Console can also be used to make an
outgoing CO call and to access certain
programmable feature (e.g. Call Park-System).
Up to 16 DSS Consoles (one per extension port)
can be connected to the system in conjunction
with a PITS telephone.

KX-T123240
DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)

Place the DSS Console.and the paired PITS
telephone side by side on your desk.
We provide three types of DSS Console as
illustrated below:
DSS buttons (16)

PF buttons (16)

KX-T7040
The DSS Console has an array of 32 DSS
buttons” plus 16 PF (Programmable Feature)
buttons.
KX-I61640

‘* The KX-T61640 has only 16 DSS buttons.

4-l-22

Any extension directory number can be
programmed to each DSS button, and the
associated LED indicator for each button
provides a busy,‘idle indication of the
programmed extension. Various features can be
programmed to the DSS and PF buttons.
The assignment for the DSS buttons and PF
buttons are programmed and changed either by
the system programming or PITS station
programming.

Programming

PITS Station Programming
PF (Programmable Feature) Button
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment

Reference
12-c-2.00
12-C-3.00

Conditions
None

4-l-23

12.01 Automatic

Transfer

Description

Pressing the DN*DSS button in the following
modes causes the corresponding operations.

Allows the DSS console operator to transfer the
CO call to an extension user by simply pressing
the associated DN*DSS button on the DSS
console.
This performance is, as a result, equivalent to the
operation of Call Transfer of a CO call to an
extension on a DN button.
To execute Automatic Transfer, assign ‘SystemOperation”, DSS Operation Mode to ‘With
Transfer.”
Defauft is set to With Transfer.”
If DSS Operation Mode is set to “Without
Transfer,” pressing the DN-DSS button
disconnects the other party and only calls the
extension user.

Modes of call

Operations caused by
pressing the DN*DSS button.

Talking to an
outside party
on the DN
button

Calls the extension by
placing the current call on
Consultation Hold.

Talking to an
extension on
the DN button

Calls the extension by
disconnecting the current
call.

Talking on the
CO button

By placing the current call on -1
Consuftation Hold, selects
*2
the DN button automatically,
and calls the extension.

Talking on the
ICM button

By disconnecting the current
call. selects the DN button
automatically, and calls the
extension.

Programming

System Programming

“System-Operation (l/3)“,
DSS Operation Mode

Reference
I Dumb

/ 40-1.01 j i(FG&

Automatic Transfer is effective only durfng a
conversation with an outside party when the DSS
console does not have a call on Consultation
Hold.

: If it is impossible to place the arrrent call on
Consultation Hold, the system ignores the
pressing of the DN=DSS button.

: If there is no idle PDN button, the current
call is placed on Consultation Hold and no
tone sounds.

Conditions

-3 : lf there is no idle PDN button, the current
call is disconnected and no tone sounds.

If the DSS console has a call on Consultation
Hold, the system ignores the pressing of the DN*
DSS button.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For s.e%ffhg Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-l .OO“Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside party
1. Press the DN=DSS button on the
DSS Console.
l

4-l-24

As soon as the other party is
placed on Consultation Hold,
extension calling starts and
ringback tone sounds.

13.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back
Deacrfptlon

Conditions

Up to four OGM’s can be recorded by the Operator
1 (Attendant Console or PlTS user) so that
different messages can be used for different
situations.
_

(1) Tenant Service
lf tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each DISA card is determined by the system
programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.
The Cperator 1 of each tenant can record and
play back the CGM within the same tenant.

The following four types of OGM can be recorded
respedively:
DISA, UCDl , UCD2 and W-UP (Wake-up)

(2) Recording of CGM
OGM recording is executed by selecting an
CXN type (usage of DISA card) from the
following four types:
l

OGM for outside parties
OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who
called the system via DISA feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.02 ‘Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) .3

1.
2.
3.
4.

OGM for UCD 1 and UCD 2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.06 ‘Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-with CGM.“)

If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
same in a tenant, the same message is
recorded for them at a time.

OGM for extension users
CGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wakeup message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 Timed Reminder with
OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

(3) Playing back of CGM
The following two ways are available:
l

A. By selecting an OGM m
B. By designating the logical number of
each DISA card directly.

Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.
l

A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be-installed to the system. .;r
Usage of each DISA card is determined by the
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-l .OO“Special Attended-DISA.“)

System Programming

‘System-Numbering Plan (g/9)‘.
OGM Record

If there are multiple DISA cards of the same
type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number,-

(4) Others

Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.

Programming
I

ffiM1 for UCD with CGM
CGM2 for UCD with CGM
CGM for DISA
CGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

Reference
VT
Icvnb

9-D-6.09 lO&lO.OO

OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DISA”. For Use 9-K-1.00 lOGiO.00

4-l-25
(40993)

Operation
Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from
Attendant Console. refer to Section 6-J-8.00
Wgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing
Back.-)

If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

+
T
xxxxxxxx Play : 00

1. Lff the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Indicates playback
time, counts up by
second.

5 You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

UCD-OGMl or
UCD-OGMP or
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM

Dial the feature number for OGM
Record 791” (default) and the
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.

When playback is finished, the
MEMORY indicator goes out.
You hear confirmation tone 3,
then no tone.

(Resource number)
1 : OGMl for UCD
2 : OGM2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
The MEMORY indicator flashes
in red 60 wink, confirmation tone
3 is heard.

xxxxxxxx
I

+z,
r-l
L

Rec. : 00
7

UCD-OGMl or
.z’^ UCD-OGM2 or
DISA-OGM or WkupOGM

(Supplement)

4. As soon as you finish, press the
MEMORY button.

In sfep 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish
playback, press the MEMORY button.

3. Begin your message.

In step 3 if you wish to change the message
during recording, you can start recording again
by dialing * .”

Indicates recording
time, counts up by
second.

lrl
YYQII
rl

5. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

In step 3 ff 30 seconds is over, recording is
terminated and piayback starts automatically.
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
..
aftenrvard.

ff your PITS has a display, it
shows:

The MEMORY indicator lights in
red.
After confirmation tone 3
sounds, the recorded message
is played back automatically.

4-l-26
(40993)

Playing back OGM

(Supplement)

1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

183
48.
?8*
I
EFI

In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish
playback, press the MEMORY button.
During playback you can start playback again
from the beginning by dialing v* .”

2. Diil the feature number for OGM
-playback 792” (default) and a
number below in succession.
(Resource number)
1: OGMl for UCD
2: OGM2forUCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
(*” and
l l:
l 2:
* 3:
l 4:

DISA No.)
sebectscard
selects card
selects card
selects card

1
2
3
4

The MEMORY indicator lights in
red.
You hear confirmation tone 3,
then the message.

. If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

1 DISA-OGM Play: 00 i
. When playback is finished, you
hear confirmation tone 3, then
no tone.
l

The MEMORY indicator goes
Out.

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-l-27
(40993)

14.00 Remote Timed Reminder
-One Time
Description

Operation

Allows the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant Console or
PITS with display) to set “Timed Reminder’
feature to any extension.
(Refer to Section 4-1-3.00,5-G-3.00 “Ttmed
Reminder.“)
If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed
beforehand, the extension user (on which
Remote Timed Reminder is set) hears a wake-up
message.
(Refer to Section 3-F-l 3.00 “Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

Setting Xmed Renrnder SCanother extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dii the feature number for
Remote Tmed Reminder Set
7*1’ (default) and the extension
number to be set Timed Reminder
in succession.

Programming

3. Dial “hour with two digits: 01 to 12.

System Programming

“System-NumberingPlan (9/9)^,
Remotelimed Reminder

Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I
9-D-6.09104-10.00

4. Dial ‘minute” with two digits: 00 to
59.

Confirm

RemoteTimed Reminder
Set
RemoteTimed Reminder
Cancel

5. Dial “0” for a.m. or diil r” for p.m..
. You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
and then diil tone l or 3 or 4.

Conditions
(1) The difference between “limed Reminder”
and “Remote Timed Reminder” is:

;Valiiity of the
setting -

1 El00
-i

Once or
everyday at the
programmed
time
Remote
limed
Reminder

by extenison
itself

If your PlTS has a display, it
shows:

11:ll

AM 1

Extension number

6. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Once

(2) At a single extension, only the latest setting is
valid whether it was set by the extension itself
(Timed Reminder) or by the Operator 1 or 2
(Remote Timed Reminder).

4-l-28
(40993)

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Xmed Reminder set to another
extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

(Supplement)
When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set
without display, reorder tone is heard.

2. Diil the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel
7r (default) and the extension
number to be canceled Remote
Tii
Reminder in succession.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If your PITS has a display, it
ShOWC
1 El00 Cancelled

3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

Confirming the alarm time programmed to another
extension (PITS with display only)
1. Lift the handset or press the SPPHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Confirm
“7+ 0” (default) and the extension
number to be confirmed the
setting in succession.
l

The display on your PITS
shows:

When no time is set:
Alarm Not Stored
If executing at 9:00 a.m. is preset at
Extension 100:

1 El00

9:00

AM 1

4-l-29
(40993)

Section 5

Station Features and Operation
Single Line Telephone (SLT)

(Section 5)

Station Features and Operation
Single Line Telephone

(SLT)

Contents

Page
5-A-1
Outgoing Ca!l Features . ... ... . ..._........................ . .. . .. . . .. ... . .. . ... .. . .. . . . .. .. . ... . . .. . .. ... ..
1 .oo Making Outside Calls.. ...........................................................................
1 .Ol Local Trunk Dial Access ..............................................................
1 .02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access ............................................
1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access .................................
2.00 Automatic Dialing ...................................................................................
2.01 Speed Dialing-Station ..................................................................
2.02 Speed Dialing-System .................................................................
2.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) ..........................................................
2.04 Pickup Dialing.. ............................................................................
Internal Calls.. ...........................................................................
Making
3.00
3.01 Inter Office Calling .......................................................................
4.00 Automatic Callback ................................................................................
4.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ...........................................................
4.02 Automatic Callback-Station .........................................................
5.00 Executive Busy Override .......................................................................
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DtiD) Override .............................................................
7.00 Walking COS (Class of Service) ............................................................
8.00 Operator Call .........................................................................................

Receiving Features . .. . . .. ... . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . ... .. . .. . . .. . .. . ... . .. .. . .. . .. .. ... . .. . .. .. . .. . ... . .. 5-B-l
1 .OO Call Pickup.. ...........................................................................................
1 .Ol Dial Call Pickup ...........................................................................
1.02 Directed Call Pickup ....................................................................
1.03 Call Pickup Deny .........................................................................
2.00 Truiik Answer From Any %tion (TAFAS)-Day Service.. ...... “:........ z.. ....
3.00 Executive Busy Override Deny ..............................................................
4.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) ...........................................................................
5.00 Call Waiting ............................................................................................
6.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out.. .............................................

5-A- 1
5-A-l
5-A-2
5-A-3
5-A-4
5-A-4
5-A-6
5-A-9
5-A-9
5-A-11
5-A- 11
5-A-1 2
5-A-l 2
5-A-13
5-A- 14
5-A-l 5
5-A- 16
5,A-17

5-B-l
5-B-l
5-B-2
5-B-3
5-B-4
5-B-5
5-B-6
5-B-8

5-B-l 0

Holding Features . . . . .. . .. .. . ... .. .. . . . .... .... . .._........._.................................................. 5-c-1
1 .OO
2.00
3.00
4.00

Hold ......................................................................................................
Consultation Hold ..................................................................................
Call Hold Retrieve-Station .....................................................................
Call Park ...............................................................................................
4.01 Call Park-System .........................................................................
4.02 Call Park-Station .........................................................................

5-l

5-c-1
5-c-2
5-c-3
5-c-4
5-c-4
5-c-5

D Transferring Features . . .. ... . . .. .. .. ... .. .. . .. ..-.........................................................1 .OO Call Transfer ..........................................................................................
1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to Station.. ..........................................
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station.. ..............................................
1.03 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote ..........................................
1.04 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Console .........................
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) .............
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) .........................................................................
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls .............................................................
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off -Hook ...................................................
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer .........................................................
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer.. ..............................
2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk .............................................................
4

5-D-l
5-D-l
5-D-2
5-D-3
5-D-3-l
5-D-3-2
5-D-4
5-D-4
5-D-7
5-D-l 0
5-D-l 3
5-D-l 6

5-E-l
Conversation Features . .. .. . .._......._._...._....._....._..........____.._....___.........................
1.00 Conference ............................................................................................
2.00 Doorphone.. ...........................................................................................
3.00 External Feature Access.. ................................ .: ....................................

Page
5-D-l

5-E-l
STE-2
5-E-3

Paging Features . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .._....................... 5-F-l
1.00 Paging.. ..................................................................................................
1.01 Paging All Extensions.. ................................................................
1.02 Group Paging ..............................................................................
1.03 i%ging External Pagers.. ........... y......... [. ......................................
1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ...............................
2.00 Background Music (BGM) through External Pager.. ..............................

5-F-l
5-F-l
5-F-3
5-F-5
5-F-7
5-F-8

5-G-l
G Other Features .. .. . . . ...__...._
_______....._........._
_._.._._..__.____.._..._..._........_..__....._.._.__.._
1.00 Night Service .........................................................................................
1 .Ol Universal Night Answer (UNA) ....................................................
1.02 Flexible Night Service.. ................................................................
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode ......................................................
2.00 Account Code Entry. ..............................................................................
3.00 Timed Reminder ....................................................................................
4.00 Data Line Security .................................................................................
5.00 Absent Message Capability ..................................................................
6.00 Message Waiting ...................................................................................
7.00 Electronic Station Lock Out ...................................................................
8.00 Assigned Feature Clear .........................................................................
9.00 Remote Station Feature Control.. ..........................................................
5-2
(30393)

5-G-l
5-G-l
5-G-2
5-G-3
5-G-5
5-G-7
5-G-9
5-G-l 0
5-G-l 2
5-G-14
5-G-15
5-G-l 6

A. Outogoing

Call Features

1.00 Making Outside Calls
1 .Ol Local Trunk Dial Access
Operation

Description
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO calls
by automatic selection of an idle CO line.
Dialing the feature number for ARS/Local CO Line
Access” enables you to execute this function.

1. Lift the handset .

To activate this feature, set “System-Operation”,
Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If set to “Yes,
” ARS feature is activated instead of this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)” for further information.

2. Dial the feature number for
“ARSRocal CO Line Access.”

Reference
VT
Dumb

9-D-l .Ol 10-c-4.00
“System-Operation(1n)“.
Automatic Route Selection
“System-LocalAccess Group”. SD5.00 10-C-9.00
Hunt Sequence
“System-NumberingPfan (2/g)“, SD6.02 lCG10.00
ARSlLocal

You hear dial tone 1.”

3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

Programmfng
System Pfogrammng

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

,’

CO Line Access

Conditions
An idle CO line available and hunting sequence is
determined by the system programming “SystemLocal Access Group’, Hunt Sequence.
If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no
idle CO line available.
If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user
is restricted from accessing this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-l .Ol “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further infomration.
If tenant service is activated, accessible trunk
group is limited to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.
The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk group
in hunt sequence 01 in “System-Local Access
Group.”

5-A-l

1.02 Individual
Access

Trunk Group

Dial
Operation

Description

1. Lift the handset.

Allows extension use-s to make outgoing CO
calls via an idle CO ii-? in the specified trunk
group by dialing the %ature number for “Trunk
Group 01-08 Access’ 3r “Trunk Group 09-l 6
Access.”

2-l

Specifying any one of trunk
groups 01 to 08

Programming
System Programmrg

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

1) Dial the feature number for
“Trunk Group 01-08 Access.”
2) Dial the trunk group
specifying number : 1 to 8.

Reference
VT
I Dumb

“System-Class of Serve (2/2)“,
Trunk Group Access
“System-Numbering F%n (2/g)‘,

Trunk Group Ol-OE Access
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
as follows:
Trunk Group
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Trunk Group
Specifying Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Conditions
Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the
ones assigned in “System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access.
If an extension user ‘ears busy tone, all CO lines
in the specified trunk group are not available.

If an extension user bears reorder tone, the user
is restricted from accessing the specified trunk
group.
Refer to Section 3-C-t .03 ‘7011 Restriction for
Individual Trunk Grocp Dial Access/Direct Trunk
Access,” for further irformation.

2-2

Specifying any’dne of trunk
groups 09 to 16
1) Dial the feature number for
“Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access.”
2) Dial the trunk group
specifying number : 1 to 8.

Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
as follows:
Specifying

Trunk Group
Number

Number

09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

5-A-2

1.03 individual Virtual Trunk Group
Dial Access
Description

Operation
1. Lift the handset.

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO
calls using Special Carrier Facilities by simply
.dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 1724 Access.”

Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization codes, required to Special Carrier
Access must be programmed beforehand in
“Special Carrier Access” screen.
Trunk groups available for Special Carrier
Access is also defined in the same screen.

2. Dial the feature number for
‘Trunk Group 17-24 Access.”

3. Dial the virtual trunk group
specifying number : 1 to 8.

Special carriers available for each extension user
is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)”
Special Carrier Access.

It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier
Access on system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2EQU/OCC Access Assignmenr for further
information.
Programming
System Programming
“System-Class of Service (2/2)“,
Special CarrierAccess
“System-Numbering Plan (2/g)“,
Trunk Group 17-24 Access
‘Special Carrier Access-Equal
AccessIOCC Access’,
“World Select 2”

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Reference
VT
DlJmb

Virtual Trunk
Digit Modification
Virtual Trunk
Group Number iruouEeTpecifyin9 Table Number

9-O-4.02 10-C-8.02
9-O-6.02 10-6-10.00
9-H-l .oO 1O-C-30.00
9-H-2.00 1O-C-31
.OO
1O-c-52.00

17
18
19

1
2
3

Equal access I
table number 2
3

20
21
22
23
24

45
6
7
8

OCCaccess
1
y
table number 2
+
3
4

Conditions
None

4. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

5-A-3

2.00 Automatic
2.01 Speed

Dialing

Dialing-Station

Description

Each stored number can have up to 16 digits
including CO line access code.

Allows SLT teiepnone ;se:s to program frequently
dialed telephor?e numbers (both extension and
outside numbers) In the Speed Dialing code (0 to
9 : dedicated to each SLT telephone user) by
dialing the feature number for “Speed DialingStation Programming.’
To make a call using pre-assigned Speed Dialing
code, dial the feature number for “Speed DialingStation” and appropriate Speed Dialing code (0 to
9).

Numbers from “0 to 9” and &*” can be registered.
To store “PAUSE,” dial y* *.”
When SLT is connected with HLC card, the SLT
can use One Touch Dialing and the special dials
such as secret dialing etc. which are stored for
PITS.
It is performed by connecting PITS with HLC card
temporarily and registering One Touch Dialing by
using the PITS.
In this case, One Touch Dialing codes stored o?i
PFl to PFlO on a PITS match speed dialing
codes by SLT (Single Line Telephone), as

Up to 10 codes can be registered for each SLT
telephone.

follows:

Programming
System Programming

Reference
Dumb
VT

SLT
PITS
Speed Dialing-Station
One Touch Dialing
PFl . .... .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . . . .. . . .... . .. .. .0
PF2 ... ... . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. . . . .... ... .. 1
PF3 . .. .. .. . . . ... .. . .. .. . . .. .. .... ... .. .2
PF4 .. .. ... .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . ... .... . ..3
PF5 ... ... . . . . ... .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .... .. .. .4
PF6 .. ... .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . .... ... .. .5
PF7 . .. ... . . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . ... .. ... .,6
PF8 . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. .... ... .. .7
PF9 . ... .. . . .. .. . . . .. ...-............... 8
PFlO .. ... . . ... . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. .. .... .. .9

“System-Numbering Plan (2/9)n, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
Speed Dialing-Station
.
“System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“, 9-O-6.07 10-C-10.00
Speed Dialing-Station
Programming

Conditions
To register the outside number in a speed dialing
code, the feature number for selecting a CO line
must be registered as leading digits.
When calling an outside party automatically:
.-- T.9 - 411 - 3209

Feature number for “ARS/Locai CO Line
Access”

When calling an outside party by specifying the

trunk group:
811 -411 - 3209
--L

Feature number for “Trunk Group 01-08
Access” or
Feature number for “Trunk Group 09-l 6
Access” or
Feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24
Access”

5-A-4

Operation
Stcri:g

the telephone

Executing Speed Dialing-Station

number

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Speed Dialing-Station
Programming.”

2. Dial the feature number for
“Speed Dialing-Station.”
l

Dial the speed dialing code: 0 to
9.

3. Dial the speed dialing code : 0 to
9.

4. Dial the telephone number that
you want to store.

5. Dial “#.”
l

No tone is heard.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

6. Replace the handset.

(Supplement)
When using a rotary telephone (pulse type), wait
until you hear confirmation tone in s&p 5 withoyt
dialing “#.”

S-A-S

Registered telephone number
is sent.

2.02 Speed

Dialing-System

Description

When the mark “*” or “#” is stored in the feature
number for “Speed Dialing-System,” the rotary
telephone users can not use this feature.

System Speed Dialing allows any e&-s x user
to call outside parties by dialing me fe&re
number for “Speed Dialing-System” and a preassigned 3-digit code (001 to 200) common to
any extension user in the system.
Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be registered
to the system.

Operation
Calling an outside party using System Speed
Dialing Code
1. Lift the handset.

The speed dialing codes are registered in
“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and
specific toll restriction level for each speed diahng
code can be assigned in the same screen.
Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed
Dialing” on next page for further information.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Speed Dialing-System.”

Programming
System Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4

Reference
VT 1 Dumb

You hear no tone.

3. Dial the appropriate speed

dialing code : 001 to 200.

“System-Tenant”,Speed Dialing- 9-D-2.00 1 O-C-5.00
System Boundary
“System-NumberingPlan (2/g)“, 9-D-6.02 10-6-10.00
Speed Dialing-System
“System-Speed Dialing-System” 9-D-8.0010-C-12.00

Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing
Codes can be split by two tenants. In this case,
one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing Codes
which belong to another tenant.
Each stored number can have up to 32 digits
including CO line access code.
“O-9 ” YJC,”
“#,” “PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “-” &d
“SECRET” can be registered.
Speed Dialing and manual dialing can be used in
combination. In this case, execute Speed Dialing
before manual dialing.
When you register a telephone number to a
System Speed Dialing Code, a feature number for
selecting a CO line must be stored as leading
digits.
The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:
ARS/Local CO Line Access
Trunk Group 01-08 Access
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access
Trunk Group 17-24 Access
l

l
l

5-A-6

The registered number is sent
to CO line automatically.

‘be ;‘,s:?r” a.:- y.s+Lrz:“’ car; assign Toll
Ees:-: -..-f:-” i-e. 2 of S:isrem S.oeed Dialing
t,re!e--26 tc 25 -'=iiSf:n the tollowing) to each
code as :olio*s

Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16j. the system
compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension
(TRLE) with TRLSD.
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD
(TRLEzTRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is
lower than TRLSD (TRLEcTRLSD), a call is
checked against System Toll Restriction
feature.
For further information about TRLE, refer to
Section 3-C-l .OO “Toll Restriction.”

System - Speed Dlalrng - System
_--_----------------------------------System Speed Dial No. =OOl
f.-------------------------‘---‘-”’--”

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6
is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLEsTRLSD), so a
call is made.
Toll Restriction Level of System
Speed Dialing (TRLSD)

TRLSD consists of 17 levels (YOO”and “01 to 16”)
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from
TRLSDs “01 to 16.”
. In TRLSD “01 to 16,” “01” is the highest level and
“16” is the lowest.
1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing
Code (TRLSD=OO)
When an
a System
extension
restriction

outgoing CO call is made by dialing
Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=OO),
users receive standard toll
treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Local
Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”
If selected speed dialing code includes
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll
Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access.”
For further information about System Toll
Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-l .OO
“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing
Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16)
When an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing
5-A-7

The following flowchart shows the simplified procedure of toll resIr!cticr, 5z-1 for
System Speed Dialing.

When an outgoing CO call is made by
dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=Ol to 16)

When an outgoing CO call is made by
dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=OO)

1
Compares TRLSD with TRLE

1
Checks a call against System Toll
Restriction feature

e
TRLE A call ;inging at an extension outside of the
same call pickup group
<2> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 5-B-l .03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
c3> A call ringing on PC0 button of PITS
telephone
c4> A call ringing on ICM button.of PITS
telephone
c5> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

5-B-l

1.02 Directed

Call Pickup

Description

Operation

Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to
answer the call ringing at extension in any call
pickup group by dialing the feature number for
‘Directed Call Pickup,” and the directory number
of ringing extension.

Answering a call ringing at extension in the
different call pickup group.
1. Lift the handset.

Programming
2. Dial the feature number for

“Directed Call Pickup.”

111
“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-O-6.03 104-10.00

3. Dial the directory number of the
ringing extension.

Conditions
It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup
after holding the current call.
An extension user who has Do Not Disturb
assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other
extensions.
This feature is not available to answer the
following calls:
cl > A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 5-B-l .03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
<2> A call ringing on PC0 button of PITS
telephone
<3> A call ringing on ICM button of PITS
telephone
c4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)
If the extension users attempt to pick up the
above mentioned call, reorder tone sounds after
dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup.”

5-B-2

You hear confirmation

Talk to the caller.

tone 3.

1.03 Call Pickup

Deny

Description

Operation

Call Pickup Deny &lows a? SXT~WC~ user :3
prohibit the other extension i;strs tram pccicq up
calls ringing at his or her exte-sior! by a caii
pickup feature (Both Dial Call Pickup and
Directed Call Pickup).

Setting Call Pickup Deny
1. Lift the handset.

To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature
number for ‘Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or ‘Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Set.”

9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

3. Replace the handset.

“System-NumberingPlan (5/g)“.
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set
Dial Call Pickup Dew Cancel
Canceling Call Pickup Deny
Conditions

1. Lift the handset

Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny
assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call
Pickup or Directed Call Pickup feature for calls
ringing at other extensions.
2. Dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”
..
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-3

2.00 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day
Service
Description

Conditions

Incorn?; CO ra!‘s programmed for TAFAS will
ring the external oager and any extension user in
the system can answer the calls by dialing the
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2”
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

If tenant service is employed :
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerTenant.
Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.

To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and ‘Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utilize the external pager, assign “SystemOperation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.”

Operation
Answering incoming CO calls programmed for
TAFAS
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.

Up to two external pagers can be connected to
this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.

1. Lift the handset.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to
section 5-G-l .Ol “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2-1 If a call is ringirig at external
pager 1: Dial the feature
number for ‘Night Answer 1.”

Programming
System Programming

“System-Operation(l/3)“,
External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering
Plan (3/g)“,
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group
(l/2)“,
Incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Line”,
Trunk Group
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant

2-2 If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature
number for ‘Night Answer 2.”

Reference
v-r
Dumb
9-D-l .Ol

10-C-4.00

9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

9-E-1 .ol

1O-C-14.00

9-F-1 .OO 1O-C-l 8.00
9-F-2.00

10-C-19.00

5-B-4

3. Talk to the caller.

4.00 Do Not Disturb

(DND)

Description
Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to
appear busy to all incoming calls (intercom.
extension and outside calls).
To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class ot
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to yes”
beforehand by system programming.
This feature can be assigned and canceled by
dialing the feature number “Do Not Disturb Set”
and ‘Call Forwarding/Do Not D&turb Cancet.’

(5) DND Override
‘Do Not Disturb Override” allows extension

users to override “Do Not Disturb” feature
assigned on the called extension user.
Refer to Section 5-A-6.00 “Do Not Disturb
Override” for further information.
Operation
Setting Do Not Disturb
1. Lii the handset.

Programmlng
System Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Reference
VT
Dumb

2. Dial the feature number for Do
Not Disturb Set **l” (default).

“System-Classof Service (1/2r, 9-D-4.01 lOG7.00
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb
“System-NumberingPfan (519): 9-D-6.05 1OklO.W
Do Not Disturb Set
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb Cancel

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.
_.

COllditiOIlS

(1) IRNA -

Automatically
If a call via DISAIDID is directed to an
extension in the DND mode, it will be
automatically redirected to another extension
(including VPS extension) or an Attendant
Console assigned as the IRNA destination.
Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 Wntercept Routing
- No Answer (IRNA) for further information.

Canceling Do Not Disturb
1. Lii the handset.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for Call

(2) Making Calls
An extension in the DND mode can still be
used to make calls and access any other
features available to that extension.

F&Warding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel “MO” (default).
l

(3) Answering Calls

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

An extension in the DND mode is available:
l

3. Replace the handset

To answer a call ringing at another
extension by “Call Pickup” feature.
Refer to Section 5-B-l .OO“Call Pickup” for
further information.

(4) FWD/DND

Setting DND feature cancels any Call
Forwarding feature pre-assigned on the
extension and vice versa.
Refer to Section 5-D-2.00 “Call Forwarding
(FWD)” for further information.
5-B-6
(30393)

(Supplement)
The table below shows whether an extension which has DND assigned rings
or not and the other extensions which has the extension’s directory number
assigned (PITS) rings or not and how their SDN indicators light, when the
extension setting DND receives a call.
Type of call arriving at
setting extension

Other extensions
has SDN assigned
or not

Extension call

Extension which
has DND assigner
PDN)
No ring -1

Extension which has
SDN assigned (SDN)

Red 240 wink
Ring
No ring

Attendant Console call

*l
Red 240 wink
Ring

Yes
DIL (1 :N) call
No ring

Lights on in red
No ring
DIL (13) call

Ring
Red 240 wink

DID call

No
indicator off

DISA call

1 No ring
Indicator off
No ring

Yes
Other calls

‘1

DND tone is sent to the caller.

5-B-7
(30393)

”

5.00 Call Waiting
Description

Operanon

Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates
that another call (extension or outside) is waiting.

Setting Call Wanq
1

Litt the handset.

To set or cancel Call Waiting feature, dial the
feature number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call
Waiting Cancel.”
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Waiting Set.”

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
I Dumb

- You near confirmation tone 1 or
2, and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

“System-Numbering
Plan (5/g)“, SD-6.05 10-C-10.00
Call Waiting Set
Call Waitina Cancel
I
I
I

3. Replace the handset.

Conditions
Call waiting tone is sent in the foliowing mode:

Canceling Call Waiting
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Waiting Cancel.:
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2, and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-8

Talking to tie new party by holding the current
paW
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

Operation
Answering Call Waiting
A call from another extension or outside party
arrives during a conversation.
l

You hear call waiting tone.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Talking to the new party by disconnecting the
current call

2. Dial the feature number for “Hold”
to hold the current party.

1. Replace the handset to
disconnect the current call.
l

Your telephone set rings.

You hear confirmation tone 2
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

2. Lift the handset.

. Talk to the new party.

Your telephone set rings.

4. Lift the handset.
l
l

Talk to the new caller.
To conclude the new
conversation and return to the
held party again, replace the
handset and lift the handset
again, then dial the feature
number for “Hold Retrieve.”

(Supplement)
See Section 5-C-l .OO“Hold” for further information
about Hold.

5-B-9

6.00 Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD j-Log Out
Description

Operation

UCD group members may leave the group
temporarily by dialing the feature number for
“UCD Log Out” to avoid UCD calls being sent to
their extensions.

Setting UCD Log Out (Leaving a UCD group)
1. Lift the handset.
You hear dial tone 4.

Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section
3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with
OGM” for further information about UCD call.,

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD
Log Out.”
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

Programming

3. Replace the handset.
~1

Conditions
. When an extension of the UCD group set for
Log Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be
heard.
(second) 0

Canceling UCD Log Out (Returning to a UCD
group)
1. Lift the handset.
l

You hear dial tone 4.

5
2. Dial the feature number for “UCD
Log In.”

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-l 0

C. Holding

Features

1.00 Hold
Description

Operation

Allows an extension user to hold the current call
and either make or answer another call
(extension or outside).

Placing a call on hold.
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

To hold a call, dial the feature number for “Hold.”
To retrieve a held call, dial the feature number for
“Hold Retrieve.”

Programming
System Programming

‘f

“System-Numbering
Hold
Hold Retrieve

Plan (4/g)“,

Reference
VT
I Dumb

2. Dial the feature number for
“Hold.”

9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00

Conditions
SLT telephone user cannot hold the multiple calls
at a time. So if the SLT telephone users attempt
to hold another call while holding a current call,
reorder tone is heard. If SDN button for SLT
telephone user is busy, the SLT telephone users
cannot hold a call even though no call is held by
SLT.

1. Lift the handset.
l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Hold
Retrieve.”
l

The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Retrieving a held call

The extension users can not hold the following
calls.
l

The other party is held
temporarily.
You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

A call with Attendant Console
A call with Doorphone

If a held call has not been answq$d more than a
pre-assig$&ime,
a warning tonre. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant
Console.

l
l
l

A call from doorphone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

To execute Call Forwarding-All Calls, assign
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb” to “Yes.”
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-All Calls Set” and
“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming
System Proga&ming

Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
.*
VM extension.
The following attempt will be rejected with
reorder tone.
If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant.

Reference
VT
Dumb

“System-Class of Service (l/Z)“,
9-D-4.01
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering
Plan (419)“. 4D-6.04
Call Forwarding-All Call Set
“System-Numbering
Plan (5/g)“, 9D-6.05
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

10-C7.00

The extension user cannot set the destination
to another extension that presets its own
destination to the user’s extension.

lC-C-10.00
l

10-C-10.00

The extension user cannot call another
extension that presets its destination to the
users extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

S-D-4
(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.
Type of Call Arriving
8 Setting Extension
Extension call

Condition of Destination

Call is forwarded to destination.

PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is forwarded and kept waiting
at destination.

Same as call reaching DND. See
Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode

Call is forwarded and kept waiting
at destination.

Conditions except In Service *

Call is placed on setting extension.

Idle status

0
0

Call is forwarded to d&nation.

Assigned to DND

IL (1 :l) or DISA call Idle status
Busy status
Assigned to DND

IID call

Busy status

..I

Result

0
0
0
0

idle status
Busy status

Forwarding

Execution

Busy tone is sent from destination.
DND tone is sent from destination.
Busy tone is sent from destination.

Busy tone is sent from destination

Assigned to DND

Same as call reaching DND. See
Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode

Busy tone is sent from destination

Conditions except ln Service *

Call is placed on destination.

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details

5-D-5

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-All

Calls

Canceling Call Forwarding-All

Calls

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dia’the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-All Call Set.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
l

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or the “FDN for General Operator
Call’ to be set as the destination:
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-6
(21292)

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
Description

Conditions

Cal; Forwardlrg-Busy.Off-Hook
provides
atiiomatic c&t irW&er
to a preset destination
when the “ser’s eztension is busy or off-hook.

An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

Incoming caiis can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice tv?ailports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l

A call from doorphone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook, assign
“System-Class of Service”, “Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb” to “Yes.”

If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to ‘Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook is set to an Attendant
Console.

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-Busy Set,” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.

Programming

The following attempt will be rejected
. with
reorder tone.

l
l

SystemProgramming
t

Reference
VT

Dumb

“System-Classof Service (l/2)“, ~9-D-4.011o-c-7.00
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb
“System-NumberingPlan (4/g)“, 9-o-6.04 104-10.00
Call Forwarding-BusySet
“System-NumberingPlan (5/g)‘, 9-O-6.05 10-c-10.00
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb Cancel

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant.
The extension user cannot set the destination
to another extension that presets&own
destination to the user’s extension.
The extension user cannot call another
extension that presets its destination to the
user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

5-D-7
(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
!3is function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.
Type of Call Arriving
at Setting Extension
Ex:ension call

Forwarding
Execution

Condition of Destination

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Idle status
Busy status

Assigned to DND

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1 A) or DISA cal I Idle status
Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DID call

Idle status
Busy status

Assigned to DND

Call is placed on setting extension.

PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service * 1

0:
X
;c

5-D-8

Forwarding possible =: Forwarding impossible
Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy..Off-Hcc%

Canceling

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

1. Lift the handset.

Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Calf
Forwarding-Busy Set.”

Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
l

)

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail ports,
or the ‘FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-9
(21292)

2.03 Call Forwarding-No

Answer

Description

Conditions

Call Forwating-No
Answer wovides automatic
call transfer to a preset desbnation if the
extension user cannot answer :he call in a
determined period (that is, ti the caller is not

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

answered while heanng ringback tone in a
specified perfod).
Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-O-1.01 “Operation (113)‘for
further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l

A call from doorphone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb” to ‘Yes.”

If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the ‘Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.
If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-No Answer is set to an Attendant
Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
The following attempt will be rejected with
..
reorder tone.
l

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-No Answer Ser and
‘Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
l

Programming
System Programming
‘System-System Timer”,
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Time-Out
“System-Class of Service (l/2)‘,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)‘.
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Set
“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)‘,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

Reference
VT
Dumb

9-O-3.00104-6.00
9-D-4.01 I O-C-7.00
9-O-6.04 lO-GlO.00
9-D-6.06 lO-GiO.00

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant.
The extension user cannot set the destination
to another extens@ that presets its own
destination to the users extension.
-- The extension user cannot call another
extension that presets its destination to the
user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

5-D-l 0
(21292)

Idle status

Busy status

I Call is forwarded

31
DIL (1 :l) or l&A

Rescrr;

Condition of Destination

call Idle status

desmation.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode
Conditions except In Service *
DID call

Idle status
Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *
0

: f&warding possible

: Forwarding impossible

5-D-l 1

’r

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-No

Fomxding-No

Answer
.

1. Lift the handset.

Liti me handset.

Dia! the feature number for “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-No Answer Set.”

I’-‘!

3. Dial the directory number of the
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or the “FDN for General Operator
Call” of the destination.
l

Answer

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-l 2
(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
Description

Conditions

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
provides automatic call transfer to a preset
destination if the user’s extension is busy off-hook
or the user cannot answer the call in a determined
period (that is, if the caller is not answered while
hearing ringback tone in a specified period).

An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to-extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l

A call from door-phone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HookMo Answer,
assign “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding
/Do Not Disturb” to ‘Yes.”
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

‘System-SystemTimer”,
Call Forwarding-NoAnswer
Time-Out
“System-Classof Service (l/2)“,
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb
“System-NumberingPlan (4/g)“,
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer
“System-NumberingPlan (5/g)“,
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb Cancel

The following attempt will be rejected with
reorder tone.
l

Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

9-D-3.001o-c-6.00

9-D-4.01lo-C-7.K
9-D-6.0410-G10.C~:
9-D-6.0510-C-lO.Ir

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant.
The extension user cannot set the destination
to another extension that presets its own
destination to the user’s extension.
The extension user cannot call another
extension that presets its destination to the
user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.’

5-D-l 3
(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
Description

Conditions

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer
provides automatic call transfer to a preset
destination if the user’s extension is busy off-hook
or the user cannot answer the call in a determined
period (that is, if the caller is not answered while
hearing ringback tone in a specified period).

An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by ‘System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for
further information.

If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer is set to
an Attendant Console.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l

A call from doorphone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer,
assign “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding
/Do Not Disturb” to “Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

The following attempt will be rejected with
reorder tone.
l

Programming
System Programming

Refi ence
VT
Dumb

9-D-3.001O-c-6.00
‘System-SystemTimer,
Call Forwarding-NoAnswer
Time-Out
‘System-Classof Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 1o-c-7.00
Call Forwarding/DoNot
Disturb
“System-Numbering
Plan (4/S)“,
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer
“System-Numbering
Plan (5/g)“,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

9-D-6.04 1o-c-1 0.00
9-D-6.05 10-C-l 0.00

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
set the destination to an extension in the other
tenant.
The extension user cannot set the destination
to another extension that presets its own
destination to the user’s extension.
The extension user cannot call another
extension that presets its destination to the
user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

5-D-l 3
(21292)

Condition of Destination

Result

Idle status

Call is fowarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Busy status
Assigned to DND
PITS programming mode

I Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1 :l) or DISA calll Idle status

I
I

1 Busy status

Assigned to DND
1 PITS programming mode

I Conditions except tn Service * I
DID call

I Idle status

I Busy status

Assigned to DND

_ .

PITS programming mode
I Conditions except In Service *

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

5-D-l 4

Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

Operation
Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo
Answer
I

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
2. Dial the feature number for ‘Call

Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.”

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
3. Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port, or
the ‘FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-l 5
(21292)

2.05 Call Forwarding

to Trunk

Description

Conditions

^ - Forwarding to Trunk allows extension users
-2..
n-c are away from their phones to receive
-coming calls (both CO and extension) at outside
;: ace.

An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the
pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to
CO call via this system is established. Duration
time of CO to CO call is restricted by ‘GroupTrunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving
CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both
parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time
is expired, and when expired the system
disconnects both parties compulsively.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”
Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and
;sCncan be entered as the telephone number of
the destination. CO line access code must be
entered as the leading digit of each entry.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
l
l
l

A call from doorphone
A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
A call directed to a UCD group

. To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both
System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb and CO Forward Mode to Yes.”
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-To Trunk” and I%all
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
Programming
System Programming
‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“.
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
CO Forward Mode
-System-Numbering
Plan (4/9)“,
Call Forwarding-to Trunk
‘System-Numbering
Plan (5/g)“,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
-Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,
CO-CO Duration Limit

Ref 9nce
v-r
Dumb
9-D-4.01 10-c-7.00

9-D-6.04 lo-c-10.00
9-D-6.05 1o-c-10.00

9-E-l .Ol

10-c-14.00

5-D-l 6

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving zt a- ?x:ension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the ore%: zestirz:z.
I

Type of Call Arriving
at Setting Extension
Extension call

Condition of Destination

Eor*~-J,Gg’
; Exec-TO”

Idle status

Result

Call is forwarded to external
destination.

Calf is placed on setting extension.

Busy status
Conditions except In Service *
DIL (1 :l) or DISA call Idle status

-3
DID call

Call is forwarded to external
1 destination.

’

Idle status

I Busy status

-”

Call is placed on setting extension.

I
I

1 Conditions except In Service * 1

I
Call is placed on setting extension.

Forwarding possible

: Forwarding impossible

Conditions are “Out .of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

3
.*...

5-D-l 7

.L.

‘5

Operation
Setting Call Forwarding

Canceling

to Tnxic

Call Forwarding

to Trunk

1. Lift the handse:.

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding to Trunk.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”
l

3. Dial the feature number for
selecting the CO line and the
telephone number of the
destination and “#” in succession.
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

(Supplement)
The system does not check the dialed number,
toll restriction level, and the feature number for
selecting a CO line at the time of setting this
function.

5-D-l

E. Conversation

Features

1 .OO Conference

Description

Operation

During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party, the extension user can add another
party (extension or outside party) on the current
conversation and hold a three party conference.
This is called Conference Conversation.

Establishing a conference
Extension A is in conversation with party B
(another extension or an outside party).
The following is the operation from the standpoint of extension A.

On the TSW card, there are eight standard
conference trunks provided for this purpose.
By equipping the optional conference expansion
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”

1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

When two members in the conference are both
outside parties, two conference trunks are
necessary. In all other cases, one conference
trunk is enough.

2. Call another party C (an
extension or an outside party).

The other party B is placed on
Consultation Hold.
Extension A hears dial tone 1
or3or4.

Talk to party C.
.:a:.:.

Programming

3. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

kl
j’Configuratron-SystemAssignment”,9-C-l.@I10-C-l .OO

Conference among the parties
A, B and C is established.

Conditions

(Supplement)

Pressing the switchhook by the conference
originator during the conference restores a
conversation with the first party.
This places the second party on Consultation
. Hold.‘-.

If the conference trunk is not available in step 3,
you cannot establish conference by pressing the
switchhook, which puts the current party C on
Consu%tion Hold, and convar@on with the
held party B starts.

Pressing the switchhook again establishes the
conference again if the conference trunk is
available. If the conference trunk is not available,
conversation with the held (second) party starts,
placing the first party on Consultation Hold.

Concluding a conference
1. Replace the handset.
If both stations B and C are
outside parties, both B and C
are disconnected.
If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension user, a conversation
between B and C is
established.
l

5-E-l

2.00 Doorphone
Description

Operation

Up to four doorphones can be connected to the
system. This provides conversations between
extensions and door-phones.

Calling from a doorphone
1. Press the bunon or :he
doorphone.

Any extension user can call the do&phones
within the same tenant by dialing the feature
number for “Doorphone Call (1 to 4).’ It is
possible to direct calls from doorphones to
specified extensions, intercom groups, pickup
groups or Attendant Consoles in “ExtensionDoorphone”, Doorphone Call Assignment.

You hear ping-pong tone.
. When the other party answers.
start conversation.

Answering a door-phone call
When your telephone set receives a doorphone
call and rings,

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
each doorphone can be determined by the
system programming in “Extension- DoorphoneS
Tenant.

1. Lift the handset.
Start conversation with the
caller from the doorphone.

Set the duration of the door opener in “ExtensionDoorphone”, Open Duration. When Open
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is
. unavailable.

Calling a dootphone
1. Lift the handset.

Programming
2. After dialing the feature number
for “Doorphone Call (1 to 4),” dial
the doorphone number : 1 to 4.
After hearing confirmation tone
3, start conversation over the
specified doorphone.

Conditions
3. After concluding conversation,
’ replace the handset. ’
_

Only conversations are available for the
doorphone. The other functions such as Hold,
Transfer are all ineffective.
When a visitor presses the button on the
doorphone, he hears ping-pong tone twice, then
doorphone call ringing starts at the designated
extension.
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone call.

Opening the door
During a conversation over the doorphone
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

2. Dial “5.”

5-E-2

The door opens for the
specified duration.

3.00 External

Feature Access

Description

Operation

Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows
the extension user to gain access to the features
offered by the host PBX, or to receive CENTREX
service provided by the central office, such as
Call Waiting and so on.

Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
Waiting)
When a call arrives from another outside party
while in conversation with an outside party,

.-?I

1. Press the hookswitch for
approximately one half second
and release.

Programming

g-D-6.03 1O-c-: 0.00

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Feature Access.”

External Feature Access

“Group-TrunkGroup (l/2)“,

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

System Programming

“System-NumberingPlan (3/g)“,

You hear call waiting tone.

External Feature Access such as Call Waiting is
effective only in 1 :l conversation with an outside
pafly.

9-E-1.Ol 10-C-t4.00

Hook Switch flash Time

g-E-1.021O-C-?
5.00
“Group-TrunkGroup (2/2)‘,
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signa
. Conditions

Finishing the conversation with the second party
and starting the conversation with the first party
again

External Feature Access is ineffective when
“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash hme is
assigned to “None.”

1. Press the hookswitch for
approximately one half second
and release.

The first party is held. Start
conversation with the second
party.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Feature Access.”

“System-System Timer”, External First Digit
Time-Out.
“System-System Timer”, External Interdigit
Time-Out.
“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction
Guard Tme-Out.

5-E-3

Start conversation with the first
party.

F. Paging

Features

1 .OO Paging
1.01 Paging

All Extensions

Description

Conditions

Paging All Extensions allows any extension user
to perform paging through the built-in speakers of
all PITS telephones that can receive paging.

Single Line telephone (SLT’s) cannot be paged.
If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are
being paged by another page, busy tone is
returned to the new paging performer. If any of
the extensions is not being paged, paging is
executed.

The Class of Service of the user’s extension
determines the extensions that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access and also if they belong to the same
tenant as the user’s extension.
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for further
information about paging groups.

Automatic Callback feature does not function
during paging operation.
Refer to Section 5-A-4.01 “Automatic CallbackTrunk” for further information.

To page all extensions, dial the feature number
for “Station Paging” and “0.”
To answer paging, dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”

When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access within the same tenant, the performer
hears reorder tone.

Programming

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SPPHONES of on-hook PITS sets.
The PlTSs actuated by paging send confirmation
tone and are ready to be paged.

System Programming
“System-Class of Service (2/2)“,
Station Paging Access
“System-Numbering
Plan (319)“.
Station Paging
Station Paging Answer

Reference
Dumb

9-D-4.02 lOhI
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

5-F-l

Operation
Performing

Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions

Paging All Extensions

During a conversation
outside party

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and dial “0.”

1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
l

After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.

with an extension or an

The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
‘Station Paging” and dial “0.”

3. After paging, replace the handset.

1
idi

Answering Paging All Extensions when PlTSs are

paged
1. Lift the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 3.

3. Start paging.

.._

4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset.
2. Dial the feature,number for
“Station Paging Answer.”

k!u

-.’

After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

5-F-2

The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.
..

1.02 Group

Paging

Description

Conditions

Group Paging provides paging to a group of
extensions specified from eight paging groups
through the built-in speakers of their PITSs.

Single Line Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.
If the designated paging group is being paged by
another page, busy tone is returned to the new
paging performer.

However, he can page within the range not
overlapping the preset paging range.
For instance, when paging is being done to group
1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
paging.

To execute Group Paging, dial the feature
number for “Station Paging” and paging group
specifying number.
To answer paging, dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”

Automatic Callback feature does not function
during paging operation.
When there is no paging group allowed to
receive paging in “System-Class of Service”,
Station Paging Access, the performer hears
reorder tone.

Programming
System Programming

Re
v-r

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SPPHONES of on-hook PITS sets.
The PlTSs actuated by paging send confirmation
tone and then are ready to be paged.

“System-Classof Service (2/2)“, 9-D-4.02
Station PagingAccess
“System-NumberingPlan (3/g)“, 9-O-6.03
Station Paging
Station PagingAnswer

5-F-3

Operation
pf--:;~l:;
F-l

,srcsJ::

‘.

T:s-sierrir_=

Paging

DL;ng a conversation
oL:side pay

L,t; the handset.

with an extension

or an

1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second

and release.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging.”

The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Dial the paging group number : 1
to 8.

Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and paging
group number : 1 to 8.

. After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.

4. After paging, replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 3.

Start paging.

Answering Group Paging when PIT% are paged
1. Lift the handset.

When an extension answers,
replace the handset.
. The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.
..

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”
l

2 call using Group Paging

After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

5-F-4

1.03 Paging

External

Pagers

Description

Conditions

Allows the extension users to perform paging
through the external pager(s) belonging to the

If the designated pager is being used, busy tone
is returned to the paging performer.

same tenant.
If two external pagers are available in the same
tenant, two methods are available: one is to page
by designating one external pager, and the other
is to page using two pagers.

If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are
being used, it is not possible to page using two
pagers. Busy tone is returned to the user.
If external pagers are not assigned by system
programming, reorder tone sounds when paging.

To execute this function, dial the feature number
for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,
dial the feature number for ‘External Paging
Answer.”

The followings show the paging priorities:
(1) Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Console
(2) TAFAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station )
(Refer to Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.” )
(3) Paging External Pagers from an extension
(this function)
(4) BGM through External Pager

Even if an external pager is connected to the
system, Paging External Pagers does not
operate unless ‘System-Operation”, External
Paging 1, 2 is assigned to “Yes”.
If Tenant Service is available, it is possible to
attach each external pager to a tenant in “lrunkPager & Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant.

Confirmation tone from external pagers is
selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone.
Programming
System Programming

Reference
VT
Dumb

*System-Operation (l/S)“,
9-D-l.Ol 1O-C-4.00
External Paging 1.2
9-D-4.02 104-8.00
‘System-Class of -rice (2/2)“,
External Paging
‘System-Numbering Plan (SB)“, ~&343+X 10-G10.00
External Paging
External Paging Answer
9.00
‘Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 1O-C-1
External Pager-Tenant
External Pager-Tone

5-F-5

Operation
-‘a”s’f’;

Performing Paging External Pagers

3urinc
o;ltsi&

1. Lift the handset

ng a call using Paging External Pagers
3 conversation
party

with an extension

or an

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second
and release.

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging.”

The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Dial the number for specifying an
external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging” and external
pager specifying number : 0, 1
or 2.

0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2
1: specifies external pager 1
2: specifies external pager 2
l

0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2
1: specifies external pager 1
2: specifies external pager 2

After you hear confirmation tone
3, start paging through the
external pager(s).

. You hear confirmation tone 3.
Start paging.

4. After paging, replace the
handset.

When an extension answers,
replace the handset.

Answering during external paging
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging Answer.”

3. Dial the number of the external
pager: 1 or 2.
. After you hear confirmation tone
3, talk to the caller who made
the page.

5-F-6

The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

1.04 Paging

All Extensions

External

and

Pagers

Description

3. After paging, replace the handset.

Paging All Extensior: 2-c Ev?nal Pagers offers
both Paging All Extensions and Paging External
Pagers at the same tire It provides paging
through the preprogrammed external pagers and
the built-in speakers in PlTSs of the extensions
within the range of the tenant that the user
belongs to.
The user’s “System-Class of Service”, Station
Paging Access” determines the paging groups of
the extensions that can receive paging and also
External Paging determines the external pagers
that can receive paging.

Answering Paging All Extensions and External
1. Lift the handset.

Programming

SystemProgramming

v-r

“System-Classof Service (2/2)“, 9-D-4.02
Station Paging ACXXSS
External Paging 1,2
‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.03
External Paging
Station Paging
External Paging Answer
Station Paging Answer

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer,” or the
feature number for “External
Paging Answer” and the number
of the external pager : 1 or 2.
After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

Refer to Section 5-F-l .Ol “Paging All Extensions”
and Section 5-F-l .03 “Paging External Pagers.”

The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Operation
Performing Paging All Extensi@@and External
Pagers

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” or the feature
number for “External Paging,”
then dial U*.”

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” or the feature
number for “External Paging,”
then dial “*.”

You hear confirmation tone 3.

3. Start paging.

After hearing confirmation tone
3. start paging.

4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset.
l

5-F-7

The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

:i,:::

Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
and External Pagers

Conditions

‘:.

2.00 Background Music (BGM)
through External Pager
Description

Programming

The system can provide up to two external music
sources. The music source can be broadcast as
background music (BGM) through external
pagers.

System Programs:-c

--,,“““‘z,/

“System-Operation(1!3’ExternalPaging 1.2
External Music Source : ,2

9-D-l .Ol[ 1O-C-4.00

“System-Numbering Plar ‘8/g)“. : 9-D-6.0810-C-10.00
BGM Through Exten?a Pag,T,

Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the
Operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user)
in the same tenant that the external pagers and
external music equipment belong to.

9-F-2.00

“Trunk-Pager8 Music ScLrce”,
External Pager-Tenart
External Pager-BGM
Music Source-Tenant
Music Source-For Use

To start and stop this function, use the same
feature number for “BGM Through External
Paging.”
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on
stops BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM
is off.

’

10-c-19.00

1
I

1O-c-20.00

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, it is possible to
attach each external music equipment and
external pager to a tenant by using “Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant and
Music Source-Tenant.

To activate this feature, external music
equipment and an external pager should be
. connected to the system, and assign “SystemOperation”, External Music Source 1, 2 and
External Paging 1, 2 to “Yes” by the system
programming.

This function is effective only when an external
pager and an external music equipment are
connected and programming has been
completed. Otherwise, the user hears reorder
tone after executing the operation to activate this
function.

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerBGM should be assigned to “Yes” to use this
function. This assignment can be done to each
external pager.
Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold
& BGM.” This assignment can be done to each
external musicequipment.

5-F-8

Operation
Turning BGM on when BGM is off
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM
Through External Paging.”

2. Dial the feature number for ‘BGM
Through External Paging.”
l

After you hear confirmation
tone 2, BGM sounds from the
external pager(s).

After you hear confirmation
tone 2, BGM from the external
pager(s) stops.

3. Replace the handset.

5-F-9

G. Other Features
1 .OO Night Service
1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Description

Conditions

Allows any extension user in the system to
answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Answer l-or 2.”

To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select ‘MT’ for YrunkCO Line” Night Answer Point assignment.
For further information about remote
administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00
System Administration from a Remote Location.”

To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. AtI CO lines belong to this trunk group
are covered by this assignment.

if tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and
2) can have unique Night Service arrangement
individually.
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External PagerTenant.
The extension user cannot answer the UNA call
ringing at an external pager in the diierent
tenant.

External pager must be connected to the system
beforehand.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
the system.
To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial
the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the
. feature number for.“Night Answer 2.”
For further information about external pager
assignment, refer to Section 5-F-l .03 “Paging
External Pagers.”

Operation
Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager.

u
m

An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.
,

Ilr

1. Lift the handset.

Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4
L

Programming

‘-: ~.

2. If a call is ringing at external
pager 1: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 1.”

System Programming

“Group-TrunkGroup (l/2)“,

if a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature number
for “Night Answer 2.”

Incoming Mode (Night)
‘Trunk-CO Line”,
Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering
Plan (3/9)
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2

3. Talk to the caller.

5-G-1

1.02

Flexible

Night Service

Description

Operation

Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1
(Attendant Console or extension user) to change
the assigned night answer destination on a CO
4ine basis by dialing the feature number for
“Flexible Night Service.”

Changing a night answer desznation to an
extension
1. Lift the handset.

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO
lines belong to this trunk group are covered by
this assignment.
If FIXED is selected for above setting, the
assigned night answer destination can not be
changed by the Operator 1.

2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service 72”
(default) and CO physical number
and destination extension number.
You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same.

3. Replace the handset.

The difference is:
Flexible

FiXed

The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the night
answer destination.
A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

Changing a night answer destination to the remote
maintenance port
1. Lift the handset.
..

2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service 72”
(default) and CO physical number
and FDN for remote.

Programmlng
SystemProsramming

Reference
VT
Dumb

SE-l.01 10-C-14.00
i..,:.“Group-TrunkGroup (l/2)“,
IncomingMC& (Night)
9-F-1.00 lOG18.00
“Trunk-COtine”,
Night Answer Point
‘System-NumberingPlan (8/9)‘, 9-D-6.0810-C-10.00
Flexible Night Service

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

3. Replace the handset.

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1.

5-G-2
(30393)

1.03 Switching
Changing a night answer destination
(Universal Night Answer)

Mode

Description

to tn UNA

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or

1. Lift the handset.

2. -Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service 72”
(default) and CO physical number,
* and 1 for external pager 1 or *
and 2 for external pager 2.
l

of Day/Night

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.
To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “SystemOperation (313)”Night Service to ‘Auto’ and
assign desired mode switching time to ‘Auto
Start Ttme” on a per day of the week basis.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set ‘SystemOperation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”

The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is
established, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

3. Replace the handset.

If tenant service is employed, night se&e
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
In this case, the assignment in ‘SystemOperation (3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment in ‘System-Tenant” is applied to
Tenant 2.
Programming
Reference
VT
DlJllIb

System Rogramming

‘System-Operation(a/3)‘,

9-D-l .03 1O-G4.00

Night Service

Auto Start Time
9-D-2.00 1W-5.00

‘System-Tenant”.
Night Service (Tenant
Auto Start Time
‘System-Numbering
Plan
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual
Set
Night Service Manual
ChllCel

5-G-3
(30393)

2)
(&9)“,

Mode
Mode

9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00

Changing from Auto mode to Manual mode

Conditions

1. lift the handset.

If Auto Stati Time on a certain day is not
assigned, the current mode is continued until a
new start time is encountered.
If the Start lime for Day mode and Night mode
on the same day are set identically, the current
mode is continued.

2. Dial the feature number for “Night
Service Manual Mode Set.”

If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
at all. the current mode is continued. In other
words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
then Night Mode is continued.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

3. Replace the handset.

Operation
Changing Day mode to Night mode
Changing from Manual mode to Auto mode

1. Lii the handset.

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set.”

2. Dial the feature number for “Night
Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

3. Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
.L

3. Replace the handset.

Changing Night mode to Day mode
Lift the handset.

.Y--

%..

Dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Cancel.”
l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.

Replace the handset.

5-G-4

2.00

Account

Code Entry

Description

Operation

Acsount Code Entry is usec to associate an
account code with incoming and outgoing CO

Entering an account code when calling an
outside party in the Forced mode

Saik.

1. Lift the handset.

The account code is appended to the SMDR call
record and can be used later for accounting and
billing purposes.
The account code can include up to 10 digits.
The validity of the entered account code is not
checked by the system.
Entry of account code may be optional, or the
extension user may be forced to enter the
account code.

2. Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

3. Dial the feature number for

In the forced mode, the account code must be
entered before making an outgoing CO call.
In the option mode, enter the account code, if
necessary.

“Account Code.”
Youhear dial tone 2.

4. Dial the account code.

Programming
Reference
VT
1 Dumb
I

Up to 10 digits can be dialed as
an account code.

#
•l

Conditions

You hear no tone.

-i

System Programming

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

5. Dial ,#.”
l

You hear dial tone 1.
.

6. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

In the option mode, it is possible to dial an
account code even after the conversation before
hanging up.
Only numerical characters of “0 to 9” can be
dialed as account codes.
Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds
alarm tone.
Be sure to dial I‘#”after dialing a code, since “#I”
delimits the code.
If you use a rotary telephone, dial “99” instead of
W to delimit the code.
You cannot use “99” and tiat ends with ‘9” as
account codes by the rotary telephone.

5-G-5

Entering an account code after calling an outside
party or atier receiving a call from an outside
party in the Option mode

Entering an account code when receiving a call
from an outside party in the Forced mode
1. Lift the handset.

While having a conversation
Talk to the other party.

2. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Account Code.”

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Dial the feature number for
“Account Code.”
l

1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.

You hear dial tone 2.

3. Dial the account code.

You hear dial tone 2.

Maximum digits for an account
code is 10.

4. Dial the account code.
l

Maximum digits for an account
code is 10.

4. Dial ,#..
l

5. Dial “#.”
l

Start conversation again.

Correcting an error after dialing a wrong account
code (not available with rotary type SLT
telephones)
1. Dial “*.”
l

You hear dial tone 2.

2. Dial the correct account code.
‘*

3. Dial “#.”

5-G-6

3.00 Timed Reminder
Clock)

(Alarm

Description

(5) Tone Pattern
Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:

The extension user can use his or her telephone
as an atarm clock.
When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2
minutes at the programmed time.
Wake-up Call
By going off-hook, the extension user can hear
the wake-up message, lf it has been recorded
beforehand.
The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent
tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up
message.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with
OGM (wake-up call).“)

5.0 set W

Operation
Setting limed Reminder
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for limed
Reminder set * 51” (default).

This feature can be set to operate only once or
everyday at a specified time.
Programming

3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to
12.

’~1

System-NumberingPlan (619), 9-D-6.06 10-G10.00
4. Dial “minute” withtwo digits: 00 to
59.

Conditions
(1) What if the extension is busy or off-hook at
the programmed time?

5. Dial ‘0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m.
.--4_ ,...

Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes
on-hook.
(2) What if a call comes in when alarm tone is
ringing?
The caller hears busy tone.

I’

‘I

6. Dial “0” for iimes Reminder-one
time, or dial ‘1” for Ttmed
Reminder-every day.
9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(3) Remote limed Reminder
This feature can also be set by the Operator 1
or 2 to any extension.
(See Section 4-I-14.00 and Section
6-J-13.00.)

7. Replace the handset.

(4) Newly programmed time overrides the aid
one.
Only the latest setting is valid at a single
extension whether it was set by the extension
itself or by the operator.
5-G-7
(40993)

Canceling the limed

Reminder Assignment

1. Lift the handset.

Answering alarm tone
When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.
1. Lift the handset.
.

2. Dial the feature number for
Tmed Reminder Cancel Y6’
(default).
l

Alarm tone stops and you hear a
wake-up message or BGM, or
intermittent tone (dial tone 2):
Replace the handset.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then diil tone 1 or 3 or 4.
l

3. Replace the handset.

Thii is determined by the system
programming.
Refer to Section 3-F-13.00 “Jimed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).”

(Supplement)
Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following
timing:
-w-

5-G-8
(40993)

I+

1.osec-j

4.00 Data Line Security
Description

Operation

Used to maintain Ihe co.mm~n~~a:.~r. ore-r:,- by
prohibiting various tones such as ‘3a*! Ww13
tone or Held Call Reminder from sounding at the
extension in data communication mode. I: aiso
prohibits other extensions from executing
overriding functions such as Busy Override.

Setting Data Line Security
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data
Line Security Set.”

To assign Data Line Security, assign “ExtensionStation” Data Line Security to “Yes.”

You can set and cancel this function by dialing
the feature numbers for “Data Line Security Set”
and “Data Line Security Cancel.”

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

Programming
System Programming

Reference
Dumb
VT
Canceling

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
Data Line Security Set
Data Line Security Cancel
9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
“Extension-Station (l/3)”
Data Line Security

Data Line Security
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data

Conditions

Line Security Cancel.”

Assigning this function always offers the
extension user Privacy mode unless Privacy
Release is executed.

If there is a conversation between the extension
setting Data Line Security and the extension not
setting it, Data Line Security is applied to the

You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

both extensions.

5-G-9

5.00

Absent

Message

Capability
The user cannoi set multiple -.essages
same time.

Descrt=t:or:

F -c-id--5

ic &.?Z
I
L-- --’ii -* When incoming call is from inside
party:

1. Title field
The display in this area varies with the zode
of the console.
There are 10 different modes.
2. Date & time field
Current year, month, date and time are
displayed in this field

LOOP-l
Ext.100
Betty
Incoming
i

3. Application field
In conjunction with the function keys, 1 C
screens are available.

- -LOOP key number
- -Extension number calling
- -Extension name;
- -Type of%all
(blinking display)

When incoming call is from outside
party:
- -LOOP key number
- -Trunk group number
- -Trunk group name
- -Type of call
(blinking display)

4. Input / output field
This field consists of the following coturns.
1

Input
:
SRC:
DES:
Message:

6. Function field
Displays the functions of the Fl through F8 keys.

6-C-l

Classification
--e

of the screens

screen will change depending

on the function key pressed.

(’ LOOP key and
LTrunk Group ]T[T[

Busy Lamp Field
screen

Busy Lamp Field
F3

Speed Dial
screen

t-n

I Speed Dial
F4

(E$;;ion

Directory)

I Extension Directory

nF5-

Call Park System
screen

Call Park
F7

t-n\

Help screen

[

Help screen

Help
F8
n
Function Select

Extension manage
.

n F3

Pickup G. manage
.

~->

CO Manage
.

n F5

lllj

Attendant Manage
.

n I=7
Help

6-C-2

)

2.00 LOOP Key and Trunk Group
Screen

r
----A

,,,_,_I,_-------------

_---_-------C1~~2~03~~c-:3C5~~~07~06@~~10~11~12~13~:~~~jCi16~
c
------------A

_.
I

..
!

Description
- -Extension number
- -Extension name

This screen displays the status of the LOOP keys
and trunk groups.
. Also displays the number of waiting calls and
overflowed calls.

- -Status of the extension

Conditions

)

The following explains the use of the various
areas of the screen.

The followings are example displays of the LOOP
key field about extension, trunk and paging.

(1) Wait call
Number of the calls that cannot arrive at any
LOOP keys. These calls are put in the queue
when all the six LOOP keys are in use.

Ext. 2001
Tony
&Of T=02 0
Calling
-7

(2) Overflow
Number of the calls remaining in the queue
when “System-System Timer” Attendant
Overflow Time has expired.

- -Extension number *
- - Extension name
- -Servfcg,cfass (01 to 32), Toll
restrictTon level (01 to 16), Account
-[ code (0: Option, F: Forced)
t-Status of the extension

* In case “Call Forwarding” or “Calf Hunting,”
indicated with “ * .”

(3) LOOP key area
Displays the status of calls on individual LOOP
key by displaying SRC (source) and DES
(destination).
The status of the individual LOOP key is
displayed with four items as illustrated in the
following examples.

- - -Trunk group number
- - -Trunk name.
- - -Toll restriction level (01 to 16)
- - -Status of the trunk

6-C-3

(4) Trunk Group area
Trunk group number, trunk group name (Up to
10 a!phanumeric characters) and trunk group
status are displayed in the trunk group area.
Dispiay for trunk group status is as follows.

G. Page 1

- - -Type z: aaging *

Paging

- - -Status

I:
m:

* G. page x
-&

Grouo paging

Group paging all

to8

G. page All

:
E. page x
-II. 1 or2

(5) When the ATT-FWD switch is set to ON, the
ATT-FWD indicator flashes.
The ATT-FWD indicator is not lit when the
switch is set to OFF.

External paging

E. page All

External paging all

All page

Group paging all
and External paging all

AI-l-1

- -Attendant

Talk

- -Status of attendant console

console number

- - - Doorphone

number

- - - Status of doorphone

The LOOP key number currently in use is displayed in reverse-video.

6-C-4

Function
l

field

Types of function fields
Following two types of function fields are available for operation in LOOP key am
Trunk Group screen.
Selection of function fields
Function field display changes by every pressing of the F8 key (function select).

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

LOOP Mode
Change

Busy Lamp
Field

Speed
Dial

Extension
Directory

Call Park

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

LOOP Mode
Change

Extension
Manage

Pickup G.
Manage

co
Manage

Attendant
Manage

(6)

(7:

@I---

Help

Function
Select

II\
\. I

!8)

Help

Function
Select

6-C-5

(6)

y.-....

The following flow charts show the options a\z..,abie i-c.n sazr _. c;)or . cmc.
Advance to your desired screen by pressing a correqzcx’~~
;_ - c- or, L YY

Changing

.
n F2

Speed Dial
screen

n F3

@zG)

n F4

(F)

n F5

Help screen

lllj

(Attendant Manage)

(Call Park)
F7

(CO manage)

(Extension Directory)

(Pickup G. Manage)

(Speed Dial)

lllj

---+

(Extension Manage)

(Busy Lamp Field)

n F5

LOOP Mode

(LOOP Mode Change)

n F3

Changing

LOOP Mode

n F7

(Help)

+
-a
(Function Select)

Field 2

(Function Select)

6-C-6

I=8

(Helpscreen)

3.00 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen

Jan 1. ‘99 FRI 12:00 Ah,
(lb

1)
I

Busy Lamp Field
0:

1000
/--J

idle

n : Busy

1001

1002 j-J

1010
1011

q
q

(1)

(2)

(3)

LOOP
& TRG

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

No./Name
Change

PGM Mode
Entry

Description
This screen is available both for monitoringJhe
status (idle or Busy) of extensions and for placing
inter office calling.
The symbols below are used to indicate the
current extension status.
0 : Idle
: Busy

n
Conditions

at .-

.%.* For monitoring the extension status, or placing
Inter Office Calling by this screen, the extension
numbers must have been registered in this
screen beforehand. For registration of extension
numbers, refer to Function Field 4 described
succeedingly.
Extension names do not appear when they are
not assigned in LOCAL mode. Refer to Section
13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”
l

For an extension to be considered busy, all
PDNs buttons are in use.
For making Inter Office Call by this screen, see
Section 6-D-3.03 “Inter Office Calling by BLF
Screen.”

6-C-7

.. .*

WFunction
Select

Function
l

fields

Types of function fields
Following five types of function fields are avaiiable for operatic? in the Busy Lamp
Field screen.

(1)

(2)

(3)

LOOP
& TRG

(1)

(2)

(3)

(41

(5)

(6)

(7)

!8)

No./Name
Change

P G M Mode
Entry

Function
Select

(6)

(7)

Call

Function
S&Ct

(7)

!8)

LOOP
& TRG

(4)

f---

(5)

(1)

LOOP
& TRG

(3)

(4)

Speed
Dial

Extension
Directory

(5)

(6)

Help

Call P &

.. Function
Select

41)

(2)

(3)

LOOP

& TRG

Page

(1)

(2)

(4)

/c\

(6)

@, *:.

!a)

PGM Mode
Exit

Function
Select

(6)

(7)

!8)

Clear

Memory

Function
Select

LOOP
& TRG

(4)

(5)

6-C-8

Switching of function fields
The following flow chart shows how to move from field to field.

r _------

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L

I
n

(Program Mode Entry)

(Function Select)

-1

4
El

I II
n
I

Field 2

I
I
I

I
F8

(Function Select)

m
n F7

l- ---;-----

I
I

(Function ISelect)i

(Program Mode Exit)

I
F8

r.
Press the F8 key for field
switching
(Function Select) !*

(Function Select)
-

----A---

BLF Program mode:
Programming of BLF screen.

BLF Monitor Mode:
Monitoring the status of
extension, or making an
extension call

6-C-9

This function field is available for advancing to the next screen or returning to the
previous screen in the Busy Lamp Field screen. You can see the extension name
screen by pressing the F6 key at extension number screen, Busy Lamp Field
program mode is obtained by pressing the F7 key.

;q-

(,,,,,,,)

(LOOP & TRG)

Advancing to next screen

(Next Page)
n

Returning to previous screen

(Previous. Page)

n _I__j
F6

(NoJName

Ext. Name column

Change)

n--

Field 4

(BLF Program mode)

(PGM Mode Entry)
-._.

(Function Select)

Program Mode Entry function (F7) appears only when the extension number column
is displayed.
Press the F6 key if required to switch screens to extension name column.

6-C-l 0

cv:-.
_^I?L>
-- ,.; ‘,.Xtl,’

field is available

---

for Inter Office-Calling.

!
,

i i-,c2

IIn
i Fl

(LOOP

& TRG)
Move the cursor onto the desired
Inter Office Calling.

) Calling

the extension

(Call)
n

(Function

Select)

This function field is available for concluding
the Busy Lamp Field screen
moving to the screen corresponding
to the selected function key.

yp-,(LOOP

(,,,,,,I
& TRG))

m
(Speed

,-a

[

;E;Dial

Dial)

pJ-(y-j
(Extension

Directory)

~-(-XL--)
V-W
1 Field 1 1
(Function

Select)

]

and

selected

extension

by the cursor.

for

Pressing the F7 key (PGM Mode Entry) in Field 1 introduces
iunction field appears in the Busy Lamp Field program mode.

this field.

This field is available for advancing to next screen or returning
the Busy Lamp Field program mode.

to previous

That is, this
screen in

j Field 4
r

(LOOP

& TRG))

n f=2

Advancing

to the next BLF Screen

Returning

to previous

(Next Page)

(Previous
n

BLF Screen

Page)

(Exiting

BLF Program

mode,

returning

to field 1 screen.)

(PGM Mode Exit)
i

f F8

(Function

Field 5

(Programming

BLF)

Select)

Speed

Dial

F
Speed

Dial

Name

Matsushita
Panasonic

.:.. t

(2) -

U)LOOP
& TRG

(4) -

(3)-

Next
Page
No.

: Speed

Dial

code

Function

Description
Allows the attendant to make a call using speed
dial code by selecting the name programmed
in the
attendant console LOCAL mode.

Conditions
l

Speed dial names are listed in alphabetical

::-4

cd-

order.

Storing of speed dial name will be performed in
attendant console LOCAL mode.
For further details, refer to Section 13-C “Speed
Dial Dictionary Mode.”
For making a call using this screen,
6-D-2.01 “Speed Dialing-System.”

field

Types of function fields
Two types of functian fields, Field 1 and Field 2,
shown below are available to operate Speed
Dial screen.
Switching of function Fields.
”
To switch the two function fields, press the F8
key (function select).

-4. ‘~’
refer to Section

(1)
LOOP
8. TRG

c-4
Next
Page

(3)
Previous
Page

(6)

(4)

(7)

Call

WFunction
Select

(1)
LOOP
& TRG

(2)
Busy

Lamp
Field

(3)

(4)
Extension
Directory

6-C-l 5

(5)
Call
Park

(6:

(7)
Help

(‘3)
Function
Select

This funciton field is available for making a za:I thrcign
Speed Dial screen.
!f there are multiple speed dial screens. :t Is tised !s advance to the next screen
to return to the previous screen.

1 Field 1 1

’
(LOOP

& TRG)

(-EF--)

Advance to the next Speed Dial screen.
) No change if only one screen.

(Next Page)
Return to previous Speed Dial screen.
’ No change if only one screen.
(Previous

Page)

#-a
cl-)

(1)

For Speed Dial calling, move the cursor to the
desired speed dial code.

(+-+)
) Perform

Speed

Dial on the cursor position.

(Call)

(Function

Select)

This funciton field is available for exiting Speed Dial screen,
other screens as selected by the function keys.

(Busy Lamp Field)

(Extension

Directory)

(Help)
1 Field 1 1
(Function

Select)

6-C-l 6

and moving

to the

5.00

Extension

Directory

Screen

Extension

Directory

Jan

Extension

Name

Idle

II:

Department

1. ‘99 FRI

12:00

Busy
No.

Betty

Account

2000

Jack

Sales

1000=

Extension

Bti

Name

Department

No.

(lfl)
BLF

(2) -

(1)LOOP
& TRG

(3)-

(5)-

(4) -

(6)-

(7)

@IFunction
Select

Description
For calling, refer to Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office
Calling by Extension Directory Screen.”

The attendant can make the extension call by
selecting desired extension name in this screen.
. It is available to search an extension number by
specifying it’s name and department.
It is also available to monitor the current extensions status as follows.

: Idle

: Busy

On this screen, in the upper left corner
shows the boundary of the initial letter of the first
and last entries.
Function

Conditions

For displaying contents of extension directory on
the screen, the information
must be entered in
attendant console LOCAL mode beforehand.
See Section 13-8 “Extension Directory Mode.”
The extension names are listed in alphabetical
order.

(2)

(1)
LOOP
& TRG

(3)
Previous
Page

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

Call

Function
Select

(7)

(8)

Help

Function
Select

This function field is available for advancing
to the next screen or returning
previous screen, when there are a number of extension directory screens.
Also, this field is available for making Inter Office Call.

to the

I
I
1 Field 1 1
Fl
n
(LOOP

)
& TRG)

Advance to next Extension Directory
) No change if only one screen.

n
(Next Page)
F3
n
(Previous

Page)

For extension
to be called.

(1)

) Call the extension

4rl

Select)
this screen

Field 2

and moving

to the screens

Field 1
111)

at the cursor

(Call)

c II FZ?k Svstem

Jan

1. ‘99 FRI

12:OO

AM
I

No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

Parked

Ext.

1000

No.
11
32
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

(Jack)

(2)

Parking

Parked
TRG

ATT#l

01 (DDDOl)

(3)-

Function

Description
T+is screen displays extensions and CO calls
. pzrked in the call park area in the system, as well
2s retrieving the parked calls.

field

Types of function field.
Two types of function fields, Function Field 1
and Function Field 2 shown below are available
to operate Call Park System screbn. _

Conditions
Fzr retrieving a parked call, refer to Section
3.30 -Call Park-System.”

.-.1

* Switching of function fields.
To switch the two function field&
key (function select).

6-F-

press the .F8

(1)

----I

I \

(3)

LOOP
& TRG

I \
Park

Retrieve
’

Fgicl

(8).

This function

field is available

for retreivi-g

the parked

calls.

LOOP & TRG
screen

(LOOP

& TRG)

Move the cursor to
retrieve a parked call.
(f)

(v)

k-4

Retrieve a parked
extension or CO call
at the cursor position.

tm-

(Park Retrieve)

1
(Function

Field 2

]

Se!act)

This function field is available for concluding this screen
screens depending
on the function key pressed.

and moving

to other

(LOOP

& TRGi

BLF screen

(Busy L&i?ip Field)

1 Speed

(Speed

Dial)
t Extension

(Extension

Directory)

Wp)
(Function

Dial screen

Select)

6-C-20

Directory I
screen

Help screen

J
I

7.00

Extension

Management

Screen

Extension
4

4
,

Manaaemen
: FWD,
2: DN;,

Jan
&-,:

1. ‘99 FRI

1200
(l/l

Lock

A!:!
1)

.
-(l)LOOP
& TRG

(2) Next
Page

(3)

(4) -

(5)-

(6)

(7)
NoJName
Change

Legend

@IFunction
Select

: FWD set
X : DND set
h
: Station lock set
Description

Conditions

Enables the attendant to monitor the status of
extensions about following three features :

Extension number is displayed
of extension directory number.

l
l
l

Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb
Electronic Station Lock

The attendant can assign or cancel those features
to/from the extension userjrefer
to Section 6-J5.00 “Remote Station Feature Control”) and make
Inter-Office call (refer to Section 6-D-3.04 “Inter
Office Calling by Extension Management
Screen”).

6-C-21

in ascending
.

order

Function
l

field

Types of function fields
Following four types of function
Management
screen.

fields are available

Switching of function fields
For switching between the four function

(1)
LOOP
8 TRG

(2)

(3)
Pickup
Manage

(4)

(5)

co
Manage

Attendant
Manage

6-C-22

(6)

(7)

Help

Function
Select

This function field is available for advancing
to the next screen or returning to the
previous screen when there are multiple extension management
screens, and
changing the display from extension number to extension
name.

(LOOP

& TRG)

-a

In
.n
(Next

Page)

_~_j

(Previous

Page)

F7
(No-/Name

I
n

(Function

Move to the next Extension Management
No change if only one screen.
Returning
to the previous Extension
screen.
No change if only one screen.

Change)

~~?r~~?rkrnber
(Example)

llllj
Select)

6-C-23

screen.

Management

Changing
Extension
(Example)

to
Name

This function field is available
Do Not Disturb and Electronic

for cancelirg
Call Forwarding,
Station Lock

-n

(LOOP

and setting/canceling

[TEj-)

w
& TRG)

Move the cursor to the extension
be set or reset.

-al

Select Setting/Canceling.

(Select)
Storing the data.

F7-

-al

(Memory)

-n

(Function

This function
Management

field is available
screen.
1

Select)

for making

Field 1

inter Office Call through

the Extension

1
m.n’..

Fl
n
(LOOP

-[F)
& TRG)

(; 1

0)
n

b--1

(Call)

(Function

Seiect!

6-C-24

l-4
Execute

Inter Office Calling

selected

extension.

for the

Help screen

(Help)
pq

(Function

Select)

6-C-25

8.00

Pickup

Group

Management

Screen

Pick
CT

:rGroup

StatioTLock

~~~~~

4.
-VI-

(2) -

(3)-

(4) -

(5)-

N-

(7)

Select

Memory

@IFunction
Select

Legend
O-r, : Group station
Description

Function

This screen is used for monitoring whether the
pickup groups are group-locked
or not.
Also used for setting/canceling
group station lock
for individual pickup group.
Refer to Section 6-J-5.00 “Remote Station
Feature Control” for further information.

Conditions
Ail extensions in the same pickup group
to Group Station Lock are locked.

assigned

lock is assigned

field

Types of function fields
Two types of function fields, Field 1 and Field
2, shown below are available to operate Pickup
Group Management
Screen.
Switching of function Fields.
To switch the two function fields, press the F8
key (function select).
--*;+a.

(6)

(2)

- (‘)T
LOOP
& TRG

(1)

(2)

LOOP
& TUG

Extension
Manage

Select

(7)
Memory

-la)Function
Select

(3)

(4)
CO

Manage

6-C-26

(5)
Attendant
Manage

(6)

(7)
Help

(8)
Function
Select

Y- s function

field is available

for setting/canceling

Field 1

group

locking.

-E!l
Fi

(LOOP

LOOP & TRG
screen

& TRG)

Move the cursor to the position
set or cancelled group lock.

-al

Select setting/canceling

group

to be

lock.

(Select)

-II F7-

Store setting/canceling
data.

(Memory)

-al

(Function

Select)

This function field is available for concluding Pickup Group
and moving to other screens as selected by function keys.

Management

screen,
..

piq

Fl
n
--__-)(T)
(LOOP & TFN3))-

-n

F2
(Extension

-al

-(EJ
Manage)
-[G)

(CO Manage)
--aI
F5
(Attendant
--n

-&iiEicJ
Manage)
->

(-1

P-W)

(Function

group

Select)

6-C-27

lock

9.00

CO Management

Screen

Management
0: Idle,

Ic0

ID b BLF
lOI!
1012
1013
1014
1013

1 TRG

No.

01
01
01
01
01

n
*

q
X

:
:
:
:
:

* : Ringing,
8 CO

(3)-

TRG No.
CO Name
CO Status
Night Answer

busy

access

busy

out

UNA
UNA

1
2

Ext.

1000

Answer

ctrl

(4) -

W-

(5)-

(7)

I+

Function
Select

: Physical number of CO line
: Busy Lamp Field
0:
Idle
n : Busy
*: Ringing
X : OUS/Fault
: Trunk group number (01 to 16)
: Name of trunk (Up to 10 alphanumeric
characters)
: Assigns status of CO access control or CO busy out
: Assigns call arrival destination
of CO line in the night service
(UNA 1, UNA 2, Extension
or RMT)

TRG No. & CO Name

ID 8 BLF
01

BBBB

busy

Stat&

Night

mode

Answer

out

Conditions

This screen is available
following functions.
co

Night

Description

:
CO ID
BLF

1OllO

Status

Legend

I
-

LOOP
& TRG

BBBB
ccccccc
DDDDD
AAA
zz1234.5

(2)

1. ‘99 FR’ ‘2:OO

X : OUS/Fault

Name

I
(I)-

: 63s~.

Jan

for setting/canceling

the

CO IDS are listed in ascending

For details about CO busy out and CO access
control, refer to Section 6-J-l 0.00 “CO Access
Control.”

out

access control
Night answer point

This screen also allows the attendant
the current CO line status.

order.

For details about Night Answer, refer to Section
6-J-l .Ol “Flexible Night Service.”

to confirm
6-C-28

Function
l

field

Types of the tunctioC :.e:ds
Following three types o: func:;on
ment screen.

ftelds are available

Switching of function fields.
For switching between three function
Select) key.

(1)

LOOP
& TRG

for operation

in CO Manage-

fields shown below, press the F8 (Function

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(8)

Function
Select

(1)

(5)

LOOP
& TRG

,7!
8’I

(6:
Select

Memory

WFunction
Select

This function field is available for advancing screen to the next screen or returning
to the previous screen, when there are multiple screens.

,->

(Previous

Advances to the next CO Management
No change if only one screen.
)

Returning to the previous CO Management
No change if only one screen.

Page)

6-C-29

screen.

_. 0 2;.
,.f

,or~ i +!c IS available for setting/canceling
v. , c ,.*,.- . 1 anri .-Nigh1 answer point.”
j

Field 2

“CO access

control.”

‘CO

I
LOOP & TRG
screen
Move the cursor to CO Status
column, Night Answer column
the CO ID to be set/canceled.
Select options
Answer.

for CO Status,

Store the selected

1
(Function

Select)

This function field is available for concluding
CO Management
moving to other screens as selected by function keys.
/I

(Extension

n
t

(Pickup

Manage)
(
G. Manage)
-

(Attendant

Manage)
-

U-W)

F8
n
(Function

Field 3

I
Select)
6-C-30

screen

and

]

data.

for

Night

10.00

Attendant

Management

Screen

Attendant

Jan

Manqement

coperaiton

-zPrgr~.~ma*

Data>

1 ‘91 FRI

REDIAL

CONF

E-E

G
(I)-------

LOOP
8 TRG

The programmable

(2) -

(3)-

(4) -

T
I

key arrangement

PI-----

matches

Select

the operation

(6)-

keyboard

(7)
Memory

as shown

PIFunction
Select

below.

Description

I
I

This screen is used to assign and monitor
various functions of thefttendant
console

the
itself.
7:. *_

Operation key click tone :
Determines
whether key click tone is heard or not
when pressing any key other than dial keys of the
operation keyboard.

Conditions
For details of the three functions in on this page, refer to the followings respectively.
Section
Section

6-G-6.00
6-G-2.00

Section

6-F-2.00

Concerning

Ringer on talking :
Determines whether ringer tone is heard or not
while in the conversation.

“Released Link Operation”
“Heavy Traffic Overflow
Transfer to Station”
“Automatic Hold”

All functions in or are effective if set to “Yes”, and ineffective
if set to “NO.”

Dial key click tone :
Determines
whether key click tone is heard or not
when pressing dial keys of the operation keyboard.
6-C-31

CProarammable

Ten function keys except One Touch are preassigned as default values, which can be changed
to other function keys. These keys are selected
by pressing the PF6 (select) key.

key>

There are 12 programmable
keys provided on the
attendant console.
It is possible to assgn me
keys to be any of the following 11 function keys:
AUTO. TRG, CALL-PARK,
TOLL-CHG.
ACCOUNT,
SERIAL, OHCA, CONF, REDIAL,
E-E, One Touch

The features assignable to One Touch key are
listed below. These functions are selected by
dialing the feature numbers, and other numbers
necessary, with up to eight digits.

Feature

Number

Other Number

Extension

directory

number

Operation

Call (Specific)

Operator

ARSILocal

CO Line Access

At least one digit

Needed

None
specifying

number:

1 or 2

Access

Trunk group specifying
at least one digit

number:

1 to 8 and

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

Trunk group specifying
at least one digit

number:

1 to 8 and

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Trunk group specifying
at least one digit

number:

1 to 8 and

Trunk Group 01-08

Doorphone
External
Station
External
Station
Message

Doorphone

Call (l-4)

Pager specifying

Paging

“0” or “*” or paging

Paging

Pager specifying

Pagiri@%nswer
Paging

number:

..
1 to 4

number:

0, 1 or 2

group

number:

numberzl

or 2..

1 to 8

None

Answer

Extension

Cancel

directory

number

Night Service Manual
Mode Set

None

Night Service Manual
Mode Cancel

None

Flexible

CO ID and pager specifying number: “1 or
*2, extension directory number or Remote

Night Service

(Continued)

6-C-32

Feature

Number

directory

number

Extension

directory

number

DND Set

Extension

directory

number

Remote

DND Cancel

Extension

directory

number

Remote

FWD Cancel

Extension

directory

number

Remote

FWD Cancel-One

Extension

directory

number

Busy Out Trunk

Trunk port physical

number

Unbusy

Trunk port physical

number

Resource

number:

1 to 3

Resource

number:

1 to 3, %l to *4

Station

Lock Set

Remote

Station

Lock Cancel

Remote

External

Time

None

Pager

Trunk

OGM Record

Function
l

OGM Playback

I
T*

field

Types of function fields
Following two types of function fields are
available for operation in Attendant
Management screen.
-G-y
-

Switchino of function fields
For switching between the function fields shown
below, press the F8 (Function Select) key.

(51.‘

(1)
LOOP
& TRG

(1)

(2)

(3)

LOOP
& TRG

Extension
Manage

Pickup
Manage

(4)
G.

Manage

6-C-33

(5)

This function field is available for concluding
Attendant
Management
screen and moving to
other screens as selected by function keys.

..a, .

-n

(LOOP

&‘TRG)

(Pickup

G. Manage)

F4
(
n
(CO Manage)

(““)

F7
U-W)

(Function

Select)
6-C-34

value at the cursor

11 .OO Help Screen
Description
This screen displays

the functions

of the fixed keys and programmable

keys.
Jan

Help

Feature

ALARM
ANSWER
CANCEL
HOLD
LOOP
MSG
NIGHT
PAGE
RELEASE
SPLIT

Displays
major/minor
alarm when the ALARM
LED is flashing/lit
Used to answer
incoming
calls in sequence.
Cancel
any key operation.
Place the current
call on hold.
Control
the source
or destination
of a call on a switch
loop.
Leave
a message
waiting
indication
at any extension.
Select
night (LED on) or day (LED off) mode.
Park the call, and make a voice announcement.
Release
a call: functions
as a hook switch.
Switch
between
the source
and destination
parties.

Input
SRC
DES.
Message
-

I
:

(2)

(1)
LOOP
8. TRG

(3)

Help
5 Keys

Jan

Help

Feature

Key
Change
the toll restriction
Place a CO call. Press

TOLL-CHG
TRG

;=lture
_^

Format

Command

Call by Name
and/or
Dfzartment.
Search
by Name an&o:
3epartment.

CALL
NAME!DEPT
SEARCH
NAMUDEPT

CALL
SEARCH

Input
SRC
DES
Message
-

i
:
:

(1)

(3)

LOOP
& TRG

(4)

:5)

5-C-36

8j-

‘--I-+

Function
Select

Function
l

field

Types of function fields
Following three types of function

il!
LOOP
& TRG

Busy

Lamp
Field

(4!
I
/ Exiensiz?
j 3i:eCtg’b
I

Speed
D;zi

(6)

(5)
Call

(7)

(8)
Functio::
Selec:

Park

(1)

(31.

LOOP
E TRG

Extension
Manage

7ickw
Xanage

Switching of function fields
For switching between the function
Select).

I
i mo
;v

fields shown

.k,hlanale

above,

(6)

(5)

(7:

Attendant
Manage

Functlc:!
Select

press the F8 key (Function

This function
we.

field is available

for switching

Help screen

F1n
t
tn
I
(LOOP

to next or previous

& TRG)

Advancing

(Next Page)

Returning
screen.

(Previous

to the previous

Page)

This function field is available for concluding this screen and switching
another screen as selected by the corresponding
function key.

-nFI-

LOOP & TRG
screen

(LE

TRG)

(Busy Lamp Field)

-n
-n

to the next Help screen.

(Speed

Dial)

(Extension

BLF screen

Directory)
-

(Call Park)
-li

F8
(Function

Field 1

Select)
6-C-38

Help

This function field is available for concluding
screen as selected by a function key.

-n

Fl
(LOOP

-n

&YiiizLJ
Manage)

G. Manage)

[M-d

F4
-(I,,-)
n
(CO Manage)
F5
(Attendant

-Ial

to another

& TRG)

(Pickup
-

and switching

-(-=p--)

F2.
-ml
(Extension
-al

Help screen

FfJ
(Function

Manage)

(XJ

(

Select)

6-C-39

D. Outgoing
1.00 Making
1.01 Local

Call Features
Outside

Trunk

Calls

Dial Access

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to make outgoing CO calls
using automatically
selected idle CO line by
dialing the feature number for “AFWLocal CO
Line Access.”

Dial tone sounds.
(For instance.
an idle LOOP j,ly is pressed and
the SRC indicator
is lit and d z.! tone sounds.:l

i. Dial the featLye number for
“ARS!Local C3 Line Access.”

To activate this feature, set “System-Operation”,
Automatic
Route Selection to “No.” If set to
“Yes,” ARS feature is activated instead of this
feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)” for further information.

Programming

“System-Operation
(l/3)“.
Automatic
Route Selection
“System-Local
Access Group”,
Hunt Sequence
“System-Numbering
Plan (US)“,
ARSILocal
CO Line Access

Reference
1 Dumb

9-D-l .Cl

10-c-4.00

9-D-5.00

1 O-C-9.00

9-D-6.02

10-C-10.00

Conditions
An idle CO line available and hunting sequence
is determined
by the sysiem programming
“System-Local
Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.
If busy tone is heard,
available.

Dia! the !eles;zne

outside

Programming
System

You hear d:z! tone.

there is no idle CO line

If tenant service is employed,
accessible trunk
group is limi?ed to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.
The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk
group in hunt sequence
01 in “System-Local
Access Group.”

6-D-l

party.

number

of the

1.02 individual
Access

Trunk

Group

Dial

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant
to make outgoing CO calls
via an idle CO line in the specified trunk group by
dialing the feature number fpr “Trunk Group Ol08 Access” or “Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access.”
TRG key (Programmable
key) can be used for
this purpose instead of dialing the feature
number.
Refer to Section 6-C-l 0.00 “Attendant
Management
Screen” for further information
about programmable
key.

Dial tone sounds:
(For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed.
indicator is lit and dial tone sounds.)

1. Press the TRG Key (Programmable key ), then dial the trunk
group number (01 to 16 ).

Programming
System
“System-Numbering
Trunk
Group
Truck
Group

Programming
Plan (2/g)",
01-08
Access
09- 16 Access

Reference
1
Dumb
I
9-D-6.02
10-C-10.00

Another dial tone sounds. and
an idle line in specified trunk
group is selected automat&/y.

2. Dial the telephone
outside party.

(Supplement)
The following
step 1.

Conditions
i

SRC

If busy tone is heard, all CO lines in the specified
trunk group are in use.

procedure

!
I

of tie

operation

for

To select one of trunk groups 01 to 08:
Dial the feature number for “Trunk Group O? 48
Access,” then dial the trunk group specifyiq
number (1 to 8).
In this case, dialed number matches trunk
group number as follows:
Specify in; Number

substitutes

number

1 Trunk Gr;

Namber

To specify one of trunk groups 09 to 16: dial Ihe
feature number for “Trunk Group 09-l 6
Access” then dial the trunk group soecify’?C
number (1 to 8).
In this case dialed number matches trr;n%
group number as follows:
Specifying Number

-1

Trunk Gross N~nSer

(Supplement)
For recalling after selecting a CO line. press Y-?
CANCEL key. After dial tone sounds. rec)cz: ~5
same procedure from siep!

6-D-2

1.03 Individual
Virtual
Dial Access

Trunk

Group

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to make outgoing CO calls
using Special Carrier Facilities by simply dialing
the feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24
Access.”
TRG key (Programmable
key) can be used for
this purpose instead of dialing the feature
number.
Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization
codes, required to Special Carrier
Access must be programmed
beforehand
in
“Special Carrier Access” screen.
Trunk groups available for Special Carrier
Access is also defined in the same screen.

Dial tone sounds:
(For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed and
the SRC indicator is lit, and dial tone sounds.)
1. Press the TRG Key (Programmable key ), then dial the virtual
trunk group number: 17 to24.

?I
1

The following
step 1.
Reference
1 Dumb

“System-Numbering
Plan (2/g)“,
Trunk Group 17-24 Access

9-D-6.02

“Special Carrier Access-Equal

9-H-l .OO 1 O-C-30.00
9-H-2.00 1 O-C-31 .OO

AccessIOCC

Access”

Attendant
TRG (Trunk

Group)

Management
key

number

of the

(Supplement)

Programming
VT

Another dial tone sounds, an
idle trunk in the specified virtual
trunk group is selected
automatically.

2. Dial the telephone
outside party.

It is programmable
to restrict Special Carrier
Access on system-wide
basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2EQU/OCC Access Assignment” for further
information.

System Programming

10-C-10.00
l

I Reference

1 6-C-10.00

None

operation

for
17-24

Virtual trunk group number matches virtual
trunk group specifying number and digit
modification
table number (Equal access table
number 1 to 4, OCC access table number 1 to
4 which should be assigned beforehand),
as
follows:
Trunk
Number
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

6-D-3

substitutes

Dial the feature number for “Trunk Group
Access” then dial the virtual trunk group
specifying number: 1 to 8.

Virtual
Group

Conditions

procedure

Virtual

Trunk

Group ‘pecifying
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Digit Modification
Table Number
Equal access
table number
i
OCC access
table number

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

2.00 Automatic
2.01 Speed

Dialing

Dialing-System

Description

The feature

Speed Dialing-System
allows the attendant to
make an outgoing call- by dialing speed dialing
code common to the whole system.
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be registered
to the system.
There are two way of speed dialing:
By using AUTO key (programmable
key).
<2> By employing
Speed Dial screen. Prior
registration
of Speed Dial dictionary in
LOCAL mode is necessary.

Speed

Programming

“System-Tenant”,
System
Boundary
“System-Speed

Speed

Diaiing-manual

Dialing-System”

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

lights and

2. Press the AUTO key (programmable key) or dial the feature
number for “Speed DialingSystem.”
Dial tone stops.

3. Dial “Speed dial code” (001 to
200).
l

number
to the

Reference
1
3umS
I
9-D-2.00
::-X.C3

9-D-8.00

’

I^-‘-13.‘”
-”
--Ji

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

Dialing-

Access
Access
Access
Access

LOOP

Programming
System

a CO line are:

Operation

The Speed Dialing Codes are registered in
“System-Speed
Dialing-System”
screen, and toll
restriction level unique to each speed dialing code
can be assigned in the same screen.
Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed
Dialing” on next page for further information.

* Not only outside number but extension
and feature number can be registered
Speed Dialing-System.

for selecting

ARS Local CO iine
* Trunk Group 01-08
* Trunk Group 09-l 6
Trunk Group 17-24
l

If Tenant Service is employed,
speed diaiing
codes (001 through 200) can be divided by two
tenants.
In this case, speed dial codes for tenant
1 can not be used by tenant 2 and vice versa.
\

numbers

Registered
is dialed.

telephone

number

(Supplemzt)
In step 2. before pressing the AUTO key, dialing
the feature number for selecting a CO line (listed
below) car:cels the feature number for a CO line
stored in tra speed dialing code temporarily
and
allows you; :o call on the manually selected line.
Eiiher of steed dialing
used in cc-bination.
Speed dia. ?g codes

and manual

dialing

can be

can be used in succession.

Attendant
AUTO

Management

key

Conditions
Each speed dialing code can have up to 32 dlc:rs
including CO line access code. “O-9:” ‘.- ” “rr’.”
“PAUSE,” “FLASH.” ‘.-” and “SECRET” csn Cs
registered.
To register a telephofie
number to a Sys:~7i
Speed Dialing Code, a feature number icselecting a CO line must be stored as iez ng
diglrs.

It is availa:: 3 to register a number consisting of
33 digi!s c- Tore by dividing it and storing it in
W3 spaec 2 sling codes. In this case: a feature
r~:mbe: fc- selecting a CO line should not be
sic:ed o:! 1-3 second speed dialing code.
To diai ihc - dmber, firs; press the AUTO key and
I;,.:
.’ speed dial;?g code, and then press
-151 *in
Li!= :!:s:
:iiz AUTC * ?y and dial fhe second speed dialing
--CF.2
ri.u-.

_ ::

Operation
Speed

dial calling through

Speed

Dial screen

1. Press the F3 (speed dial). Speed Dial
screen appears on the CRT disoiay.

,,,a:‘DT

3. Press an idie LOOP key.
- The SRC ic.3icator
socrnds.

(7)

4. ?ress the F-7 iey (call).

I
/

Carl

i
/
l

j
/jj
Ii

Zgh:s a% -;:z! tone

4
!I

6-D-5

RecistPred
= -..d ” ‘c!aGhone
.-I”,
autmatiral’y.

numte-

s dialed

The system administrator
can assign Toll
Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing
(referred to as “TRLSD” in the following) to each
code as follows:

If the attendant
(TRL4=6) makes an outgoing CO
call by selecting a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=7),
in this case, TRLA of 6 is higher
than TRLSD of 7 (TRLA>TRLSD),
so a call is
made.

I :.
I

: 001
i 002

If the attendant
(TRtA=6) makes an outgoing CO
call by selecting a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=4),
in this case, TRLA of 6 is lower than
TRLSD of 4 (TRLAcTRLSD),
so a call is checked
against the System Toll Restriction feature.

Level of System
(TRLSD)

TRLSD consists of 17 levels (“00” and “01 to 16”)
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different fronTRLSDs “01 to 16.”
In TRLSD ;Ol to 16,” “01” is the highest level and
“16“ is the lowest.
1. Toll Restriction Plan for System
Code (TRLSD=OO)

Speed

Dialing

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing
a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=OO),
the attendant
receive standard toll restriction
treatmeni.
If selected speed dialing code includes Local
Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”
if seiected speed dialing code includes
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading cigiis, a tail is checkec again:.. ,,~;:;i!
Resrriciion for Individual Trunk Group L:a:
Access..’
For further information
abour System Toil
Res:riaicn
featilre, refer to Section 3-C-l .OO
Tc, ;j Res:ris:icn.”

-.3

Tc:i F;es::istion Plan for System
cccl IT’;liSDzO: to 16)

Toll

If TRLA is equal to or higher than TRLSD
(TRLAkTRLSD)
a call is made, and if TRLA is
lower than TRLSD (TRLA
In case there are two or more same extension
names in the list.
l

* Calling by specifying only extension
Entry type l- Call Name (CR)
l

name

Extension

Calling by specifying only department
Entry type 2- Call/Department
(CR)
Calling by specifying both extension
Department
Entry type 3- Call Name/Department

1 ExteinsNo.1

Directory

is displayed

EtiensisiNamei

as follows:
DE!nt

name and
(CR)
Then enter “Call Jack” and press the 1 RETURN/
key.

Programming
For registering the extension number and name
. in Extension Directory in Local mode, refer to
Section 13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”

Then the screen is displayed

as:

Conditions
The attendant console can place an extension
call by entering only department,
if there is an idle
extension in the specified department.

Message: Can not call ( Same Name exist )
~U’T”‘T’“~‘“T

Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP
key is pressed, the SRC indicator is lit and dial=.
tone sounds.)

Make the extension call using the same
procedure as Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office
Calling by Extension Directory Screen.”

Enter the name/department
using full keyboard
following the above mentioned format.
After ringback tone sounds, when called party
answers, start conversation.
(Supplement)
l

If designated
extension name or department
name are not listed in the Extension Directory,
the call is not placed, and the following
message appears on the message line.
Message:

The Name/Department

does not exist.

6-D-l 3

3.06 Off-Hook
(OHCA)

Call Announcement
Operation

Description

When called extension is busy (busy tone is
returned), OHCA allows the attendant to in form
the busy party that another call is waiting through
built-in speaker of the called user’s PITS
telephone.
OHCA works under the folfowing
l

conditions:

cl
CiiCA

OHCA key (Programmable
key) is assigned the
Attendant Console.
The called extension’s telephone is PITS KXT123230D,
KX-T123235
or KX-I7130
and
OHCA button is assigned on it.
The called extension is off-hook, all PDN
buttons are busy, and OHCA button is not in
use.

Attendant
) OHCA

key

Assignment”
(l/3)“,

Confirmation
tone sounds.
Start talking.
In case OHCA is available for
the extension, the OHCA
indicator on the called
extension lights in green, and
confirmation
tone of two beeps
sounds.

When answering an incoming COcall and
transferring it to the extension, if the extension is
busy, talk to the extension that you will transfer
the CO call by pressing the OHCA key. Then
press the RELEASE key.
As soon as any PDN becomes idle, the CO call is
placed on the PDN on the called extension.

Reference
VT
i Dumb
9-C-2.00 IO-C-~ .OO
9-G-l .Ol 1 o-c-z2.00
L; ‘.

...

I
Management

2. Press the OHCA key (programmable key).

When a call is transferred
to the extension in
OHCA conversation
status, the transferred
call
will be placed on a PDN as soon as any PDN
becomes idle by pressing the RELEASE key.

Programming

“Configuration-Slot
“Extension-Station
OHCA circuit

Busy tone sounds.

(Supplement)

In the system programming,
assign “ExtensionStation (l/3)“, OHCA Circuit to “Yes” at the called
extension.

number.

To utilize this function, install T-SW OHCA card
(KX-T336105)
in the Basic Slot 02, and OHCA
card (KX-T96136)
on the PLC or HLC card.
Refer to Section 2-C-3.02 “T-SW OHCA Card
(KX-T336105)”
and Section 2-C-3.03 “OHCA ’ Card (KX-T96136)’ for further information.

System Programming

Dial the extension

Reference

1 6-G’3.00

Conditions
Busy status of PITS telephone user means all
PDNs on called extension are in use. In this
status, busy tone is returned.
OHCA does not function if “System-Class
of
Service (l/Z)“, BSSOHCA
Deny is set to “Yes” at
called extension.

6-D-l 4

4.00 Executive

Busy

Override

Description

Operation

Executive Busy Override allows the attencant to
intrude on a busy line, and then a 3-party
conversation
is established.
The feature is
accessed by dialing “1” while hearing bus:/ tone.

1. Dial the extensor.
l

In entering into a three-party
conversation.
ail the
three parties hear confirmation
tone.
It is programmable
to send this tone or nor by
“System-Operation”,
Beep Tone for Bsy-ovriBrgin.

Busy tone sounds.

2. Dial “1.”

hi-l

III1

~~7%~

. Overriding
I

Programming

tone sounds at the
three parties. Start a threeperson conversation.
In case overriding is
impossible, busy tone
continues.

(Supplement)

. To complete a three-person
conversation
overriding on the SRC side, press the
RELEASE key.

after

Conditions
Busy status means that all PDNs on the cslled
extension are in use. In this status, busy tone
sounds.

Executive Busy Override does not function when
the other party is any one of the following status;
l

When answering an incoming
extension number to transfer
extension.
(CO call is held on SRC side
sounds on DES side), dialing
person conversation.
After informing the extension
CO call, press the RELEASE
As soon as any PDN becomes
arrives at the PDN.

Three-party
conversation
OHCA conversation
ICM conversation
Private CO conversation
In conversation
with another attendant
console.
_.x..

Executive Busy Override does not function if
either of two parties in conversation
has set the
followings;
l

Executive
(Refer
Data Line
(Refer

To complete a three-persoh
conversation
after
overriding on the DES side party and holding a
party on SRC side, press the RELEASE key.
In this case, the held station on SRC side is
transferred.
This is camp-on transfer.
..
CO call, dial the
the call to the
and busy tone
“1” offers a threeof-transferring
the
key.
idle, the CO call

For further detail of transferring
a camped-on
party, refer to Section 6-G-l .02 “Call Transfer
Camp-on to Station.”

Busy Override Deny
to Section 4-D-5.00.)
Security
to Section 4-I-5.00.)

6-D-l 5

5.00

Do Not Disturb
Override

(DND)

Description

Operation

Do Not Disturb Override makes the attendant
possible to call the extension which has set Do rlJot
Disturb.
Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides calling
the extension.
Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb (DND)”
for further information
about DND feature.
Programming
None
Conditions
If busy tone is heard after dialing “1,” Executive
Busy Override can be done by dialing “1” again.

1. Dial the extension

If DND feature is assigned to
the called extension, DND tone
sounds.

•l
1

number.

2. Dial “1.”
l

Ringback tone sounds,
calling starts.

and

(Supplement)
To transfer
assigned.

a call to extension

which has DND

After answering an incoming CO call, to transfer
the call to an extension, dial the extension
number (the incoming call on SRC side is held,
on DES side DND tone is heard). Dialing “1”
cancels DND function temporarily,
and while
hearing ringback tone, press the RELEASE key.
Then a call is transferred
to the destination
party.

6-D-l 6

E. Receiving

Features

1.00

by the ANSWER

Answering
Key

Description

Operation

The attendant can answer an incoming call
displayed on the answer field by pressing the’
ANSWER key. An incoming call appears on the
answer field in preferential order, that is assigned
by the system programming
in advance.

Incoming

call appears

on the answer

1. Press the ANSWER
l

For instance, if CO calls are assigned for higher
preference
than extension calls and if an
extension call arrives first and then a CO call
arrives, the answer field displays the extension
call first, then changes to show the CO call as
soon as it reaches.

The attendant
call appearing
field.

Programming
System

Reference

Programming

‘Extension-Attendant
Console”
Attendant Console (Call
Priority) (2/2)

9-G-4.02

Dumb
10-c-28.00

Conditions
If another call arrives during a conversation,
the
attendant can answer it by simply pressing the
ANSWER key.
In this case, the previous call will be placed on
hold or disconnected
depending
on the attendant
console programming.
For further information,
refer to Section 6-F-2.00
“Automatic Hold.”
;r=

6-E-l

field.
key.

can answer the
on the answer

2.00

Answering

by a LOOP Key

Description
If there are multiple incoming calls, the attendant
can answer a desired call by pressing a LOOP
key associated with it.
For instance, when there are two incoming
extension calls, you can confirm the callers on
the screen below and answer a desired call by
pressing a LOOP key associated with it.

LOOP

Key and

Trunk

Jan.

Group
Wait

Jack
GO1
T=OS
Incoming
010

020

030

EXT. 200
Manager
C=Ol
T=Ol
Incoming
040

050

(3)

(4)

FRI

12:00

(6) -

(5)

060

070

060

090

100

110

120

130

Input
SRC
DES
Message

199

overlbw=o

Call = 0

(2)

(1)
Ex-rloo

In the example below, pressing the ANSWER key
automatically
connects a call from Jack. Press
the LOOP 2 key to answer the call from Manager.

140

150

160

LOOP-1
EXT. 100
Jack
Incoming

i
:
:

Programming

‘*

Operation

None
ii-

0 DES 1.
rlr_l SRC
I

Conditions
During a conversation,
the attendant
can answer
another incoming call by pressing a LOOP key
associated with it.
In this case, the previous call will be placed on
hold or disconnected
depending
on the attendant
console programming.
For further information,
refer to Section 6-F-2.00
“Automatic Hold.”

ml
LOOP

6-E-2

Multiple incoming calls are
arriving at LOOP keys.
l

Multiple SRC indicators
flash in 240 winks.

2. Press the desired
l

start to

LOOP key.

The SRC indicator of the
pressed LOOP key lights.
to the caller.

Talk

3.00 Directed Call Pickup
Description

Operation

Directed Call Pickup allows the attendant to
answer the call ringing at any extension by
dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup,” and then the directory number of the
ringing extension.

Picking up a call ringing

Programming

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
l

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

lights and

2. Dial the feature number for
Directed Call Pickup. “48”
(default).

Reference

System Programming

lhmb

“System-Numbering
Plan (3B)’
Directed Call Pickup
_

3. Dial the directory
ringing extension.

Conditions
It is possible
after holding

at an extension

to execute Directed
the cunent call.

to answer

the

cl> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
~2>

A call ringing on PC0 button

<3>

A call ringing on ICM button

<4>

A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 ‘Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed
Ringing” for further
information.)

For thti above calls, reorder tone sounds after
dialing the feature number for uDiiected Call
Pickup” and the diiectory number of the ringing
extension and the following message appears on
the Message line.
1 Message:

of the

Call Pickup
l

This feature is not available
following calls:

number

No Incoming

Call 1

6-E-3
(40993)

You hear confirmation
Talk to the caller.

tone 3.

F. Holding

Features

1 .OO Hold
Description

Operation

AlI~ws me attendam :o hold the current call
teTranIy
&y pressing the HOLD key.
This rs effectrve only for a call on the SRC side of
a LOOP key.
A call on the DES side of the LOOP key can not
be placed on hold.

Holding

a call

During a conversation
with an outside or inside
patty, the SRC indicator of the corresponding
LOOP key is lit.

UOLO
0

To place a call on hold, press the HOLD key.
To retrieve a held call. press the LOOP key in
holding status.
Programming

1. Press the HOLD key.
The other party is placed on
hold. The SRC indicator of the
corresponding
LOOP key starts
flashing in 60 wink.
The DES indicator of that
LOOP key lights, and dial tone
sounds.

None
Conditions
Retrieving

Up to six calls can be placed on hold at the
attendant
console.
Calls held by the attendant console
retrieved by other extensions.

can not be

Holding the other attendant console
doorphone
calls is impossible.

and

a held call

The SRC indicator
indicator is iii.
m
rl m

DES

SRC

LEZU

If a held call has nofbeen
answered more than a
pre-assigned
time, transfer recall tone may
sound at attendant console.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder’
for further information.

is flashing

1. Press the LOOP key in holding
status.

. Conversation

with the SRC
side party is established.
. The SRC indicator of the
corresponding
LOOP key is lii,
the DES indicator light goes
Out.

If a held call is not answered for more than 30
minutes, it will be disconnected
automatically.

6-F-l

and the DES

2.00 Automatic

Hold

Description

Operation

b.laking a call during a conversation
with an outside
or extension party causes holding the current
conversation
automatically,
and performs calling
on the DES side.

Executing

Auioinatic

ANSWER

key or the LOCI? b.:,.

cl0
LOOP

Music on Hold is sent to the held party if available.
For sending Music on Hold, prior assignment
is
necessary by programming.
Refer to Section 3-El .OO “Music on Hold.”

The first call is held, and the
SRC indicator starts to flash in
green 60 wink.
The SRC indicator of the LOOP
key where call is arriving lights.
Speak to the second party.

(Supplement)
Attendant

Hold

Management

1 Reference1
I&c-10.00

Executing
ANSWER

Automatic
Hold without
key or the LOOP key

pressing

the

While in a conversation
with an outside party or
extension on SRC side of a LOOP key, execute
any of the following operations
on’DES side of
the LOOP key, then the current call is held
automatically.

Conditions
i

“: .’ L

Press the ANSWER key, or the
LOOP key where the call is
arriving.

Programming

Automatic

C! ; --;

During a conversation
with a CO cati ‘3’ an
extension on the SRC side of ;I-a LOC?
key,
another call arrives on another LOOP +.ey.

Another call arriving during the conversation
can
be answered
by pressing the ANSWER key or the
LOOP key, holding the current party automatically,
if -Automatic
Hold” is set to “Yes” in the Attendant
Management
screen.
To answer the new call by holding or disconnecting
the current call can be assigned by programming.

+;.c

None

Using dial pad
Pressing the CALL PARK key (programmable
key)
Pressing the SERIAL key (programmable
key)
-Only
during a conversation
with a CO call.
Pressing the TOLL CHG key (programmable
key)
-Only
during a conversation
with an extension
Pressing the AUTO key (programmable
key)
Pressing the PAGE key
Pressing the TRG key (programmable
key)
Pressing the One Touch key (programmable
key)

l
l

l
l
l
l

6-F-2

3.00

Call Park-System
Opera?

Description

pzyr-_

This function provides putting a call into the
parking place common to the whole system.
Up to 20 calls can be parked with each call park
area number (01 to 20).
CALL-PARK
key should be assigned as
programmable
key in advance.
Parked cali can be retrieved from any extension
in the system.

During

outside

cn
f ,ai!

1. Press tine CALL-PARK
(programmable
key).

CALL P&a.

CALL-PARK

key

The call is held.
. The SRC indicator starts
flashing in green 60 wink, the
DES indicator is lit, dial tone
sounds.
l

Dl
*

Ref+fence
6-GT0.00

. The call is parked in an idle
parking
area. After
confirmation
tone sounds, it
becomes silent.
. Both SRC, DES indicator
lights
on the LOOP key go out.
. The following
message appears
on the message line:

-’

key can not

In case of no answer in preassigned
time, Held
Call Reminder starts.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held
Call Reminder.”
In case of no answer in 30 minutes
hold, the held party is disconnected.

To park the call to an idle
parking area: Dial I*.”

2-l

Conditions
. A call on the DES side of the LOOP
be parked.

key

l-l

Programming

Management

;arty

L!-lJ

Attendant

with an extension

t :onvc:satior;

after starting
2-2

If Tenant Service is employed,
20 parking areas
can be split between two tenants in ‘SystemTenant”, Call Park Boundary.
In this case, each
tenant cannot use the other’s parking place.

: Caii Darked

xx: parking
20)

area number

at xx
(01 to

To park a call by specifying a
parking area number:
Dial the
parking area number: 01 to 20.
l

If music source is connected
to the system, Music
on Hold (such as radio) is sent to the parked
party. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment
is necessary by programming.
Refer to Section 3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold.”

Message

Resutts is the same as dialing
P*-R key.

(Supplement)
Busy tone sounds if att Ihe parking areas or a
specified parking area are occupied.
The following message appears on the message
tine of CRT.
If all the parking
I

I
I

6-F-3

areas

Message:

are in use:
Call park deny

If the specified

parking

Message

area is occupied:

Retrieving a parked call employing
System screen

Call Park

: Call park at xx deny
1. Press the F5 key (call park).

xx: parking

area number
l

To start conversation

again, press the LOOP key.

Retrieving a parked call
There are two ways to retrieve

The SRC indicator
key is lit.
Dial tone sounds.

3. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP

of the LOOP

The SRC indicator of the LOOP
key is lit and dial tone sounds.

4. Press the F7 key (park retrieve).
- After hearing confirmation
tone,
speak with the parked party.
The following message appears _
on the message line of CRT: -

2. Press the CALL PARK key.
l

No tone is heard.

Message

3. Dial the call park area number
(01 to 20).

xx : parking
After you hear confirmation
tone, speak with a parked
caller.
. The following message appears
on the message line on CRT
screen:

Message

: Call park retrieve

xx: call park area number

from xx I
(01 to 20)

(Supplement)
If no call is parked in a specified parking area,
reorder tone sounds and the following message
appears on the message line:
Message

: Call park retrieve

appears

the CALL

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
l

screen

2. Move the cursor to the desired
number to be retrieved by pressing
the F4, F5, F6 keys (T ,J ,H).

a parked call.

Retrieving a parked call by pressing
PARK key (programmable
key)

Call Park System
on the screen.

deny

6-F-4

: Call park retrieve
area number

from xx.

G. Transferring
1.00

Features

Call Transfer

1 .Ol Unscreened
Station

Call Transfer

to
Operation

Description

Allows the attendant
CO) to an extension

During a conversation
with an extenszn
or
outside party
Dial the extension number o: :ne
destination.

to transfer a call (extension,
user without announcement.

Programming
System

Programming

“System-System Timer-.
Transfer Recall

Reference
t

Dud

/ 9-D-3.00 / lO-C-E.00 /

Ringback

tone sounds.

2. Press the RELEASE
l

Conditions

In case of no answer from the destination
extension in 30 minutes, the line will be
disconnected.

If Music on hold is available, during transferring
operation, Music on Hold is sent to the transferred
party until conversation
starts. Refer to Section
3-E-1 -00 “Music on Hold.”

kdy.

Both SRC, DES indicator
go out and the attendant
console becomes silent.
The following message
appears on the message

lights

line.

If transferring
a call routed via
trunk group 01 to extension 100:
Message

If transferred
call is not answered in preassigned
interval, Transfer Recall starts to the attendant
console. The time taken to activate this function
is set by “System-System
Timer”, Transfer Recall.
Refer to Section 3-E-3.00 “Transfer Recall” for
further information.

: TRG 01 is transferred

Changing the transfer
the RELEASE key

destination

1. Press the CANCEL

2. Dial the extension
new party.

to Ext.1 00 1
before

pressing

key.

number

of the

(Supplement)
Instead of pressing the CANCEL key, if you press
the LOCP key whose SRC indicator is flashing in
60 wink, you can talk to the held party again.

6-G-l

1.02 Call Transfer
Station

by Camp-on

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to transfer a call to busy
extension.
Transferred
call will ring the busy extensior
automatically
when it becomes idle.

During a conversation
extension.
The SW

with an outside
indicator is lit.

1. Press the HOLD key.
l

Programming

The SRC indicator starts to
flash in 60 wink, and the DES
indicator lights.

2. Dial the extension
destination.
l

Conditions
Busy status of PITS telephone means all PDNs
on the destination
extension are in use.

Camp-on

deny.

number

of the

Busy tone sounds on DES side
of the LOOP key.

3. Press the RELEASE

key.

Both SRC and DES indicator
lights go out and the attendant
console becomes silent.
Transferred
party is placed on
hold until the destination
extension answers.
. Ringing starts at the
destination
extension, as soon
as it becomes idle.
If the destination answers,
conversation
with the
transferred
party starts.

If Camp-on Transfer cannot be set (for example,
the destination
extension is in program mode),
the following message appears on the message
. line on the screen:
1 Message:

party or

]

If camped on call is not answered in preassigned
interval, transfer recall starts at the attendat
console.
The time taken to activate transfer recall is set by
“System-System
Timer”, Transfer Recall.

6-G-2

1.03 Screened

Call Transfer

to Station

Description
Allows the attendant
CO) to an extension

Changing the transfer
the RELEASE key

to transfer a call (extension,
with announcement.

destination

1. Press the CANCEL

before

pressing

key.

Programming
None

2. Dial the extension
new destination.

Conditions
If Music on Hold is available, a held party
receives Music on Hold during transfer.
Refer to Section 3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold.”

During a conversation
extension

with an outside

Dial the extension
destination.
l

Ringback

Instead of pressing the CANCEL key, if you press
the LOOP key whose SRC indicator is flashing in
60 wink, you can talk to the held party again.

party or an

number

of the

Retrieving the transferred
party does not answer

tone sounds.

2. The called extension
side answers.*

l-l

on the DES

Speak with the called party on
DES side.

3. Press the RELEASE
l

Key.

Both SRC, DES indicator lights
go out and attendant console
becomes silent.
The following message
appears

on the message

line.

If transferring
a call routed via
trunk group 01 to extension 100:

Message

: TRG 01 is connected

DES

sRc

with Ext.100

6-G-3

party if the destination

1. Press the LOOP key which is
flashing in 60 wink.
l

RELEASE

of the

(Supplement)

Operation

rl0

number

Conversation
with the
transferred
party starts.

1.04 Screened

Call Transfer

to Trunk

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension,
CO) to an outside patty with announcement.

During

a conversation

outside

party

1. Select a CO line.

Programming
None

Conditions
A call placed

with an extension

After selecting the CO line on
DES side of the LOOP key, dial

tone sounds.
on hold during

call transfer

receives

2. Dial the telephone
outside party.

Music on Hold, if available.
Refer to Section 3-E-i .OO “Music on Hold” for
further information

number

Ringback tone sounds from the
CO line. When the called party
answers, make the announcement.

3. Press the RELEASE
l

of the

key.

Held call is connected with the
outside destination party, and
the attendant console becomes
silent.
The following message
appears on the message line
on the screen.

”

If transferring
extension 100 via
CO line in the trunk group 01:
1 Message:
(Supplement

Ext.100

after selecting

6-G-4

the CO line,

1. Press the CANCEL key, then
repeat the pre-described
operation from step1 .

If busy tone or reorder
an outside party,
(GL)
n

with TRG 01 1

)

If busy tone sounds
(GZZ)
rl

is connected

tone sounds

after calling

1. Press the CANCEL key, then
repeat the pre-described
operation from step 1.

1.05 Unscreened
Remote

Call Transfer

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension,
CO) to the remote maintenance
feature.
Modem answer tone is returned instantly, if it is
not in use.

During

a conversation

To transfer a call to Remote Maintenance
Resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is
assigned in “System-Operation”,
Remote
Directory Number.
See Section 3-B-3.00 “Floating Directory Number
(FDN)” for details about FDN.

Message

For accessing the remote maintenance
feature,
RMT card must be installed and assigned to the
system.
Programming

Assignment

party or

1. Dial the FDN for Remote.

This operation allows the System Administrator
to perform System Administration
from a Remote
Location.
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration
from a Remote Location” for
further information.

Conftguratlon-Slot

with an outside

extension

Conditions

...
If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends
Music on Hold to the transferred party during the
transferring
operation.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO
“Music on Hold.”

If Remote Maintenance
Resource is in use, busy
tone is returned to the held party. Automatic
Callback does not function in this case, so the
party should call Remote again when it becomes
idle.

6-G-5

Confirmation
tone sounds.
The attendant console is free
to handle another call.
The following message
appears on the message line in
I/O field:

If an outside

party is transferred:

: TRG 01 is connected
Remote Term.
If an extension

with

is transferred:

: Ext. 100 is connected
Remote Term.

with

1.06 Unscreened
Call Transfer
-to
a UCD Group (with

OGM)

Description
Allows the attendant tc transfer an out&e
call to
a UCD Group from 01 To 04 (wtth OGM tfle).
From version
any extension

8.Xx. not only the operators but
user can transfer an outside call to

a UCD group

(with OGM).

Programming
System

Reference

Programming

“Special Attended-UCD

(l/2)

Dumb
:X-44.00

9-K-3.01

Conditions
If all group members are not available to answer
the call, it will be redirected to the Overfbw
destination.
In this case, the call will be
_ disconnected
if not answered by the Overflow
destination
within 60 seconds.
See page 3-D-13 for further information.

Operation
During

a conversation

with an outside

party.

1 Dial the FDN for UCD group (01
to
l

04).

The LOOP key is released
automatically.

Feature References
Uniform Call Distribution
OGM (Section

(UCD)-with/without

3-D-2.06)

6-G-5-l
(40993)

2.00

Heavy Traffic Overflow
Transfer
to Station

Descrlotlon

Conditions

CF; 1; _ ,, 33: I ;;;- z*-: e at the attendant
console
at the same I’-e
If six tails hare arrived and other calls arrive, the
number c;f the other calls is displayed
in the “wait
call” or “LOOP key and Trunk Gioup” screen.

If a call in the queue cannot be transferred
to the
preassigned
destination,
it is called an
overflowed
call.
The number of overflowed
calls is displayed
in
“Over flow = ” of “LOOP key and Trunk Group”
screen.
Calls cannot be transferred
in the following
cases:
.

If the waiting calls remain in the “wait call” for a
specified duration programmed
in “SystemSystem Timer- Attendant Overflow Time, they will
be transferred
automatically
to the specified
extension assigned by “Extension-Attendant
Console”, Overflow.
To transfer those calls, set “Overflow transfer” to
“Yes” in the Attendant Management
screen.

Operation
None

Programming
System Programming

/’
\

‘“System-System
Timer”,
Attendant
Overflow Time
“Extension-Attendant
Console”,
Overflow
Attendant

Overflow transfer

The transfer destination
is not assigned.
The destination extension is busy.
The destination extension has DND assigned.

Management

Refeience
1 Dumb
I
9-D-3.00
1 O-C-6.00
VT

9-G-4.01

10-C-28.00

Reference

1 6-C-10.00 1

6-G-6

3.00

Serial

Call

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant to transfer a CO call to
muttjpie extensions (up to three extensions)
sequentially.
When the first extension hangs up, a call is
transferred
to the second extension and the third
extension in sequence automatically
without
assistance of the attendant console.
For this function prior assigning of SERIAL key to
a programmable
key is necessary.

CO call arrives at attendant

console.

1. Answer the call by pressing the
ANSWER key (programmable
key).
SRC indicator lights.
Start conversation.
l

II11--11
SERIAL

Programming
iii

2. Press the SERIAL key
(programmable
key).
l

Outside party is placed on
hold, SRC indicator starts to
flash in 60 winks.
DES indicator lights.

3. Dial the required
number.

Conditions
In case the specified extension is busy or does
not answer within specified duration, call
advances to the next extension.
Specified duration is the preset time assigned in
“Call Forwarding
No-Answer Time-Out” by system
programming.

extension

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each
required extension (up to three)
during silence.
I

If all of the called extensions answer, serial call is
concluded.
If any of the called extensions is busy
or does not answer, calling the attendant console
starts again automatically.

5. Press the RELEASE
l

key.

The SRC and DES indicator
lights go out.

Making a CO outgoing
extensions

call and transfer

it to

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

2. Make an outgoing
I fik

6-G-7

CO call.

Steps 3 to 5 are same as
mentioned above.

4.00

Interposition

Call Transfer

Description

Conditions

This function

Transferr.:g
a call to another attendant console
is limited XI screened call transfer. Unscreened
call trans’lr (automatic
transfer ) is ineffective.

allows ?z a.r;enda-: ccsnsz,e to
make Screened
Call T:ansfer
.:ransfe:;r;g
atie:
informing it) to the other atteman:
co?scle in :ne
same tenant, after answering ad plaong a call

on hold.
Programming
None

Operation
)

When attendant

console 1 receives a call from
extension
100, and transfer it to attendant
console 2.
c I / 0 Field of Attendant

Console

c I 0 Field of Attendant

1 >

1. Attendant
console 1 answers the incoming
from extension
100 and holds it.

call
SRC:
DES:

2. Attendant

console

1 calls attendant

console

2.
SIX:
DES:

3. Attendant

console

Ext. 100 Hold
AlTl
Incoming

2 answers.
1 SRC: Ext. 100 Hold
1 DES: ATT1 Talk

/I
)

Console

4. Attendant
key.

console

1 presses

the RELEASE
+;;;Ext.lOOHold

5. Attendant
console 2 presses
corresponding
LOOP key.

the

SRti:
DES:

Reorder

tone sounds.

i SRC: Ext. 100 Talk
1 DES:

..
i

6-G-8

5.00

Call Transfer
Console

via Attendant
Operation

Description
The a~r,~a~;
an extarsion

car tranjier an outside
:o another extension.

An extension which has held an outside party
calls the attendant console.
The SRC indicator starts flashing in 60 wink, the
DES indicator starts flashing in 240 wink.

call held by

Programming

None

1. Press the ANSWER

key .

ANSWER

Conditions
None

The DES indicator lights. Start
conversation
with the DES side
party.
The SRC indicator remains
flashing in 60 wink.

2. Press the CANCEL

[GZZ)

Dial tone sounds from DES
side, and calling starts.
The SRC indicator is flashing
60 wink.

Dial the telephone
destination.
Ringback

0
0

number

of the

tone sounds.

4. Press the RELEASE

RELEASE

6-G-9

key.

The held call is transferred
automatically
and the called
party answers it.
Both SRC and DES indicator
lights go out and the attendant
console becomes silent.

6.00

Released

Link Operation

Description

Operation

Allows
the attendant to transfer a call bj s.qz~Iy
dialing the extension number of the c¶es::-.arOn
without pressing the RELEASE key.
ff any PDN button on the destination
extensron IS
idle, the call is released from the console ano call
ringing starts at the destination
party.

During a conversation
with an outside or inside
party
1. Dial the extension number of the
destination
party.
l

Set “Released link operation” to “Yes” in Attendant
Management
screen beforehand.
l

Programming

Conditions

If the destination
is busy or has DND assigned,
transferring
is ineffective .
)n the former case, pressing the RELEASE key
provides Camp-on Transfer.

6-G-l 0

The first party is placed on
hold, and if the destination
party is idle, call ringing starts.
Both SRC, DES indicator lights
on the LOOP key go out.

7.00

Automatic
Answer

Redirection

If No

Description
If an incomtng oufsde call ringing on a LOOP key
is not answered wrthin a specified time, it can&?
redirected to the exten9on assigned as the
overflow destination
of Attendant Consoles.

Programming
system

Reference

Programmkg

Dumb

“System-System Timer’.
Attendant Overflow Ttme

SD3.00

10-c-6.00

“Extension-Attendant
Overflow

9-G-4.01

10-C-28.00

Console”.

Conditions
1. Incoming Mode (Day) : ATT
This feature works only for the incoming call
routed via a CO line which belcmgs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is
assigned as “ATT-”
2. “Overflow Transfer” assignment
Set “Overflow transfer” to “Yes” in the
Attendant
Management
screen of an attendant
console assigned as the Operator 1.
3. “Overflow” extension assignment
If the extension assigned as the overflow
extension is busy, or not assigned, this feature
does not work.
The call continues to ring at an LOOP key.
4. Attendant Overflow Time
The timer which applies to the feature is
“System-System
Timer”, Attendant Overflow
Time.
5. Single and Dual Console mode
This feature works in both Single and Dual
Console mode.
Refer to Section 3-D-l .OO “Attendant Console
Operation” for further information.

Operation
None
6-G-l 1
(30393)

H. Conversation

Features

1 .OO Conference
Description

Operation

The attendant can set up a three-person
conference
that includes inside party as well as
outside party by adding a new party to the
established
call.

Durirq

wm
v ,
. s.
l-R% 1.9

The CONF key (programmable
key) must be
assigned to the attendant console in advance.
On the TSW card, there are eight standard
conference
trunks provided for this purpose.
By equipping the optional conference
expansion
card (KX-T336104).
the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference
expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System
Assignment”,
TSW
Additional CONF to ‘Yes.”

“Configuration

If the called party answers,
begin speaking.

Both SRC and DES indicators
light. Start a conference.

Finishing

the conference

1. Press the RELEASE

key.

0RELESE

Both SRC. DES indicator lights
go out.
If both B and C are outside
parties, both parties are
disconnected.
If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension user, a conversation
between B and C is
established.
.’

pressing
l

Fleference
VT I Dumb

System Assignment”.

TSW Additional

or inside

Place a new call while holding
the current party.

Programming
System Programming

with an outside

2. Press the CONF key
(programmable
key).

When two members in the conference
are outside
parties, two conference trunks are necessary.
In
all other cases, one conference trunk is enough.
If there are no -die conference
trunks,
the CONF key does not function.

a conversation

The following
line:

SG1.00 lO-Gl.00

CONF

message

appears

on the message

Attendant
CONF

Management

P-4

1 Message:

Changing from conference
DES side party by holding

Conditions
Conference
call is available
combinations.
l

I
in the following

Two outside patties and an attendant
console
An outside party, an inside party and an
attendant console
Two inside parties and an attendant console

Conference
call including
console is unavailable.

another

is connected

with TRG (01) 1
.-

6-GlO.00

key

Ext.100

to conversation
SRC side party

1. Press the corresponding

with
LOOP

The SRC side party is placed
on hold, speak with the DES
side party.

(Supplement)
To change from conference
to conversation
with
the SRC side party by holding the DES side
party, press the SPLIT key (call splitting function).
For further information,
refer to Section 6-H-3.00
“Call Splitting.”

attendant

6-H-l

2.00

Unattended

Conference

Description

Operation

Allows the attendant IO change a three-party
conference
including two outside parties to a COCO call by pressing the CONF key, and observing
conversation
status through SRC, DES indication
is possible.

Setting up an unattendeo
During a three-person
outside parties

confere-ce

tail
including

twc

1. Press the COh= key
(pr0grammab.r
key).

For this function, prior assignment
of the CONF
key to programmable
key is necessary in the
Attendant Programming.
Conversation
duration
of the CO-CO call is limited, and can be changed
by “Group-Trunk
Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit.

Returning

Programming

con’zence

A three-pan!
conference
changes to z CO-CO call. and
both SRC, DES indicators star
flashing in : 23 wink.

to a three-party

con’srence

Both SRC. DES indicators
wink.
~~

L-4

are ‘lashing in 120

1. Press the associated
l

m-l

LOOP key.

Establishes a three-person
conference.
coth SRC, DES
indicators light.

(Supplement)
If there is no idle conference
t-ink, the attendan:
can speak with only one outsict party.

Conditions
During a CO-CO call through Unattended
Conference,
Unattended
Conference
Recall
begins 60 seconds before the CO-CO call
duration is over.

During
through
sent to
CO-CO

Answering

unattended

conference

recall

During a CO-CO call through r-e unattended
conference,
unattended
conference
recall starts
60 seconds before the time lirt. Both SRC and
DES indicators flash in 240 witk.

the conversation
status between CO-CO
Unattended
Conference,
warning tone is
both outside parties 15 seconds before the
call duration expires.

1. Press the associated
l

6-H-2

LOOP key.

A three-par&
conference
starts.
Both SRC , DES indicators iight.

3.00

Call Splitting

Description

(Supplement)

The attendant can speak with the SRC side party
and the DES side party alternately while holding
the other party by pressing the SPLIT key.

During a conversation
with the DES s:ce pa!rtj
while holding the SRC side party, pressing the
LOOP key disconnects the DES side party and
enables a conversation
with the SRC side par7

Programming

During a conversation
with the DES side party
while holding the SRC side party, the attendant
can make a call from the DES side while holding
the SRC side party by pressing the CANCEL key.

None
Conditions

Pressing the CONF key during
introduces a conference call.

Call Splitting
During a conversation
with the SRC side party
while holding the DES side party, pressing the
LOOP key or CANCEL key does not function.

Pressing the RELEASE key during Call Splitting
releases the attendant console from the call and a
conversation
between the SRC and DES parties
starts.
Operation

During a conversation
party on SRC side

with an outside
.-

Call another extension
party from DES side.
l

or inside
or outside

The SRC side party is placed
on hold.
When the called party answers,
begin speaking.
Press the SPLIT key.

Conversation
with the SRC side
party starts and the DES side
party is placed on hold.
The SRC indicator is lit, and the
DES indicator flashes in 60 wink.
Press the SPLIT key again.

SPLIT

Conversation
with the DES side
party starts, and the SRC side
party is placed on hold.
The DES indicator is lit, the
SRC indicator flashes in 60
wink.

q0
SPLIT

4. The attendant

can speak with the
SRC side party and the DES side
party alternately by every
pressing of the SPLIT key.
6-H-3

4.00

Doorphone

Calling

Description
The attendant

Operation
can make and answer

call.
Up to four doorphones

Making

a doorphone

can be connected

a doorphone

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

to the

system.

During a doorphone
door for a specified

call

call, dialing “5” opens the
period.

Dial tone sounds.

2. Dial the feature number for
“Door- phone Call (1 to 4):” then,
dial the doorphone
number (1 to

Set the duration of the door opener in “ExtensionDoorphone”,
Open Duration. When Open
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is
unavailable.

4)
l

Opening

After hearing
conversation
phone.

dial tone, start
over the door-

a door
1 . Dial 5”
l

Conditions

If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each doorphone
can be assigned by the system
programming
in “Extension-Doorphone,”
Tenant.
The attendant can place a call to the doorphone
within the same tenant, but cannot hold or
transfer the doorphone
call.
When a visitor presses the button on the doorphone, ping-pong tone sounds twice, then
doorphone
call ringing starts.
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone
call.
Dialing “5” again while the door is open enables
the attendant to prolong the opening duration to
the specified duration assigned in “ExtensionDoorphone”,
Open Duration.

6-H-4

The door opens for the
specified duration.

5.00

Tone Through
(End to End
DTMF Signaling)

Description

Operation

During a call (extension, outside or doorphone),
this function allows the attendant
to send DTMF
(touch tone) signals to the voice path while
pressing dial pad buttons after pressing the E-E
key (programmable
key).
End to End DTMF Signaling is used to access
network services such as OCC access which
requires touch-tone
signals.

During

The E-E key should be assigned
Management
screen.

E-E

a call (extension,

outside

or doorphone),

1. Press the E-E key
(programmable
key).

rl r-l

2. Dial the telephone
l

in Attendant

Programming

Conditions
None

6-H-5

number.

DTMF signal is transmitted
while dialing.

6.00 Cancel

Key Function

Description
Allo:vs ?he attendant :o get a line for
on the selected LOOP key again by
pressing the CANCEL key.
.When CANCEL key is pressed while
selected LOOP key, dial tone will be

Operation
making
simply
seizing
heard.

a call

While hear?g

or speaking

1. Press the CANCEL
the
l

Programming

tone, dialing,

Conditions
Pressing the CANCEL key does not function
during a conference
call and during a
conversation
with the SRC side party with holding
the DES side party.
Cancel Key Function does not work while talking
. on DES side without holding a call on SRC side.

When a call is made after pressing the CANCEL
key, it is checked against the system toll
restriction procedure,
and a call duration time
count is renewed.

6-H-6

Dial tone sounds.

key.

I. Paging

Features

1 .OO Paging
1.01 Paging

All Extensions

Description

Operation

Allows the attendam ::: make paging
announcement
thrash
built-in speakers of all
FITS telephones
by c’aling the feature number
for “Station Paging” a:d -0.”

1. Press an idle LOOP key and dial
the feature number for “Station
Paging” and “0” in succession.
l

Programming

After confirmation
tone sounds,
all extension paging through
built-in speakers is possible.

System Programs;. -?
“System-Numbering

F z.$ (3 9)“, / 9-D-6.03 110-0-10.00

2. Perform

Station Paging

paging.

Conditions
Single line telephones
If Tenant
available
console.

3. An extension

(SLT’s) can not be paged.

answers

the page.

Service is employed,
paging is only
within the same tenant as the attendant

If an extension
active, paging

4. Press the RELEASE

key.

is off-hook or its SP-PHONE
is
is una::ailable
for the extension.

RELEASE

Current call is parked and paging all extensions
through built-in spearer of all PITS telephones
can be carried out by pressing the PAGE key
during a conversation.
For further informaticnt
refer to Section 6-l-l .05
“Call Park and Paging.”

Transferring

a call using Paging

923
q

During a conversation
outside party.
45s
789
x

-; .-

All Extensions

with an extension

1. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and “0” in
succession.
_
After confirmation
tone sounds,
extension paging starts.
The first party is placed on
hold.
l

2. Perform

q0
RELEASE

6-l-l

paging.

3. After an extension answers the
page, press the RELEASE key.
. Conversation
between the held
party and the paged party
starts. Attendant console
becomes silent.

1.02 Group

Paging

Description

2. Perform

1 .CNS tlY* a.I?QrlCa”’. to make paging
3’“3UXC
-&I tr-zsgh built-in speakers of PITS
:eiepho;-5
sy LXC ‘j ng ;he desired Paging
Group.

3. An extension

Up to eight paging
system.

groups can be assigned

paging.

answers

to the

Programming

4. Press the RELEASE
The call is released
attendant console.

pi‘System-Numbering

the page.

Plan (3/9) ,

key.
from the

-1
Transferring
Conditions

a call using Group Paging

During a conversation,

Single line telephones

(SLT’s) can not be paged.

1. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and desired
paging group number (1 to 8) in
succession.

If Tenant Service is employed, paging is only
available within the tenant where the attendant
console belongs.

Confirmation
tone sounds.
The specified paging group
gets ready to be paged.
The call is held.

If the designated
paging group is being paged by
another page, busy tone is heard.
However, group paging can be done within the
range not overlapping the previous paging range.
For instance, when paging is being done to group
1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
paging.
1

If an extension
active, paging

2. Perform

is off-hook or its SP-PHONE is
is unavailable for the extension.

3. An extension

Current call is parked and Group Paging through
built-in speaker of PITS telephones
can be
carried out by pressing the PAGE key during a
conversation.
For further details, refer to Section 6-l-l -05 “Call
Park and Paging.”

1 Press an idle LOOP key and dial
the feature number for “Station
Paging” and paging group
number (1 to 8) in succession.
l

answers

4. Press the RELEASE

Operation
LOOP

paging.

Confirmation
tone sounds.
The specified paging group
gets ready to be paged.
6-l-2

the page.

key.

The call is released from the
console.
Conversation
between the held
party and the paged party
starts.

1.03

Paging

External

Pagers
Conditions

Description

If Tenant Service is employed,
only in the same tenant.

:,lows the attendant tc Take paging
announcement
through rhe external pagers

dialing the feature
Up to two external
this system.

by
numoer for “External Paging’.”
pagers can be equipped with

The followings

Confirmation
tone from external pagers is
selected by “Trunk-Pa,;er & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone.

Reference
Dumb

9-D-l .Ol

1 o-c-4.00

~9-D-6.03 10-c-10.00
g-F-2.00

priorities:

If a lower priority page is active, and a higher
priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower
one: for instance, if Paging External Pager from
extension is overridden
by Paging External Pager
from an Attendant Console, reorder tone is
returned to the extension who initiates the Paging
External Pager. If TAFAS call or BGM is
overridden by another higher prfority, it is
interrupted
and starts again when’the higher
priority is finished.

Programming

“System-Operation
(l/3)‘.
External Paging 1,2
‘System-Numbering
Plar (3/g)‘,
External Paging
“Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone

show the paging

can
The

(1) Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Console
(2) TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
(Refer to Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.“)
(3) Paging External Pager from an extension
(this function)
(4) BGM through External Pager

External paging is effeaive when an external
pager or pagers are connected and assigned for
use by “System-Opera2on”,
External Pager 1,2.

is available

External paging originated by the attendant
override external paging from an extension.
extension will hear reorder tone.

Employing two externa pagers or selecting one
pager will be assigned oy “System-Operation”,
External Pager 1, 2.

System Programming

paging

1 O-C-1 9.00

6-l-3

Operation
1. Press an idie LOG”
The SRC indicate:
dial tone is heara.

i.e.

Transterrlr,C
Dur,-g

:s ..:. 3:~

(Selecting external pager 2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “2” in
succession.
(Selecting external pagers 1 and
2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “0” in
succession.

(Selecting external pagers 1 and
2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “0” in
succession.

II
El

paging.

((

101

5. Press the RELEASE

After confirmation
tone sounds,
the attendant console is
connected
to the external
pager.
The other patty is held.

. After confirmation
tone,. the
attendant console is connected
to the external paging
equipment.

answers

Pagers

1. (Selecting external pager 1)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “1” in
succession.

(Selecting external pager 2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and ‘2” in
succession.

4. An extension

External

a ccnversation,

2. (Selecting external pagei !
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and ‘1” in
succession.

3. Perform

a call using Paging

2. Perform

paging.
.

3. An extension

the page.

/u/

key.

answers

4. Press the RELEASE

the page.

key.

RELEASE

The call is released
console.

from the

6-l-4

The call is released from the
console.
Conversation
between the held
party and the paged party
starts.

1.04

Paging
External

Ail Extensions
Pagers

and

Description

Operation
1. Press an idle LOOP key and dial
the feature number for “Station
Paging” and I‘*n in succession.

edging
of
announcement
th’c.:l;” $1 ?I:~‘? in: sxakers
PITS and external pagers ? and 2 at the same
time.
External paging access tone can be set in the
system program.
Allov:s

the

z~erdar:

‘;

T&C:

Confirmation

2. Perform

tone sounds.

paging.

Programming
System

Programmipg

“System-Operation (113)‘.
External Paging 1.2
“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“,
External Paging
Station Paging
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone

rents
Dcmb

.Ol

I o-w.00

v-r
9-D-l
9-D-6.03

1 o-c-:

0.00

9-F-2.00

I 0-c-r

9.00

3. An extension

Conditions

4. Press the RELEASE

If Tenant Service is employed,
only in the same tenant.

paging

If an extension
active, paging

the page.

key.

is available
The call is released
console.

Paging All
be carried
PAGE key
For further
“Call Park

answers

from the

is off-hook or its SP-PHONE is
is unavailable for the extension.
Transferring
Extensions

Extensions and External Pagers can
out after parking a call by pressing the
during conversation.
information,
refer to Section 6-l-l -05
and Paging.”

the held party using’baging
and External Pagers

All

1 _ Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and u*n in
succession.
_‘.

Paging All Extensions and External Pagers
originated by the attendant can override external
paging from an extension unless the extension is
paging other extensions at the same time. The
extension will hear reorder tone when overridden.

After the confirmation
tone
sounds, the other party is held.

2. An extension

This function originated by the attendant
overrides TAFAS call and BGM through External
Pager, which are interrupted and start again
when the paging is finished.
For further information
about TAFAS, refer to
Section 3-D-2.04 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

answers

3. Press the RELEASE

6-l-5

the page.

key.

The call is released from the
console.
Conversation
between the held
party and the paged party
starts.

1.05 Call Park and Paging
Description

Opef3tion

Allows the attendant to park a call (extens z- 2:
outside) and perform paging by simply pressing
the PAGE key (Programmable
key).
When the PAGE key is pressed during a
conversation,
a call is parked in an idle call
parking area and paging mode is established
automatically.

5,
- 4.i--s

3 CO’. E-S&ion

One of the following five types of paging can be
assigned to the PAGE key by the system
programming:
Paging
Paging
Paging
Paging
Paging

All Extensions
External Pager 1
External Pager 2
External Pagers 1 and 2
All Extensions and External

The other party is parked and
paging is possible.
The following display appears
on the message line:
1 Message:

Call Parked

at xx 1
+

parking area
number: 01
to 20
2. Announce
destination

Pagers.

the call park
number : 01 to 20.

Programming
.

3. An extension

answers

the page.

.Hi

4. Press the RELEASE key.
.\
The call is released from the
console.
The paged extension retrieves
a parked call and starts
speaking.

Conditions

This function
conversation.

is available

only during a

6-l-6

:.,

2.00

BGM through
Pager

External

Description

Conditions

The system can provide up to twc SI:.ZX
;T.LSIC
sources. The music source can be Sroaccastzd
as background
music (BGM) througn external
pagers.

If Tenant Service
is emp:oyec
each external music equipme-:

:ne affiliation

BGM will be terminated

&ernal

The attendant can switch on;off the BGM til!hin
the same tenant.
To switch on/off the BGM, same feature number
for “BGM Through External Pager” is used
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on
stops the BGM, and starts the BGM while BGM is

during

Switching

on the BGM
1. Press an idle -0OP

If external music equipment
and an external
pager are connected,
this function is not
executed unless “System-Operation”,
External
Music Source 1,2 and External Paging I, 2 are
assigned to “Yes.”

lights and

2. Dial the feati-2 number for “BGM
through Exteral Pager.”
l

Switching

Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold &
BGM.” This assignment
can be done to each
external music equipment.

Confirmatiotone sounds, then
BGM is hez-3 from external
pager.

off the BGM
1. Press an idle -0bP

key.

LC-3
l

jo/
Programming
.z?--

key.

The SRC inzicator
dial tone so-nds.

. Assign “Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”, External
Pager-BGM
to “Yes” to use this function. This
assignment
can be done to each external pager.

paging.

Operation

Off.

System Programming

and external
pager can lze determined
by 1-15 system
programming
‘Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant
and M-sic Source-Tenant.

Reference
Dumb

The SRC ircicator
tone sounc;.

Dial the feat--z

number

for “BGM

“System-Operation (l/3)“,
External Paging 1,2
External Music Source 1,2

9-D-l .Ol 1 O-C-4.00

through

‘System-Numbering
Plan (819)“.
BGM Through
External Paging
“Trunk-Pager
& Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant
External
Pager-BGM
Music Source-Tenant
Music Source-For
Use

9-D-6.08/ 1 O-C-l 0.00

. After confiration
tone sounds,
BGM from *bernal pager
stops.

9-F-2.00 j
10-c-19.00
I
j 10-C-20.00

6-l-7

Exte-al

lights, dial

Pager.”

J. Other

Features

1 .OO Night Service
1 .Ol

Operation

Flexible Night Service

Changing

Description

feature

Night Answer

Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1
(Attendant Console or extension user) to change
the assigned night answer destination
on a CO
line basis.
The attendant assigned as Operator 1 can
change the night answer destination
by
employing one of the following two ways.
cl > By dialing
the feature number for “Flexible
Night Service.”
<2> By employing the CO Management
Screen
of the attendant
console.

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
l

The difference

•l

Fixed

(Setting
external

lights and

night answer
pager 1)

point to

Dial “Y.”
l

1
Dl

and Fixed night service
l

Confirmation
tone sounds,
the LOOP key is released
automatically.

and

The following display appears
on the message line:

is:
The Operator 1 (Attendant
or Extension) can change
answer destination.

Console
the night

: Flexible
3-2

A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination
of one or more CO
lines in night mode

(Setting
external

night answer
pager 2)

III

point to

Confirmation
tone sounds,
the LOOP key is released
automatically.

9-E-1.01

“Trunk-CO
Line”.
Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering
Plan
Flexible Night Service

9-F-1.OO
(819)‘.

Message

9-D-6.08

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination
can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1.
6-J-1
(30393)

and

The following display appears
on the message line:

‘Group-Trunk Group (ln)“,
Incoming Mode (Night)

Dial .

ABC

Fief’

System Programming

Night Service Set-UNAl

“*2.”

Programming

3-l

[ Message
Flexible

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72”
(default) and “CO ID (physical
number).”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk
Group”
incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE.
All CO
lines belong to this trunk group are covered by
this assignment.
If FIXED is selected for above setting, the
assigned night answer destination
can not be
changed by the Operator 1.
Call handling in Flexible
is almost the same.

Point by dialing me

number

: Flexible

Night Service Set-UNA2

(Setting night answer
an extension)
Dial the extension
number.

point to

(Setting night answer
Remote;
Dial ‘Remote
Number -

directory

. Confirmation

tone sounds and
the LOOP key- is released
automatically.
. The following display appears
on the message line:

Directory

Confiibn
tone sounds,
LOOP key rs released
automaticalfy.
The display bebw appears
the message line:

Message

point to

&tample>
: Flexible Night Service

Message

Set-&.1000

6-J-2

: Flexible

Night Service Set-Remote

the

Operation
Changing

Night Answer

point by employing

CO Management

screen

1. Press the F4 key (CO rnanagei.
CO Management

TRG

screen
No.&

appears

on the
CO

Name

(C
-

;.r.:

UNA

-.d
.-.-.

--w
-..d

-(.a

:qhi

Status

16 : DDDOl
01 : DDD02

1011
1012

OISP:Z~

_.-

(2)

(1) LOOP
& TRG

(4)

(3)

Obtain

the desired

function

The following

-(l)-(2)

(3) -

ii%: T

or the F3 key (previous

(6)

(51

Select

to Night Answer

field by pressing

Night

Status

Answer

UNA

6-J-3

page).

select).
field appears.

(4)

4. Move the cursor

(8) -

screen.

3. Press the F8 key (function
l

‘) -

F,nction
Select

2. Press the F2 key (next page),

Prevaus
Page

(6) -

-6)

the F4 key

-w

1.3,

6. Select “UNAl ,- “UNA2” -Ext.” or “Remotekey (select).
UNA 1
UNA 2
Ext.
Remote
*

:
:
:
:

External Pager 1
External Pager 2
Extension *
Remote maintenance

6-J-4

the F6

port

If “EXT.” is selected, the extension
be entered successively.

?ress the F7 key (memory).

by pressing

directory

number

must

1.02

Switching

of Day/Night

Mode

Description

Operation

It is assignable
to switch Day/Night
mode either
automatically
at pre-assigned
time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant
Console or
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is selected, the
attendant
assigned as Operator 1 can switch day
mode to night and vice versa by pressing the
NIGHT key.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “SystemOperation
(3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”

Changing

The attendant
assigned as Operator 1, however,
can override the Auto Mode setting, that is
Manual Mode is established,
by dialing the
feature number for “Night Service Manual Mode
Set.” To restore the Auto mode, dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

Changing

DAY mode to NIGHT

While the NIGHT

key indicator

NIGHT

“System-Operation

(3/3)“,

Night Service
Auto Start Time
‘System-Tenant”,
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering
Plan (8/g)“,
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel

9-D-i

is lit in green,

1. Press the NIGHT
than one second.

rlK)
I

10-C-4.00

The indicator on the NIGHT key
lights.
The system is now in NIGHT
mode.

key indicator

Dumb
.03

key for more

mode to DAY mode

While the NIGHT

Reference
VT

is off,

1. Press the NIGHT
than one second.

Programming
System Programming

mode

Changing

The

light

on the

NIGHT key goes out.
The system is now in,DAY
mode.

to “Manual”

/o/

indicator

key for more

mode from “Auto” mode

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

9-D-2.00

LOOP

1 O-C-5.00

9-D-6.08

iO-C-10.00

2. Dial the feature
Service Manual
l

1 Messaae:

number for “Night
Mode Set.”

The following message
on the message line:

Niaht Service

Manual

Mode

appears

Set

Conditions
Changing

to “Auto” mode from “Manual”

/o/

If tenant service is employed,
night service
assignment
unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed
individually.
In this case, the assignment
in “SystemOperation
(3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment
in “System-Tenant”
is applied to
Tenant 2.

mode

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP

2. Dial the feature
Service Manual
l

Message:

6-J-5

Night

number for “Night
Mode Cancel.”

The following message
on the message line:
Service

Manual

Mode

appears

Cancel

2.00

Account

Code

Entry
Operation

Description

Entering

When placing an outgoing call or during a
conversation,
account codes can be recorded on
the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
by entering an account code (up to IO digits) for
accounting and billing purposes.
Assigning the ACCOUNT key to a programmable
key must be done by Attendant Management
screen.

an account

code when calling an outsids

w-b.

101

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP

The SRC indicator
tone sounds .

lights, dial

Dial the feature number for
“ARS/Local CO Line Access.”

Programming

Dial tone 2 sounds.

3. Press the ACCOUNT key
(programmable
key).
Dial tone sounds.
The following message appears
on the message line in I/O field:

Conditions

You can enter an account
call before hanging up.
Only numbers 0 through
. account code.

code during or after a

Message:
9 can be entered

as an

to conclude

code

Dial an account code (0 through
9, up to 10 digits).

Entering 11 or more digits as an account code
without the delimiter is invalid and causes alarm
tone.
Enter “#” as the delimiter
code.

Enter account

The account
the message

#
/[?I

an account

code appears on
line in I/O field.
.\

Dial “#.”

l
l

The account code is stored.
The message on the
Input/Output
field disappears,
and dial tone sounds .

6. Dial the ielephone
outside party.

number

of the

(Supplement)
To correct input errors in step 4, enter an account
code again after pressing *.”

6-J-6

Entering an account code during
with an outside party
1.

Correcting

a conversation

While entering an account
the delimiter “#I’)

Press the ACCOUNT
key
(programmable
key).

*
/u/

-1

The following message
appears on the message
l/O field:

an input error

line in

code (before

1. Dial “*.”

2. Dial the intended
Message:

Enter Account

rntering

accoun? code.

Code

2. Dial an account code (0 through
9, up to 10 digits).
After entering
The account
the message

code appears on
line in I/O field.

the delimiter

“#”

1. Press the ACCOUNT
key
(programmable
key).

3. Dial “#.I’
#

The account code is stored and
the messages on the message
line disappears.

•l

Note:

You can continue a conversation
entering the account code.

2. Dial the intended

(Supplement)
Correcting the error after entering the deiimiter
“w’ is possible only when making a call or during
a conversation.

1. While hearing reorder tone,
press the ACCOUNT
key
(programmable
key).

Canceling
key

Dial tone sounds and the
following message appears:

Message:

Enter Account

The account
the message

Code

code appears on
line in I/O field.

3. Dial “#.”
l

the account

code before entering

1. Press the ACCOUNT key
(programmable
key).

2. Dial an account code (0 through
9, up to 10 digits).
l

code.

while

Entering an account code after finishing
conversation
before going on-hook

account

The account code is stored and
the messages on the message
line disappear.
Reorder tone sounds again.

6-J-7

‘%’

3.00

Secret

Dialing

Description

Conditions

During speed dialing or calling by Extension
Directory, all or part of the telephone
numbers
appear on the CRT screen can be concealed.

secret portion

appears

with * m

that

When storing a speed dialing code, entering “[”
only without entering “I”, causes all the digits

The

entered

.”
Operation

The dialing numbers are registered by “SystemWhen storing a number,
Speed Dial-System.”
bracket the secret part that yoti want to hide with
[
1. Then the part does not appear on the CRT
screen.

None

It is assignable to print out the secret part onto
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) by
assigning “System-Operation”.
Print Secret Dial to
Yes.
Programming

6-J-8

after “[” to be hidden.

Message

4.00

Waiting

Description

(1) Receiver’s

Allows the attendant to indicate to an extension
that a message is waiting for him or her. by turning
on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on the called
extension.
The extension user who received the message
waiting indicahkin can call back the message
sender by simply going off-hook and pressing the
red lit MESSAGE indicator (button).
This feature is useful when the called extension
busy or does not answer the call.
UP to 500 message waiting
for the whole system.

indications

. A PITS telephone
button.
l

r
1 Message:

can be set

‘System-Tenant”,
Message Waiting Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan (7/9)“,

Wafting)

isn’t accepted.

104-5.00

SD6.07

10-G10.00

Setting of the multiple
indications

message

waiting

(1) More than one message
message
extension

message sender sets
message waiting indications to the same
extension more than once, this leaves only
one message on the called extension.

Receiver

A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
button.’
A Single Line Telephone with MESSAGE
Iamp

Refer to
further information.

sender can leave
waiting indications to the same
at the same time.

(2) Even if the same

Attendant Console
A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
button.’
Any Single Line Telephone

(2) Message
l

MW(Message

902.00

1. Suitable Telephones:
(1) Message Sender

without

Cwnb

Conditions

A Single Line Telephone
MESSAGE lamp.

a MESSAGE

‘VT

Message Cancel

without

3. Tenant Service
The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is
determined
by “System-Tenant”
Message
Waiting Boundary.

Reference

Programming

is:

(2) The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for the system or
tenant l/2 has been assigned.
In this case, the following message is
shown on the message is line of Attendant
Console screen:

Programming
System

extension

The MESSAGE indicator on the message
receivers extension will be turned off when:
(1) The message receiver calls back the
message sender by pressing the red lit
MESSAGE button, and it was answered by
the message sender (or by another
extension using Call Pickup or an SDN
button).* ’

on page 4-l-l 7 for

(2) Message waiting indication
the message sender.’ ’

2. Reorder Tone
The attendant who attempts to leave message
waiting indication may hear the reorder tone in
the following cases.

is canceled

(3) Message waiting indications are canceled
by the message receiver.* ’

6-J-9
(30393)

The indicator may not be turned off, if there
are other message waiting indications
sent by
other extensions.

All message
at once.

waiting

indications

are canceled

I
1

Operation
Setting
another

the Message
extension

123
iBl
4,e
7.9
t

Waiting

indication

1. Dial the extension
l

number.

Ringback tone, busy tone or
DND tone sounds.

2. Press the MSG key.
l

After confirmation
tone sounds,
the following message is
shown on the message line.

1 Message:

MW(Message

Canceling the Message
the extension

Waiting)
Waiting

at EXr. 100

Indication

left on

101

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP

2. Dial the feature number for
Message Cancel %9” (default)
and the extension number of the
message receiver in succession.

6-J-9-l
(30393)

5.00

Remote Station Feature
Control
Programming

Description
Allows the attendant to cancel or set the following
features assigned to each extension:

System

“System-Numbering
Remote Station
Remote Station
Remote DND
Remote DND
Remote FWD
Remote FWD

Features to b_e canceled:
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Electronic Station Lock Out
FWD (Call Fowarding)
(It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily.)
l

Features
l

to be set:
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Electronic Station Lock Out

Reference
1 Dumb

9-D-6

Cancel-OneTim~

When an extension is locked by the operator,
unlocking by the locked extension itself is
impossible.

one of

Management
feature

Plan (8/g)“,
Lock Set
Lock Cancel
Set
Cancel
Cancel

Conditions

This operation
can be done by employing
the following ways.
By employing
Extension
Screen
<2> By dialing the associated

Programming

number

The attendant
can also set or cancel the
electronic station lock on each pickup group by
employing
Pickup Group Management
Screen of
the attendant
console.
For further information,
refer to Section 6-C-8.00
“Pickup Group Management
Screen.”

6-J-10

Operation
Setting/Canceling

“DNZ~~~.

z.n@

;+-

-.;

r .‘,3

c..

;r~

;tmnL;

Ei;:ensic.-

P,f;_-ageme,?:

screen

BP:: appears
FWD

‘.J.

3ND

on the display.

Lock

r;Q
. ;!

($5

i
-w
Next
Page

(3) -

2. By pressing the F2 key (next page)
page), obtain the desired screen.

3. Press the F8 key (function
l

The following

function

or the F3 key (previous

se&t‘.
field appears.

4. Move the cursor to the FWC. 3NC field by pressing
(:t) or the F5 key (+).

6-J-l 1

the F4 key

5. 5~ z-tssing the F2 key T ) or the F3 key ( & ), move the
curs:’ to the target ex?%sion numbe- TO be set/canceled
“DND”
or cz-ceded ‘,FWD.”
Note:

F-.rrigning

6. Self:
setting
For canceling

FWD is c?available

by this operation.

item by pressing the F6 key (select).
the function, select m
mark.

7. Press the F7 key (memory)

6-J-l 2

to store tie selected

data.

Setting/Canceling
“Electronic Station
For step 1 to 3, refer to the procedure

Lock Out” by employing
Extension
for Setting/Canceling
DND.
4. Move the cursor

-m

Manageme?

to Lock field by press.?;

sc’ee-

17~ -4 ; +. :t

;’ ihe

5. Move the cursor to the target extension number to be seti
canceled “Electronic Station Lock” by pressing the F2 key ( ‘?)
or the F3 key (& ).

6. Select the setting item by pressing the F6 key (select).
For canceling .“Electronic Station Lock,” select m

7. Press the F7 key (memory)

6-J-l 3

to store the selected
-..

data.

mark.

Setting/Canceling
Pickup
Group

“Electronic

Managemenr

Station
screen

Lo:-

Out”

1. =-ISS
l

ic 3~rkx

the

?ckup

S:c -3 5: ?-‘pi~,

F3 key ;?I+-;

Group

Managec:zn:

-..:-

1~2

.;+

SC:K:

appears

on the display
I

= skup Group
En

-7

774

i'j'

: Group

Jun

Management
Station

15,

'91

THU

12:00

Lock

2. !.‘we the cursor to the pickup group number to be set/canceled
-fiectronic
Station Lock” by pressing the F2 key through the F5
ys(1‘,
-L, t,+).
..

3. %!ect ” 07, ” for locking , ” m”
z-essing the F6 key (select).

4. =-?ss the F7 key (memory)

6-J-l 4

for canceling

to store the selected

locking

data.

Lsi~g :le feature
Zancz.”

ssing the feature number for ‘Re;lote Sta: :L,zck Set”.“Remote
Station Locrc, Cancsi”
1. Press an idle LOO?
. The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

key.
lights 2nd

(For canceling “Electronic
Station Lock*)
Dial the feature number i~r
“Remote Station Lock Cancel”
and the extension numbe- to be
canceled electronic static? lock
in succession.
Confirmation
tone sounds.
the LOOP key is reieasei
automatically.

Losing the feature number
,.Remote DND Cancel”

for ‘Remote

The SRC indicator of the LOOP
key lights, and dial tone .,
sounds.

2-2

(For canceiing .,DND”)
Dial the feature number ‘or
“Remote DND Cancel” a’7d the
extension number lo be
canceled DND in sxcession.
l

Confirmation
tone sourxs.
the LOOP key is releassd
matically.

lights and

Confirmation
tone sounds
the LOOP key is released
matically.

and
auto-

For canceling “FWD” feature temporarily,
dial the
‘eature number for “Remote FWD Cancel-One
Time- and the extension number to be canceled
FWD in successron.

DND Set”/

(For setting “DND’)
Dial the feature number ‘or
“Remote DND Set- and :le
extension number :o be set
DND in succession.

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

Suppiement)

and
. -

2-1

FWC

2. Dial the feature number for “Remote FWD Cancel” and the
extension number to be canceled
FWD in succession.

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
l

for “Remote

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
l

(For setting -Electronic Sxiion
Lock”)
Dial the feature number fcr
“Remote Station Lock Se:- and
the extension number to 5s set
Station Lock in successic-?.
2-2

number

and
auto-

6-J-1 5

6.00 Dial Tone Transfer
Operation

Description
The attendant
the extension

can arer the toll restriction
user fcr only one call.

level of

TOLL-CHG
key must be assigned as a programmable key by the Attendant Management
screen.

Altering the toll restriction
user for only one call

level of the extension

There comes

extension

call.

1. Press the ANSWER

key.

an incoming

Programming
l

Attendant

TOLL-CHG

key

Mxagement

Reference

6-C-l 0.00

The SRC indicator lights. Start
conversation
with the
extension.
The extension asks
the attendant to change the toil
restriction level.

2. Press the TOLL-CHG

Conditions

(programmable

Toll restriction level tc be assigned for an extension must be the saine or lower than that of
attendant console.

key

key).

The extension is placed on
hold.
The SRC indicator flashes in 60
wink, and the DES indicator
lights.

3. Dial the desired

toll restriction

level (01 to 16).
l

6-J-l 6

The SRC indicator light goes
out and the call is released
from the console.
New dial tone is returned to the
extension.

7.00 Search

by Name/Department

Description

Conditions

The attendant
can search the desired extension
number by entering the name and department
of
the extension
in the Extension Directory screen.

The attendant

The following three basic entry patterns are available for seaching, assuming that number means
extension number, name means extension name,
and (CR) means pressing the RETURN key.
l

Search Name (CR) - Seaching by specifying
extension name only.
Search/Department
(CR) - Searching by
specifying department
only.
Search Name/Department
(CR) - Searching
specifying extension name and department.

can make an extension

call after

searching.
“*n can be entered as a wild card for searching
extension names and departments.
For displaying
tory.

all contents

SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH

of Extension

* (CR)
/if (CR)
*c/* (CR)

This procedure assumes the following
sions are in the Extension Directory.

Direc-

exten-

Programming
Refer to Section
Mode .”

13-B “Extension

Directory

Execute: SEARCH Ja * (CR).
Extension name of “Jack” and “James” will be
listed.
For searching by specifying a part of extension
name.
SEARCH 0- - -0 ++

Input a part of extension

name

For searching by specifying a part of department name.
SEARCH I M”
input a part of Department
Name

6-J-l 7

For searching by speciying a part of extension
name and department
name:
SEARCH
OO++ /&I++

Operation
Searching
department

(Supplement)
by specifying
name.

extension

name and

This procedure
assumes the following
are in the Extension Directory.

In case several extensions
match
criteria, all subjects appear.

extensions

the search

In case no extension match the search criteria,
the following message appears on the message
line.
Message:

Cannot

by Name/Department!

For calling the searched extension,
refer to
Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office Calling by Extension Directory Screen.”

1. Enter
l

“SEARCH.”

The following
line:

message

appears

on the Input

Input: SEARCH
2. Press the space key once, then enter the
extension name “Jack.”
l

The following
line:

message

Input: SEARCH

appears

Jack

3. Enter 7 and the department
l

The following
line:

message

1 Inhut: SEARCH
4. Press the RETURN
l

on the Input

name
appears

Jack/account

“account.”
on the Input

key.

The corresponding
extensions
will be
searched and displayed on the Extension
Directory screen.

6-J-l 8

8.00

Outgoing
Recording

Message
(OGM)
and Playing Back

Descrfptlon

Condltlons

Up to four OGM’s can be recorded by the Operator
1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so that
different messages can be used for different
situations.
_

(1) Tenant Service
lf tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each DISA card is determined
by the system
programming
Special Attendant-DISA”
tenant.
The operator 1 of each tenant can record and
play back the OGM within the same tenant.

The folbwing four types of OGM can be recorded
respectively:
DISA, UCDl , UCDP and W-UP (Wake-up)
OGM for outside

(2) Recording
l

parties

OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who
called the system via DISA feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct inward System
Access (DISA).“)

1. OGMl

3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
l

users

OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wakeup message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 Vmed Reminder with
OGM (Wake-up Call).3
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds

A. By selecting an OGM type
B. By designating
the logical number
each DlSA card directly.

from the lowest

Reference
VT
1 Dumb

9-D-6.09 10-G10.00

For Use 9-K-1.00

DISA card physical

number.

Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.

Record

OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DfSA”.

DISA cards of the same

(4) Others

Programming

Plan (g/9)“,

If there are multiple

type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts

Usage of each DISA card is determined
by the
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-l .OO “Special Attended-DISA.“)

OGM

.. *.

long.

A DISA card is required to record’OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be installed to the system.

‘System-Numbering

If the type of muftiile DISA cards are the
same in a tenant, the same message is
recorded for them at a time.

(3) Playing back of OGM
The following two ways are available:

System Programming

for UCD with OGM

2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM

OGM for UCD 1 and UCD 2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-with
OGM-)
OGM for extension

of CGM
-- ’
OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
following four types:

10-C-40.00

6-J-19
(40993)

Operation
Recording

OGM

Playing back OGM

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOW

LOW

- The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

10/

lights and

*1,
EFI

2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Record 791” (default) and the
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.
(Resource number)

(23
.s.
.7..
L!!zl

1
2
3
4

:
:
:
:

OGMl
OGM2
OGM
OGM

4s.
1..
.

Message:

1
2
3
4

xxxxxxxx recording: 00 set
I
L
UCD-OGMl
or
UCD-OGM2
or
DISA-OGM or
Wake Up OGM

Message:

xxxxxxxx
l

1 Message:

xxxxxxxx
I
-

00 set

After playback finishes, the
SRC indicator remains lit, and
no tone sounds.

playing:

00 set

After playback finishes, the
SRC indicator remains lit, and
no tone sounds.

In step 2, if you wish to interrupt
playback, press “I#.”

and finish

During playback you can start playback
from the beginning by dialing * .”

In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is
terminated
and playback starts automatically.
Accordingly,
it is not necessary to execute step 4
afterward.
In step 3, if you wish to change the message
during recording, you can start recording again by
dialing rt .”
and finish
6-J-20
(40993)

UCD-OGMl
or
UCD-OGM2
or
DISA-OGM or
Wake Up OGM

(Supplement)

In Step 4, if you wish to interrupt
playback, dial 3.”

for UCD
for UCD
for DISA
for W-UP (Wake-up)

message
appears on the screen. After
confirmation
tone sounds,
playback starts.

recording.

playing:

OGMl
OGM2
OGM
OGM

. The following

Playback starts automatically
through the handset or headset,
the following message appears
on the screen.

:
:
:
:

number)

(*” and DISA No.)
l l : selectsCard
*2: selectsCard
l 3: setectsCard3
l 4 : selects Card 4

3. Begin your message.

(Resource

for UCD
for UCD
for DISA
for W-UP (Wake-up)

4. Dial Y#” to conclude

lights and

2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Playback 792” (defautt) and a
number below in succession.

The following message appears
on the screen and confirmation
tone sounds.

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

ioi

again

9.00 Trunk

Verify
9pc”ztion

Description
Allows the attendant
specified trunk.

to verify :he c:::us

P,ess an idle LOOP key.

The SRC indicator
ione sounds.

The TRG key (programmabie
key; “7ust be
assigned to the atiendant co-sole.

lights arc dia

Press the TRG key (programrabie
key).

Programming
System Prcgramming
“System-Operation’, PITS
Programming Pass:vord

3. Dial “;t.”

Attendant

Ey+rt.-,=s

I&?agement

ITRG key

I S-I-- 1 11:

Dial the four-digit password
(PITS programming
password!.

Conditions
The attendant
can place a c&l by specifyin,;
trunk but cannot hold or trar;s-ier it.
When

specified

Dial the desired trunk port physica
number (four digits) -2

!runk is bus?. bus) lone so,-‘3s.
l

Verifying a trunk can be dona
placed from SRC side.

only when

a :.z:; is

6-J-21

Another dial tone sounds.
specified trunk is seized.

and ?“t

The PITS programming
password is used for PJTS
programming
and Trunk Verify

Refer to Section 14-F-4.00
“Testing the Ports” for details
about trunk port physical
number.

10.00

CO Access

Control
Operation

Description
The attendant
cz. c;.-z:o:
them from being accesscz
employing
CO Manageme-:

Sett!cg CO busy out by dialing
numoer

L.Z :.x.. :z pre.,nt
*-;c: t’<:E WC-: oy
SW+-‘.

the feature

Press an idle LOOP key.
If CO busy out is assigned fo a CC line, bzh extensions and attendant consoles cannot access
the line.
Refer to Section 3-F-8.00 “CO Busy Out” for
further information.

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

Dial the feature number for “Busy
Out Trunk” and trunk port physical number in succession.

If CO access ctrl is assigned to a CO line. %-tensions cannot access tne line.

CO busy out can also be set by dialing the
feature number for “Busy Out Trunk.’
Programming

System

lights and

Confirmation
tone sounds
the LOOP key is released
automaticafly.

and

(Supplement)
Program5ng

“System-Numbering
Busy Out Trunk
Unbusy Trunk

Pian (9/g)“,

I
/

3efewce
VT
1

9-D-&09

To cancel “CO Busy Out,” diai the feature number
for Wnbusy Trunk” and trunk port physical
number in succession.

Dumb

-:-c-t j.00

Conditions
None

6-J-22

Operation
CO access

control

by employing

CO Management

‘--l-i.“IJ--

screen

1. Press the F4 key (CO manage).
l

CO Management
ID & BLF

111:
1112

TRG

0
m

screen appears
No.&

Name

on the display.
CO

Night

StaLS

01 : DDDOS
02 : EEE03

ri?r. .-,.:I

UN>

/
.- ..- ._

-L.
*L
-

(1) -

(2) -

LOOP
& TRG

(3) -

:4)

-is!

(7) 1

Function
Select
i

-(2)
Next
Page

(3) -

2. By pressing the F2 key (next page)
page), obtain the desired screen.

3. Press the F8 key (function
l

The following

4. By pressing
field.

function

select).
field appears.

the F4 key (H

-4

6-J-23

or the F3 key (previous

): move the cursor to the CO status

Status

N.ght

Answer
UNA

-<2)

-7

(3) -

5. Move the curse:
(?)ortheF3key(1

to I?.-- --;?I

C 7 3 ek :--?ss:?,;

:he F2 key

6. Select “CO busy out” or “CO access cW by pressing the F6 key
(select).
If m~
mark is selected, the CO is returned to normal
status.

7. Press the F7 key (memory).
l

Entered

data.is

6-J-24

stored.

11 .OO Power

Failure

Operation
Programming

Description
At the time of power failure,

power

is supplied

None

the attendant console from backup battery of the
system.
During power failure, the attendant console can
execute any other operations than the operations
below:
l
l

Operation
Operation
F8).
Operation

Conditions
When the backup
attendant console

battery is not provided,
is not operable.

the

Call processing is not interrupted when power
failed and when power is restored.

using CRT display
using function keys (Fl through
using full keyboard.

6-J-25

2.00 Intercept Routing-No
Answer (IRNA)

Description
If the destination
is not currently available to
receive the transferred
call, Intercept Routing
does not work. However, Hunting function
becomes active, if programmed.

If an incoming CO call is not answered
in a
specified period, or if a held incoming CO call is
not answered
in a programmed
period after Held
Call Reminder or Unscreened
Call Transfer
Recall or Unattended
Conference
Recall. the cal!s
can be transferred
to an Attendant
Console
programmed.
The destination
of Intercept Routing during day
and night are assiged in “Group-Trunk
Group”,
Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing
(Night) on a trunk group basis.
Set the time taken to start Intercept Routing in
“System-System
Timer”, Intercept Routing TimeOut (System) and Intercept Routing Time-Out
(DISA) for DISA calls.
For details of DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)“.

If the destination extension of direct dialing-in
calls is in the data line security mode, IRNA
feature &es not work on it.
,,.
Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 ‘Data Line Security”
further information.

for

Operation
Answering an incomming
call from trunk, unscreened call transfer recall, Held Call Reminder,
or call park recall
1. The SRC indicator

is flashing.

Programming
System

Programmmg

0
r-l

“Group-Trunk Group”,
Intercept routing (Day)
Intercept routing (Night)
“System-System Timer”,
Intercept Routing Time-Out
(System)
Intercept Routing lime Out
(DISA)

ANSWER

Routing-No
Answer
incoming CO calls.

The SRC indicator of the LOOP
key changes from flashing to

Answering

works for the

1. All incoming CO calls other than calls
placed on ‘DILl : N, Private CO, Attendant
Consoles, Remote and UCD
2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to
Attendant
Consoles)
3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to
Attendant
Consoles, calls on Exclusive
Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)
4. An incoming outside call routed via DISA/
DID which comes in on an extension in
DND mode.
Call Forwarding
and Do not Disturb
effective for this function.

Unattended

Conference

Recall

1. Both SRC, DES indicators are
_
flashing (SRC, DES are both CO
lines).

Conditions
Intercept
following

2. Answer the incoming call by
pressing the ANSWER key or the
LOOP key.

cl
0

ANSWER

2. Answer the calls by pressing the
ANSWER key or the LOOP key.
Both SRC, DES indicators of
the LOOP key change from
flashing to being tit.

3. Conference
call is established.
Begin speaking.

are not

6-J-26
(30393)

If conference
trunk or
trunk is not available,
side party is held and
tion continues on the

AGC
the SRC
conversaDES side.

13.00 Remote Timed Reminder
- One Time
Description

Operation

Allows the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant
Console
PITS with display) to set rimed
Reminder”

feature to any extension.
(Refer to Section 4-1-3.00,5-G-3.00

101

“Timed

If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed
beforehand,
the extension user can hear the
wake-up message.
(Refer to Section 3-F-l 3.00 “limed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

Programming

“System-Numbering
Plan (919)
Remote limed Reminder
Confirm
Remote limed Reminder
Set
Remote Timed Reminder
Cancel

to an extension

1. Press an idle LOOP key.

I
/ SD-6.09

1
I

The SRC indicator

lights and dial

tone sounds.

3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to 12.

neterence
VT

2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Set
7*1” (default) and the extension
number to be set Timed Reminder
in succession.

Programming
System

Reminder

LOOP

Reminder.“)

Setting Iimed

Dumb
lo-c-1o.w

Dial “minute” with two digits: 00 to
59.

5. Dial “0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m..
Conditions
l

(1) The difference between “Timed Reminder”
and “Remote Timed Reminder” is:
Setting

Validity of the
setting

?imed
Reminder

by extenison
itself

Once’ti?
everyday at the
programmed
time

Remote
Timed
Reminder

by Operator

Once

1 or2

The LOOP key is released
automatically
and the following
message appears on the
Message line.

Message:

(2) At a single extension, only the latest setting is
valid whether it was set by the extension itself
(Timed Reminder) or by the Operator 1 or 2
(Remote l7med Reminder).

6-J-27
(40993)

Atann Ext. 100 1O:OO AM

Canceling

limed

Reminder

set to an extension

1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOW

The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

jo/

lights and

2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel
-“7#” (default) and the extension
number to be canceled Trmed
Reminder in succession.
9 The LOOP key is released
automatically
and the following
message appears on the
Message line.

Confirming
LOOP

Message:

Alarm Cancelled

the assigned

alarm time

Press an idle LOOP key.
. The SRC indicator
dial tone sounds.

*Pa
q
.,.
I..
l

Ext. 100

IigMs and

2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Confirm
7*0’ (defauft) and the extension
number to be confirmed the
setting in succession.
. The LOOP key is released
automatically
and the following
message appears on the
Message line.
Message:

Alarm Ext. 100 1030

When no time is set:
Message:

Alarm Not Stored Ext. 100

6-J-28
(30393)

14.00 Call Display at Attendant
Description

Console

Display of the following
changed.

Call Forwarding

calls dir-em3

Console

has been

and IRNA

EXT. 100

Call Display

to an Attendant

Al7

at SRC area of a LOOP key

Call Forwarding

(WD)

New version

Old versm

Cl>
r 7
lRG.02
T2083

L
intercept Routing
No Answer (IRNA)

TRG.02
T2083

::$

... .. .. 1
... .. .. 2

1::::::::

T=O’
IRNA
a

I Item No.

1 T2083

I Name of a CO line mentioned

I T=Ot

I Toll Restriction

1 R’lOO

The call is forwarded/redirected
/ from Ext.lOO.

Programming

Display
TRG.02

Descrption
The call is forwarded/redirected
by IRNA to an Attendant
via a CO line of Trunk Group (TRG) 02.

Level of TRG.02

None

)

6-J-29
(30393)

I
Console

in Item 1.

ts 01.

by IRNA to an Attendant

Console

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 689 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Page Layout : SinglePage Mod Date : 2002:01:25 23:36:50-06:00 Creation Date : 1999:10:20 15:37:06+01:00 Producer : Acrobat 4.0 Scan Plug-in for Windows Author : EZ Manuals Modify Date : 2002:01:25 23:36:50-06:00 Create Date : 1999:10:20 15:37:06+01:00 Metadata Date : 2002:01:25 23:36:50-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

PDF Panasonic KX T336 System Ref Vol 1

KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation